TOOLS
MyFundedPerps Rule Changes
Every MyFundedPerps rule and policy change on record, dated and shown before and after.
MyFundedPerps Premier
88 help center pages tracked
Changes by day
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading with the APICompetition accounts cannot participate in copy groups; affected saved groups must be disabled.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
including unrealized P\&L, reaches the profit target, so track
risk.remaining_profit_equity. When it reaches zero, the evaluation passes and
open positions are closed. risk.remaining_profit counts realized profit only
and can stay above zero while open profit already covers the target. Both are
null when the account has no profit target, and remaining_profit_equity is
also null when marks are incomplete.
Copy groups and scheduled execution
Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See Authentication.
Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that reject_reason. Previously
accepted child orders are not canceled, and filled positions are not closed.
Older API schedules created before scope was retained can recover their
boundary while the original key still exists. If that key has been deleted,
only the schedule's own account can be established: an enabled copy group
causes future slices or rungs to stop rather than assume broader access. Finish
or recreate an older copied schedule before deleting its original key.
After
including unrealized P\&L, reaches the profit target, so track
risk.remaining_profit_equity. When it reaches zero, the evaluation passes and
open positions are closed. risk.remaining_profit counts realized profit only
and can stay above zero while open profit already covers the target. Both are
null when the account has no profit target, and remaining_profit_equity is
also null when marks are incomplete.
Copy groups and scheduled execution
Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See Authentication.
+ Competition accounts cannot lead or follow in a copy group, because the
+ Competition Rules prohibit copying trades into or out of them.
+ POST /v1/copy-trading rejects an enabled group that includes one. A group
+ saved before this rule does not copy lead orders to or from a competition
+ account; disable it with POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable.
Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that reject_reason. Previously
accepted child orders are not canceled, and filled positions are not closed.
Older API schedules created before scope was retained can recover their
boundary while the original key still exists. If that key has been deleted,
only the schedule's own account can be established: an enabled copy group
causes future slices or rungs to stop rather than assume broader access. Finish
or recreate an older copied schedule before deleting its original key.
including unrealized P\&L, reaches the profit target, so track
risk.remaining_profit_equity. When it reaches zero, the evaluation passes and
open positions are closed. risk.remaining_profit counts realized profit only
and can stay above zero while open profit already covers the target. Both are
null when the account has no profit target, and remaining_profit_equity is
also null when marks are incomplete.
Copy groups and scheduled execution
Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See Authentication.
+ Competition accounts cannot lead or follow in a copy group, because the
+ Competition Rules prohibit copying trades into or out of them.
+ POST /v1/copy-trading rejects an enabled group that includes one. A group
+ saved before this rule does not copy lead orders to or from a competition
+ account; disable it with POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable.
Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that reject_reason. Previously
accepted child orders are not canceled, and filled positions are not closed.
Older API schedules created before scope was retained can recover their
boundary while the original key still exists. If that key has been deleted,
only the schedule's own account can be established: an enabled copy group
causes future slices or rungs to stop rather than assume broader access. Finish
or recreate an older copied schedule before deleting its original key.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading SettingsOptional percent buttons added to One-Click Trading, accessible via gear icon in window.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading shows a small window with Sell, Buy, and
− Flat on the trade page. It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
order the moment you tap, with no review step, even if Confirm New Orders
asks you to review orders placed from the order ticket. Turn the switch off to
remove the window and its button.
One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
validation still apply.
The first time you use it, a notice explains how it works. Check **I understand
orders send without confirmation. and select Continue (or Turn On** if
you are turning the switch on in Settings). Your agreement is saved to your
account, so the notice does not appear again on other devices. Cancel sends
nothing.
Show Flat Button appears while One-Click Trading is on and is on by
After
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading shows a small window with Sell, Buy, and
+ Flat on the trade page. Optional percent buttons are turned on from the
+ gear in the window itself; see
+ One-Click Trading. It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
order the moment you tap, with no review step, even if Confirm New Orders
asks you to review orders placed from the order ticket. Turn the switch off to
remove the window and its button.
One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
validation still apply.
The first time you use it, a notice explains how it works. Check **I understand
orders send without confirmation. and select Continue (or Turn On** if
you are turning the switch on in Settings). Your agreement is saved to your
account, so the notice does not appear again on other devices. Cancel sends
nothing.
Show Flat Button appears while One-Click Trading is on and is on by
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading shows a small window with Sell, Buy, and
− Flat on the trade page. It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
+ Flat on the trade page. Optional percent buttons are turned on from the
+ gear in the window itself; see
+ One-Click Trading. It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
order the moment you tap, with no review step, even if Confirm New Orders
asks you to review orders placed from the order ticket. Turn the switch off to
remove the window and its button.
One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
validation still apply.
The first time you use it, a notice explains how it works. Check **I understand
orders send without confirmation. and select Continue (or Turn On** if
you are turning the switch on in Settings). Your agreement is saved to your
account, so the notice does not appear again on other devices. Cancel sends
nothing.
Show Flat Button appears while One-Click Trading is on and is on by
PremierMyFundedPerps · Copy Trading SettingsCompetition accounts cannot lead groups or follow either; multiplier calculation and Try An Order preview feature explained; competition rule added to validation rules.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Open Copy Trading settings
Group controls
Each group contains:
- one Lead Account that sends eligible trading instructions;
- one or more Follower Accounts;
- a multiplier from 0.1× to 2× for each follower;
- an enabled, stopping, or stopped lifecycle.
An account can participate in only one enabled group. Groups remain the same
when you switch the active account elsewhere in the app. Accounts are listed
under any name you gave them on the dashboard; renaming an account does not
change its group or multiplier.
Lead Account
− Choose the account that should drive the group. Changing the lead of an existing
group requires disabling that group first. If the lead is no longer active or
available, disable the group before editing its membership.
Follower Accounts and Multipliers
Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:
- below 1× uses less relative size;
- 1× uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
- above 1× uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
Copies use the lead's chosen venue. A trading halt prevents new follower
exposure, including an order placed before the halt that is still executing.
When you save a group, every account that starts following has its open orders
canceled, including stop loss and take profit orders, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. A follower trades only
through its lead, so a manual order left on it could not execute. Positions
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.
Manage copy groups through the API
API keys with read scope can inspect GET /v1/copy-trading. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.
Keys with trade scope can use these operations:
| Operation | Endpoint |
|---|
Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | POST /v1/copy-trading
Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
| Acknowledge a completed follower stop notice | POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/acknowledge-copy-stop |
|---|
− Saving applies the same ownership, account status, stage, sizing, disjoint-group,
− and cleanup rules as the website. Every existing and new member must be
accessible to the credential. Groups omitted from a save are preserved; only
IDs in deleted_config_ids are deleted. A group must be disabled before it
can be deleted or its lead changed. Pending stop cleanup must finish first.
json theme={null}
{
"groups": [
{
"enabled": true,
"source_account_id": "YOUR_LEAD_ACCOUNT_ID",
"targets": [
{ "account_id": "YOUR_FOLLOWER_ACCOUNT_ID", "multiplier_bps": 10000 }
]
After
Open Copy Trading settings
Group controls
Each group contains:
- one Lead Account that sends eligible trading instructions;
- one or more Follower Accounts;
- a multiplier from 0.1× to 2× for each follower;
- an enabled, stopping, or stopped lifecycle.
An account can participate in only one enabled group. Groups remain the same
when you switch the active account elsewhere in the app. Accounts are listed
under any name you gave them on the dashboard; renaming an account does not
change its group or multiplier.
Lead Account
+ Choose the account that should drive the group. Competition accounts cannot
+ lead a group. Changing the lead of an existing
group requires disabling that group first. If the lead is no longer active or
available, disable the group before editing its membership.
Follower Accounts and Multipliers
Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
+ Competition accounts cannot follow either, because the Competition Rules
+ prohibit copying trades into or out of a competition account. Accounts that
+ cannot be selected show the reason under their name.
The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:
- below 1× uses less relative size;
- 1× uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
- above 1× uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.
+ Each follower row shows what it would open when the lead opens 1 BTC, and how
+ that quantity follows from the two account sizes and the multiplier. For
+ example, a \$100,000 follower of a \$50,000 lead copies 200% of the lead's
+ quantity at 1×, and 300% at 1.5×.
+ Try An Order
+ Once a group has followers, Try An Order shows how one lead order would
+ scale across the group. Nothing is placed. Drag the slider to set the lead
+ order size and choose 1× or 2× leverage. For each account, the preview
+ shows the order it would open, the margin that order needs, and a bar for the
+ account's balance. The filled part of the bar is the margin needed. An account
+ marked Would Reject cannot afford that order and would skip it while the
+ lead and other followers still fill. Lower its multiplier or use a smaller
+ order to copy it.
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
Copies use the lead's chosen venue. A trading halt prevents new follower
exposure, including an order placed before the halt that is still executing.
When you save a group, every account that starts following has its open orders
canceled, including stop loss and take profit orders, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. A follower trades only
through its lead, so a manual order left on it could not execute. Positions
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.
Manage copy groups through the API
API keys with read scope can inspect GET /v1/copy-trading. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.
Keys with trade scope can use these operations:
| Operation | Endpoint |
|---|
Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | POST /v1/copy-trading
Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
| Acknowledge a completed follower stop notice | POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/acknowledge-copy-stop |
|---|
+ Saving applies the same ownership, account status, stage, competition, sizing,
+ disjoint-group, and cleanup rules as the website. Every existing and new member must be
accessible to the credential. Groups omitted from a save are preserved; only
IDs in deleted_config_ids are deleted. A group must be disabled before it
can be deleted or its lead changed. Pending stop cleanup must finish first.
json theme={null}
{
"groups": [
{
"enabled": true,
"source_account_id": "YOUR_LEAD_ACCOUNT_ID",
"targets": [
{ "account_id": "YOUR_FOLLOWER_ACCOUNT_ID", "multiplier_bps": 10000 }
]
Open Copy Trading settings
Group controls
Each group contains:
- one Lead Account that sends eligible trading instructions;
- one or more Follower Accounts;
- a multiplier from 0.1× to 2× for each follower;
- an enabled, stopping, or stopped lifecycle.
An account can participate in only one enabled group. Groups remain the same
when you switch the active account elsewhere in the app. Accounts are listed
under any name you gave them on the dashboard; renaming an account does not
change its group or multiplier.
Lead Account
− Choose the account that should drive the group. Changing the lead of an existing
+ Choose the account that should drive the group. Competition accounts cannot
+ lead a group. Changing the lead of an existing
group requires disabling that group first. If the lead is no longer active or
available, disable the group before editing its membership.
Follower Accounts and Multipliers
Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
+ Competition accounts cannot follow either, because the Competition Rules
+ prohibit copying trades into or out of a competition account. Accounts that
+ cannot be selected show the reason under their name.
The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:
- below 1× uses less relative size;
- 1× uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
- above 1× uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.
+ Each follower row shows what it would open when the lead opens 1 BTC, and how
+ that quantity follows from the two account sizes and the multiplier. For
+ example, a \$100,000 follower of a \$50,000 lead copies 200% of the lead's
+ quantity at 1×, and 300% at 1.5×.
+ Try An Order
+ Once a group has followers, Try An Order shows how one lead order would
+ scale across the group. Nothing is placed. Drag the slider to set the lead
+ order size and choose 1× or 2× leverage. For each account, the preview
+ shows the order it would open, the margin that order needs, and a bar for the
+ account's balance. The filled part of the bar is the margin needed. An account
+ marked Would Reject cannot afford that order and would skip it while the
+ lead and other followers still fill. Lower its multiplier or use a smaller
+ order to copy it.
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
Copies use the lead's chosen venue. A trading halt prevents new follower
exposure, including an order placed before the halt that is still executing.
When you save a group, every account that starts following has its open orders
canceled, including stop loss and take profit orders, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. A follower trades only
through its lead, so a manual order left on it could not execute. Positions
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.
Manage copy groups through the API
API keys with read scope can inspect GET /v1/copy-trading. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.
Keys with trade scope can use these operations:
| Operation | Endpoint |
|---|
Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | POST /v1/copy-trading
Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
| Acknowledge a completed follower stop notice | POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/acknowledge-copy-stop |
|---|
− Saving applies the same ownership, account status, stage, sizing, disjoint-group,
− and cleanup rules as the website. Every existing and new member must be
+ Saving applies the same ownership, account status, stage, competition, sizing,
+ disjoint-group, and cleanup rules as the website. Every existing and new member must be
accessible to the credential. Groups omitted from a save are preserved; only
IDs in deleted_config_ids are deleted. A group must be disabled before it
can be deleted or its lead changed. Pending stop cleanup must finish first.
json theme={null}
{
"groups": [
{
"enabled": true,
"source_account_id": "YOUR_LEAD_ACCOUNT_ID",
"targets": [
{ "account_id": "YOUR_FOLLOWER_ACCOUNT_ID", "multiplier_bps": 10000 }
]
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideArticle added details about One-Click Trading window resizing, percent buttons, and their configuration options; changed "and Flat" to "percent, and Flat" in summary.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
Trading settings; turn it off there to
remove the window.
- On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
− size are remembered in that browser.
- On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. Drag the window's
header to move it around within the chart. Its position is remembered in
that browser. Tap the handle to switch between the top and bottom edges.
The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
− between them, and Flat below.
- Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
- A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
opposite order reduces the position.
- Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
you change is saved for that market on all your devices. Each market's Stop
Loss and Take Profit are edited under One-Click Trading by Market in
Trading settings. Markets without their own settings start from your Quick Size
amount and your TP/SL preset.
Before your first One-Click order, a notice explains that orders send without
confirmation. You agree once, and the choice is saved to your account.
One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
validation still apply.
Choose an order type
- Max Market Slippage, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
and individual position closes;
- separate Non-Forex and Forex leverage caps for the order ticket;
- Warn Without Stop Loss for orders that can increase exposure;
- Resize TP/SL With Position to keep existing exits sized to a position
you add to;
- confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
- One-Click Chart Close for closing a position from the chart's position
line without the close dialog;
- Show Reverse Position and Confirm Reverse Position for the
Reverse Position button and its review;
- One-Click Trading, which sends market orders from a small Buy, Sell,
− and Flat window with no review step;
- account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
All actions.
Read the complete Trading settings reference to configure
these defaults.
Customize the terminal layout
On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.
The Layout button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:
- Colour Scheme: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
After
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
Trading settings; turn it off there to
remove the window.
- On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
+ size are remembered in that browser. Sell and Buy grow with the
+ window, so a larger window gives you larger buttons.
- On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. Drag the window's
header to move it around within the chart. Its position is remembered in
that browser. Tap the handle to switch between the top and bottom edges.
The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
+ between them, and Flat below. You can also turn on percent buttons from the
+ gear in the window's header.
- Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
- A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
opposite order reduces the position.
- Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
+ - When turned on, the percent buttons under Sell open a short and the ones under Buy
+ open a long, sized as a share of your available margin at your saved
+ leverage. 100% uses all of your available margin.
+ - The Close percent buttons close that share of your position in the
+ market at market. Unlike Flat, they leave your open orders in place.
+ They are available only while you have a position in that market.
+ Percent buttons are off by default. Select the gear in the window's header and
+ turn on Show Percent Buttons to add them, then choose the three open
+ percentages and the three close percentages. Changes apply as you type and are
+ saved to your account, so they follow you to every device.
Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
you change is saved for that market on all your devices. Each market's Stop
Loss and Take Profit are edited under One-Click Trading by Market in
Trading settings. Markets without their own settings start from your Quick Size
amount and your TP/SL preset.
Before your first One-Click order, a notice explains that orders send without
confirmation. You agree once, and the choice is saved to your account.
One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
validation still apply.
Choose an order type
- Max Market Slippage, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
and individual position closes;
- separate Non-Forex and Forex leverage caps for the order ticket;
- Warn Without Stop Loss for orders that can increase exposure;
- Resize TP/SL With Position to keep existing exits sized to a position
you add to;
- confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
- One-Click Chart Close for closing a position from the chart's position
line without the close dialog;
- Show Reverse Position and Confirm Reverse Position for the
Reverse Position button and its review;
- One-Click Trading, which sends market orders from a small Buy, Sell,
+ percent, and Flat window with no review step;
- account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
All actions.
Read the complete Trading settings reference to configure
these defaults.
Customize the terminal layout
On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.
The Layout button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:
- Colour Scheme: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
Trading settings; turn it off there to
remove the window.
- On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
− size are remembered in that browser.
+ size are remembered in that browser. Sell and Buy grow with the
+ window, so a larger window gives you larger buttons.
- On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. Drag the window's
header to move it around within the chart. Its position is remembered in
that browser. Tap the handle to switch between the top and bottom edges.
The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
− between them, and Flat below.
+ between them, and Flat below. You can also turn on percent buttons from the
+ gear in the window's header.
- Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
- A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
opposite order reduces the position.
- Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
+ - When turned on, the percent buttons under Sell open a short and the ones under Buy
+ open a long, sized as a share of your available margin at your saved
+ leverage. 100% uses all of your available margin.
+ - The Close percent buttons close that share of your position in the
+ market at market. Unlike Flat, they leave your open orders in place.
+ They are available only while you have a position in that market.
+ Percent buttons are off by default. Select the gear in the window's header and
+ turn on Show Percent Buttons to add them, then choose the three open
+ percentages and the three close percentages. Changes apply as you type and are
+ saved to your account, so they follow you to every device.
Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
you change is saved for that market on all your devices. Each market's Stop
Loss and Take Profit are edited under One-Click Trading by Market in
Trading settings. Markets without their own settings start from your Quick Size
amount and your TP/SL preset.
Before your first One-Click order, a notice explains that orders send without
confirmation. You agree once, and the choice is saved to your account.
One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
validation still apply.
Choose an order type
- Max Market Slippage, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
and individual position closes;
- separate Non-Forex and Forex leverage caps for the order ticket;
- Warn Without Stop Loss for orders that can increase exposure;
- Resize TP/SL With Position to keep existing exits sized to a position
you add to;
- confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
- One-Click Chart Close for closing a position from the chart's position
line without the close dialog;
- Show Reverse Position and Confirm Reverse Position for the
Reverse Position button and its review;
- One-Click Trading, which sends market orders from a small Buy, Sell,
− and Flat window with no review step;
+ percent, and Flat window with no review step;
- account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
All actions.
Read the complete Trading settings reference to configure
these defaults.
Customize the terminal layout
On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.
The Layout button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:
- Colour Scheme: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsAdded condition that a funded account failing or closing during evaluation triggers automatic funding if limits are met.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
10 × \$10K, 4 × \$25K, 2 × \$50K, or any mix that totals \$100,000 or less. Profits, losses, and withdrawals do not
change the allocation an account uses. A funded account that fails or is
closed stops using allocation.
Elite is its own model type, so Elite allocation also counts toward the
\$300K maximum funded allocation
across all models.
Elite purchases have no total size limit, so you can pass more Elite
evaluations than can be funded at once. When a passed evaluation would take
your Elite funded allocation above \$100,000, or your total above \$300,000,
it keeps its Passed status and enters Funding Review after identity
verification and agreement signing, instead of being funded automatically.
Review does not guarantee funding, and any approval must still fit within both
− limits. See Becoming Funded.
Payouts
| Payout term | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
|---|
| Profit split | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 |
These payout terms are the same for the 3% DLL and No DLL options. The split is
80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps, or 90% to you with the 90/10 upgrade.
- On demand: you can request from your first day funded. Elite has no
waiting period, minimum trading days, consistency requirement, or profit
target before a request, and no daily request limit: you can request again
After
10 × \$10K, 4 × \$25K, 2 × \$50K, or any mix that totals \$100,000 or less. Profits, losses, and withdrawals do not
change the allocation an account uses. A funded account that fails or is
closed stops using allocation.
Elite is its own model type, so Elite allocation also counts toward the
\$300K maximum funded allocation
across all models.
Elite purchases have no total size limit, so you can pass more Elite
evaluations than can be funded at once. When a passed evaluation would take
your Elite funded allocation above \$100,000, or your total above \$300,000,
it keeps its Passed status and enters Funding Review after identity
verification and agreement signing, instead of being funded automatically.
Review does not guarantee funding, and any approval must still fit within both
+ limits. If a funded account fails or closes while the evaluation waits and it
+ then fits within both limits, it is funded automatically. See Becoming Funded.
Payouts
| Payout term | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
|---|
| Profit split | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 |
These payout terms are the same for the 3% DLL and No DLL options. The split is
80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps, or 90% to you with the 90/10 upgrade.
- On demand: you can request from your first day funded. Elite has no
waiting period, minimum trading days, consistency requirement, or profit
target before a request, and no daily request limit: you can request again
10 × \$10K, 4 × \$25K, 2 × \$50K, or any mix that totals \$100,000 or less. Profits, losses, and withdrawals do not
change the allocation an account uses. A funded account that fails or is
closed stops using allocation.
Elite is its own model type, so Elite allocation also counts toward the
\$300K maximum funded allocation
across all models.
Elite purchases have no total size limit, so you can pass more Elite
evaluations than can be funded at once. When a passed evaluation would take
your Elite funded allocation above \$100,000, or your total above \$300,000,
it keeps its Passed status and enters Funding Review after identity
verification and agreement signing, instead of being funded automatically.
Review does not guarantee funding, and any approval must still fit within both
− limits. See Becoming Funded.
+ limits. If a funded account fails or closes while the evaluation waits and it
+ then fits within both limits, it is funded automatically. See Becoming Funded.
Payouts
| Payout term | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
|---|
| Profit split | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 | 80/20, or 90/10 |
These payout terms are the same for the 3% DLL and No DLL options. The split is
80% to you and 20% to MyFundedPerps, or 90% to you with the 90/10 upgrade.
- On demand: you can request from your first day funded. Elite has no
waiting period, minimum trading days, consistency requirement, or profit
target before a request, and no daily request limit: you can request again
PremierMyFundedPerps · Copy Trading GuideArticle now prohibits competition accounts from leading or following in copy trading groups, and adds an example table showing how multipliers affect follower position sizing.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide
Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.
Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.
Before you start
Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
− but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account or disable the group and
let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually. When an account starts
following, its open orders, including stop loss and take profit orders, are
canceled, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. Its positions stay open.
Create a group
Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).
Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.
Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.
Choose how much of the lead's balance-adjusted quantity each follower should
use.
Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.
How follower size is calculated
Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. 1× follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is 0.1× through 2×.
Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.
A copied order uses the lead's leverage unless it is above the follower's own
maximum for that market. In that case, the copy uses the follower's maximum
instead. If the follower already holds the market, the copy keeps that
position's margin mode (cross or isolated).
Reversing a lead position reverses each follower too. The follower's whole
position on that side closes, and a new position opens on the other side at
the follower's normal copy size.
If the follower's position changes before its copy fills, for example because
one of its take profit orders filled first, the copy is resized so the follower
After
Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide
Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.
Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.
Before you start
Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
+ but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead. Competition accounts
+ cannot lead or follow: the Competition Rules prohibit copying trades into or
+ out of a competition account. A group saved before this rule no longer copies
+ to or from a competition account, and you can still disable it.
Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account or disable the group and
let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually. When an account starts
following, its open orders, including stop loss and take profit orders, are
canceled, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. Its positions stay open.
Create a group
Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).
Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.
Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.
Choose how much of the lead's balance-adjusted quantity each follower should
use.
Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.
How follower size is calculated
Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. 1× follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is 0.1× through 2×.
+ For example, with a \$50,000 lead:
+
\$50,000 1× 1 BTC 1 BTC \$100,000 1× 1 BTC 2 BTC \$100,000 1.5× 1 BTC 3 BTC \$25,000 0.5× 1 BTC 0.25 BTC
| Follower | Multiplier | Lead opens 1 BTC | Follower opens |
|---|
+ At 1×, every follower uses the same share of its balance as the lead. Use
+ Try An Order in Copy Trading settings to see the margin each account would
+ need for a lead order and which followers would reject it.
Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.
A copied order uses the lead's leverage unless it is above the follower's own
maximum for that market. In that case, the copy uses the follower's maximum
instead. If the follower already holds the market, the copy keeps that
position's margin mode (cross or isolated).
Reversing a lead position reverses each follower too. The follower's whole
position on that side closes, and a new position opens on the other side at
the follower's normal copy size.
If the follower's position changes before its copy fills, for example because
one of its take profit orders filled first, the copy is resized so the follower
Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide
Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.
Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.
Before you start
Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
− but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
+ but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead. Competition accounts
+ cannot lead or follow: the Competition Rules prohibit copying trades into or
+ out of a competition account. A group saved before this rule no longer copies
+ to or from a competition account, and you can still disable it.
Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account or disable the group and
let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually. When an account starts
following, its open orders, including stop loss and take profit orders, are
canceled, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. Its positions stay open.
Create a group
Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).
Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.
Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.
Choose how much of the lead's balance-adjusted quantity each follower should
use.
Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.
How follower size is calculated
Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. 1× follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is 0.1× through 2×.
+ For example, with a \$50,000 lead:
+
\$50,000 1× 1 BTC 1 BTC \$100,000 1× 1 BTC 2 BTC \$100,000 1.5× 1 BTC 3 BTC \$25,000 0.5× 1 BTC 0.25 BTC
| Follower | Multiplier | Lead opens 1 BTC | Follower opens |
|---|
+ At 1×, every follower uses the same share of its balance as the lead. Use
+ Try An Order in Copy Trading settings to see the margin each account would
+ need for a lead order and which followers would reject it.
Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.
A copied order uses the lead's leverage unless it is above the follower's own
maximum for that market. In that case, the copy uses the follower's maximum
instead. If the follower already holds the market, the copy keeps that
position's margin mode (cross or isolated).
Reversing a lead position reverses each follower too. The follower's whole
position on that side closes, and a new position opens on the other side at
the follower's normal copy size.
If the follower's position changes before its copy fills, for example because
one of its take profit orders filled first, the copy is resized so the follower
PremierMyFundedPerps · Challenges and RulesAdded rule: funded accounts failing or closing allow waiting accounts within limits to receive automatic funding.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
option to show it again. API sandbox accounts work the same way with **Hide
Sandbox Accounts**.
Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.
Maximum funded allocation
You can hold up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
− completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review.
See Becoming Funded.
Funded accounts and payouts
The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.
A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, \$250, and \$500 before the split
on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes, and \$30 on a \$1K Elite prize
After
option to show it again. API sandbox accounts work the same way with **Hide
Sandbox Accounts**.
Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.
Maximum funded allocation
You can hold up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
+ completion instead of receiving automatic funding. If a funded account later
+ fails or closes and the waiting account then fits within both limits, it is
+ funded automatically.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review.
See Becoming Funded.
Funded accounts and payouts
The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.
A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, \$250, and \$500 before the split
on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes, and \$30 on a \$1K Elite prize
option to show it again. API sandbox accounts work the same way with **Hide
Sandbox Accounts**.
Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.
Maximum funded allocation
You can hold up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
− completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
+ completion instead of receiving automatic funding. If a funded account later
+ fails or closes and the waiting account then fits within both limits, it is
+ funded automatically.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review.
See Becoming Funded.
Funded accounts and payouts
The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.
A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, \$250, and \$500 before the split
on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes, and \$30 on a \$1K Elite prize
PremierMyFundedPerps · Becoming FundedAdded description of automatic funding when an active account fails or closes, and funding order for multiple waiting applications.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
The limit adds the original sizes of your active funded accounts. Two \$50K
accounts in the same model use its entire \$100K allowance. Trading profits,
losses, and withdrawals do not change the allocation used. Failed, closed, and
archived accounts no longer use active allocation.
If funding another passed account would exceed either limit, the application
enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement completion.
It does not receive a funded account automatically. For example, passing a
second \$100K Prime account while you already hold \$100K funded in Prime requires
Funding Review, even if your total across all models is below \$300K.
A review does not guarantee additional allocation. Funding approval must remain
within both limits. Your completed identity check and signed agreement remain
on the application while it waits.
3. Follow any funding review
Some passed accounts can enter Funding Review In Progress after identity
and agreement completion. The dashboard shows whether the account is waiting
for review, needs attention, was not approved, or is ready.
Do not repeat identity or signing steps after they are shown as complete.
4. Open the funded account
When funding is approved, choose Go to Funded Account or select the new
funded account in the account switcher. Confirm that its stage is Funded
and its status is Active before trading.
The funded account is separate from the passed evaluation. It has its own
balance, rules, positions, payout cycle, and history.
A funded account must record an executed trade at least once every 7
After
The limit adds the original sizes of your active funded accounts. Two \$50K
accounts in the same model use its entire \$100K allowance. Trading profits,
losses, and withdrawals do not change the allocation used. Failed, closed, and
archived accounts no longer use active allocation.
If funding another passed account would exceed either limit, the application
enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement completion.
It does not receive a funded account automatically. For example, passing a
second \$100K Prime account while you already hold \$100K funded in Prime requires
Funding Review, even if your total across all models is below \$300K.
A review does not guarantee additional allocation. Funding approval must remain
within both limits. Your completed identity check and signed agreement remain
on the application while it waits.
+ If one of your active funded accounts fails or is closed while the application
+ waits, and the waiting account now fits within both limits, it is funded
+ automatically. You do not need to contact support. When several applications
+ are waiting, the one you signed first is funded first.
3. Follow any funding review
Some passed accounts can enter Funding Review In Progress after identity
and agreement completion. The dashboard shows whether the account is waiting
for review, needs attention, was not approved, or is ready.
Do not repeat identity or signing steps after they are shown as complete.
4. Open the funded account
When funding is approved, choose Go to Funded Account or select the new
funded account in the account switcher. Confirm that its stage is Funded
and its status is Active before trading.
The funded account is separate from the passed evaluation. It has its own
balance, rules, positions, payout cycle, and history.
A funded account must record an executed trade at least once every 7
The limit adds the original sizes of your active funded accounts. Two \$50K
accounts in the same model use its entire \$100K allowance. Trading profits,
losses, and withdrawals do not change the allocation used. Failed, closed, and
archived accounts no longer use active allocation.
If funding another passed account would exceed either limit, the application
enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement completion.
It does not receive a funded account automatically. For example, passing a
second \$100K Prime account while you already hold \$100K funded in Prime requires
Funding Review, even if your total across all models is below \$300K.
A review does not guarantee additional allocation. Funding approval must remain
within both limits. Your completed identity check and signed agreement remain
on the application while it waits.
+ If one of your active funded accounts fails or is closed while the application
+ waits, and the waiting account now fits within both limits, it is funded
+ automatically. You do not need to contact support. When several applications
+ are waiting, the one you signed first is funded first.
3. Follow any funding review
Some passed accounts can enter Funding Review In Progress after identity
and agreement completion. The dashboard shows whether the account is waiting
for review, needs attention, was not approved, or is ready.
Do not repeat identity or signing steps after they are shown as complete.
4. Open the funded account
When funding is approved, choose Go to Funded Account or select the new
funded account in the account switcher. Confirm that its stage is Funded
and its status is Active before trading.
The funded account is separate from the passed evaluation. It has its own
balance, rules, positions, payout cycle, and history.
A funded account must record an executed trade at least once every 7
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramCommission History now shows full Order ID instead of redacted version; first-purchase offer increased from 25% off to up to 30% off.Oct 19
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
until the review is complete.
- Purchase emails: when a purchase made with your code is credited to
you, we email the address on your account with the commission amount, the
code used, and a partially hidden email of the buyer. Each purchase sends
one email while notifications are enabled, including repeat purchases by
the same buyer. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their
commission is corrected or approved. For new purchases, commission held
for eligibility review is emailed once it is approved, and failed or
abandoned checkouts send nothing. "Earned" means the commission is recorded
on your affiliate balance, not that it has been paid out. Turn these emails
off or back on under
Notification settings.
− - Commission History shows a redacted Order ID beneath each product:
− an ellipsis followed by the last eight characters. Use this reference to
− distinguish purchases when discussing a commission with support. Each
order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
at, including any promotion rate.
- Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
be your own is removed.
- A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
approved commission stays yours.
FP Points
Qualifying affiliate revenue also earns FP Points at the rate shown under
Ways to Earn on Rewards. These
| Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case |
|---|
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 25% off an eligible first
− purchase and 20% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
− of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
− shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
− matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
− and a 25% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
− Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
− Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
team issues you. The tab appears once your first code is issued. Affiliates
without codes do not see this tab.
After
until the review is complete.
- Purchase emails: when a purchase made with your code is credited to
you, we email the address on your account with the commission amount, the
code used, and a partially hidden email of the buyer. Each purchase sends
one email while notifications are enabled, including repeat purchases by
the same buyer. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their
commission is corrected or approved. For new purchases, commission held
for eligibility review is emailed once it is approved, and failed or
abandoned checkouts send nothing. "Earned" means the commission is recorded
on your affiliate balance, not that it has been paid out. Turn these emails
off or back on under
Notification settings.
+ - Commission History shows the full Order ID beneath each product.
+ It is the same order number (starting with FP-) that appears on the
+ buyer's invoice and receipt, so you can match orders to invoices and
+ reference a purchase when discussing a commission with support. Each
order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
at, including any promotion rate.
- Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
be your own is removed.
- A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
approved commission stays yours.
FP Points
Qualifying affiliate revenue also earns FP Points at the rate shown under
Ways to Earn on Rewards. These
| Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case |
|---|
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
+ - Advertised offer. Every graphic invites buyers to use your code for up
+ to 30% off, the rate for an eligible first purchase. This rate is part of
+ the artwork and does not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
+ shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code gives
+ 30% off an eligible first purchase. Previously downloaded graphics may show
an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
+ and an Up to 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions
+ of Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes,
+ and Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
team issues you. The tab appears once your first code is issued. Affiliates
without codes do not see this tab.
until the review is complete.
- Purchase emails: when a purchase made with your code is credited to
you, we email the address on your account with the commission amount, the
code used, and a partially hidden email of the buyer. Each purchase sends
one email while notifications are enabled, including repeat purchases by
the same buyer. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their
commission is corrected or approved. For new purchases, commission held
for eligibility review is emailed once it is approved, and failed or
abandoned checkouts send nothing. "Earned" means the commission is recorded
on your affiliate balance, not that it has been paid out. Turn these emails
off or back on under
Notification settings.
− - Commission History shows a redacted Order ID beneath each product:
− an ellipsis followed by the last eight characters. Use this reference to
− distinguish purchases when discussing a commission with support. Each
+ - Commission History shows the full Order ID beneath each product.
+ It is the same order number (starting with FP-) that appears on the
+ buyer's invoice and receipt, so you can match orders to invoices and
+ reference a purchase when discussing a commission with support. Each
order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
at, including any promotion rate.
- Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
be your own is removed.
- A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
approved commission stays yours.
FP Points
Qualifying affiliate revenue also earns FP Points at the rate shown under
Ways to Earn on Rewards. These
| Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case |
|---|
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 25% off an eligible first
− purchase and 20% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
− of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
− shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
− matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
+ - Advertised offer. Every graphic invites buyers to use your code for up
+ to 30% off, the rate for an eligible first purchase. This rate is part of
+ the artwork and does not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
+ shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code gives
+ 30% off an eligible first purchase. Previously downloaded graphics may show
an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
− and a 25% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
− Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
− Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
+ and an Up to 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions
+ of Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes,
+ and Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
team issues you. The tab appears once your first code is issued. Affiliates
without codes do not see this tab.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Update TP/SL attached to a resting limit entryPage removed from the help center.Oct 18
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading with the APIStop_market and stop_limit orders now support attached take-profit/stop-loss; attached-exits endpoint extended to stop_market and stop_limit entries.Oct 18
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.
| type | Required price fields | Important options |
|---|
| limit | limit_price | attached TP/SL, IOC, FOK, or GTD time in force |
−
stop_limit trigger_price, limit_price opening conditional order
| type | Required price fields | Important options |
|---|---|---|
| stop_market | trigger_price | optional reduce-only protection |
| take_market | trigger_price | opening conditional order |
| take_profit | trigger_price, reduce_only: true | position protection |
The server resolves provider, symbol, and venue coin from market_id. Do not
send those fields. expected_price records what your client observed, but it
never controls the execution price, margin calculation, or slippage reference.
FX markets trade on veranta. Use their current market_id values from
GET /v1/markets. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets are
retiring: they accept only orders that reduce or close existing positions
there. The historical fpx and lighter providers are retired and have no
markets available for new trades.
copy uses the leverage you send, lowered to the follower's own maximum for
that market when needed, and keeps the margin mode of any position the
follower already holds in that market. See
Copy Trading.
Use GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server id is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.
If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns 503 with Retry-After instead of returning truncated data.
- PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id} changes price and optionally size.
- PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits sets or removes TP/SL attached to
− a resting limit entry. Send null to remove a leg.
- DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id} cancels a working order or queues cancellation
when execution already owns the row.
To cancel the complete ordinary-order snapshot for an account, send
POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/cancel-all-orders with an Idempotency-Key.
It includes resting orders and armed trigger orders. An in-flight market order
can still settle, and active TWAP, VWAP, or scaled parents must be canceled
through their own endpoints. Each request advances at most five source orders,
with every source cancellation isolated in its own transaction. A 202
response includes progress and Retry-After; repeat the same request until the
operation reports completed.
Chase orders cannot be modified. Cancel the chase and place a replacement with
new offset or cap settings.
After
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.
| type | Required price fields | Important options |
|---|
| limit | limit_price | attached TP/SL, IOC, FOK, or GTD time in force |
+
stop_limit trigger_price, limit_price opening conditional order, attached TP/SL
| type | Required price fields | Important options |
|---|---|---|
| stop_market | trigger_price | attached TP/SL, or reduce-only protection |
| take_market | trigger_price | opening conditional order |
| take_profit | trigger_price, reduce_only: true | position protection |
The server resolves provider, symbol, and venue coin from market_id. Do not
send those fields. expected_price records what your client observed, but it
never controls the execution price, margin calculation, or slippage reference.
FX markets trade on veranta. Use their current market_id values from
GET /v1/markets. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets are
retiring: they accept only orders that reduce or close existing positions
there. The historical fpx and lighter providers are retired and have no
markets available for new trades.
copy uses the leverage you send, lowered to the follower's own maximum for
that market when needed, and keeps the margin mode of any position the
follower already holds in that market. See
Copy Trading.
Use GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server id is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.
If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns 503 with Retry-After instead of returning truncated data.
- PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id} changes price and optionally size.
- PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits sets or removes TP/SL attached to
+ a resting limit, stop_market, or stop_limit entry. Send null to remove
+ a leg.
- DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id} cancels a working order or queues cancellation
when execution already owns the row.
To cancel the complete ordinary-order snapshot for an account, send
POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/cancel-all-orders with an Idempotency-Key.
It includes resting orders and armed trigger orders. An in-flight market order
can still settle, and active TWAP, VWAP, or scaled parents must be canceled
through their own endpoints. Each request advances at most five source orders,
with every source cancellation isolated in its own transaction. A 202
response includes progress and Retry-After; repeat the same request until the
operation reports completed.
Chase orders cannot be modified. Cancel the chase and place a replacement with
new offset or cap settings.
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.
| type | Required price fields | Important options |
|---|
| limit | limit_price | attached TP/SL, IOC, FOK, or GTD time in force |
−
stop_limit trigger_price, limit_price opening conditional order
| type | Required price fields | Important options |
|---|---|---|
| stop_market | trigger_price | optional reduce-only protection |
+
stop_limit trigger_price, limit_price opening conditional order, attached TP/SL
| type | Required price fields | Important options |
|---|---|---|
| stop_market | trigger_price | attached TP/SL, or reduce-only protection |
| take_market | trigger_price | opening conditional order |
| take_profit | trigger_price, reduce_only: true | position protection |
The server resolves provider, symbol, and venue coin from market_id. Do not
send those fields. expected_price records what your client observed, but it
never controls the execution price, margin calculation, or slippage reference.
FX markets trade on veranta. Use their current market_id values from
GET /v1/markets. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets are
retiring: they accept only orders that reduce or close existing positions
there. The historical fpx and lighter providers are retired and have no
markets available for new trades.
copy uses the leverage you send, lowered to the follower's own maximum for
that market when needed, and keeps the margin mode of any position the
follower already holds in that market. See
Copy Trading.
Use GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server id is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.
If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns 503 with Retry-After instead of returning truncated data.
- PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id} changes price and optionally size.
- PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits sets or removes TP/SL attached to
− a resting limit entry. Send null to remove a leg.
+ a resting limit, stop_market, or stop_limit entry. Send null to remove
+ a leg.
- DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id} cancels a working order or queues cancellation
when execution already owns the row.
To cancel the complete ordinary-order snapshot for an account, send
POST /v1/accounts/{account_id}/cancel-all-orders with an Idempotency-Key.
It includes resting orders and armed trigger orders. An in-flight market order
can still settle, and active TWAP, VWAP, or scaled parents must be canceled
through their own endpoints. Each request advances at most five source orders,
with every source cancellation isolated in its own transaction. A 202
response includes progress and Retry-After; repeat the same request until the
operation reports completed.
Chase orders cannot be modified. Cancel the chase and place a replacement with
new offset or cap settings.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideFixed Range Volume Profile drawing added with developing POC and value-area tracking; Take Profit and Stop Loss attachment rules added for multiple order types.Oct 18
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Chart customization such as colors, chart style, and scale settings follows
you to every market, while drawings stay on the market where you drew them.
To build your own indicators, see Custom Scripts.
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
While One-Click Trading is on, the header also has a
lightning button that shows or hides the One-Click window.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
Trading settings). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.
For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
If you switch between Long and Short, a fixed Take Profit or Stop Loss price
moves to the other side of the entry price at the same distance, so it still
protects the new direction. Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger
price.
While you draft a limit order, the draft limit line on the chart shows TP
and SL handles. Drag a handle up or down to set that Take Profit or Stop
Loss price. The ticket turns on TP/SL and fills in the price, and the draft
line stays in sync with the ticket as you edit either one. Nothing is placed
until you submit the order. A handle is hidden once its level is set, and the
SL handle is hidden while a trailing stop is selected. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.
New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:
| Venue | Trigger source |
|---|
For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
After
Chart customization such as colors, chart style, and scale settings follows
you to every market, while drawings stay on the market where you drew them.
To build your own indicators, see Custom Scripts.
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
+ A new Fixed Range Volume Profile drawing shows its developing point of
+ control (POC) and developing value area as step lines across the range. The
+ upper and lower value-area lines track the value area high (VAH) and value
+ area low (VAL) bar by bar. At the end of the range they match the final VAH
+ and VAL for the whole range. Past the end of the range, the lines continue
+ flat at those final levels: candles after the range are not counted. To hide
+ either line, open the drawing's settings and turn off Developing Poc or
+ Developing VA on the Style tab. Change the share of volume the value
+ area covers with Value Area Volume on the Inputs tab. Profiles you drew
+ before this change keep their own settings.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
While One-Click Trading is on, the header also has a
lightning button that shows or hides the One-Click window.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
Trading settings). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.
For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
If you switch between Long and Short, a fixed Take Profit or Stop Loss price
moves to the other side of the entry price at the same distance, so it still
protects the new direction. Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger
price.
+ You can attach a Take Profit and Stop Loss to market, limit, Stop Market, and
+ Stop Limit entries. On a limit or stop entry, the TP/SL waits with the order and
+ is placed only when the entry fills, so it cannot trigger before you have a
+ position. A TP/SL on a Stop Market entry is checked against its trigger price,
+ and on a Stop Limit entry against its limit price. If the entry fills at a price
+ that would put the Take Profit or Stop Loss on the wrong side of your entry, the
+ order is rejected instead of opening an unprotected position. You can change or
+ remove a waiting TP/SL from Open Orders until the entry fills. Take Market,
+ Take Limit, and reduce-only orders cannot carry a TP/SL.
While you draft a limit order, the draft limit line on the chart shows TP
and SL handles. Drag a handle up or down to set that Take Profit or Stop
Loss price. The ticket turns on TP/SL and fills in the price, and the draft
line stays in sync with the ticket as you edit either one. Nothing is placed
until you submit the order. A handle is hidden once its level is set, and the
SL handle is hidden while a trailing stop is selected. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.
New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:
| Venue | Trigger source |
|---|
For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
Chart customization such as colors, chart style, and scale settings follows
you to every market, while drawings stay on the market where you drew them.
To build your own indicators, see Custom Scripts.
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
+ A new Fixed Range Volume Profile drawing shows its developing point of
+ control (POC) and developing value area as step lines across the range. The
+ upper and lower value-area lines track the value area high (VAH) and value
+ area low (VAL) bar by bar. At the end of the range they match the final VAH
+ and VAL for the whole range. Past the end of the range, the lines continue
+ flat at those final levels: candles after the range are not counted. To hide
+ either line, open the drawing's settings and turn off Developing Poc or
+ Developing VA on the Style tab. Change the share of volume the value
+ area covers with Value Area Volume on the Inputs tab. Profiles you drew
+ before this change keep their own settings.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
While One-Click Trading is on, the header also has a
lightning button that shows or hides the One-Click window.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
Trading settings). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.
For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
If you switch between Long and Short, a fixed Take Profit or Stop Loss price
moves to the other side of the entry price at the same distance, so it still
protects the new direction. Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger
price.
+ You can attach a Take Profit and Stop Loss to market, limit, Stop Market, and
+ Stop Limit entries. On a limit or stop entry, the TP/SL waits with the order and
+ is placed only when the entry fills, so it cannot trigger before you have a
+ position. A TP/SL on a Stop Market entry is checked against its trigger price,
+ and on a Stop Limit entry against its limit price. If the entry fills at a price
+ that would put the Take Profit or Stop Loss on the wrong side of your entry, the
+ order is rejected instead of opening an unprotected position. You can change or
+ remove a waiting TP/SL from Open Orders until the entry fills. Take Market,
+ Take Limit, and reduce-only orders cannot carry a TP/SL.
While you draft a limit order, the draft limit line on the chart shows TP
and SL handles. Drag a handle up or down to set that Take Profit or Stop
Loss price. The ticket turns on TP/SL and fills in the price, and the draft
line stays in sync with the ticket as you edit either one. Nothing is placed
until you submit the order. A handle is hidden once its level is set, and the
SL handle is hidden while a trailing stop is selected. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.
New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:
| Venue | Trigger source |
|---|
For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsAdded clarification that 3% DLL accounts maintain their daily loss floor after withdrawals, with reference to related documentation.Oct 18
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Withdrawals and your loss cushion
A payout deducts its full gross amount from the balance, which reduces the room
above the loss threshold by the same amount. The threshold itself does not
move.
For example, an Elite \$25K account at \$27,000 equity with no open positions
has \$2,000 of profit and \$3,250 of room above its \$23,750 threshold.
Requesting all of it deducts \$2,000 gross and pays you \$1,600 (\$1,800 with
the 90/10 upgrade). The balance
returns to \$25,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, and the room above it
returns to the original \$1,250.
Select, Prime, and Signature work differently: their loss threshold locks to
the starting balance on the first withdrawal. Elite never has that lock.
Lifetime payout cap
Elite payouts count toward the
\$100,000 lifetime payout cap
per user, combined across every plan and counted after the profit split. This
is separate from the \$100,000 Elite funded allocation cap: the payout cap
limits the money you can receive, while the funded cap limits the total
starting size of your active Sim Funded Elite accounts.
After
Withdrawals and your loss cushion
A payout deducts its full gross amount from the balance, which reduces the room
above the loss threshold by the same amount. The threshold itself does not
move.
For example, an Elite \$25K account at \$27,000 equity with no open positions
has \$2,000 of profit and \$3,250 of room above its \$23,750 threshold.
Requesting all of it deducts \$2,000 gross and pays you \$1,600 (\$1,800 with
the 90/10 upgrade). The balance
returns to \$25,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, and the room above it
returns to the original \$1,250.
Select, Prime, and Signature work differently: their loss threshold locks to
the starting balance on the first withdrawal. Elite never has that lock.
+ On a 3% DLL account, a withdrawal also never lowers the daily loss floor below
+ where it started that day. See
+ Daily loss limit after a withdrawal.
Lifetime payout cap
Elite payouts count toward the
\$100,000 lifetime payout cap
per user, combined across every plan and counted after the profit split. This
is separate from the \$100,000 Elite funded allocation cap: the payout cap
limits the money you can receive, while the funded cap limits the total
starting size of your active Sim Funded Elite accounts.
Withdrawals and your loss cushion
A payout deducts its full gross amount from the balance, which reduces the room
above the loss threshold by the same amount. The threshold itself does not
move.
For example, an Elite \$25K account at \$27,000 equity with no open positions
has \$2,000 of profit and \$3,250 of room above its \$23,750 threshold.
Requesting all of it deducts \$2,000 gross and pays you \$1,600 (\$1,800 with
the 90/10 upgrade). The balance
returns to \$25,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, and the room above it
returns to the original \$1,250.
Select, Prime, and Signature work differently: their loss threshold locks to
the starting balance on the first withdrawal. Elite never has that lock.
+ On a 3% DLL account, a withdrawal also never lowers the daily loss floor below
+ where it started that day. See
+ Daily loss limit after a withdrawal.
Lifetime payout cap
Elite payouts count toward the
\$100,000 lifetime payout cap
per user, combined across every plan and counted after the profit split. This
is separate from the \$100,000 Elite funded allocation cap: the payout cap
limits the money you can receive, while the funded cap limits the total
starting size of your active Sim Funded Elite accounts.
PremierMyFundedPerps · PayoutsAdded section explaining how withdrawals interact with daily loss limits, including example calculation.Oct 18
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Elite requests show the gross deduction and Balance After Payout only,
because their floor does not change.
The preview updates as you change the requested amount and appears again in
confirmation. The loss buffer is the projected balance minus the permanent
max loss floor, using the full gross deduction rather than just your share.
A zero-buffer warning appears when the payout leaves no room above the floor.
If the projected balance falls below the floor, an explicit breach warning
appears and submission is blocked, including when the entered amount exceeds
the available payout. Reduce your request to retain room for trading losses
and fees. This buffer
only measures the max loss floor; the daily loss rule still applies. Cash and
store-credit allocation do not change the buffer.
Split cash and store credit
Yes, funded payouts can still be redeemed for store credit. On most
accounts you can take 100% as cash through Rise, 100% as store credit, or any
split between the two.
Use the slider, a preset, or enter the store-credit amount. The request panel
shows each part before you confirm.
Some accounts are paid in store credit only. \$1K and \$2.5K Select accounts,
for example, cannot take any part of a payout as cash. On these accounts the request panel
shows Paid as Store Credit in place of the slider, and the whole requested
amount is converted to store credit. Payout Terms lists the payout method as
Store credit only. These payouts do not receive the store-credit boost
because the accounts already have a 90/10 split, so a \$30 request grants \$30
After
Elite requests show the gross deduction and Balance After Payout only,
because their floor does not change.
The preview updates as you change the requested amount and appears again in
confirmation. The loss buffer is the projected balance minus the permanent
max loss floor, using the full gross deduction rather than just your share.
A zero-buffer warning appears when the payout leaves no room above the floor.
If the projected balance falls below the floor, an explicit breach warning
appears and submission is blocked, including when the entered amount exceeds
the available payout. Reduce your request to retain room for trading losses
and fees. This buffer
only measures the max loss floor; the daily loss rule still applies. Cash and
store-credit allocation do not change the buffer.
+ Daily loss limit after a withdrawal
+ A withdrawal never counts as a daily loss. On plans with a daily loss limit,
+ a payout first uses up any profit you made earlier in the same trading day.
+ That withdrawn profit no longer adds room under the daily loss limit, so the
+ daily loss floor never drops below where it started that day.
+ For example, a \$5K account with a 3% daily loss limit (\$150) starts the day
+ at \$5,000, so its daily loss floor is \$4,850. It gains \$280, then withdraws
+ \$280 gross. The balance returns to \$5,000 and the daily loss floor stays at
+ \$4,850. If the withdrawal is larger than the day's profit, the floor moves
+ down only by the extra amount, so the withdrawal still does not count as a
+ loss.
Split cash and store credit
Yes, funded payouts can still be redeemed for store credit. On most
accounts you can take 100% as cash through Rise, 100% as store credit, or any
split between the two.
Use the slider, a preset, or enter the store-credit amount. The request panel
shows each part before you confirm.
Some accounts are paid in store credit only. \$1K and \$2.5K Select accounts,
for example, cannot take any part of a payout as cash. On these accounts the request panel
shows Paid as Store Credit in place of the slider, and the whole requested
amount is converted to store credit. Payout Terms lists the payout method as
Store credit only. These payouts do not receive the store-credit boost
because the accounts already have a 90/10 split, so a \$30 request grants \$30
Elite requests show the gross deduction and Balance After Payout only,
because their floor does not change.
The preview updates as you change the requested amount and appears again in
confirmation. The loss buffer is the projected balance minus the permanent
max loss floor, using the full gross deduction rather than just your share.
A zero-buffer warning appears when the payout leaves no room above the floor.
If the projected balance falls below the floor, an explicit breach warning
appears and submission is blocked, including when the entered amount exceeds
the available payout. Reduce your request to retain room for trading losses
and fees. This buffer
only measures the max loss floor; the daily loss rule still applies. Cash and
store-credit allocation do not change the buffer.
+ Daily loss limit after a withdrawal
+ A withdrawal never counts as a daily loss. On plans with a daily loss limit,
+ a payout first uses up any profit you made earlier in the same trading day.
+ That withdrawn profit no longer adds room under the daily loss limit, so the
+ daily loss floor never drops below where it started that day.
+ For example, a \$5K account with a 3% daily loss limit (\$150) starts the day
+ at \$5,000, so its daily loss floor is \$4,850. It gains \$280, then withdraws
+ \$280 gross. The balance returns to \$5,000 and the daily loss floor stays at
+ \$4,850. If the withdrawal is larger than the day's profit, the floor moves
+ down only by the extra amount, so the withdrawal still does not count as a
+ loss.
Split cash and store credit
Yes, funded payouts can still be redeemed for store credit. On most
accounts you can take 100% as cash through Rise, 100% as store credit, or any
split between the two.
Use the slider, a preset, or enter the store-credit amount. The request panel
shows each part before you confirm.
Some accounts are paid in store credit only. \$1K and \$2.5K Select accounts,
for example, cannot take any part of a payout as cash. On these accounts the request panel
shows Paid as Store Credit in place of the slider, and the whole requested
amount is converted to store credit. Payout Terms lists the payout method as
Store credit only. These payouts do not receive the store-credit boost
because the accounts already have a 90/10 split, so a \$30 request grants \$30
PremierMyFundedPerps · Update TP/SL attached to a resting limit or stop entryNew page published.Oct 18
PremierMyFundedPerps · API capabilitiesEntry protection now includes stop-market and stop-limit orders in addition to market and limit orders.Oct 18
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-capabilities
Compare the public REST API and MCP tools with the trading website.
The developer API is in beta. Breaking changes may be introduced at any time.
Trading coverage
The public API can place and manage trades on existing challenge accounts.
It uses the website's paper execution engine and server-side trading rules.
It does not expose every website feature.
−
| Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC. |
|---|---|
| Entry protection | Attached TP/SL on market and non-reduce-only limit entries. |
Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits.
Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders.
Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits.
Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total.
Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents.
Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation.
Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage.
Copy trading | List, save, and disable copy-trading groups whose members the credential can access, and acknowledge a completed copy stop.
Trading policy | Read an account's effective rules, trading limits, restrictions, payout and copy locks, and trading halts.
Account events | A WebSocket stream of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts.
See Trading with the API for behavior and examples and the
REST reference for request and response fields.
After
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-capabilities
Compare the public REST API and MCP tools with the trading website.
The developer API is in beta. Breaking changes may be introduced at any time.
Trading coverage
The public API can place and manage trades on existing challenge accounts.
It uses the website's paper execution engine and server-side trading rules.
It does not expose every website feature.
| Capability | Public API support |
|---|
Account selection | List non-archived accounts accessible to the credential and read an account's risk snapshot.
Market discovery | List execution markets, inspect a market's availability, and request a current quote with an optional size estimate.
Standard orders | Market, limit, chase, stop-market, stop-limit, take-market, take-limit, take-profit, and external conditional orders.
| Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC. |
|---|
+ Entry protection | Attached TP/SL on market and non-reduce-only limit, stop-market, and stop-limit entries.
Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits.
Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders.
Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits.
Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total.
Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents.
Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation.
Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage.
Copy trading | List, save, and disable copy-trading groups whose members the credential can access, and acknowledge a completed copy stop.
Trading policy | Read an account's effective rules, trading limits, restrictions, payout and copy locks, and trading halts.
Account events | A WebSocket stream of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts.
See Trading with the API for behavior and examples and the
REST reference for request and response fields.
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-capabilities
Compare the public REST API and MCP tools with the trading website.
The developer API is in beta. Breaking changes may be introduced at any time.
Trading coverage
The public API can place and manage trades on existing challenge accounts.
It uses the website's paper execution engine and server-side trading rules.
It does not expose every website feature.
−
| Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC. |
|---|---|
| Entry protection | Attached TP/SL on market and non-reduce-only limit entries. |
+ Entry protection | Attached TP/SL on market and non-reduce-only limit, stop-market, and stop-limit entries.
Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits.
Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders.
Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits.
Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total.
Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents.
Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation.
Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage.
Copy trading | List, save, and disable copy-trading groups whose members the credential can access, and acknowledge a completed copy stop.
Trading policy | Read an account's effective rules, trading limits, restrictions, payout and copy locks, and trading halts.
Account events | A WebSocket stream of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts.
See Trading with the API for behavior and examples and the
REST reference for request and response fields.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuidePhone window interaction changed: drag header to move within chart, tap handle to switch edges instead of dragging to move between edges.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
Trading settings; turn it off there to
remove the window.
- On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
size are remembered in that browser.
− - On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. The window sits
− over the chart at the top or bottom edge; drag or tap its handle to move it
− to the other edge.
The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
between them, and Flat below.
- Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
- A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
opposite order reduces the position.
- Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
After
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
Trading settings; turn it off there to
remove the window.
- On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
size are remembered in that browser.
+ - On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. Drag the window's
+ header to move it around within the chart. Its position is remembered in
+ that browser. Tap the handle to switch between the top and bottom edges.
The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
between them, and Flat below.
- Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
- A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
opposite order reduces the position.
- Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
One-Click Trading
One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
It is on by default in
Trading settings; turn it off there to
remove the window.
- On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
size are remembered in that browser.
− - On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. The window sits
− over the chart at the top or bottom edge; drag or tap its handle to move it
− to the other edge.
+ - On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. Drag the window's
+ header to move it around within the chart. Its position is remembered in
+ that browser. Tap the handle to switch between the top and bottom edges.
The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
between them, and Flat below.
- Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
- A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
opposite order reduces the position.
- Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
PremierMyFundedPerps · CompetitionsAccount bans now include both full account bans and competition-specific bans as grounds for disqualification and prize forfeiture.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
On a competition that checks your residence country, the competition page
shows Complete Account Details instead of Join Competition until you
finish your account details. Completing them brings you back to the
competition page, where you can join.
Disqualification
Breaking a competition's rules can lead to disqualification. A disqualified entry leaves the leaderboard and can't win a prize.
When an entry is disqualified, its competition account is closed:
- Open orders are cancelled.
- Open positions are closed at the market price.
- Your other accounts are not affected.
If your competition account is still open after your entry ends, it can only reduce or close positions. New trades that open or add to a position are rejected with a message that your competition entry has ended.
If a disqualification is reversed, your entry returns to the leaderboard and your competition account reopens. Orders and positions closed at disqualification are not restored, so the account starts again with no open positions.
− If your MyFundedPerps account is banned, your active competition entries are
− disqualified and their competition accounts are closed. A winner whose account
− is banned when results are finalized does not receive a prize.
Provisional and final results
A competition's standings stay provisional for a short time after trading closes while closing scores settle. The page labels them Provisional Standings until results are final, then Final Standings. Prizes follow the final standings.
A prize shown as To be determined has not been announced yet. Its page updates when the prize is set, which happens before the competition ends.
For the rules, prizes, and daily case draws of the launch competition, see Launch competition. For account paths and the free reset in the October Competition, see October competition.
After
On a competition that checks your residence country, the competition page
shows Complete Account Details instead of Join Competition until you
finish your account details. Completing them brings you back to the
competition page, where you can join.
Disqualification
Breaking a competition's rules can lead to disqualification. A disqualified entry leaves the leaderboard and can't win a prize.
When an entry is disqualified, its competition account is closed:
- Open orders are cancelled.
- Open positions are closed at the market price.
- Your other accounts are not affected.
If your competition account is still open after your entry ends, it can only reduce or close positions. New trades that open or add to a position are rejected with a message that your competition entry has ended.
If a disqualification is reversed, your entry returns to the leaderboard and your competition account reopens. Orders and positions closed at disqualification are not restored, so the account starts again with no open positions.
+ If your MyFundedPerps account is banned, or banned from competitions, your
+ active competition entries are disqualified and their competition accounts are
+ closed. A winner whose account is banned, or banned from competitions, when
+ results are finalized does not receive a prize.
Provisional and final results
A competition's standings stay provisional for a short time after trading closes while closing scores settle. The page labels them Provisional Standings until results are final, then Final Standings. Prizes follow the final standings.
A prize shown as To be determined has not been announced yet. Its page updates when the prize is set, which happens before the competition ends.
For the rules, prizes, and daily case draws of the launch competition, see Launch competition. For account paths and the free reset in the October Competition, see October competition.
On a competition that checks your residence country, the competition page
shows Complete Account Details instead of Join Competition until you
finish your account details. Completing them brings you back to the
competition page, where you can join.
Disqualification
Breaking a competition's rules can lead to disqualification. A disqualified entry leaves the leaderboard and can't win a prize.
When an entry is disqualified, its competition account is closed:
- Open orders are cancelled.
- Open positions are closed at the market price.
- Your other accounts are not affected.
If your competition account is still open after your entry ends, it can only reduce or close positions. New trades that open or add to a position are rejected with a message that your competition entry has ended.
If a disqualification is reversed, your entry returns to the leaderboard and your competition account reopens. Orders and positions closed at disqualification are not restored, so the account starts again with no open positions.
− If your MyFundedPerps account is banned, your active competition entries are
− disqualified and their competition accounts are closed. A winner whose account
− is banned when results are finalized does not receive a prize.
+ If your MyFundedPerps account is banned, or banned from competitions, your
+ active competition entries are disqualified and their competition accounts are
+ closed. A winner whose account is banned, or banned from competitions, when
+ results are finalized does not receive a prize.
Provisional and final results
A competition's standings stay provisional for a short time after trading closes while closing scores settle. The page labels them Provisional Standings until results are final, then Final Standings. Prizes follow the final standings.
A prize shown as To be determined has not been announced yet. Its page updates when the prize is set, which happens before the competition ends.
For the rules, prizes, and daily case draws of the launch competition, see Launch competition. For account paths and the free reset in the October Competition, see October competition.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Billing and RewardsInstagram option added to Share to Claim task interface, and new section added describing My Runs display and status indicators.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
Elite prize accounts.
Share to Claim
When available, Share to Claim on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a passed challenge or paid payout on X. Link your X account, include the
certificate link, mention @MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link
within seven days of the pass or payout. A case is added after the post is approved.
Passing a 1K or 2.5K challenge does not earn a Share to Claim case, but payouts
from those accounts do.
− For a paid payout, you can instead choose Instagram in the payout certificate
− dialog. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag @myfundedperps_, and
keep your account public until review. Submit the story link and a screenshot
within seven days of the payout. Instagram does not require a linked X account.
Each payout can earn one reward through either X or Instagram. A pending or
approved claim locks that payout to its chosen platform; after rejection, you
can switch platforms while the claim window is open.
Payout rewards use the net amount you received after the profit split:
| Net payout | X case | Instagram story case |
|---|
To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.
Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
Pictionary
A Pictionary drop shows a live drawing made by a MyFundedPerps team member,
with a short prompt about what is being drawn. Everyone who opened the drop
watches the same drawing as it happens. Until the drawing starts, the page
shows that it is waiting for the artist.
Type your guess under the drawing and select Guess. Guesses can be up to
60 characters (some symbols, including emoji, count as two characters).
Most Pictionary drops let you keep guessing until the drop ends. Some drops
give each player a set number of guesses; the page then shows how many you
have left, and every wrong, very close, or correct guess uses one. When you
run out, the guess box locks for the rest of the drop. Guesses are limited to
one per second, with a burst of up to three after a pause. Each guess is checked with the same matching rules as
After
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
Elite prize accounts.
Share to Claim
When available, Share to Claim on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a passed challenge or paid payout on X. Link your X account, include the
certificate link, mention @MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link
within seven days of the pass or payout. A case is added after the post is approved.
Passing a 1K or 2.5K challenge does not earn a Share to Claim case, but payouts
from those accounts do.
+ For a paid payout, you can instead choose Instagram, either from the payout's
+ task in Share to Claim or in the payout certificate dialog. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag @myfundedperps_, and
keep your account public until review. Submit the story link and a screenshot
within seven days of the payout. Instagram does not require a linked X account.
Each payout can earn one reward through either X or Instagram. A pending or
approved claim locks that payout to its chosen platform; after rejection, you
can switch platforms while the claim window is open.
Payout rewards use the net amount you received after the profit split:
| Net payout | X case | Instagram story case |
|---|
To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.
Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
+ Select My Runs at the top of the page to see every run you have started in
+ that drop, newest first. Each finished run shows its market, PnL, number of
+ trades, and the date and time of the chart you traded, and your best run is
+ marked Best. A run that is still playing shows In Progress, a run that
+ never finished shows Not Finished, and a run whose chart could not load
+ shows Chart Unavailable. Older runs load when you select Load More.
Pictionary
A Pictionary drop shows a live drawing made by a MyFundedPerps team member,
with a short prompt about what is being drawn. Everyone who opened the drop
watches the same drawing as it happens. Until the drawing starts, the page
shows that it is waiting for the artist.
Type your guess under the drawing and select Guess. Guesses can be up to
60 characters (some symbols, including emoji, count as two characters).
Most Pictionary drops let you keep guessing until the drop ends. Some drops
give each player a set number of guesses; the page then shows how many you
have left, and every wrong, very close, or correct guess uses one. When you
run out, the guess box locks for the rest of the drop. Guesses are limited to
one per second, with a burst of up to three after a pause. Each guess is checked with the same matching rules as
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
Elite prize accounts.
Share to Claim
When available, Share to Claim on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a passed challenge or paid payout on X. Link your X account, include the
certificate link, mention @MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link
within seven days of the pass or payout. A case is added after the post is approved.
Passing a 1K or 2.5K challenge does not earn a Share to Claim case, but payouts
from those accounts do.
− For a paid payout, you can instead choose Instagram in the payout certificate
− dialog. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag @myfundedperps_, and
+ For a paid payout, you can instead choose Instagram, either from the payout's
+ task in Share to Claim or in the payout certificate dialog. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag @myfundedperps_, and
keep your account public until review. Submit the story link and a screenshot
within seven days of the payout. Instagram does not require a linked X account.
Each payout can earn one reward through either X or Instagram. A pending or
approved claim locks that payout to its chosen platform; after rejection, you
can switch platforms while the claim window is open.
Payout rewards use the net amount you received after the profit split:
| Net payout | X case | Instagram story case |
|---|
To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.
Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
+ Select My Runs at the top of the page to see every run you have started in
+ that drop, newest first. Each finished run shows its market, PnL, number of
+ trades, and the date and time of the chart you traded, and your best run is
+ marked Best. A run that is still playing shows In Progress, a run that
+ never finished shows Not Finished, and a run whose chart could not load
+ shows Chart Unavailable. Older runs load when you select Load More.
Pictionary
A Pictionary drop shows a live drawing made by a MyFundedPerps team member,
with a short prompt about what is being drawn. Everyone who opened the drop
watches the same drawing as it happens. Until the drawing starts, the page
shows that it is waiting for the artist.
Type your guess under the drawing and select Guess. Guesses can be up to
60 characters (some symbols, including emoji, count as two characters).
Most Pictionary drops let you keep guessing until the drop ends. Some drops
give each player a set number of guesses; the page then shows how many you
have left, and every wrong, very close, or correct guess uses one. When you
run out, the guess box locks for the rest of the drop. Guesses are limited to
one per second, with a burst of up to three after a pause. Each guess is checked with the same matching rules as
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramValues changed: 30% to 25%, 25% to 20%, 30% to 25%.Oct 17
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
| Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case |
|---|
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 30% off an eligible first
− purchase and 25% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
− and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
After
| Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case |
|---|
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
+ - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 25% off an eligible first
+ purchase and 20% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
+ and a 25% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
| Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case |
|---|
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 30% off an eligible first
− purchase and 25% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
+ - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 25% off an eligible first
+ purchase and 20% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
− and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
+ and a 25% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideAdded section on comparing account P&L in activity panel; changed example timeframes from "2 hours, 6 hours" to "2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours".Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
Forex and index markets
Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
on Hyperliquid, around the clock. Where offered, SP500 and NAS100 can also
trade on Ostium with standard market hours; see
Markets with two trading-hour options.
The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
each side:
| Markets | Venue |
|---|
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
separate markets.
Open Configure Watchlist from the bottom-bar Watchlist to remove markets or
drag them into your preferred order. Your watchlist is saved to your profile
and follows you across trading accounts.
On the trading terminal, use the source menu on the scrolling market ticker to
show Trending markets, the standard Tickers list, Top Volume, or your Watchlist.
Watchlist markets appear in your saved order, including markets from different
venues. The ticker source you choose is remembered in this browser. When your
watchlist is empty, the ticker prompts you to add markets.
Chart preferences and templates
The chart's timeframe menu offers minute timeframes from 1 to 45 minutes, hour
timeframes from 1 to 12 hours, and daily and weekly candles. The exact list
− depends on the market. Timeframes such as 45 minutes, 2 hours, and 6 hours are
combined from shorter candles, so they start at midnight UTC and reach as far
back in history as the shorter candles they combine. Star a timeframe in the
menu to add it to the chart header. The chart opens on the timeframe you used
last.
The candle countdown follows server time while the price connection is
available, so an incorrect device clock does not add extra time to the current
candle. Quiet Hyperliquid markets can wait for the next trade before showing
a new candle.
Charts automatically reload their history when the live candle feed resumes
after an interruption that may have skipped candles. Returning to the page,
tapping the chart, or a quiet market does not trigger a reload by itself.
Live candles keep updating until the reload starts and pause only while it
After
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
+ Compare account P\&L
+ Open Accounts in the trade page's activity panel to compare accounts
+ without switching dashboards. Today's P\&L shows each account's equity
+ change since midnight New York time, including unrealized gains and losses.
+ It updates as balances and position prices change and appears on both desktop
+ rows and mobile account cards. You can sort the desktop column or hide it
+ through Columns.
+ A dash means today's baseline is unavailable. Accounts with no open positions
+ and no activity since the daily reset show zero.
Forex and index markets
Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
on Hyperliquid, around the clock. Where offered, SP500 and NAS100 can also
trade on Ostium with standard market hours; see
Markets with two trading-hour options.
The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
each side:
| Markets | Venue |
|---|
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
separate markets.
Open Configure Watchlist from the bottom-bar Watchlist to remove markets or
drag them into your preferred order. Your watchlist is saved to your profile
and follows you across trading accounts.
On the trading terminal, use the source menu on the scrolling market ticker to
show Trending markets, the standard Tickers list, Top Volume, or your Watchlist.
Watchlist markets appear in your saved order, including markets from different
venues. The ticker source you choose is remembered in this browser. When your
watchlist is empty, the ticker prompts you to add markets.
Chart preferences and templates
The chart's timeframe menu offers minute timeframes from 1 to 45 minutes, hour
timeframes from 1 to 12 hours, and daily and weekly candles. The exact list
+ depends on the market. Timeframes such as 45 minutes, 2 hours, 3 hours, and 6 hours are
combined from shorter candles, so they start at midnight UTC and reach as far
back in history as the shorter candles they combine. Star a timeframe in the
menu to add it to the chart header. The chart opens on the timeframe you used
last.
The candle countdown follows server time while the price connection is
available, so an incorrect device clock does not add extra time to the current
candle. Quiet Hyperliquid markets can wait for the next trade before showing
a new candle.
Charts automatically reload their history when the live candle feed resumes
after an interruption that may have skipped candles. Returning to the page,
tapping the chart, or a quiet market does not trigger a reload by itself.
Live candles keep updating until the reload starts and pause only while it
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
+ Compare account P\&L
+ Open Accounts in the trade page's activity panel to compare accounts
+ without switching dashboards. Today's P\&L shows each account's equity
+ change since midnight New York time, including unrealized gains and losses.
+ It updates as balances and position prices change and appears on both desktop
+ rows and mobile account cards. You can sort the desktop column or hide it
+ through Columns.
+ A dash means today's baseline is unavailable. Accounts with no open positions
+ and no activity since the daily reset show zero.
Forex and index markets
Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
on Hyperliquid, around the clock. Where offered, SP500 and NAS100 can also
trade on Ostium with standard market hours; see
Markets with two trading-hour options.
The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
each side:
| Markets | Venue |
|---|
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
separate markets.
Open Configure Watchlist from the bottom-bar Watchlist to remove markets or
drag them into your preferred order. Your watchlist is saved to your profile
and follows you across trading accounts.
On the trading terminal, use the source menu on the scrolling market ticker to
show Trending markets, the standard Tickers list, Top Volume, or your Watchlist.
Watchlist markets appear in your saved order, including markets from different
venues. The ticker source you choose is remembered in this browser. When your
watchlist is empty, the ticker prompts you to add markets.
Chart preferences and templates
The chart's timeframe menu offers minute timeframes from 1 to 45 minutes, hour
timeframes from 1 to 12 hours, and daily and weekly candles. The exact list
− depends on the market. Timeframes such as 45 minutes, 2 hours, and 6 hours are
+ depends on the market. Timeframes such as 45 minutes, 2 hours, 3 hours, and 6 hours are
combined from shorter candles, so they start at midnight UTC and reach as far
back in history as the shorter candles they combine. Star a timeframe in the
menu to add it to the chart header. The chart opens on the timeframe you used
last.
The candle countdown follows server time while the price connection is
available, so an incorrect device clock does not add extra time to the current
candle. Quiet Hyperliquid markets can wait for the next trade before showing
a new candle.
Charts automatically reload their history when the live candle feed resumes
after an interruption that may have skipped candles. Returning to the page,
tapping the chart, or a quiet market does not trigger a reload by itself.
Live candles keep updating until the reload starts and pause only while it
PremierMyFundedPerps · PayoutsArticle now states every request requires review and approval, and clarifies that request availability doesn't guarantee immediate payment.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.
Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.
Submitted requests cannot be cancelled. If a request is rejected, that day's
allowance is restored, so you can submit a new request right away once all
− eligibility gates are clear. Review and delivery can take longer than the
− request window.
Minimum and profit split
On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.
\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of \$30 on \$1K or \$50 on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.
Elite accounts use an 80/20 split, or 90/10 with the upgrade, and a minimum of
1% of the account size before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K,
\$250 on \$25K, and \$500 on \$50K (\$40, \$80, \$200, and \$400 to you
on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). A \$1K Elite prize
account has a \$30 minimum before the split (\$24 to you). See
After
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.
Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.
Submitted requests cannot be cancelled. If a request is rejected, that day's
allowance is restored, so you can submit a new request right away once all
+ eligibility gates are clear. Every request is subject to review and approval.
+ Daily or on-demand request availability does not guarantee immediate payment;
+ review and delivery can take longer than the request window.
Minimum and profit split
On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.
\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of \$30 on \$1K or \$50 on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.
Elite accounts use an 80/20 split, or 90/10 with the upgrade, and a minimum of
1% of the account size before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K,
\$250 on \$25K, and \$500 on \$50K (\$40, \$80, \$200, and \$400 to you
on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). A \$1K Elite prize
account has a \$30 minimum before the split (\$24 to you). See
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.
Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.
Submitted requests cannot be cancelled. If a request is rejected, that day's
allowance is restored, so you can submit a new request right away once all
− eligibility gates are clear. Review and delivery can take longer than the
− request window.
+ eligibility gates are clear. Every request is subject to review and approval.
+ Daily or on-demand request availability does not guarantee immediate payment;
+ review and delivery can take longer than the request window.
Minimum and profit split
On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.
\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of \$30 on \$1K or \$50 on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.
Elite accounts use an 80/20 split, or 90/10 with the upgrade, and a minimum of
1% of the account size before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K,
\$250 on \$25K, and \$500 on \$50K (\$40, \$80, \$200, and \$400 to you
on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). A \$1K Elite prize
account has a \$30 minimum before the split (\$24 to you). See
PremierMyFundedPerps · Account trading policyAdded explanation of automatic position closure 15 minutes before weekend market close with associated order rejections and cancellations.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
see Retiring markets.
EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Veranta. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and
USD/JPY markets are retiring the same way: they report
trading_enabled: false, an order that would open, add to, or flip a position
there is rejected with market_unavailable, and reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing positions keep working.
Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
reopening price. See
Trading hours.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see Asset Exposure Limits.
Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the current market caps
After
see Retiring markets.
EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Veranta. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and
USD/JPY markets are retiring the same way: they report
trading_enabled: false, an order that would open, add to, or flip a position
there is rejected with market_unavailable, and reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing positions keep working.
Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
reopening price. See
Trading hours.
+ From 15 minutes before a session market's scheduled weekend close until it
+ reopens, every open position on it is closed automatically and an order that
+ would open, add to, or flip a position is rejected with weekend_closure.
+ Resting entry orders on the market are canceled with cancel reason
+ venue_policy, and the closed positions report close reason system. See
+ Weekend auto-close.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see Asset Exposure Limits.
Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the current market caps
see Retiring markets.
EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Veranta. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and
USD/JPY markets are retiring the same way: they report
trading_enabled: false, an order that would open, add to, or flip a position
there is rejected with market_unavailable, and reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing positions keep working.
Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
reopening price. See
Trading hours.
+ From 15 minutes before a session market's scheduled weekend close until it
+ reopens, every open position on it is closed automatically and an order that
+ would open, add to, or flip a position is rejected with weekend_closure.
+ Resting entry orders on the market are canceled with cancel reason
+ venue_policy, and the closed positions report close reason system. See
+ Weekend auto-close.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see Asset Exposure Limits.
Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the current market caps
PremierMyFundedPerps · Troubleshooting and FAQAdded section explaining that forex and index positions close automatically 15 minutes before weekend market close, with warning notification.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
expires soonest first. Select Expiry Schedule under your balance on
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
Store Credit Expiry.
Do FP Points expire?
Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
September 11, 2026 expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026 (04:00 UTC on
December 10). Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select Expiry Schedule on the FP Points tab of
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
FP Points Expiry.
A tool or footer is unavailable
If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
Refresh beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.
After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
stay on may refresh automatically once to load the new files, or show an
Update Available prompt with a refresh button. Repeated loading failures show a manual refresh option instead of
immediately refreshing again. If the whole page shows Something Went Wrong,
include its error reference when contacting support.
After
expires soonest first. Select Expiry Schedule under your balance on
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
Store Credit Expiry.
Do FP Points expire?
Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
September 11, 2026 expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026 (04:00 UTC on
December 10). Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select Expiry Schedule on the FP Points tab of
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
FP Points Expiry.
+ Can I hold forex and index positions over the weekend?
+ No. All open positions on markets that follow trading hours (the forex and
+ index markets marked 24/5 or 23/5) close automatically 15 minutes
+ before the market's scheduled weekend close. A warning on the trade page shows
+ the upcoming auto-close time during the final hour. New positions cannot be
+ opened on those markets after the auto-close time until the market reopens.
+ Auto-closed positions show Weekend Auto-Close in your trade history. See
+ Weekend auto-close.
A tool or footer is unavailable
If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
Refresh beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.
After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
stay on may refresh automatically once to load the new files, or show an
Update Available prompt with a refresh button. Repeated loading failures show a manual refresh option instead of
immediately refreshing again. If the whole page shows Something Went Wrong,
include its error reference when contacting support.
expires soonest first. Select Expiry Schedule under your balance on
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
Store Credit Expiry.
Do FP Points expire?
Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
September 11, 2026 expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026 (04:00 UTC on
December 10). Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select Expiry Schedule on the FP Points tab of
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
FP Points Expiry.
+ Can I hold forex and index positions over the weekend?
+ No. All open positions on markets that follow trading hours (the forex and
+ index markets marked 24/5 or 23/5) close automatically 15 minutes
+ before the market's scheduled weekend close. A warning on the trade page shows
+ the upcoming auto-close time during the final hour. New positions cannot be
+ opened on those markets after the auto-close time until the market reopens.
+ Auto-closed positions show Weekend Auto-Close in your trade history. See
+ Weekend auto-close.
A tool or footer is unavailable
If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
Refresh beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.
After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
stay on may refresh automatically once to load the new files, or show an
Update Available prompt with a refresh button. Repeated loading failures show a manual refresh option instead of
immediately refreshing again. If the whole page shows Something Went Wrong,
include its error reference when contacting support.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideArticle adds weekend auto-close requirement for certain markets with new section explaining timing, mechanics, and effects on orders and positions.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
Markets with two trading-hour options
Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
in the market bar (or at the top of Market Details on a phone) switches
between them. Hover the info icon beside each option, or read the line under
it on a phone, for what that option means.
- Standard Market Hours follows the sessions in the table above. While the
market is closed, prices freeze and new positions wait until it reopens.
- 24/7 trades around the clock, including nights, weekends, and holidays.
Outside regular market hours, its price can move away from the underlying
market.
The trade page opens on Standard Market Hours unless you hold an open
position in that market, in which case it opens on the option your position
uses. You can hold a market on only one option at a time; close the position
before trading the other.
While a market is closed
- Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
- Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
- You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
− - Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote. If your
− account is liquidated or closed out while a market is closed, those
− positions close at that last quote.
− Prices can open far from the last quote after a weekend or holiday. A Stop
Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
which can be worse than its trigger price.
Browse markets
The Markets page shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices refresh
every 30 seconds while the tab is visible; polling pauses in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.
Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
After
trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
Markets with two trading-hour options
Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
in the market bar (or at the top of Market Details on a phone) switches
between them. Hover the info icon beside each option, or read the line under
it on a phone, for what that option means.
- Standard Market Hours follows the sessions in the table above. While the
market is closed, prices freeze and new positions wait until it reopens.
+ Positions on this option close automatically before the weekend; see
+ Weekend auto-close.
- 24/7 trades around the clock, including nights, weekends, and holidays.
Outside regular market hours, its price can move away from the underlying
market.
The trade page opens on Standard Market Hours unless you hold an open
position in that market, in which case it opens on the option your position
uses. You can hold a market on only one option at a time; close the position
before trading the other.
While a market is closed
- Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
- Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
- You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
+ - Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote during a
+ daily break or holiday closure. If your account is liquidated or closed out
+ while a market is closed, those positions close at that last quote.
+ Prices can open far from the last quote after a daily break or holiday. A Stop
Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
which can be worse than its trigger price.
+ Weekend auto-close
+ You cannot hold positions on these markets over the weekend. Every open
+ position on them closes automatically 15 minutes before the market's scheduled
+ weekend close. This applies to every account type, in both the evaluation and
+ funded stages, and it happens whether or not you are online.
+ - When it happens: 15 minutes before the Friday close in the
+ Trading hours table. The time follows New York time, so it
+ moves with daylight saving time. For example, a market that closes at
+ Friday 17:00 New York time closes its positions at 16:45.
+ - Warning: during the final hour before the auto-close, the trade page
+ shows the exact auto-close time in your time zone with a countdown, and the
+ market status above the chart counts down to it.
+ - How positions close: at the market price at that moment, with the normal
+ trading fee. Realized profit or loss is applied to your balance, and the
+ account's rules are checked against the result, the same as for a close you
+ make yourself.
+ - Open orders: limit and stop entry orders on the market are canceled.
+ Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled when their position closes.
+ - New positions: from the auto-close time until the market reopens on
+ Sunday, you cannot open or add to a position on the market. Orders that only
+ reduce a position are still accepted. Trading resumes at the next scheduled
+ opening.
+ - Trade history: a closed position shows the reason Weekend Auto-Close,
+ with its exit price and realized profit or loss. Its closing fill appears in
+ order history as a System Close.
+ The 24/7 option of a market with two trading-hour options is not affected.
+ Daily breaks and holiday closures do not close positions.
Browse markets
The Markets page shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices refresh
every 30 seconds while the tab is visible; polling pauses in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.
Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
Markets with two trading-hour options
Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
in the market bar (or at the top of Market Details on a phone) switches
between them. Hover the info icon beside each option, or read the line under
it on a phone, for what that option means.
- Standard Market Hours follows the sessions in the table above. While the
market is closed, prices freeze and new positions wait until it reopens.
+ Positions on this option close automatically before the weekend; see
+ Weekend auto-close.
- 24/7 trades around the clock, including nights, weekends, and holidays.
Outside regular market hours, its price can move away from the underlying
market.
The trade page opens on Standard Market Hours unless you hold an open
position in that market, in which case it opens on the option your position
uses. You can hold a market on only one option at a time; close the position
before trading the other.
While a market is closed
- Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
- Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
- You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
− - Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote. If your
− account is liquidated or closed out while a market is closed, those
− positions close at that last quote.
− Prices can open far from the last quote after a weekend or holiday. A Stop
+ - Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote during a
+ daily break or holiday closure. If your account is liquidated or closed out
+ while a market is closed, those positions close at that last quote.
+ Prices can open far from the last quote after a daily break or holiday. A Stop
Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
which can be worse than its trigger price.
+ Weekend auto-close
+ You cannot hold positions on these markets over the weekend. Every open
+ position on them closes automatically 15 minutes before the market's scheduled
+ weekend close. This applies to every account type, in both the evaluation and
+ funded stages, and it happens whether or not you are online.
+ - When it happens: 15 minutes before the Friday close in the
+ Trading hours table. The time follows New York time, so it
+ moves with daylight saving time. For example, a market that closes at
+ Friday 17:00 New York time closes its positions at 16:45.
+ - Warning: during the final hour before the auto-close, the trade page
+ shows the exact auto-close time in your time zone with a countdown, and the
+ market status above the chart counts down to it.
+ - How positions close: at the market price at that moment, with the normal
+ trading fee. Realized profit or loss is applied to your balance, and the
+ account's rules are checked against the result, the same as for a close you
+ make yourself.
+ - Open orders: limit and stop entry orders on the market are canceled.
+ Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled when their position closes.
+ - New positions: from the auto-close time until the market reopens on
+ Sunday, you cannot open or add to a position on the market. Orders that only
+ reduce a position are still accepted. Trading resumes at the next scheduled
+ opening.
+ - Trade history: a closed position shows the reason Weekend Auto-Close,
+ with its exit price and realized profit or loss. Its closing fill appears in
+ order history as a System Close.
+ The 24/7 option of a market with two trading-hour options is not affected.
+ Daily breaks and holiday closures do not close positions.
Browse markets
The Markets page shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices refresh
every 30 seconds while the tab is visible; polling pauses in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.
Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Tradable AssetsTotal tradable markets decreased from 134 to 122; crypto markets decreased from 68 to 66, stocks from 41 to 31.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
Tradable Assets
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/tradable-assets
Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.
− This page lists all 134 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
− List last changed: 2026-10-12.
This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
current availability. Markets that follow [trading
hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.
Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on Market Exposure Caps. See Asset Exposure Limits for how those caps apply to your accounts.
Crypto
− 68 markets.
−
| BMNR-USD | BMNR |
|---|---|
| COHR-USD | COHR |
−
| SAMSUNG-USD | SAMSUNG |
|---|---|
| SKHX-USD | SKHX |
−
| SKHYNIX-USD | SKHYNIX |
|---|---|
| SMSN-USD | SMSN |
| SNDK-USD | SNDK |
|---|
| TSLA-USD | TSLA |
Indices
7 markets.
| Market | Symbol |
|---|
After
Tradable Assets
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/tradable-assets
Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.
+ This page lists all 122 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
+ List last changed: 2026-10-16.
This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
current availability. Markets that follow [trading
hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.
Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on Market Exposure Caps. See Asset Exposure Limits for how those caps apply to your accounts.
Crypto
+ 66 markets.
| Market | Symbol |
|---|
| 1000PEPE-USD | 1000PEPE |
| ETHFI-USD | ETHFI |
|---|
| JTO-USD | JTO |
| LDO-USD | LDO |
|---|
| LIT-USD | LIT |
| PENGU-USD | PENGU |
| PUMP-USD | PUMP |
|---|
| RENDER-USD | RENDER |
| ZEC-USD | ZEC |
Stocks
+ 31 markets.
| Market | Symbol |
|---|
| AMD-USD | AMD |
| AMZN-USD | AMZN |
| AVGO-USD | AVGO |
|---|
| BMNR-USD | BMNR |
|---|
| COIN-USD | COIN |
|---|
| DRAM-USD | DRAM |
|---|
| META-USD | META |
|---|
| MSFT-USD | MSFT |
| ORCL-USD | ORCL |
| SAMSUNG-USD | SAMSUNG |
|---|
| SKHYNIX-USD | SKHYNIX |
|---|
| SNDK-USD | SNDK |
|---|
| TSLA-USD | TSLA |
Indices
7 markets.
| Market | Symbol |
|---|
Tradable Assets
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/tradable-assets
Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.
− This page lists all 134 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
− List last changed: 2026-10-12.
+ This page lists all 122 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
+ List last changed: 2026-10-16.
This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
current availability. Markets that follow [trading
hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.
Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on Market Exposure Caps. See Asset Exposure Limits for how those caps apply to your accounts.
Crypto
− 68 markets.
+ 66 markets.
| Market | Symbol |
|---|
| 1000PEPE-USD | 1000PEPE |
| ETHFI-USD | ETHFI |
|---|
| JTO-USD | JTO |
−
| ETHFI-USD | ETHFI |
|---|---|
| KAITO-USD | KAITO |
| LDO-USD | LDO |
| LIT-USD | LIT |
| PENGU-USD | PENGU |
−
| ETHFI-USD | ETHFI |
|---|---|
| PONS-USD | PONS |
| PUMP-USD | PUMP |
| RENDER-USD | RENDER |
| ZEC-USD | ZEC |
Stocks
− 41 markets.
+ 31 markets.
| Market | Symbol |
|---|
| AMD-USD | AMD |
| AMZN-USD | AMZN |
−
| Market | Symbol |
|---|---|
| ARM-USD | ARM |
| AVGO-USD | AVGO |
−
| Market | Symbol |
|---|---|
| BE-USD | BE |
| BMNR-USD | BMNR |
−
| Market | Symbol |
|---|---|
| COHR-USD | COHR |
| COIN-USD | COIN |
−
DELL-USD DELL
| Market | Symbol |
|---|---|
| CXMT-USD | CXMT |
| DRAM-USD | DRAM |
−
| Market | Symbol |
|---|---|
| LLY-USD | LLY |
| META-USD | META |
| MSFT-USD | MSFT |
| ORCL-USD | ORCL |
−
RKLB-USD RKLB
| Market | Symbol |
|---|---|
| QCOM-USD | QCOM |
| SAMSUNG-USD | SAMSUNG |
−
| Market | Symbol |
|---|---|
| SKHX-USD | SKHX |
| SKHYNIX-USD | SKHYNIX |
−
| Market | Symbol |
|---|---|
| SMSN-USD | SMSN |
| SNDK-USD | SNDK |
| TSLA-USD | TSLA |
Indices
7 markets.
| Market | Symbol |
|---|
PremierMyFundedPerps · GlossarySlippage definition expanded to explain how it is calculated and displayed for triggered orders in order history.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Market order
An instruction that executes immediately at top-of-book with maximum adverse
slippage capped against the mark by a size-based tier. Book prices inside the
cap are preserved; the fill is never better than the mark.
Notional value
The position or order quantity multiplied by price, before leverage converts it
to a margin requirement.
Perpetual future
A derivatives contract without a fixed expiry date. MyFundedPerps simulates
trading these markets; it does not place exchange orders for the trader.
Slippage
The difference between a reference or expected price and the final average
− execution price.
Stop Loss / Take Profit (SL / TP)
Exit instructions triggered when a configured price condition is reached.
Challenges and accounts
Challenge account
A simulated account governed by a purchased or granted challenge plan.
Consistency rule
A plan-specific limit on how concentrated qualifying profit may be in a small
number of days or results.
Equity
Account value including the effect of open positions at current marks.
Evaluation
The stage in which a trader works toward the plan's target while respecting its
After
Market order
An instruction that executes immediately at top-of-book with maximum adverse
slippage capped against the mark by a size-based tier. Book prices inside the
cap are preserved; the fill is never better than the mark.
Notional value
The position or order quantity multiplied by price, before leverage converts it
to a margin requirement.
Perpetual future
A derivatives contract without a fixed expiry date. MyFundedPerps simulates
trading these markets; it does not place exchange orders for the trader.
Slippage
The difference between a reference or expected price and the final average
+ execution price. For a filled Stop Loss, Take Profit, or other triggered order,
+ your history shows Slippage vs trigger: the fill price compared with the
+ order's trigger price, multiplied by its size. A positive value means the fill
+ was worse than the trigger, and a negative value means it was better.
Stop Loss / Take Profit (SL / TP)
Exit instructions triggered when a configured price condition is reached.
Challenges and accounts
Challenge account
A simulated account governed by a purchased or granted challenge plan.
Consistency rule
A plan-specific limit on how concentrated qualifying profit may be in a small
number of days or results.
Equity
Account value including the effect of open positions at current marks.
Evaluation
The stage in which a trader works toward the plan's target while respecting its
Market order
An instruction that executes immediately at top-of-book with maximum adverse
slippage capped against the mark by a size-based tier. Book prices inside the
cap are preserved; the fill is never better than the mark.
Notional value
The position or order quantity multiplied by price, before leverage converts it
to a margin requirement.
Perpetual future
A derivatives contract without a fixed expiry date. MyFundedPerps simulates
trading these markets; it does not place exchange orders for the trader.
Slippage
The difference between a reference or expected price and the final average
− execution price.
+ execution price. For a filled Stop Loss, Take Profit, or other triggered order,
+ your history shows Slippage vs trigger: the fill price compared with the
+ order's trigger price, multiplied by its size. A positive value means the fill
+ was worse than the trigger, and a negative value means it was better.
Stop Loss / Take Profit (SL / TP)
Exit instructions triggered when a configured price condition is reached.
Challenges and accounts
Challenge account
A simulated account governed by a purchased or granted challenge plan.
Consistency rule
A plan-specific limit on how concentrated qualifying profit may be in a small
number of days or results.
Equity
Account value including the effect of open positions at current marks.
Evaluation
The stage in which a trader works toward the plan's target while respecting its
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsElite pricing cards now come with 3% daily loss limit enabled by default, changeable via toggle or at checkout.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
| With 90/10 upgrade, No DLL | \$107 | \$210 | \$539 | \$1,067 |
|---|
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the
per-order account limits. Only funded Elite accounts are
capped; see
Funded allocation.
DLL options
− Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:
| Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else |
|---|
3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
| No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page |
|---|
A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
- The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
allowance is \$1,500.
- Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
positions.
- The day boundary matches the other plans; see
Challenges and Rules.
After
| With 90/10 upgrade, No DLL | \$107 | \$210 | \$539 | \$1,067 |
|---|
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the
per-order account limits. Only funded Elite accounts are
capped; see
Funded allocation.
DLL options
+ Elite pricing cards start with 3% DLL enabled and keep that option until
+ you change it. Turn off the daily loss limit toggle on a card to choose
+ No DLL for that size. You can also choose the option at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:
| Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else |
|---|
3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
| No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page |
|---|
A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
- The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
allowance is \$1,500.
- Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
positions.
- The day boundary matches the other plans; see
Challenges and Rules.
| With 90/10 upgrade, No DLL | \$107 | \$210 | \$539 | \$1,067 |
|---|
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the
per-order account limits. Only funded Elite accounts are
capped; see
Funded allocation.
DLL options
− Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at checkout. The two options
+ Elite pricing cards start with 3% DLL enabled and keep that option until
+ you change it. Turn off the daily loss limit toggle on a card to choose
+ No DLL for that size. You can also choose the option at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:
| Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else |
|---|
3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
| No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page |
|---|
A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
- The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
allowance is \$1,500.
- Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
positions.
- The day boundary matches the other plans; see
Challenges and Rules.
PremierMyFundedPerps · PayoutsAdded clarification that Elite account payout frequency displays as "On Demand" in Checkout.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts. Every request
must meet the normal payout requirements below.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
− your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.
Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.
After
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts. Every request
must meet the normal payout requirements below.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
+ your previous request finishes. Checkout shows Elite payout frequency as
+ On Demand. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.
Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts. Every request
must meet the normal payout requirements below.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
− your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
+ your previous request finishes. Checkout shows Elite payout frequency as
+ On Demand. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
have their own daily allowance.
Midnight renews the request allowance; it does not approve or pay an existing
request. A pending request must finish and all eligibility gates must be clear
before you can submit another one.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Billing and RewardsRemoved merch case reward for $9,999+ payouts; added Instagram submission option with tiered rewards table; added Pictionary game mode with detailed rules; Instagram stories have separate daily allowance; question page modes increased from seven to eight.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
Matt's Golden Ticket, which each winner opens the same
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
Elite prize accounts.
Share to Claim
When available, Share to Claim on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a passed challenge or paid payout on X. Link your X account, include the
certificate link, mention @MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link
within seven days of the pass or payout. A case is added after the post is approved.
Passing a 1K or 2.5K challenge does not earn a Share to Claim case, but payouts
− from those accounts do. A payout share for \$9,999 or more also earns a merch case
− alongside its regular case.
You can submit **one funded share and one payout share per New York calendar
day**. The allowances are separate: submitting a funded share does not use your
− payout allowance. Pending and approved submissions count; rejected submissions
do not. A rejected post can be resubmitted once within the original seven-day window.
After you use an allowance, other tasks of that type show a countdown and unlock
at midnight New York time. This reset follows daylight saving time. The seven-day
claim window still applies, so a task may expire before the next reset. Community
tasks have their own limits and do not use these daily allowances.
Community tasks can ask you to post on X, Instagram, YouTube, or TikTok. X tasks
need a linked X account. Instagram, YouTube, and TikTok tasks do not need a
linked account: follow the task details, publish the post, and paste its link
before the task ends. Each task accepts one claim per person, and a rejected post
can be resubmitted once while the task is open.
Purchase History
Open Purchase History
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
− The password opens a question page with one of seven modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
through the exit.
- Text Answer: Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.
- Show Your Work: Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.
- Draw a Chart: Draw the given function, such as y = x^2 + 3, on the
supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
−2π to 2π for y = sin(x). Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
the curve within the visible range. You do not need
algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
position against the function.
- Speed Trading: Trade a fast replay of a real past chart for a limited
time. The best profit and loss (PnL) when the drop closes wins.
2048
Select New Game on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.
Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a New Game button appear
To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.
Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
Text answers
Some drops ask for a Text Answer. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select Submit Answer. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, A matches a. When spacing is ignored, New York
matches NewYork; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.
Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
After
Matt's Golden Ticket, which each winner opens the same
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
Elite prize accounts.
Share to Claim
When available, Share to Claim on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a passed challenge or paid payout on X. Link your X account, include the
certificate link, mention @MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link
within seven days of the pass or payout. A case is added after the post is approved.
Passing a 1K or 2.5K challenge does not earn a Share to Claim case, but payouts
+ from those accounts do.
+ For a paid payout, you can instead choose Instagram in the payout certificate
+ dialog. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag @myfundedperps_, and
+ keep your account public until review. Submit the story link and a screenshot
+ within seven days of the payout. Instagram does not require a linked X account.
+ Each payout can earn one reward through either X or Instagram. A pending or
+ approved claim locks that payout to its chosen platform; after rejection, you
+ can switch platforms while the claim window is open.
+ Payout rewards use the net amount you received after the profit split:
+
Up to \$250 Bronze Silver \$250.01 to \$500 Silver Gold \$500.01 to \$1,000 Gold Diamond \$1,000.01 to \$2,500 Diamond Obsidian \$2,500.01 to \$9,998.99 Obsidian Eclipse \$9,999 or more Eclipse Eclipse
| Net payout | X case | Instagram story case |
|---|
+ A payout share for \$9,999 or more also earns a merch case alongside its
+ regular case when merch rewards are available to you. An Instagram story below
+ that amount earns only the case in the table, including when that case is Eclipse.
You can submit **one funded share and one payout share per New York calendar
day**. The allowances are separate: submitting a funded share does not use your
+ payout allowance. Instagram stories have their own allowance of one submission
+ per New York calendar day. Pending and approved submissions count; rejected submissions
do not. A rejected post can be resubmitted once within the original seven-day window.
After you use an allowance, other tasks of that type show a countdown and unlock
at midnight New York time. This reset follows daylight saving time. The seven-day
claim window still applies, so a task may expire before the next reset. Community
tasks have their own limits and do not use these daily allowances.
Community tasks can ask you to post on X, Instagram, YouTube, or TikTok. X tasks
need a linked X account. Instagram, YouTube, and TikTok tasks do not need a
linked account: follow the task details, publish the post, and paste its link
before the task ends. Each task accepts one claim per person, and a rejected post
can be resubmitted once while the task is open.
Purchase History
Open Purchase History
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
+ The password opens a question page with one of eight modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
through the exit.
- Text Answer: Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.
- Show Your Work: Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.
- Draw a Chart: Draw the given function, such as y = x^2 + 3, on the
supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
−2π to 2π for y = sin(x). Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
the curve within the visible range. You do not need
algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
position against the function.
- Speed Trading: Trade a fast replay of a real past chart for a limited
time. The best profit and loss (PnL) when the drop closes wins.
+ - Pictionary: Watch a MyFundedPerps team member draw live and type
+ guesses. The first correct guessers win.
2048
Select New Game on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.
Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a New Game button appear
To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.
Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
+ Pictionary
+ A Pictionary drop shows a live drawing made by a MyFundedPerps team member,
+ with a short prompt about what is being drawn. Everyone who opened the drop
+ watches the same drawing as it happens. Until the drawing starts, the page
+ shows that it is waiting for the artist.
+ Type your guess under the drawing and select Guess. Guesses can be up to
+ 60 characters (some symbols, including emoji, count as two characters).
+ Most Pictionary drops let you keep guessing until the drop ends. Some drops
+ give each player a set number of guesses; the page then shows how many you
+ have left, and every wrong, very close, or correct guess uses one. When you
+ run out, the guess box locks for the rest of the drop. Guesses are limited to
+ one per second, with a burst of up to three after a pause. Each guess is checked with the same matching rules as
+ text answers, shown on the page. The page tells you right away whether a
+ guess is wrong, very close, or correct.
+ A selection of wrong guesses appears in the public Guesses list with
+ your display name. The list may omit guesses during busy periods or when a
+ player is muted. Correct and very close guess text is never shown to other
+ players. The list can show that someone guessed correctly without revealing
+ their answer. The winner count updates when rewards are confirmed, and the
+ page shows how many people are watching while the drop is live.
+ Some Pictionary drops keep guesses private. In those drops the Guesses
+ list is replaced by a note, other players never see your guesses, and you
+ see only the winner count go up as rewards are claimed. The team member
+ drawing can see every guess in both kinds of drop.
+ The first correct guesses received and accepted by the server win, up to
+ one reward per player and the number of rewards shown on the page. A correct guess shows that your place is being checked, then shows that
+ you won or that every reward was already claimed. Once you have guessed
+ correctly, further guesses do not count again. The drop ends when every
+ reward is claimed or when it is closed, and the page then shows that the drop
+ ended.
+ Sending guesses too quickly asks you to slow down for a moment before you
+ guess again. If your connection drops, the page reconnects on its own and the
+ drawing catches up. Keep the drop open in only one tab or window; opening it
+ somewhere else moves your seat there.
Text answers
Some drops ask for a Text Answer. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select Submit Answer. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, A matches a. When spacing is ignored, New York
matches NewYork; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.
Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
Matt's Golden Ticket, which each winner opens the same
way. Each winner of an account
giveaway receives the stated evaluation account as soon as the draw runs, and a
notification confirms it is ready. An account giveaway can award an
Elite account, including a \$1K Elite size that cannot be bought; see
Elite prize accounts.
Share to Claim
When available, Share to Claim on Rewards lets you earn a case by posting
about a passed challenge or paid payout on X. Link your X account, include the
certificate link, mention @MyFundedPerps, and submit the published post link
within seven days of the pass or payout. A case is added after the post is approved.
Passing a 1K or 2.5K challenge does not earn a Share to Claim case, but payouts
− from those accounts do. A payout share for \$9,999 or more also earns a merch case
− alongside its regular case.
+ from those accounts do.
+ For a paid payout, you can instead choose Instagram in the payout certificate
+ dialog. Save the payout image, post it to your story, tag @myfundedperps_, and
+ keep your account public until review. Submit the story link and a screenshot
+ within seven days of the payout. Instagram does not require a linked X account.
+ Each payout can earn one reward through either X or Instagram. A pending or
+ approved claim locks that payout to its chosen platform; after rejection, you
+ can switch platforms while the claim window is open.
+ Payout rewards use the net amount you received after the profit split:
+
Up to \$250 Bronze Silver \$250.01 to \$500 Silver Gold \$500.01 to \$1,000 Gold Diamond \$1,000.01 to \$2,500 Diamond Obsidian \$2,500.01 to \$9,998.99 Obsidian Eclipse \$9,999 or more Eclipse Eclipse
| Net payout | X case | Instagram story case |
|---|
+ A payout share for \$9,999 or more also earns a merch case alongside its
+ regular case when merch rewards are available to you. An Instagram story below
+ that amount earns only the case in the table, including when that case is Eclipse.
You can submit **one funded share and one payout share per New York calendar
day**. The allowances are separate: submitting a funded share does not use your
− payout allowance. Pending and approved submissions count; rejected submissions
+ payout allowance. Instagram stories have their own allowance of one submission
+ per New York calendar day. Pending and approved submissions count; rejected submissions
do not. A rejected post can be resubmitted once within the original seven-day window.
After you use an allowance, other tasks of that type show a countdown and unlock
at midnight New York time. This reset follows daylight saving time. The seven-day
claim window still applies, so a task may expire before the next reset. Community
tasks have their own limits and do not use these daily allowances.
Community tasks can ask you to post on X, Instagram, YouTube, or TikTok. X tasks
need a linked X account. Instagram, YouTube, and TikTok tasks do not need a
linked account: follow the task details, publish the post, and paste its link
before the task ends. Each task accepts one claim per person, and a rejected post
can be resubmitted once while the task is open.
Purchase History
Open Purchase History
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
− The password opens a question page with one of seven modes:
+ The password opens a question page with one of eight modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
through the exit.
- Text Answer: Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.
- Show Your Work: Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.
- Draw a Chart: Draw the given function, such as y = x^2 + 3, on the
supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
−2π to 2π for y = sin(x). Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
the curve within the visible range. You do not need
algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
position against the function.
- Speed Trading: Trade a fast replay of a real past chart for a limited
time. The best profit and loss (PnL) when the drop closes wins.
+ - Pictionary: Watch a MyFundedPerps team member draw live and type
+ guesses. The first correct guessers win.
2048
Select New Game on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.
Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a New Game button appear
To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
position closes automatically when the run ends.
Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
+ Pictionary
+ A Pictionary drop shows a live drawing made by a MyFundedPerps team member,
+ with a short prompt about what is being drawn. Everyone who opened the drop
+ watches the same drawing as it happens. Until the drawing starts, the page
+ shows that it is waiting for the artist.
+ Type your guess under the drawing and select Guess. Guesses can be up to
+ 60 characters (some symbols, including emoji, count as two characters).
+ Most Pictionary drops let you keep guessing until the drop ends. Some drops
+ give each player a set number of guesses; the page then shows how many you
+ have left, and every wrong, very close, or correct guess uses one. When you
+ run out, the guess box locks for the rest of the drop. Guesses are limited to
+ one per second, with a burst of up to three after a pause. Each guess is checked with the same matching rules as
+ text answers, shown on the page. The page tells you right away whether a
+ guess is wrong, very close, or correct.
+ A selection of wrong guesses appears in the public Guesses list with
+ your display name. The list may omit guesses during busy periods or when a
+ player is muted. Correct and very close guess text is never shown to other
+ players. The list can show that someone guessed correctly without revealing
+ their answer. The winner count updates when rewards are confirmed, and the
+ page shows how many people are watching while the drop is live.
+ Some Pictionary drops keep guesses private. In those drops the Guesses
+ list is replaced by a note, other players never see your guesses, and you
+ see only the winner count go up as rewards are claimed. The team member
+ drawing can see every guess in both kinds of drop.
+ The first correct guesses received and accepted by the server win, up to
+ one reward per player and the number of rewards shown on the page. A correct guess shows that your place is being checked, then shows that
+ you won or that every reward was already claimed. Once you have guessed
+ correctly, further guesses do not count again. The drop ends when every
+ reward is claimed or when it is closed, and the page then shows that the drop
+ ended.
+ Sending guesses too quickly asks you to slow down for a moment before you
+ guess again. If your connection drops, the page reconnects on its own and the
+ drawing catches up. Keep the drop open in only one tab or window; opening it
+ somewhere else moves your seat there.
Text answers
Some drops ask for a Text Answer. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select Submit Answer. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, A matches a. When spacing is ignored, New York
matches NewYork; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.
Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramPayout method changed from Riseworks only to choice between Rise cash or Store Credit with 10% bonus, with new rules and conditions added.Oct 16
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
- Payout requests are usually approved on the last Friday of each month, and
− some requests may be approved and paid sooner. Payouts are paid through
− Riseworks to the email you enter. While
Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
After
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
- Payout requests are usually approved on the last Friday of each month, and
+ some requests may be approved and paid sooner. Choose Rise for a cash
+ payout to the email you enter, or Store Credit (+10%) to receive your
+ commission plus a 10% boost as store credit after approval. For example,
+ \$100 in commission becomes \$110 in store credit. The dialog shows the
+ credit amount before you submit. Store credit cannot be withdrawn as cash
+ and follows the store credit expiry rules.
+ Both choices use the same identity verification, minimum, refund hold,
+ pending-request, and payout cooldown rules. Store credit does not require
+ Rise onboarding. While
Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
- Payout requests are usually approved on the last Friday of each month, and
− some requests may be approved and paid sooner. Payouts are paid through
− Riseworks to the email you enter. While
+ some requests may be approved and paid sooner. Choose Rise for a cash
+ payout to the email you enter, or Store Credit (+10%) to receive your
+ commission plus a 10% boost as store credit after approval. For example,
+ \$100 in commission becomes \$110 in store credit. The dialog shows the
+ credit amount before you submit. Store credit cannot be withdrawn as cash
+ and follows the store credit expiry rules.
+ Both choices use the same identity verification, minimum, refund hold,
+ pending-request, and payout cooldown rules. Store credit does not require
+ Rise onboarding. While
Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Billing and RewardsThe password opens a question page with one of seven modes instead of six; Speed Trading mode was added with detailed gameplay rules and mechanics.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
− The password opens a question page with one of six modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
through the exit.
- Text Answer: Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.
- Show Your Work: Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.
- Draw a Chart: Draw the given function, such as y = x^2 + 3, on the
supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
−2π to 2π for y = sin(x). Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
the curve within the visible range. You do not need
algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
position against the function.
2048
Select New Game on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.
Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a New Game button appear
back your last move or Restart to put every block back where it started.
Neither uses an attempt.
On a keyboard, select the board, move with the arrow keys, press Space to pick
up the block under the highlight, slide it with the arrow keys, and press
Space again to put it down.
The game submits as soon as the green block reaches the exit. Starting a game
uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page, and each game
expires 30 minutes after it starts. Your moves are checked automatically. A
solved board receives the reward only if a slot is still available when the
result is accepted. If the connection fails, use Retry Claim to resend the
same solution without spending another attempt. The remaining reward count
updates on its own as other players win.
Text answers
Some drops ask for a Text Answer. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select Submit Answer. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, A matches a. When spacing is ignored, New York
matches NewYork; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.
Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
After
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
+ The password opens a question page with one of seven modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
through the exit.
- Text Answer: Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.
- Show Your Work: Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.
- Draw a Chart: Draw the given function, such as y = x^2 + 3, on the
supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
−2π to 2π for y = sin(x). Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
the curve within the visible range. You do not need
algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
position against the function.
+ - Speed Trading: Trade a fast replay of a real past chart for a limited
+ time. The best profit and loss (PnL) when the drop closes wins.
2048
Select New Game on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.
Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a New Game button appear
back your last move or Restart to put every block back where it started.
Neither uses an attempt.
On a keyboard, select the board, move with the arrow keys, press Space to pick
up the block under the highlight, slide it with the arrow keys, and press
Space again to put it down.
The game submits as soon as the green block reaches the exit. Starting a game
uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page, and each game
expires 30 minutes after it starts. Your moves are checked automatically. A
solved board receives the reward only if a slot is still available when the
result is accepted. If the connection fails, use Retry Claim to resend the
same solution without spending another attempt. The remaining reward count
updates on its own as other players win.
+ Speed Trading
+ A Speed Trading drop stays open for a set time shown at the top of the page,
+ and the top players by PnL when it closes win the reward. Select Start Run
+ to play. After a three second countdown, 60 seconds of a real chart from one of
+ our most traded markets plays at 100× speed, starting at a random moment in
+ the past. Prices are shown at a random scale with a little noise so the chart
+ can't be looked up, but every move is real. The market is shown during the run;
+ the date and real starting price are revealed when it ends.
+ Every run starts with a \$100,000 balance at 1× leverage, with no fees and no
+ liquidation. Trade with the buttons under the chart:
+
Buy Moves your position one step toward Long 100% Sell Moves your position one step toward Short 100% Close Closes your position and banks the profit or loss Step Sets the step size: 10%, 25%, 50%, or 100% (all in)
| Control | What it does |
|---|
+ Each button shows the position it leads to, for example Buy 25% and
+ To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
+ keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
+ close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
+ that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
+ position closes automatically when the run ends.
+ Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
+ toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
+ uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
+ page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
+ positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
+ awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
+ temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
Text answers
Some drops ask for a Text Answer. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select Submit Answer. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, A matches a. When spacing is ignored, New York
matches NewYork; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.
Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
− The password opens a question page with one of six modes:
+ The password opens a question page with one of seven modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
through the exit.
- Text Answer: Type an answer using the matching rules shown with the question.
Some questions include images, and some are asked entirely in an image.
Select an image to open it full size in a new tab.
- Show Your Work: Draw every step of your solution with your mouse, finger,
or stylus and box your final answer. The grader checks the answer and the
steps that reach it. A final answer alone is not accepted.
- Draw a Chart: Draw the given function, such as y = x^2 + 3, on the
supplied grid. Each question sets the ranges and spacing of its numbered
x and y axes. Some questions use π labels for radians, for example
−2π to 2π for y = sin(x). Read the axis labels before drawing, then draw
the curve within the visible range. You do not need
algebra steps or a boxed answer. The grader checks the curve's shape and
position against the function.
+ - Speed Trading: Trade a fast replay of a real past chart for a limited
+ time. The best profit and loss (PnL) when the drop closes wins.
2048
Select New Game on the board to start with two tiles. On a desktop, slide
with the arrow keys or W, A, S, D. On a phone or tablet, swipe the board or tap
the arrow buttons under it. The board tells you which applies before you start.
Every slide moves all tiles as far as they can go, and two tiles with the same
number that touch during a slide merge into one tile of double the value. A
slide that moves nothing does not count. After each slide a new 2 or 4 tile
appears. The game ends and submits your result as soon as any tile reaches the
target shown on the board. For example, a 1024 drop ends at the first 1024
tile. When no slide can change the board, the game is over.
Starting a game uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page.
When a game ends, your score, your best tile, and a New Game button appear
back your last move or Restart to put every block back where it started.
Neither uses an attempt.
On a keyboard, select the board, move with the arrow keys, press Space to pick
up the block under the highlight, slide it with the arrow keys, and press
Space again to put it down.
The game submits as soon as the green block reaches the exit. Starting a game
uses one attempt, including when you leave or reload the page, and each game
expires 30 minutes after it starts. Your moves are checked automatically. A
solved board receives the reward only if a slot is still available when the
result is accepted. If the connection fails, use Retry Claim to resend the
same solution without spending another attempt. The remaining reward count
updates on its own as other players win.
+ Speed Trading
+ A Speed Trading drop stays open for a set time shown at the top of the page,
+ and the top players by PnL when it closes win the reward. Select Start Run
+ to play. After a three second countdown, 60 seconds of a real chart from one of
+ our most traded markets plays at 100× speed, starting at a random moment in
+ the past. Prices are shown at a random scale with a little noise so the chart
+ can't be looked up, but every move is real. The market is shown during the run;
+ the date and real starting price are revealed when it ends.
+ Every run starts with a \$100,000 balance at 1× leverage, with no fees and no
+ liquidation. Trade with the buttons under the chart:
+
Buy Moves your position one step toward Long 100% Sell Moves your position one step toward Short 100% Close Closes your position and banks the profit or loss Step Sets the step size: 10%, 25%, 50%, or 100% (all in)
| Control | What it does |
|---|
+ Each button shows the position it leads to, for example Buy 25% and
+ To Long 75%. You can change the step size at any time, even mid-run. On a
+ keyboard, press the up arrow to buy, the down arrow to sell, and Space to
+ close. Trades fill at the price on the chart when you place them, and a trade
+ that arrives too late or too fast is rejected with a message. Any open
+ position closes automatically when the run ends.
+ Your PnL is your final balance minus \$100,000. Only your best run counts
+ toward the leaderboard, so a worse run never lowers your place. Starting a run
+ uses one attempt unless the drop allows unlimited attempts. If you leave the
+ page or lose your connection mid-run, the run keeps playing to the end, open
+ positions close automatically, and the result still counts. Rewards are
+ awarded about a minute after the drop closes. Starting runs too quickly
+ temporarily pauses new runs and shows when to retry.
Text answers
Some drops ask for a Text Answer. Enter your answer directly on the question
page and select Submit Answer. Any accepted alternative succeeds. Read the
matching rules shown with the question: case and spacing can each matter.
When case is ignored, A matches a. When spacing is ignored, New York
matches NewYork; this also ignores tabs and line breaks. Otherwise, spacing
must match exactly, including at the beginning and end. Punctuation and accents
always matter. Equivalent Unicode spellings of the same accented character match.
Text answers must be nonblank and at most 200 characters. An incorrect answer
uses one attempt and remains in the field so you can edit it. Answers are checked
immediately. A correct answer shows that it is correct and that your place is
being checked for a moment while rewards go out in the order correct answers
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramPayout requests changed from approved on the last Friday of each month to usually approved then with some paid sooner.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
you still need current Sumsub approval and must meet the minimum age.
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
− - Payout requests are approved on the last Friday of each month and paid
− through Riseworks to the email you enter. While
Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
After
you still need current Sumsub approval and must meet the minimum age.
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
+ - Payout requests are usually approved on the last Friday of each month, and
+ some requests may be approved and paid sooner. Payouts are paid through
+ Riseworks to the email you enter. While
Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
you still need current Sumsub approval and must meet the minimum age.
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
− - Payout requests are approved on the last Friday of each month and paid
− through Riseworks to the email you enter. While
+ - Payout requests are usually approved on the last Friday of each month, and
+ some requests may be approved and paid sooner. Payouts are paid through
+ Riseworks to the email you enter. While
Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading with the APIAdded information about close notifications in the trading terminal, PnL reporting for full and partial closes, and cross-reference to PnL Display section.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api
Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.
The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an Idempotency-Key header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned client_order_id for durable reconciliation.
Exposure caps
API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
for each market; other users have separate allowances. Elite accounts are the
exception: each Elite account has its own cap for each market, counting only
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
After
Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api
Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.
The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an Idempotency-Key header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned client_order_id for durable reconciliation.
+ Close notifications in the trading terminal also cover orders placed through
+ the API. A full close reports the whole trade's settled net PnL, including
+ entry and exit fees, earlier partial closes, and swap payments. Partial-close
+ notifications distinguish a closed portion from a legacy fill-only result.
+ See PnL Display for the calculation scopes.
+ Order history continues to report each fill's own realized PnL and fee.
Exposure caps
API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
for each market; other users have separate allowances. Elite accounts are the
exception: each Elite account has its own cap for each market, counting only
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api
Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.
The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an Idempotency-Key header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned client_order_id for durable reconciliation.
+ Close notifications in the trading terminal also cover orders placed through
+ the API. A full close reports the whole trade's settled net PnL, including
+ entry and exit fees, earlier partial closes, and swap payments. Partial-close
+ notifications distinguish a closed portion from a legacy fill-only result.
+ See PnL Display for the calculation scopes.
+ Order history continues to report each fill's own realized PnL and fee.
Exposure caps
API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
for each market; other users have separate allowances. Elite accounts are the
exception: each Elite account has its own cap for each market, counting only
that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading SettingsAdded clarification that close notifications use settled results and detailed how full and partial closes calculate net PnL in notifications.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
For example, buy 1 ETH at \$3,000 and sell 0.9 ETH at \$3,100. If ETH then drops
to \$2,950, Open position shows -\$5 on the remaining 0.1 ETH, while Total trade
shows +\$85 before fees and swap payments.
Include Estimated Close Fees is on by default. Turn it off to stop deducting
the estimated fee to close the remaining position. This applies to either PnL
mode. Both controls are in Settings; the terminal no longer has a fee toggle.
Your choices sync across devices when signed in. The display mode applies to
open-position values on the chart, positions table and cards, dashboard,
breakeven prices, and open-position share cards. The tooltip shows the components
included in the selected mode; realized fills remain available in trade history.
The chart's position label always reads Net PnL; its value follows your
selected display mode.
These preferences change displayed values only. Execution fees, account equity,
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.
Chart Lines
Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except Trade Arrows and Bid/Ask Lines is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.
| Setting | What it shows |
|---|
After
For example, buy 1 ETH at \$3,000 and sell 0.9 ETH at \$3,100. If ETH then drops
to \$2,950, Open position shows -\$5 on the remaining 0.1 ETH, while Total trade
shows +\$85 before fees and swap payments.
Include Estimated Close Fees is on by default. Turn it off to stop deducting
the estimated fee to close the remaining position. This applies to either PnL
mode. Both controls are in Settings; the terminal no longer has a fee toggle.
Your choices sync across devices when signed in. The display mode applies to
open-position values on the chart, positions table and cards, dashboard,
breakeven prices, and open-position share cards. The tooltip shows the components
included in the selected mode; realized fills remain available in trade history.
The chart's position label always reads Net PnL; its value follows your
selected display mode.
+ Close notifications use settled results rather than these display preferences.
+ A full close shows Total trade net PnL, including earlier partial closes,
+ all trading fees, and swap payments. A partial close shows **Closed portion net
+ PnL**, including its closing fee and a proportional share of the remaining
+ entry costs and swap payments. Older partially closed positions without that
+ cost history show Fill net PnL for subsequent partial closes instead.
+ Historical notifications keep their original amounts. Execution price movement
+ can still make the settled result differ from the chart estimate.
These preferences change displayed values only. Execution fees, account equity,
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.
Chart Lines
Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except Trade Arrows and Bid/Ask Lines is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.
| Setting | What it shows |
|---|
For example, buy 1 ETH at \$3,000 and sell 0.9 ETH at \$3,100. If ETH then drops
to \$2,950, Open position shows -\$5 on the remaining 0.1 ETH, while Total trade
shows +\$85 before fees and swap payments.
Include Estimated Close Fees is on by default. Turn it off to stop deducting
the estimated fee to close the remaining position. This applies to either PnL
mode. Both controls are in Settings; the terminal no longer has a fee toggle.
Your choices sync across devices when signed in. The display mode applies to
open-position values on the chart, positions table and cards, dashboard,
breakeven prices, and open-position share cards. The tooltip shows the components
included in the selected mode; realized fills remain available in trade history.
The chart's position label always reads Net PnL; its value follows your
selected display mode.
+ Close notifications use settled results rather than these display preferences.
+ A full close shows Total trade net PnL, including earlier partial closes,
+ all trading fees, and swap payments. A partial close shows **Closed portion net
+ PnL**, including its closing fee and a proportional share of the remaining
+ entry costs and swap payments. Older partially closed positions without that
+ cost history show Fill net PnL for subsequent partial closes instead.
+ Historical notifications keep their original amounts. Execution price movement
+ can still make the settled result differ from the chart estimate.
These preferences change displayed values only. Execution fees, account equity,
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.
Chart Lines
Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except Trade Arrows and Bid/Ask Lines is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.
| Setting | What it shows |
|---|
PremierMyFundedPerps · Breaches and Next StepsAdded explanation that liquidated positions show total trade net PnL including partial closes, fees, and swaps, separate from account rule results.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
An evaluation changes to Failed when a rule breach or authorized account
decision ends it. The account can no longer place trades, but it remains in
the account switcher and history so you can review the result.
The dashboard's Pass Progress card identifies the final failed constraint when
that information is available. Common constraints include:
- maximum daily loss;
- maximum drawdown;
- the 30-Day Inactivity Rule (evaluation accounts) or the 7-Day Inactivity
Rule (funded accounts);
- evaluation time limit (historical accounts only);
- consistency;
- profit target or another plan-specific pass condition.
Inactivity rules
Every account must record an executed trade at least once within its
inactivity window. The window is measured in calendar days, not trading days,
and applies to every account model and size:
| Account stage | Window | Outcome when the window passes |
|---|
Evaluation | 30 consecutive calendar days | The evaluation is marked Failed with the reason 30-Day Inactivity Rule.
Funded | 7 consecutive calendar days | The funded account is closed with the reason 7-Day Inactivity Rule.
The window starts at account creation or activation if you have never traded.
If your account has a later scheduled activation date, time before that date
does not count toward inactivity. An executed trade after activation restarts
the window from that trade's timestamp. A trade before scheduled activation
does not move the start earlier. Logging in, placing an order that does not
After
An evaluation changes to Failed when a rule breach or authorized account
decision ends it. The account can no longer place trades, but it remains in
the account switcher and history so you can review the result.
The dashboard's Pass Progress card identifies the final failed constraint when
that information is available. Common constraints include:
- maximum daily loss;
- maximum drawdown;
- the 30-Day Inactivity Rule (evaluation accounts) or the 7-Day Inactivity
Rule (funded accounts);
- evaluation time limit (historical accounts only);
- consistency;
- profit target or another plan-specific pass condition.
+ If a position is liquidated, its notification shows Total trade net PnL:
+ the complete position result including earlier partial closes, trading fees,
+ and swap payments. This amount describes the trade, while the account's rule
+ result depends on its recorded equity and applicable limits.
Inactivity rules
Every account must record an executed trade at least once within its
inactivity window. The window is measured in calendar days, not trading days,
and applies to every account model and size:
| Account stage | Window | Outcome when the window passes |
|---|
Evaluation | 30 consecutive calendar days | The evaluation is marked Failed with the reason 30-Day Inactivity Rule.
Funded | 7 consecutive calendar days | The funded account is closed with the reason 7-Day Inactivity Rule.
The window starts at account creation or activation if you have never traded.
If your account has a later scheduled activation date, time before that date
does not count toward inactivity. An executed trade after activation restarts
the window from that trade's timestamp. A trade before scheduled activation
does not move the start earlier. Logging in, placing an order that does not
An evaluation changes to Failed when a rule breach or authorized account
decision ends it. The account can no longer place trades, but it remains in
the account switcher and history so you can review the result.
The dashboard's Pass Progress card identifies the final failed constraint when
that information is available. Common constraints include:
- maximum daily loss;
- maximum drawdown;
- the 30-Day Inactivity Rule (evaluation accounts) or the 7-Day Inactivity
Rule (funded accounts);
- evaluation time limit (historical accounts only);
- consistency;
- profit target or another plan-specific pass condition.
+ If a position is liquidated, its notification shows Total trade net PnL:
+ the complete position result including earlier partial closes, trading fees,
+ and swap payments. This amount describes the trade, while the account's rule
+ result depends on its recorded equity and applicable limits.
Inactivity rules
Every account must record an executed trade at least once within its
inactivity window. The window is measured in calendar days, not trading days,
and applies to every account model and size:
| Account stage | Window | Outcome when the window passes |
|---|
Evaluation | 30 consecutive calendar days | The evaluation is marked Failed with the reason 30-Day Inactivity Rule.
Funded | 7 consecutive calendar days | The funded account is closed with the reason 7-Day Inactivity Rule.
The window starts at account creation or activation if you have never traded.
If your account has a later scheduled activation date, time before that date
does not count toward inactivity. An executed trade after activation restarts
the window from that trade's timestamp. A trade before scheduled activation
does not move the start earlier. Logging in, placing an order that does not
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramFirst-purchase offer changed from fixed 30% off to 30% off first purchase and 25% off later purchases, with additional guidance on graphic updates.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
| Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case |
|---|
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - Fixed 30% offer. Every graphic prints a fixed offer of 30% off with
− your code as part of its artwork. It does not update with your code's
− current discount, which Your Code's Discount shows. Share the graphics
− only while your code gives buyers 30% off.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
After
| Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case |
|---|
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
+ - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 30% off an eligible first
+ purchase and 25% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
+ of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
+ shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
+ matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
+ an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
| Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case |
|---|
The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
− - Fixed 30% offer. Every graphic prints a fixed offer of 30% off with
− your code as part of its artwork. It does not update with your code's
− current discount, which Your Code's Discount shows. Share the graphics
− only while your code gives buyers 30% off.
+ - First-purchase offer. Every graphic states 30% off an eligible first
+ purchase and 25% off later purchases with your code. These rates are part
+ of the artwork and do not update automatically. Your Code's Discount
+ shows the standard discount. Share the graphics only while your code
+ matches both advertised rates. Previously downloaded graphics may show
+ an older offer; download fresh copies before sharing.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
drag to frame it. These edits only affect your graphics; they do not change
your profile.
- Code. Your code fills in automatically. To use a different code,
request a change as described in Your affiliate code and link.
- Formats. Graphics are grouped into two sections. Standard holds
post and banner sizes: Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, Every
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading SettingsClarified that Confirm New Orders does not apply to Reverse Position or One-Click Trading, removed note about reset, and added new One-Click Trading section with 6+ settings.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.
If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.
Trade Confirmations
Confirm New Orders has three options:
| Option | Behavior |
|---|
Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders.
| All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand. |
|---|
− The same choice applies to
− Reverse Position: with Never,
− clicking it reverses the position right away; with Market Orders or **All
− Orders**, it opens a short review first.
Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
− submitted. This update resets previous confirmation choices to off for everyone.
− You can turn confirmation back on, and that new choice is saved.
When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.
One-Click Chart Close changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
Show Reverse Position controls whether the
Reverse Position button appears. It
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
After
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.
If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.
Trade Confirmations
Confirm New Orders has three options:
| Option | Behavior |
|---|
Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders.
| All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand. |
|---|
+ This choice does not apply to
+ Reverse Position or One-Click
+ Trading. Reversals follow Confirm Reverse Position below, and One-Click
+ Trading never shows a review.
Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
+ submitted.
When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.
One-Click Chart Close changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
Show Reverse Position controls whether the
Reverse Position button appears. It
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.
+ One-Click Trading
+ One-Click Trading shows a small window with Sell, Buy, and
+ Flat on the trade page. It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
+ order the moment you tap, with no review step, even if Confirm New Orders
+ asks you to review orders placed from the order ticket. Turn the switch off to
+ remove the window and its button.
+ One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
+ when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
+ validation still apply.
+ The first time you use it, a notice explains how it works. Check **I understand
+ orders send without confirmation. and select Continue (or Turn On** if
+ you are turning the switch on in Settings). Your agreement is saved to your
+ account, so the notice does not appear again on other devices. Cancel sends
+ nothing.
+ Show Flat Button appears while One-Click Trading is on and is on by
+ default. Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the
+ market's open orders in one tap. Turn it off to hide Flat from the window.
+ One-Click Trading by Market lists the markets that have their own One-Click
+ settings. For each market you can change:
+
| Setting | Options |
|---|
+ One-Click Size and Size Unit | USD, the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets
+
Stop Loss and Take Profit Unit Points, %, or USD
| One-Click Stop Loss / Take Profit | Leave empty for none, or enter an amount above 0 |
|---|
+ Markets are added here when you change the size in the One-Click window. Other
+ markets start from your Quick Size amount and your
+ TP/SL Preset under Order Defaults. You can save One-Click settings for up to 50
+ markets. See One-Click Trading in
+ the Trading Guide for how the window works.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.
If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.
Trade Confirmations
Confirm New Orders has three options:
| Option | Behavior |
|---|
Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders.
| All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand. |
|---|
− The same choice applies to
− Reverse Position: with Never,
− clicking it reverses the position right away; with Market Orders or **All
− Orders**, it opens a short review first.
+ This choice does not apply to
+ Reverse Position or One-Click
+ Trading. Reversals follow Confirm Reverse Position below, and One-Click
+ Trading never shows a review.
Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
− submitted. This update resets previous confirmation choices to off for everyone.
− You can turn confirmation back on, and that new choice is saved.
+ submitted.
When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.
One-Click Chart Close changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
Show Reverse Position controls whether the
Reverse Position button appears. It
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
off.
+ One-Click Trading
+ One-Click Trading shows a small window with Sell, Buy, and
+ Flat on the trade page. It is on by default. Buy and Sell send a market
+ order the moment you tap, with no review step, even if Confirm New Orders
+ asks you to review orders placed from the order ticket. Turn the switch off to
+ remove the window and its button.
+ One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
+ when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
+ validation still apply.
+ The first time you use it, a notice explains how it works. Check **I understand
+ orders send without confirmation. and select Continue (or Turn On** if
+ you are turning the switch on in Settings). Your agreement is saved to your
+ account, so the notice does not appear again on other devices. Cancel sends
+ nothing.
+ Show Flat Button appears while One-Click Trading is on and is on by
+ default. Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the
+ market's open orders in one tap. Turn it off to hide Flat from the window.
+ One-Click Trading by Market lists the markets that have their own One-Click
+ settings. For each market you can change:
+
| Setting | Options |
|---|
+ One-Click Size and Size Unit | USD, the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets
+
Stop Loss and Take Profit Unit Points, %, or USD
| One-Click Stop Loss / Take Profit | Leave empty for none, or enter an amount above 0 |
|---|
+ Markets are added here when you change the size in the One-Click window. Other
+ markets start from your Quick Size amount and your
+ TP/SL Preset under Order Defaults. You can save One-Click settings for up to 50
+ markets. See One-Click Trading in
+ the Trading Guide for how the window works.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
PremierMyFundedPerps · Security SettingsCode expiration time changed from 10 minutes to 12 hours, or 10 minutes for email changes.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
per minute per account. If you reach it, wait a minute before trying again.
A new sign-in does not reset the limit.
Remove an authenticator app
Select Remove Authenticator App in Security settings and confirm. You may need to sign
out and sign in again before changing your methods.
If you lose access to every enrolled passkey and authenticator app, contact
MyFundedPerps support for account recovery. Keep an additional passkey on
another device or security key as a recovery option.
Verify your identity in support chat
Support can send a Support Verification Code to your current account email.
It starts with SUP- and is designed to be shared in the MyFundedPerps support
conversation you opened. Check the conversation reference and requested action
− in the email before sharing it. It expires after 10 minutes and permits five
incorrect attempts. A new request replaces the previous code.
Never share a sign-in code, password-reset code, passkey approval, or
authenticator code with support. The support code cannot sign you in or remove
two-factor authentication. If you did not request help or the action is wrong,
do not share it.
After
per minute per account. If you reach it, wait a minute before trying again.
A new sign-in does not reset the limit.
Remove an authenticator app
Select Remove Authenticator App in Security settings and confirm. You may need to sign
out and sign in again before changing your methods.
If you lose access to every enrolled passkey and authenticator app, contact
MyFundedPerps support for account recovery. Keep an additional passkey on
another device or security key as a recovery option.
Verify your identity in support chat
Support can send a Support Verification Code to your current account email.
It starts with SUP- and is designed to be shared in the MyFundedPerps support
conversation you opened. Check the conversation reference and requested action
+ in the email before sharing it. It expires after 12 hours, or after 10 minutes
+ when the code is for changing your account email. Each code permits five
incorrect attempts. A new request replaces the previous code.
Never share a sign-in code, password-reset code, passkey approval, or
authenticator code with support. The support code cannot sign you in or remove
two-factor authentication. If you did not request help or the action is wrong,
do not share it.
per minute per account. If you reach it, wait a minute before trying again.
A new sign-in does not reset the limit.
Remove an authenticator app
Select Remove Authenticator App in Security settings and confirm. You may need to sign
out and sign in again before changing your methods.
If you lose access to every enrolled passkey and authenticator app, contact
MyFundedPerps support for account recovery. Keep an additional passkey on
another device or security key as a recovery option.
Verify your identity in support chat
Support can send a Support Verification Code to your current account email.
It starts with SUP- and is designed to be shared in the MyFundedPerps support
conversation you opened. Check the conversation reference and requested action
− in the email before sharing it. It expires after 10 minutes and permits five
+ in the email before sharing it. It expires after 12 hours, or after 10 minutes
+ when the code is for changing your account email. Each code permits five
incorrect attempts. A new request replaces the previous code.
Never share a sign-in code, password-reset code, passkey approval, or
authenticator code with support. The support code cannot sign you in or remove
two-factor authentication. If you did not request help or the action is wrong,
do not share it.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Purchase HistoryArticle clarified that purchases paid entirely with store credit display as Card with 0.00 Card (USD) amount.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
the refunded accounts and show the total returned, including store credit.
Accounts outside the refund retain their paid status.
Review the price breakdown
Open a row to see its challenge, profit split, base price, discount code and
discount amount when present, total, and current status. An order for several
accounts appears once, with the number of accounts beside the challenge and
every account it issued in its details. Exports include a Quantity column
and list each account number. A purchase made with
the PERPS code shows PERPS as its discount code together with the
percentage it was worth at the time. Use this stored
breakdown instead of comparing the order to today's challenge price.
Payment Method shows Unifold for purchases paid through Unifold and
− Card for card checkout. Purchase-history exports use the same labels.
Open an invoice
Select the invoice icon in the order row or View Invoice inside the order
details for a paid or refunded purchase. The PDF opens in a new tab, where you
can save or print it. Pending and failed purchases do not have invoices.
The invoice header identifies the issuing company by its legal name, Funding
Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., together with its registered business address. The
invoice contains the order number, billing details, payment reference,
subtotal, discount, and total paid. An order for several accounts shows one
line with the number of accounts and the price of each. Discounts show the code you applied,
including PERPS when it selected an eligible promotion for your purchase.
Newly generated invoices identify Unifold payments as Unifold.
Older purchases may take a moment to generate their invoice on first access.
Once created, the PDF remains the original payment record. A refund does not
replace an existing invoice; check the order's current status in Purchase
History for refund information.
Export history
Use the export control in the filtered table toolbar to download the supported
purchase-history export. Review the active filters first if you expect a
particular subset.
Total (USD) is the order price after discounts. The export splits it into
Store Credit (USD), the store credit applied to the order, and the amount
charged to your payment method: Card (USD) for card checkout or
− Unifold (USD) for Unifold payments. Use these columns to track how much of
− each purchase you paid out of pocket.
For a missing row or invoice, follow Troubleshooting and FAQ.
After
the refunded accounts and show the total returned, including store credit.
Accounts outside the refund retain their paid status.
Review the price breakdown
Open a row to see its challenge, profit split, base price, discount code and
discount amount when present, total, and current status. An order for several
accounts appears once, with the number of accounts beside the challenge and
every account it issued in its details. Exports include a Quantity column
and list each account number. A purchase made with
the PERPS code shows PERPS as its discount code together with the
percentage it was worth at the time. Use this stored
breakdown instead of comparing the order to today's challenge price.
Payment Method shows Unifold for purchases paid through Unifold and
+ Card for card checkout. A purchase paid entirely with store credit also
+ shows Card. Purchase-history exports use the same labels.
Open an invoice
Select the invoice icon in the order row or View Invoice inside the order
details for a paid or refunded purchase. The PDF opens in a new tab, where you
can save or print it. Pending and failed purchases do not have invoices.
The invoice header identifies the issuing company by its legal name, Funding
Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., together with its registered business address. The
invoice contains the order number, billing details, payment reference,
subtotal, discount, and total paid. An order for several accounts shows one
line with the number of accounts and the price of each. Discounts show the code you applied,
including PERPS when it selected an eligible promotion for your purchase.
Newly generated invoices identify Unifold payments as Unifold.
Older purchases may take a moment to generate their invoice on first access.
Once created, the PDF remains the original payment record. A refund does not
replace an existing invoice; check the order's current status in Purchase
History for refund information.
Export history
Use the export control in the filtered table toolbar to download the supported
purchase-history export. Review the active filters first if you expect a
particular subset.
Total (USD) is the order price after discounts. The export splits it into
Store Credit (USD), the store credit applied to the order, and the amount
charged to your payment method: Card (USD) for card checkout or
+ Unifold (USD) for Unifold payments. A purchase paid entirely with store
+ credit shows Card with a Card (USD) amount of 0.00. Use these columns to
+ track how much of each purchase you paid out of pocket.
For a missing row or invoice, follow Troubleshooting and FAQ.
the refunded accounts and show the total returned, including store credit.
Accounts outside the refund retain their paid status.
Review the price breakdown
Open a row to see its challenge, profit split, base price, discount code and
discount amount when present, total, and current status. An order for several
accounts appears once, with the number of accounts beside the challenge and
every account it issued in its details. Exports include a Quantity column
and list each account number. A purchase made with
the PERPS code shows PERPS as its discount code together with the
percentage it was worth at the time. Use this stored
breakdown instead of comparing the order to today's challenge price.
Payment Method shows Unifold for purchases paid through Unifold and
− Card for card checkout. Purchase-history exports use the same labels.
+ Card for card checkout. A purchase paid entirely with store credit also
+ shows Card. Purchase-history exports use the same labels.
Open an invoice
Select the invoice icon in the order row or View Invoice inside the order
details for a paid or refunded purchase. The PDF opens in a new tab, where you
can save or print it. Pending and failed purchases do not have invoices.
The invoice header identifies the issuing company by its legal name, Funding
Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., together with its registered business address. The
invoice contains the order number, billing details, payment reference,
subtotal, discount, and total paid. An order for several accounts shows one
line with the number of accounts and the price of each. Discounts show the code you applied,
including PERPS when it selected an eligible promotion for your purchase.
Newly generated invoices identify Unifold payments as Unifold.
Older purchases may take a moment to generate their invoice on first access.
Once created, the PDF remains the original payment record. A refund does not
replace an existing invoice; check the order's current status in Purchase
History for refund information.
Export history
Use the export control in the filtered table toolbar to download the supported
purchase-history export. Review the active filters first if you expect a
particular subset.
Total (USD) is the order price after discounts. The export splits it into
Store Credit (USD), the store credit applied to the order, and the amount
charged to your payment method: Card (USD) for card checkout or
− Unifold (USD) for Unifold payments. Use these columns to track how much of
− each purchase you paid out of pocket.
+ Unifold (USD) for Unifold payments. A purchase paid entirely with store
+ credit shows Card with a Card (USD) amount of 0.00. Use these columns to
+ track how much of each purchase you paid out of pocket.
For a missing row or invoice, follow Troubleshooting and FAQ.
PremierMyFundedPerps · SettingsArticle expanded to list specific settings options: 3D Scenes, Dialog Background Blur, One-Click Trading, and Affiliate Emails added to descriptions.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
− Control background effects and install the web app.
Blur personal details and secrets while you share your screen.
Trading
− Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
− Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
Find and share your pass, funded, payout, lifetime payout, and leaderboard
certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
matching settings tab.
After
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
+ Control background effects, 3D Scenes, Dialog Background Blur, and install
+ the web app.
Blur personal details and secrets while you share your screen.
Trading
+ Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, One-Click Trading,
+ and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
+ Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio, and, for affiliates,
+ Affiliate Emails.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
Find and share your pass, funded, payout, lifetime payout, and leaderboard
certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
matching settings tab.
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
− Control background effects and install the web app.
+ Control background effects, 3D Scenes, Dialog Background Blur, and install
+ the web app.
Blur personal details and secrets while you share your screen.
Trading
− Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
+ Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, One-Click Trading,
+ and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
− Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
+ Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio, and, for affiliates,
+ Affiliate Emails.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
Find and share your pass, funded, payout, lifetime payout, and leaderboard
certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
matching settings tab.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Sandbox and test keysAdded instructions for hiding sandbox accounts in the account switcher using a Filter option.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
never appear in sandbox responses. This applies to direct position, order,
TWAP/VWAP, and scaled-order IDs, client order IDs, modifications, cancellations,
and idempotent retries. A known ID does not grant access across environments
or outside the accounts selected for the credential. Inaccessible individual
resources return 404; a client order ID lookup returns an empty list.
- Archived accounts and their orders, positions, and strategy history are
unavailable through trading endpoints in either API environment, including
previously successful trading-request replays.
- Sandbox accounts are excluded from analytics, leaderboards, certificates,
and payouts. They exist only for integration testing. In the web app they
carry a Sandbox badge in the account switcher, and their dashboard
never shows funded-stage progression because a sandbox account cannot
− become funded.
- Sandbox trading still enforces evaluation rules, so a sandbox account can
breach. That is useful for testing how your integration handles rejections
and account failure.
- Reaching the profit target ends a sandbox account as passed. A sandbox pass
does not lead to identity verification, an agreement, or a funded account.
Go live
When your integration works in the sandbox, create a live key with the same
access level, point your client at
https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com, and select the challenge accounts
it should reach. No other code changes are needed.
After
never appear in sandbox responses. This applies to direct position, order,
TWAP/VWAP, and scaled-order IDs, client order IDs, modifications, cancellations,
and idempotent retries. A known ID does not grant access across environments
or outside the accounts selected for the credential. Inaccessible individual
resources return 404; a client order ID lookup returns an empty list.
- Archived accounts and their orders, positions, and strategy history are
unavailable through trading endpoints in either API environment, including
previously successful trading-request replays.
- Sandbox accounts are excluded from analytics, leaderboards, certificates,
and payouts. They exist only for integration testing. In the web app they
carry a Sandbox badge in the account switcher, and their dashboard
never shows funded-stage progression because a sandbox account cannot
+ become funded. To keep them out of the account switcher, open Filter
+ and check Hide Sandbox Accounts; uncheck it to show them again.
- Sandbox trading still enforces evaluation rules, so a sandbox account can
breach. That is useful for testing how your integration handles rejections
and account failure.
- Reaching the profit target ends a sandbox account as passed. A sandbox pass
does not lead to identity verification, an agreement, or a funded account.
Go live
When your integration works in the sandbox, create a live key with the same
access level, point your client at
https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com, and select the challenge accounts
it should reach. No other code changes are needed.
never appear in sandbox responses. This applies to direct position, order,
TWAP/VWAP, and scaled-order IDs, client order IDs, modifications, cancellations,
and idempotent retries. A known ID does not grant access across environments
or outside the accounts selected for the credential. Inaccessible individual
resources return 404; a client order ID lookup returns an empty list.
- Archived accounts and their orders, positions, and strategy history are
unavailable through trading endpoints in either API environment, including
previously successful trading-request replays.
- Sandbox accounts are excluded from analytics, leaderboards, certificates,
and payouts. They exist only for integration testing. In the web app they
carry a Sandbox badge in the account switcher, and their dashboard
never shows funded-stage progression because a sandbox account cannot
− become funded.
+ become funded. To keep them out of the account switcher, open Filter
+ and check Hide Sandbox Accounts; uncheck it to show them again.
- Sandbox trading still enforces evaluation rules, so a sandbox account can
breach. That is useful for testing how your integration handles rejections
and account failure.
- Reaching the profit target ends a sandbox account as passed. A sandbox pass
does not lead to identity verification, an agreement, or a funded account.
Go live
When your integration works in the sandbox, create a live key with the same
access level, point your client at
https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com, and select the challenge accounts
it should reach. No other code changes are needed.
PremierMyFundedPerps · PaginationArticle clarifies that cursor pagination applies to TWAP and VWAP order history endpoints and simplifies cursor position description.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/pagination
Walk recent order history with a bounded opaque cursor.
GET /v1/orders returns newest orders first. Set limit from 1 to 100; the
default is 50.
When has_more is true, send next_cursor as the next request's cursor
parameter. Treat the cursor as opaque and URL-encode it:
bash theme={null}
curl --get "https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/orders"
-H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY"
--data-urlencode "account_id=ACCOUNT_ID"
--data-urlencode "limit=50"
--data-urlencode "cursor=$NEXT_CURSOR"
− The same cursor pattern is used by filled orders, closed positions, and scaled
− orders. Each endpoint returns its own opaque cursor. Never reuse a cursor with
a different endpoint, account, or filter.
− The opaque cursor preserves the exact position in Convex's compound index, so
− orders sharing the same millisecond are not skipped. The server reads at most
limit indexed rows for each page, regardless of the account's total order
history.
A client_order_id lookup is not paginated. Send
GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to receive the normal page shape with zero
or one order and has_more: false. Do not send limit or cursor with that
lookup.
After
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/pagination
Walk recent order history with a bounded opaque cursor.
GET /v1/orders returns newest orders first. Set limit from 1 to 100; the
default is 50.
When has_more is true, send next_cursor as the next request's cursor
parameter. Treat the cursor as opaque and URL-encode it:
bash theme={null}
curl --get "https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/orders"
-H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY"
--data-urlencode "account_id=ACCOUNT_ID"
--data-urlencode "limit=50"
--data-urlencode "cursor=$NEXT_CURSOR"
+ The same cursor pattern is used by filled orders, closed positions, scaled
+ orders, and completed or canceled TWAP and VWAP history (GET /v1/twap-orders
+ with a status of completed or canceled). Each endpoint returns its own opaque cursor. Never reuse a cursor with
a different endpoint, account, or filter.
+ The opaque cursor preserves the exact sort position, so orders sharing the same millisecond are not skipped. The server reads at most
limit indexed rows for each page, regardless of the account's total order
history.
A client_order_id lookup is not paginated. Send
GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to receive the normal page shape with zero
or one order and has_more: false. Do not send limit or cursor with that
lookup.
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/pagination
Walk recent order history with a bounded opaque cursor.
GET /v1/orders returns newest orders first. Set limit from 1 to 100; the
default is 50.
When has_more is true, send next_cursor as the next request's cursor
parameter. Treat the cursor as opaque and URL-encode it:
bash theme={null}
curl --get "https://developers.myfundedperpetuals.com/v1/orders"
-H "Authorization: Bearer $FP_API_KEY"
--data-urlencode "account_id=ACCOUNT_ID"
--data-urlencode "limit=50"
--data-urlencode "cursor=$NEXT_CURSOR"
− The same cursor pattern is used by filled orders, closed positions, and scaled
− orders. Each endpoint returns its own opaque cursor. Never reuse a cursor with
+ The same cursor pattern is used by filled orders, closed positions, scaled
+ orders, and completed or canceled TWAP and VWAP history (GET /v1/twap-orders
+ with a status of completed or canceled). Each endpoint returns its own opaque cursor. Never reuse a cursor with
a different endpoint, account, or filter.
− The opaque cursor preserves the exact position in Convex's compound index, so
− orders sharing the same millisecond are not skipped. The server reads at most
+ The opaque cursor preserves the exact sort position, so orders sharing the same millisecond are not skipped. The server reads at most
limit indexed rows for each page, regardless of the account's total order
history.
A client_order_id lookup is not paginated. Send
GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to receive the normal page shape with zero
or one order and has_more: false. Do not send limit or cursor with that
lookup.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideArticle adds Ostium as trading venue for SP500 and NAS100 with standard market hours, expands Hedge mode exception details, and introduces One-Click Trading feature with 4 other changes.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
Forex and index markets
Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
− on Hyperliquid, around the clock. The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
each side:
| Markets | Venue |
|---|
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
Trading hours
These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
the clock. Times are New York time:
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|
−
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|---|---|
| US30 | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday |
Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
A badge beside the market name marks these markets in the trade page header,
the market picker, search, and the Markets page, so you can tell they do not
trade around the clock before you open one. FX pairs show 24/5, since they
trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
Markets with two trading-hour options
Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
Each account holds one net position per market. Every fill on that market
updates the same position, so an order in the opposite direction trades
against what you already hold instead of opening a separate position.
| Opposite-side order size | Result |
|---|
Smaller than your position | Reduces the position. The rest stays open at the same entry price.
| Equal to your position | Closes the position completely. |
|---|
Larger than your position | Closes the position and opens one on the other side using only the size left over (a flip).
For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
Reverse a position
Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
side, or the largest size your margin allows. Holding a 1 BTC long and
reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short when your margin covers it. On the
chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
Copy Trading.
Reverse Position opens a short review first, so you can check the market, the
new side, and the estimated price before anything is sent. To reverse as soon
as you click, turn off
Confirm Reverse Position in Trading
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
Choose an order type
| Order | What it does | Main tradeoff |
|---|
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.
How limit orders fill
A limit order always fills its whole size. It never fills partially and does not
depend on how much size is showing at its price. What price it fills at depends
on whether the order rests first.
- A buy limit is reached when the best ask is at or below the limit price. A
sell limit is reached when the best bid is at or above it.
- A limit placed at or through the current market does not rest. It fills right
away as a standard market order: the whole size at the best ask for a buy or
the best bid for a sell, under the same mark-based slippage cap as any market
order, and never worse than your limit price. The order ticket asks you to
confirm this before submitting.
- A limit resting in Open Orders fills at exactly its limit price once the
market has reached that price on two order book checks in a row. It never
fills at a better price than the limit. If the market moves back off the
price between those checks, the order keeps waiting and the count starts
over. The first missed confirmation can retry sooner; repeated misses
wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
− Where faster confirmation is enabled, a fresh book showing the market
strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
it does not fill using an old touch alone.
- A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.
Start a limit order from the chart
Hover the chart and a + button appears beside the price label on the price
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
\$100.02 fills at the \$100.01 cap; a best ask of \$99.99 fills at the \$100 mark.
Forex markets use the same rules with the forex slippage tier as the cap. The
tier is selected from order notional at the mark. FX limits retain their
price protection: a resting limit needs both the real opposing book price and
the mark to reach its limit, and marketable limits use market-style pricing,
never worse than their limit.
Other instruments retain their maximum adverse slippage caps. Larger notional
and lower open interest may widen those caps; a better opposing book price
within the cap is preserved.
− The pricing schedule, in basis points of the reference price (fixed per-side spread for FX, maximum adverse slippage for other markets):
Major indices and commodities (NAS100, SP500, XAU, GOLD, SILVER, XAG, CL, BRENTOIL)
| Order notional | Maximum slippage |
|---|
| Up to \$100,000 | 0.25 bps |
Forex
| Order notional | Maximum slippage |
|---|
A Stop Loss reduces risk but cannot guarantee a particular fill price. Fast
markets, gaps, available liquidity, and the configured exit type still affect
execution.
Use execution protection
The Trading settings include:
- Max Market Slippage, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
and individual position closes;
- separate Non-Forex and Forex leverage caps for the order ticket;
- Warn Without Stop Loss for orders that can increase exposure;
- Resize TP/SL With Position to keep existing exits sized to a position
you add to;
- confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
- account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
All actions.
Read the complete Trading settings reference to configure
these defaults.
Customize the terminal layout
On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.
The Layout button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:
- Colour Scheme: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
After
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
Forex and index markets
Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
+ on Hyperliquid, around the clock. Where offered, SP500 and NAS100 can also
+ trade on Ostium with standard market hours; see
+ Markets with two trading-hour options.
+ The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
each side:
| Markets | Venue |
|---|
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
Trading hours
These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
the clock. Times are New York time:
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|
+
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|---|---|
| US30, and SP500 and NAS100 on Ostium where offered | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday |
Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
A badge beside the market name marks these markets in the trade page header,
the market picker, search, and the Markets page, so you can tell they do not
trade around the clock before you open one. FX pairs show 24/5, since they
trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
Markets with two trading-hour options
Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
+ While One-Click Trading is on, the header also has a
+ lightning button that shows or hides the One-Click window.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
Each account holds one net position per market. Every fill on that market
updates the same position, so an order in the opposite direction trades
against what you already hold instead of opening a separate position.
| Opposite-side order size | Result |
|---|
Smaller than your position | Reduces the position. The rest stays open at the same entry price.
| Equal to your position | Closes the position completely. |
|---|
Larger than your position | Closes the position and opens one on the other side using only the size left over (a flip).
For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
+ One exception comes from the retiring Hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets.
+ A position you still hold there is separate from the Veranta market of the same
+ name, so a new EUR/USD or USD/JPY order opens or changes a Veranta position
+ and does not reduce the Hyperliquid one. See Retiring markets.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
Reverse a position
Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
side, or the largest size your margin allows. Holding a 1 BTC long and
reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short when your margin covers it. On the
chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
Copy Trading.
Reverse Position opens a short review first, so you can check the market, the
new side, and the estimated price before anything is sent. To reverse as soon
as you click, turn off
Confirm Reverse Position in Trading
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
+ One-Click Trading
+ One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
+ It is on by default in
+ Trading settings; turn it off there to
+ remove the window.
+ - On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
+ window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
+ size are remembered in that browser.
+ - On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. The window sits
+ over the chart at the top or bottom edge; drag or tap its handle to move it
+ to the other edge.
+ The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
+ between them, and Flat below.
+ - Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
+ tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
+ Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
+ - A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
+ position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
+ opposite order reduces the position.
+ - Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
+ open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
+ Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
+ the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
+ you change is saved for that market on all your devices. Each market's Stop
+ Loss and Take Profit are edited under One-Click Trading by Market in
+ Trading settings. Markets without their own settings start from your Quick Size
+ amount and your TP/SL preset.
+ Before your first One-Click order, a notice explains that orders send without
+ confirmation. You agree once, and the choice is saved to your account.
+ One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
+ when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
+ validation still apply.
Choose an order type
| Order | What it does | Main tradeoff |
|---|
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
+ Triggers on Veranta and Ostium markets | Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other price triggers follow the venue's mid price. | The fill still uses the bid or ask, so it can differ from the mid price that triggered it.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.
How limit orders fill
A limit order always fills its whole size. It never fills partially and does not
depend on how much size is showing at its price. What price it fills at depends
on whether the order rests first.
- A buy limit is reached when the best ask is at or below the limit price. A
sell limit is reached when the best bid is at or above it.
- A limit placed at or through the current market does not rest. It fills right
away as a standard market order: the whole size at the best ask for a buy or
the best bid for a sell, under the same mark-based slippage cap as any market
order, and never worse than your limit price. The order ticket asks you to
confirm this before submitting.
- A limit resting in Open Orders fills at exactly its limit price once the
market has reached that price on two order book checks in a row. It never
fills at a better price than the limit. If the market moves back off the
price between those checks, the order keeps waiting and the count starts
over. The first missed confirmation can retry sooner; repeated misses
wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
+ A fresh book showing the market
strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
it does not fill using an old touch alone.
- A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.
Start a limit order from the chart
Hover the chart and a + button appears beside the price label on the price
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
\$100.02 fills at the \$100.01 cap; a best ask of \$99.99 fills at the \$100 mark.
Forex markets use the same rules with the forex slippage tier as the cap. The
tier is selected from order notional at the mark. FX limits retain their
price protection: a resting limit needs both the real opposing book price and
the mark to reach its limit, and marketable limits use market-style pricing,
never worse than their limit.
Other instruments retain their maximum adverse slippage caps. Larger notional
and lower open interest may widen those caps; a better opposing book price
within the cap is preserved.
+ The pricing schedule, in basis points of the reference price. Each value is the maximum adverse slippage, a worst-case cap rather than a fixed spread, including for Forex:
Major indices and commodities (NAS100, SP500, XAU, GOLD, SILVER, XAG, CL, BRENTOIL)
| Order notional | Maximum slippage |
|---|
| Up to \$100,000 | 0.25 bps |
Forex
| Order notional | Maximum slippage |
|---|
A Stop Loss reduces risk but cannot guarantee a particular fill price. Fast
markets, gaps, available liquidity, and the configured exit type still affect
execution.
Use execution protection
The Trading settings include:
- Max Market Slippage, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
and individual position closes;
- separate Non-Forex and Forex leverage caps for the order ticket;
- Warn Without Stop Loss for orders that can increase exposure;
- Resize TP/SL With Position to keep existing exits sized to a position
you add to;
- confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
+ - One-Click Chart Close for closing a position from the chart's position
+ line without the close dialog;
+ - Show Reverse Position and Confirm Reverse Position for the
+ Reverse Position button and its review;
+ - One-Click Trading, which sends market orders from a small Buy, Sell,
+ and Flat window with no review step;
- account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
All actions.
Read the complete Trading settings reference to configure
these defaults.
Customize the terminal layout
On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.
The Layout button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:
- Colour Scheme: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
Forex and index markets
Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
− on Hyperliquid, around the clock. The following markets price from oracle
+ on Hyperliquid, around the clock. Where offered, SP500 and NAS100 can also
+ trade on Ostium with standard market hours; see
+ Markets with two trading-hour options.
+ The following markets price from oracle
venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
each side:
| Markets | Venue |
|---|
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
Trading hours
These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
the clock. Times are New York time:
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|
−
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|---|---|
| US30 | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday |
+
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|---|---|
| US30, and SP500 and NAS100 on Ostium where offered | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday |
Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
A badge beside the market name marks these markets in the trade page header,
the market picker, search, and the Markets page, so you can tell they do not
trade around the clock before you open one. FX pairs show 24/5, since they
trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
Markets with two trading-hour options
Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
When another tab or device has synchronized a template change, your next
template edit uses that updated collection. If two tabs save conflicting
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
+ While One-Click Trading is on, the header also has a
+ lightning button that shows or hides the One-Click window.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
Each account holds one net position per market. Every fill on that market
updates the same position, so an order in the opposite direction trades
against what you already hold instead of opening a separate position.
| Opposite-side order size | Result |
|---|
Smaller than your position | Reduces the position. The rest stays open at the same entry price.
| Equal to your position | Closes the position completely. |
|---|
Larger than your position | Closes the position and opens one on the other side using only the size left over (a flip).
For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
+ One exception comes from the retiring Hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets.
+ A position you still hold there is separate from the Veranta market of the same
+ name, so a new EUR/USD or USD/JPY order opens or changes a Veranta position
+ and does not reduce the Hyperliquid one. See Retiring markets.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
Reverse a position
Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
side, or the largest size your margin allows. Holding a 1 BTC long and
reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short when your margin covers it. On the
chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
Copy Trading.
Reverse Position opens a short review first, so you can check the market, the
new side, and the estimated price before anything is sent. To reverse as soon
as you click, turn off
Confirm Reverse Position in Trading
settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
+ One-Click Trading
+ One-Click Trading places market orders from a small window on the trade page.
+ It is on by default in
+ Trading settings; turn it off there to
+ remove the window.
+ - On desktop, select One-Click in the bottom bar to show or hide the
+ window. Drag it anywhere on the trade page and resize it; its position and
+ size are remembered in that browser.
+ - On a phone, tap the lightning button in the trade header. The window sits
+ over the chart at the top or bottom edge; drag or tap its handle to move it
+ to the other edge.
+ The window shows Sell at the bid and Buy at the ask, with the size
+ between them, and Flat below.
+ - Buy and Sell send a market order for the size shown as soon as you
+ tap. There is no review step, even if you confirm orders in the order ticket.
+ Orders use your saved leverage, margin mode, and Max Market Slippage.
+ - A saved Stop Loss and Take Profit attach only when the order opens a new
+ position. Adding to a position lets its existing exits resize with it, and an
+ opposite order reduces the position.
+ - Flat closes your whole position in that market and cancels the market's
+ open orders. You can hide it with Show Flat Button in Trading settings.
+ Use the size controls to change the amount, or edit it to choose a unit: USD,
+ the asset, or Minis and Micros on supported index and commodity markets. A size
+ you change is saved for that market on all your devices. Each market's Stop
+ Loss and Take Profit are edited under One-Click Trading by Market in
+ Trading settings. Markets without their own settings start from your Quick Size
+ amount and your TP/SL preset.
+ Before your first One-Click order, a notice explains that orders send without
+ confirmation. You agree once, and the choice is saved to your account.
+ One-Click orders are sent immediately. Fills can differ from the price shown
+ when the market moves fast. Challenge rules, exposure limits, and order
+ validation still apply.
Choose an order type
| Order | What it does | Main tradeoff |
|---|
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
+ Triggers on Veranta and Ostium markets | Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other price triggers follow the venue's mid price. | The fill still uses the bid or ask, so it can differ from the mid price that triggered it.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.
How limit orders fill
A limit order always fills its whole size. It never fills partially and does not
depend on how much size is showing at its price. What price it fills at depends
on whether the order rests first.
- A buy limit is reached when the best ask is at or below the limit price. A
sell limit is reached when the best bid is at or above it.
- A limit placed at or through the current market does not rest. It fills right
away as a standard market order: the whole size at the best ask for a buy or
the best bid for a sell, under the same mark-based slippage cap as any market
order, and never worse than your limit price. The order ticket asks you to
confirm this before submitting.
- A limit resting in Open Orders fills at exactly its limit price once the
market has reached that price on two order book checks in a row. It never
fills at a better price than the limit. If the market moves back off the
price between those checks, the order keeps waiting and the count starts
over. The first missed confirmation can retry sooner; repeated misses
wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
− Where faster confirmation is enabled, a fresh book showing the market
+ A fresh book showing the market
strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
it does not fill using an old touch alone.
- A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.
Start a limit order from the chart
Hover the chart and a + button appears beside the price label on the price
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
\$100.02 fills at the \$100.01 cap; a best ask of \$99.99 fills at the \$100 mark.
Forex markets use the same rules with the forex slippage tier as the cap. The
tier is selected from order notional at the mark. FX limits retain their
price protection: a resting limit needs both the real opposing book price and
the mark to reach its limit, and marketable limits use market-style pricing,
never worse than their limit.
Other instruments retain their maximum adverse slippage caps. Larger notional
and lower open interest may widen those caps; a better opposing book price
within the cap is preserved.
− The pricing schedule, in basis points of the reference price (fixed per-side spread for FX, maximum adverse slippage for other markets):
+ The pricing schedule, in basis points of the reference price. Each value is the maximum adverse slippage, a worst-case cap rather than a fixed spread, including for Forex:
Major indices and commodities (NAS100, SP500, XAU, GOLD, SILVER, XAG, CL, BRENTOIL)
| Order notional | Maximum slippage |
|---|
| Up to \$100,000 | 0.25 bps |
Forex
| Order notional | Maximum slippage |
|---|
A Stop Loss reduces risk but cannot guarantee a particular fill price. Fast
markets, gaps, available liquidity, and the configured exit type still affect
execution.
Use execution protection
The Trading settings include:
- Max Market Slippage, a server-enforced limit for ordinary market orders
and individual position closes;
- separate Non-Forex and Forex leverage caps for the order ticket;
- Warn Without Stop Loss for orders that can increase exposure;
- Resize TP/SL With Position to keep existing exits sized to a position
you add to;
- confirmation controls for new orders and TP/SL chart drags;
+ - One-Click Chart Close for closing a position from the chart's position
+ line without the close dialog;
+ - Show Reverse Position and Confirm Reverse Position for the
+ Reverse Position button and its review;
+ - One-Click Trading, which sends market orders from a small Buy, Sell,
+ and Flat window with no review step;
- account-synced keyboard execution for placing orders, managing focused
positions, canceling focused orders, and the reviewed Cancel All and Close
All actions.
Read the complete Trading settings reference to configure
these defaults.
Customize the terminal layout
On desktop widths the trading terminal is rearrangeable. The chart stays in
the center with the activity tabs below it; the order book and order ticket
can move between the zones around them.
The Layout button (the layout icon in the market stats bar) opens the
terminal layout menu:
- Colour Scheme: start with Graphite, Midnight, or Aubergine, then choose
PremierMyFundedPerps · October competitionAdded schedule showing registration opens October 1 and trading opens October 5 and closes October 31, 2026; added information about free Trade Case entry task and automatic entry conditions.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
October competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/october-competition
Entry, account paths, ranking, and the free reset and its unlock tasks for the MyFundedPerps October Competition.
Entry
The October Competition has its own page under Competitions, with the schedule, prizes, and leaderboard. Join from that page while registration is open.
When you claim the free Trade Case for following MyFundedPerps on X, you are entered automatically if registration is open and you meet the competition's entry requirements. The claim confirmation says You're in the October Competition and links to the competition page. If automatic entry is not possible, the confirmation invites you to join manually instead.
Choose your path
Before your first trade, choose a path on the competition page. The path sets your starting balance and how your leverage and exposure caps are scaled.
| Path | Starting balance | Leverage and exposure caps |
|---|
Scaled leverage rounds down to a whole number and never drops below 1x. For example, a market with a 5x leverage cap allows 20x on Blitz and 2x on Whale.
You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.
Trading and ranking
There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.
The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.
After
October competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/october-competition
Entry, account paths, ranking, and the free reset and its unlock tasks for the MyFundedPerps October Competition.
+ Schedule
+ All times are New York time.
+
Registration opens October 1, 2026 at 12:00 AM Trading opens October 5, 2026 at 12:00 PM Registration and trading close October 31, 2026 at 12:00 PM
| Event | Time |
|---|
+ You can join until trading closes. Joining late leaves less time to trade, and
+ no adjustment is made. The competition page shows these times in your own time
+ zone.
Entry
The October Competition has its own page under Competitions, with the schedule, prizes, and leaderboard. Join from that page while registration is open.
+ The free Trade Case task list for following MyFundedPerps on X also shows an
+ optional Enter Competition step while registration is open. Entry is free
+ and does not affect your Trade Case.
When you claim the free Trade Case for following MyFundedPerps on X, you are entered automatically if registration is open and you meet the competition's entry requirements. The claim confirmation says You're in the October Competition and links to the competition page. If automatic entry is not possible, the confirmation invites you to join manually instead.
Choose your path
Before your first trade, choose a path on the competition page. The path sets your starting balance and how your leverage and exposure caps are scaled.
| Path | Starting balance | Leverage and exposure caps |
|---|
Scaled leverage rounds down to a whole number and never drops below 1x. For example, a market with a 5x leverage cap allows 20x on Blitz and 2x on Whale.
You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.
Trading and ranking
There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.
The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.
October competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/october-competition
Entry, account paths, ranking, and the free reset and its unlock tasks for the MyFundedPerps October Competition.
+ Schedule
+ All times are New York time.
+
Registration opens October 1, 2026 at 12:00 AM Trading opens October 5, 2026 at 12:00 PM Registration and trading close October 31, 2026 at 12:00 PM
| Event | Time |
|---|
+ You can join until trading closes. Joining late leaves less time to trade, and
+ no adjustment is made. The competition page shows these times in your own time
+ zone.
Entry
The October Competition has its own page under Competitions, with the schedule, prizes, and leaderboard. Join from that page while registration is open.
+ The free Trade Case task list for following MyFundedPerps on X also shows an
+ optional Enter Competition step while registration is open. Entry is free
+ and does not affect your Trade Case.
When you claim the free Trade Case for following MyFundedPerps on X, you are entered automatically if registration is open and you meet the competition's entry requirements. The claim confirmation says You're in the October Competition and links to the competition page. If automatic entry is not possible, the confirmation invites you to join manually instead.
Choose your path
Before your first trade, choose a path on the competition page. The path sets your starting balance and how your leverage and exposure caps are scaled.
| Path | Starting balance | Leverage and exposure caps |
|---|
Scaled leverage rounds down to a whole number and never drops below 1x. For example, a market with a 5x leverage cap allows 20x on Blitz and 2x on Whale.
You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.
Trading and ranking
There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.
The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.
PremierMyFundedPerps · GuidesAdded nine sections covering markets by asset class, custom chart indicators, closed trade review, competitions, and affiliate program details.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Guides
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/index
Task-oriented guides for starting, trading, completing challenges, using copy trading, and solving common problems.
Use these guides to buy a challenge, place trades, manage risk, and resolve
common problems. For a field-by-field explanation of account preferences, use
the Settings reference.
Go from sign-in to your first simulated trade.
Place and manage orders, set exits, and configure risk controls.
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand shared
limits.
− Check execution commissions, entry and exit examples, and hourly swap fees.
Estimate position size, drawdown, holding costs, and payout splits with
clearly defined scenarios.
Read your plan terms and understand account progression.
Elite plan sizes, daily loss limit options, boosted leverage, and payouts.
Follow purchase, evaluation, funding, payouts, billing, and rewards from
start to finish.
Coordinate trades across challenge accounts you own.
Diagnose common trading, settings, copy, and billing problems.
Look up trading and MyFundedPerps terminology.
After
Guides
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/index
Task-oriented guides for starting, trading, completing challenges, using copy trading, and solving common problems.
Use these guides to buy a challenge, place trades, manage risk, and resolve
common problems. For a field-by-field explanation of account preferences, use
the Settings reference.
Go from sign-in to your first simulated trade.
Place and manage orders, set exits, and configure risk controls.
+ See every market you can trade, grouped by asset class.
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand shared
limits.
Estimate position size, drawdown, holding costs, and payout splits with
clearly defined scenarios.
+ Write your own chart indicators with adjustable inputs.
+ Check execution commissions, entry and exit examples, and hourly swap fees.
+ Review closed trades and add notes, setups, tags, and ratings.
Read your plan terms and understand account progression.
Elite plan sizes, daily loss limit options, boosted leverage, and payouts.
+ Find current, upcoming, and past competitions and how standings work.
+ Entry, rules, prizes, and daily case drops for the Launch Competition.
+ Schedule, account paths, ranking, and the free reset for the October
+ Competition.
Follow purchase, evaluation, funding, payouts, billing, and rewards from
start to finish.
Coordinate trades across challenge accounts you own.
+ Apply, share your code, earn commission and tier rewards, and get paid.
Diagnose common trading, settings, copy, and billing problems.
Look up trading and MyFundedPerps terminology.
Guides
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/index
Task-oriented guides for starting, trading, completing challenges, using copy trading, and solving common problems.
Use these guides to buy a challenge, place trades, manage risk, and resolve
common problems. For a field-by-field explanation of account preferences, use
the Settings reference.
Go from sign-in to your first simulated trade.
Place and manage orders, set exits, and configure risk controls.
+ See every market you can trade, grouped by asset class.
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand shared
limits.
− Check execution commissions, entry and exit examples, and hourly swap fees.
Estimate position size, drawdown, holding costs, and payout splits with
clearly defined scenarios.
+ Write your own chart indicators with adjustable inputs.
+ Check execution commissions, entry and exit examples, and hourly swap fees.
+ Review closed trades and add notes, setups, tags, and ratings.
Read your plan terms and understand account progression.
Elite plan sizes, daily loss limit options, boosted leverage, and payouts.
+ Find current, upcoming, and past competitions and how standings work.
+ Entry, rules, prizes, and daily case drops for the Launch Competition.
+ Schedule, account paths, ranking, and the free reset for the October
+ Competition.
Follow purchase, evaluation, funding, payouts, billing, and rewards from
start to finish.
Coordinate trades across challenge accounts you own.
+ Apply, share your code, earn commission and tier rewards, and get paid.
Diagnose common trading, settings, copy, and billing problems.
Look up trading and MyFundedPerps terminology.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsAdded NAS100 and SP500 to the list of instruments with boosted leverage on Elite accounts.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
− rule, and boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
| Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
|---|
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
− Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
| Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure |
|---|
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
After
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
+ rule, and boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
| Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
|---|
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
+ Elite accounts use boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
| Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure |
|---|
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
− rule, and boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
+ rule, and boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
| Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
|---|
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
− Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
+ Elite accounts use boosted leverage on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
| Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure |
|---|
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
PremierMyFundedPerps · Challenges and RulesAdded information about hiding API sandbox accounts using a similar method to hiding competition accounts.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Passed | The evaluation reached its passing conditions. Trading stops on the completed evaluation while the next stage is prepared.
Failed | A rule breach or authorized account decision ended the account.
Funded | The platform issued a funded-stage account after the required review, identity, and agreement flow.
| Closed or archived | The account remains in history but is no longer active. |
|---|
After an evaluation passes
The account switcher's Active filter keeps your passed evaluation visible
until its funded account is issued. The evaluation still shows Passed and
cannot take new orders. Once the funded account is issued, use the Passed
filter or clear the filters to find the completed evaluation.
A competition account counts as Active while the competition runs. To keep
it out of the account switcher, open Filter and check **Hide Competition
Accounts**. The account keeps trading and stays in the competition; uncheck the
− option to show it again.
Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.
Maximum funded allocation
You can hold up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
After
Passed | The evaluation reached its passing conditions. Trading stops on the completed evaluation while the next stage is prepared.
Failed | A rule breach or authorized account decision ended the account.
Funded | The platform issued a funded-stage account after the required review, identity, and agreement flow.
| Closed or archived | The account remains in history but is no longer active. |
|---|
After an evaluation passes
The account switcher's Active filter keeps your passed evaluation visible
until its funded account is issued. The evaluation still shows Passed and
cannot take new orders. Once the funded account is issued, use the Passed
filter or clear the filters to find the completed evaluation.
A competition account counts as Active while the competition runs. To keep
it out of the account switcher, open Filter and check **Hide Competition
Accounts**. The account keeps trading and stays in the competition; uncheck the
+ option to show it again. API sandbox accounts work the same way with **Hide
+ Sandbox Accounts**.
Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.
Maximum funded allocation
You can hold up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Passed | The evaluation reached its passing conditions. Trading stops on the completed evaluation while the next stage is prepared.
Failed | A rule breach or authorized account decision ended the account.
Funded | The platform issued a funded-stage account after the required review, identity, and agreement flow.
| Closed or archived | The account remains in history but is no longer active. |
|---|
After an evaluation passes
The account switcher's Active filter keeps your passed evaluation visible
until its funded account is issued. The evaluation still shows Passed and
cannot take new orders. Once the funded account is issued, use the Passed
filter or clear the filters to find the completed evaluation.
A competition account counts as Active while the competition runs. To keep
it out of the account switcher, open Filter and check **Hide Competition
Accounts**. The account keeps trading and stays in the competition; uncheck the
− option to show it again.
+ option to show it again. API sandbox accounts work the same way with **Hide
+ Sandbox Accounts**.
Follow the action shown on the dashboard. Depending on the account and current
workflow, you may need to complete identity verification, review and sign the
customer agreement, or wait for a funding review before the funded account is
available in the account switcher.
Maximum funded allocation
You can hold up to \$300K in total funded allocation, with a maximum of
\$100K per model type. Prime, Select, Signature, and Elite are separate
model types. Original account sizes add together within each model, even when
you use several smaller accounts. A passed account that would exceed
either limit enters Funding Review after identity verification and agreement
completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
PremierMyFundedPerps · PayoutsAdded guidance on contacting support for mistaken store-credit selection, and clarified that payout review can be automatic or staff-conducted with frequency affecting timing.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
when you submit, and the store credit is added immediately. The gross account
deduction and new payout cycle also take effect immediately. Requests that need
verification or have unresolved trading reviews remain pending for review.
On other accounts, the store-credit portion receives a 10% boost. For example, converting \$100 of
a payout grants \$110 in store credit. The boosted credit cannot be withdrawn
as cash. It is added when the payout is paid, while any cash portion is sent
through Rise.
Like all store credit, it expires 45 days after it is added. See
Store Credit Expiry.
The full requested amount still counts toward the payout-cycle deduction. The
boost increases the store-credit value you receive; it does not increase the
amount deducted from the funded account.
Submit and wait for review
Eligible \$1K and \$2.5K Select store-credit-only payouts complete on submission.
− Other payout requests go through review. While a request is under review,
trading on that funded account is locked. Do not submit another request or try
to change the supporting balance.
Payout History shows the requested amount, cash and boosted store-credit parts,
request and decision dates, current status, and the gross deduction for a paid
payout. A paid payout can also show a certificate action.
Eligibility is checked again when the request is submitted. If account state
changed, review the updated blocker and try again only after it is resolved.
After
when you submit, and the store credit is added immediately. The gross account
deduction and new payout cycle also take effect immediately. Requests that need
verification or have unresolved trading reviews remain pending for review.
On other accounts, the store-credit portion receives a 10% boost. For example, converting \$100 of
a payout grants \$110 in store credit. The boosted credit cannot be withdrawn
as cash. It is added when the payout is paid, while any cash portion is sent
through Rise.
Like all store credit, it expires 45 days after it is added. See
Store Credit Expiry.
The full requested amount still counts toward the payout-cycle deduction. The
boost increases the store-credit value you receive; it does not increase the
amount deducted from the funded account.
+ If you chose store credit by mistake, contact support before spending any of
+ that credit.
Submit and wait for review
Eligible \$1K and \$2.5K Select store-credit-only payouts complete on submission.
+ Other payout requests go through review. Requests may be reviewed
+ automatically or by staff. Frequent requests can take longer to review. While a
+ request is under review,
trading on that funded account is locked. Do not submit another request or try
to change the supporting balance.
Payout History shows the requested amount, cash and boosted store-credit parts,
request and decision dates, current status, and the gross deduction for a paid
payout. A paid payout can also show a certificate action.
Eligibility is checked again when the request is submitted. If account state
changed, review the updated blocker and try again only after it is resolved.
when you submit, and the store credit is added immediately. The gross account
deduction and new payout cycle also take effect immediately. Requests that need
verification or have unresolved trading reviews remain pending for review.
On other accounts, the store-credit portion receives a 10% boost. For example, converting \$100 of
a payout grants \$110 in store credit. The boosted credit cannot be withdrawn
as cash. It is added when the payout is paid, while any cash portion is sent
through Rise.
Like all store credit, it expires 45 days after it is added. See
Store Credit Expiry.
The full requested amount still counts toward the payout-cycle deduction. The
boost increases the store-credit value you receive; it does not increase the
amount deducted from the funded account.
+ If you chose store credit by mistake, contact support before spending any of
+ that credit.
Submit and wait for review
Eligible \$1K and \$2.5K Select store-credit-only payouts complete on submission.
− Other payout requests go through review. While a request is under review,
+ Other payout requests go through review. Requests may be reviewed
+ automatically or by staff. Frequent requests can take longer to review. While a
+ request is under review,
trading on that funded account is locked. Do not submit another request or try
to change the supporting balance.
Payout History shows the requested amount, cash and boosted store-credit parts,
request and decision dates, current status, and the gross deduction for a paid
payout. A paid payout can also show a certificate action.
Eligibility is checked again when the request is submitted. If account state
changed, review the updated blocker and try again only after it is resolved.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Buying a ChallengeAffiliate @CODE links now apply automatically at checkout instead of taking priority over referral cookies, and PERPS no longer applies automatically without explicit entry.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
\$10K, \$25K, \$50K, and \$100K accounts. Elite offers \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and
\$50K accounts, each with a choice of a 3% daily loss limit (3% DLL) or no
daily loss limit (No DLL). Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at
checkout; it cannot be changed after purchase. List prices are \$49, \$95,
\$249, and \$495 with 3% DLL, and \$89, \$175, \$449, and \$889 with No DLL.
See Elite Accounts. \$200K
accounts are not available at checkout.
Every Elite account includes an Elite Case,
whose tier depends on the size and DLL option. The Elite pricing card and the
checkout order summary show the case your selection includes, and the sealed
case is added to Rewards when the order is paid.
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
− show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
If you enter a free account or case gift code at checkout and select
Add Code, checkout opens Redeem Code on the Rewards page and redeems it
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked Coming Soon
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
and total update with every change. On a phone the whole order stays open above
the payment form: choose a plan from Choose a Challenge, pick an account
size, and open Trading Rules or Payouts and Perks to see the full rules.
Review Your Order shows the fee, the Discount or Affiliate Code field,
and the total.
Pay particular attention to:
- the single evaluation profit target;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
− - the daily payout window and gross minimum;
- funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
- challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.
Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.
Buy more than one account
When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
Accounts control appears under Account Size**. Use it to buy several
accounts of the selected plan and size in one order:
| Account size | Accounts per order |
|---|
The payment page shows the original amount, applied credit, expiry time, and any
Reserved Store Credit. Resume Payment opens that invoice again.
Check Status retrieves its current provider status. The page can still manage
an existing invoice when new challenge purchases or store-credit checkout are
unavailable.
Use Cancel Invoice to cancel an unpaid invoice. Credit is released only after
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.
3. Apply a checkout code
− Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of PERPS and
− any older referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in
− even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code
− before applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active
− referral cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it.
− Otherwise, checkout applies PERPS when that offer is enabled.
You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Discount or Affiliate Code.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see PERPS; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.
− Use Add Code to replace the automatically applied discount with another
− discount or affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.
When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
under Discount or Affiliate Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid.
After
\$10K, \$25K, \$50K, and \$100K accounts. Elite offers \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and
\$50K accounts, each with a choice of a 3% daily loss limit (3% DLL) or no
daily loss limit (No DLL). Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at
checkout; it cannot be changed after purchase. List prices are \$49, \$95,
\$249, and \$495 with 3% DLL, and \$89, \$175, \$449, and \$889 with No DLL.
See Elite Accounts. \$200K
accounts are not available at checkout.
Every Elite account includes an Elite Case,
whose tier depends on the size and DLL option. The Elite pricing card and the
checkout order summary show the case your selection includes, and the sealed
case is added to Rewards when the order is paid.
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
+ show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link is applied automatically at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. PERPS is not applied automatically: to use it or any other code, enter it and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
If you enter a free account or case gift code at checkout and select
Add Code, checkout opens Redeem Code on the Rewards page and redeems it
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked Coming Soon
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
and total update with every change. On a phone the whole order stays open above
the payment form: choose a plan from Choose a Challenge, pick an account
size, and open Trading Rules or Payouts and Perks to see the full rules.
Review Your Order shows the fee, the Discount or Affiliate Code field,
and the total.
Pay particular attention to:
- the single evaluation profit target;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
+ - the daily payout window (Elite has none) and gross minimum;
- funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
- challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.
Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.
Buy more than one account
When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
Accounts control appears under Account Size**. Use it to buy several
accounts of the selected plan and size in one order:
| Account size | Accounts per order |
|---|
The payment page shows the original amount, applied credit, expiry time, and any
Reserved Store Credit. Resume Payment opens that invoice again.
Check Status retrieves its current provider status. The page can still manage
an existing invoice when new challenge purchases or store-credit checkout are
unavailable.
Use Cancel Invoice to cancel an unpaid invoice. Credit is released only after
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.
3. Apply a checkout code
+ Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of any older
+ referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in even when
+ attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code before
+ applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active referral
+ cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it. Otherwise,
+ checkout starts without a code; PERPS is shown on the account-size cards
+ but applies only when you enter it.
You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Discount or Affiliate Code.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see PERPS; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.
+ Use Add Code to enter a discount or affiliate code, or to replace an
+ automatically applied affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.
When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
under Discount or Affiliate Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid.
\$10K, \$25K, \$50K, and \$100K accounts. Elite offers \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and
\$50K accounts, each with a choice of a 3% daily loss limit (3% DLL) or no
daily loss limit (No DLL). Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at
checkout; it cannot be changed after purchase. List prices are \$49, \$95,
\$249, and \$495 with 3% DLL, and \$89, \$175, \$449, and \$889 with No DLL.
See Elite Accounts. \$200K
accounts are not available at checkout.
Every Elite account includes an Elite Case,
whose tier depends on the size and DLL option. The Elite pricing card and the
checkout order summary show the case your selection includes, and the sealed
case is added to Rewards when the order is paid.
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
− show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
+ show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link is applied automatically at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. PERPS is not applied automatically: to use it or any other code, enter it and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
If you enter a free account or case gift code at checkout and select
Add Code, checkout opens Redeem Code on the Rewards page and redeems it
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked Coming Soon
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
and total update with every change. On a phone the whole order stays open above
the payment form: choose a plan from Choose a Challenge, pick an account
size, and open Trading Rules or Payouts and Perks to see the full rules.
Review Your Order shows the fee, the Discount or Affiliate Code field,
and the total.
Pay particular attention to:
- the single evaluation profit target;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
− - the daily payout window and gross minimum;
+ - the daily payout window (Elite has none) and gross minimum;
- funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
- challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.
Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.
Buy more than one account
When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
Accounts control appears under Account Size**. Use it to buy several
accounts of the selected plan and size in one order:
| Account size | Accounts per order |
|---|
The payment page shows the original amount, applied credit, expiry time, and any
Reserved Store Credit. Resume Payment opens that invoice again.
Check Status retrieves its current provider status. The page can still manage
an existing invoice when new challenge purchases or store-credit checkout are
unavailable.
Use Cancel Invoice to cancel an unpaid invoice. Credit is released only after
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.
3. Apply a checkout code
− Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of PERPS and
− any older referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in
− even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code
− before applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active
− referral cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it.
− Otherwise, checkout applies PERPS when that offer is enabled.
+ Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of any older
+ referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in even when
+ attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code before
+ applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active referral
+ cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it. Otherwise,
+ checkout starts without a code; PERPS is shown on the account-size cards
+ but applies only when you enter it.
You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Discount or Affiliate Code.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see PERPS; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.
− Use Add Code to replace the automatically applied discount with another
− discount or affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
+ Use Add Code to enter a discount or affiliate code, or to replace an
+ automatically applied affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.
When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
under Discount or Affiliate Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Billing and RewardsAffiliate milestone rewards now issued as gift codes on Giveaways tab instead of sealed cases; past draw winners display method added.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
MyFundedPerps keeps billing records, platform rewards, and funded payouts as
separate parts of the product.
- Billing records challenge purchases and invoices.
- Rewards contains reward cases, FP Points, and enabled campaigns.
- Payouts sends eligible funded-account profit through the payout flow.
For funded profit, use the Payouts guide.
Your Rewards page
Open Rewards to manage your cases,
giveaways, FP Points, and store credit in one place. Overview shows cases
ready to open and any open giveaways. My Rewards contains unopened cases,
account prizes awaiting delivery, and discount codes won from cases. Giveaways lists every open giveaway with
its own entry details, so you can enter each one separately, followed by past
− draws; FP Points, Store Credit, and Pull History remain separate views
within Rewards when available.
Select Redeem Code to enter a gift code or drop password in a dialog.
This link opens that
dialog directly after sign-in. Existing Redeem and Giveaways links continue
to take you to the corresponding Rewards view. Each selected view stays in
the URL, so reload and Back or Forward return to the same place.
You can browse available giveaways before signing in. Sign in to enter or
view your own rewards. If an entry cannot be confirmed, turn off any
content blockers for the site, check your connection, and try again. On smaller screens, swipe the section tabs to reach
additional views.
Giveaway entry requires an enabled public profile. If you have not finished
account onboarding, select Complete Onboarding in the entry dialog. After
other Trade Case you received. Open it from My Rewards; opening it requires
the same completed account details as other cases. The offer ends once all
follow tasks have been handed out. If you already received a follow task by
then, you can still finish it and claim your case.
Claims are checked for fraud. A claim made from a browser or device that cannot
be verified is not accepted; claim again from your usual browser. Accepted
claims add a Trade Case immediately, including when you share a device with
another user. Previously held claims can also be opened without waiting for
approval. An explicitly declined claim remains unavailable, and its X account
cannot be used for another claim. Contact support if you think a claim was
declined by mistake.
Affiliate milestone rewards
− Affiliate sales milestones can grant sealed cases automatically. Each milestone
− reward is issued once and remains yours after refunds. Open the granted case
− on the Rewards page. Some milestones also issue a separate Prime evaluation
− account; that account is independent of the case result. See the
− Affiliate Program guide for the milestone rewards.
Redeem a free account or case code
Open Redeem Code, sign in, and complete
onboarding if prompted. Paste the full code and select Redeem Code. You can
also reach this page from Rewards. If you enter a free account or case code in
the checkout code field and select Add Code, checkout takes you to Redeem
Code and redeems it for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout.
Redeem older codes without a prefix directly on Rewards.
Each code can be used once and does not expire. An account code adds a free
evaluation account with the challenge size and profit split configured when
the code was issued. Normal challenge rules and funding requirements apply.
A case code adds one sealed case to Rewards; redeeming the code does not open
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
− An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that was issued to them to share
− with their audience.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
The password opens a question page with one of six modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
After
MyFundedPerps keeps billing records, platform rewards, and funded payouts as
separate parts of the product.
- Billing records challenge purchases and invoices.
- Rewards contains reward cases, FP Points, and enabled campaigns.
- Payouts sends eligible funded-account profit through the payout flow.
For funded profit, use the Payouts guide.
Your Rewards page
Open Rewards to manage your cases,
giveaways, FP Points, and store credit in one place. Overview shows cases
ready to open and any open giveaways. My Rewards contains unopened cases,
account prizes awaiting delivery, and discount codes won from cases. Giveaways lists every open giveaway with
its own entry details, so you can enter each one separately, followed by past
+ draws. When a past draw has more winners than fit on its row, select **Show
+ All to open Giveaway Winners**, where you can search the full list by
+ username. FP Points, Store Credit, and Pull History remain separate views
within Rewards when available.
Select Redeem Code to enter a gift code or drop password in a dialog.
This link opens that
dialog directly after sign-in. Existing Redeem and Giveaways links continue
to take you to the corresponding Rewards view. Each selected view stays in
the URL, so reload and Back or Forward return to the same place.
You can browse available giveaways before signing in. Sign in to enter or
view your own rewards. If an entry cannot be confirmed, turn off any
content blockers for the site, check your connection, and try again. On smaller screens, swipe the section tabs to reach
additional views.
Giveaway entry requires an enabled public profile. If you have not finished
account onboarding, select Complete Onboarding in the entry dialog. After
other Trade Case you received. Open it from My Rewards; opening it requires
the same completed account details as other cases. The offer ends once all
follow tasks have been handed out. If you already received a follow task by
then, you can still finish it and claim your case.
Claims are checked for fraud. A claim made from a browser or device that cannot
be verified is not accepted; claim again from your usual browser. Accepted
claims add a Trade Case immediately, including when you share a device with
another user. Previously held claims can also be opened without waiting for
approval. An explicitly declined claim remains unavailable, and its X account
cannot be used for another claim. Contact support if you think a claim was
declined by mistake.
Affiliate milestone rewards
+ Reaching an affiliate tier issues one-time rewards as single-use gift codes on
+ the Giveaways tab of the Affiliates page. Each tier reward is issued once
+ and remains yours after refunds. Redeem a code on your own account with
+ Redeem Code, or give it away. See
+ Reward tiers for each tier's
+ rewards.
Redeem a free account or case code
Open Redeem Code, sign in, and complete
onboarding if prompted. Paste the full code and select Redeem Code. You can
also reach this page from Rewards. If you enter a free account or case code in
the checkout code field and select Add Code, checkout takes you to Redeem
Code and redeems it for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout.
Redeem older codes without a prefix directly on Rewards.
Each code can be used once and does not expire. An account code adds a free
evaluation account with the challenge size and profit split configured when
the code was issued. Normal challenge rules and funding requirements apply.
A case code adds one sealed case to Rewards; redeeming the code does not open
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
+ An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
+ share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
+ affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
The password opens a question page with one of six modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
MyFundedPerps keeps billing records, platform rewards, and funded payouts as
separate parts of the product.
- Billing records challenge purchases and invoices.
- Rewards contains reward cases, FP Points, and enabled campaigns.
- Payouts sends eligible funded-account profit through the payout flow.
For funded profit, use the Payouts guide.
Your Rewards page
Open Rewards to manage your cases,
giveaways, FP Points, and store credit in one place. Overview shows cases
ready to open and any open giveaways. My Rewards contains unopened cases,
account prizes awaiting delivery, and discount codes won from cases. Giveaways lists every open giveaway with
its own entry details, so you can enter each one separately, followed by past
− draws; FP Points, Store Credit, and Pull History remain separate views
+ draws. When a past draw has more winners than fit on its row, select **Show
+ All to open Giveaway Winners**, where you can search the full list by
+ username. FP Points, Store Credit, and Pull History remain separate views
within Rewards when available.
Select Redeem Code to enter a gift code or drop password in a dialog.
This link opens that
dialog directly after sign-in. Existing Redeem and Giveaways links continue
to take you to the corresponding Rewards view. Each selected view stays in
the URL, so reload and Back or Forward return to the same place.
You can browse available giveaways before signing in. Sign in to enter or
view your own rewards. If an entry cannot be confirmed, turn off any
content blockers for the site, check your connection, and try again. On smaller screens, swipe the section tabs to reach
additional views.
Giveaway entry requires an enabled public profile. If you have not finished
account onboarding, select Complete Onboarding in the entry dialog. After
other Trade Case you received. Open it from My Rewards; opening it requires
the same completed account details as other cases. The offer ends once all
follow tasks have been handed out. If you already received a follow task by
then, you can still finish it and claim your case.
Claims are checked for fraud. A claim made from a browser or device that cannot
be verified is not accepted; claim again from your usual browser. Accepted
claims add a Trade Case immediately, including when you share a device with
another user. Previously held claims can also be opened without waiting for
approval. An explicitly declined claim remains unavailable, and its X account
cannot be used for another claim. Contact support if you think a claim was
declined by mistake.
Affiliate milestone rewards
− Affiliate sales milestones can grant sealed cases automatically. Each milestone
− reward is issued once and remains yours after refunds. Open the granted case
− on the Rewards page. Some milestones also issue a separate Prime evaluation
− account; that account is independent of the case result. See the
− Affiliate Program guide for the milestone rewards.
+ Reaching an affiliate tier issues one-time rewards as single-use gift codes on
+ the Giveaways tab of the Affiliates page. Each tier reward is issued once
+ and remains yours after refunds. Redeem a code on your own account with
+ Redeem Code, or give it away. See
+ Reward tiers for each tier's
+ rewards.
Redeem a free account or case code
Open Redeem Code, sign in, and complete
onboarding if prompted. Paste the full code and select Redeem Code. You can
also reach this page from Rewards. If you enter a free account or case code in
the checkout code field and select Add Code, checkout takes you to Redeem
Code and redeems it for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout.
Redeem older codes without a prefix directly on Rewards.
Each code can be used once and does not expire. An account code adds a free
evaluation account with the challenge size and profit split configured when
the code was issued. Normal challenge rules and funding requirements apply.
A case code adds one sealed case to Rewards; redeeming the code does not open
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
− An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that was issued to them to share
− with their audience.
+ An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that MyFundedPerps issued to them to
+ share with their audience. Affiliate tier reward codes are different: the
+ affiliate can redeem them or give them away.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
personal code. When MyFundedPerps announces a drop, enter the password on
Redeem Code or open the announced
link, which fills the password in for you. Passwords are not case sensitive.
The password opens a question page with one of six modes:
- 2048: Slide numbered tiles together until one reaches the drop's target tile.
- Pipes: Draw pipes that connect each pair of matching numbered dots and fill
every cell of the board.
- Unblock: Slide blocks out of the way to free the green arrow block
PremierMyFundedPerps · Asset Exposure LimitsMarket Group Caps for Elite accounts expanded to include NAS100 and SP500 in addition to indices, US30, gold, and oil.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Asset Exposure Limits
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/asset-exposure-limits
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand how per-user open notional limits affect your orders.
Find Current Market Limits
Open Market Exposure Caps
for the current list of tradable markets, their categories, maximum leverage,
and exposure caps. Search by market name or symbol to find an asset.
By default the page shows All Products: each market's cap range across
every challenge product and account size. Choose a Product and an
Account Size to see the exact caps for that account. The page also shows
that account's Account Exposure Limit when one applies, and for Elite, its
− Market Group Caps on indices, US30, gold, and oil. The selection is saved in the
page link, so you can bookmark or share the caps for one product and size.
The table uses the platform's market configuration. Check that page for
current values when planning a trade; this guide explains the rules without
copying limits that can change.
How Exposure Is Calculated
A market exposure cap limits the combined open notional across your own
accounts of the same challenge product and account size trading that market.
Your matching accounts share one allowance. Other users have separate
allowances, even when their accounts have the same product and size.
Elite accounts are the exception: each Elite account has its own allowance for
each market, counting only that account's position. Your other Elite accounts
of the same size do not use up its capacity, and a reduction frees capacity
If you type a size larger than that remaining capacity, a note under Size
shows how far over the cap the order is, with Use Max to fill in the largest
size that fits. When no capacity is left, the note says the cap is reached.
Because the remaining capacity is an estimate, you can still submit the order;
the engine rejects it at fill if it would exceed the cap.
A position keeps the same exposure group while it remains open,
including when you add, reduce, or reverse its size. Retiring a challenge
product does not move existing exposure into another group. After you fully
close the position, a new position uses the current product grouping.
Read the Cap Table
- Max Leverage is the market's maximum leverage. Your account's rules can
impose a lower limit. Elite accounts have higher leverage and their own
− exposure caps on indices, US30, gold, and oil; with Elite selected, the column
shows the Elite leverage. See
Elite Accounts.
- Exposure Cap is the configured per-user notional ceiling, not the
remaining capacity available for your next order.
- With All Products selected, a range with an asterisk means the cap
varies by challenge product and account size. The range shows the smallest and largest configured caps;
each value applies separately to each user’s matching accounts, or to each
Elite account on its own.
- No Cap means market exposure enforcement is disabled. Available margin,
account rules, and other order checks still apply.
For your account's configured Maximum Position Size, sign in, select an
account, and hover over the market's leverage badge. Read the
After
Asset Exposure Limits
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/asset-exposure-limits
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand how per-user open notional limits affect your orders.
Find Current Market Limits
Open Market Exposure Caps
for the current list of tradable markets, their categories, maximum leverage,
and exposure caps. Search by market name or symbol to find an asset.
By default the page shows All Products: each market's cap range across
every challenge product and account size. Choose a Product and an
Account Size to see the exact caps for that account. The page also shows
that account's Account Exposure Limit when one applies, and for Elite, its
+ Market Group Caps on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. The selection is saved in the
page link, so you can bookmark or share the caps for one product and size.
The table uses the platform's market configuration. Check that page for
current values when planning a trade; this guide explains the rules without
copying limits that can change.
How Exposure Is Calculated
A market exposure cap limits the combined open notional across your own
accounts of the same challenge product and account size trading that market.
Your matching accounts share one allowance. Other users have separate
allowances, even when their accounts have the same product and size.
Elite accounts are the exception: each Elite account has its own allowance for
each market, counting only that account's position. Your other Elite accounts
of the same size do not use up its capacity, and a reduction frees capacity
If you type a size larger than that remaining capacity, a note under Size
shows how far over the cap the order is, with Use Max to fill in the largest
size that fits. When no capacity is left, the note says the cap is reached.
Because the remaining capacity is an estimate, you can still submit the order;
the engine rejects it at fill if it would exceed the cap.
A position keeps the same exposure group while it remains open,
including when you add, reduce, or reverse its size. Retiring a challenge
product does not move existing exposure into another group. After you fully
close the position, a new position uses the current product grouping.
Read the Cap Table
- Max Leverage is the market's maximum leverage. Your account's rules can
impose a lower limit. Elite accounts have higher leverage and their own
+ exposure caps on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil; with Elite selected, the column
shows the Elite leverage. See
Elite Accounts.
- Exposure Cap is the configured per-user notional ceiling, not the
remaining capacity available for your next order.
- With All Products selected, a range with an asterisk means the cap
varies by challenge product and account size. The range shows the smallest and largest configured caps;
each value applies separately to each user’s matching accounts, or to each
Elite account on its own.
- No Cap means market exposure enforcement is disabled. Available margin,
account rules, and other order checks still apply.
For your account's configured Maximum Position Size, sign in, select an
account, and hover over the market's leverage badge. Read the
Asset Exposure Limits
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/asset-exposure-limits
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand how per-user open notional limits affect your orders.
Find Current Market Limits
Open Market Exposure Caps
for the current list of tradable markets, their categories, maximum leverage,
and exposure caps. Search by market name or symbol to find an asset.
By default the page shows All Products: each market's cap range across
every challenge product and account size. Choose a Product and an
Account Size to see the exact caps for that account. The page also shows
that account's Account Exposure Limit when one applies, and for Elite, its
− Market Group Caps on indices, US30, gold, and oil. The selection is saved in the
+ Market Group Caps on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil. The selection is saved in the
page link, so you can bookmark or share the caps for one product and size.
The table uses the platform's market configuration. Check that page for
current values when planning a trade; this guide explains the rules without
copying limits that can change.
How Exposure Is Calculated
A market exposure cap limits the combined open notional across your own
accounts of the same challenge product and account size trading that market.
Your matching accounts share one allowance. Other users have separate
allowances, even when their accounts have the same product and size.
Elite accounts are the exception: each Elite account has its own allowance for
each market, counting only that account's position. Your other Elite accounts
of the same size do not use up its capacity, and a reduction frees capacity
If you type a size larger than that remaining capacity, a note under Size
shows how far over the cap the order is, with Use Max to fill in the largest
size that fits. When no capacity is left, the note says the cap is reached.
Because the remaining capacity is an estimate, you can still submit the order;
the engine rejects it at fill if it would exceed the cap.
A position keeps the same exposure group while it remains open,
including when you add, reduce, or reverse its size. Retiring a challenge
product does not move existing exposure into another group. After you fully
close the position, a new position uses the current product grouping.
Read the Cap Table
- Max Leverage is the market's maximum leverage. Your account's rules can
impose a lower limit. Elite accounts have higher leverage and their own
− exposure caps on indices, US30, gold, and oil; with Elite selected, the column
+ exposure caps on NAS100, SP500, US30, gold, and oil; with Elite selected, the column
shows the Elite leverage. See
Elite Accounts.
- Exposure Cap is the configured per-user notional ceiling, not the
remaining capacity available for your next order.
- With All Products selected, a range with an asterisk means the cap
varies by challenge product and account size. The range shows the smallest and largest configured caps;
each value applies separately to each user’s matching accounts, or to each
Elite account on its own.
- No Cap means market exposure enforcement is disabled. Available margin,
account rules, and other order checks still apply.
For your account's configured Maximum Position Size, sign in, select an
account, and hover over the market's leverage badge. Read the
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramReference to PERPS priority removed; language changed to describe automatic application ahead of older referral cookies.Oct 15
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
limit option) earns 15%. Other later purchases keep your normal rate. A first
purchase of Elite earns 25%; the rates do not stack. First purchase here
means the buyer's first paid purchase with any code, affiliate, or plan, so
a returning customer never qualifies for 25% by switching to your code. If
your normal rate for a purchase is higher, you keep it. The rate is fixed
when the buyer pays, and ending a promotion does not change commission you
already earned. While a promotion runs, a Boosted Commission banner at
the top of the Affiliates page shows both promotion rates; the banner
disappears when the promotion ends.
- Checkout credit: your affiliate code must be applied to the completed
purchase for a sale to count toward affiliate commission. Opening your
@CODE link carries the selected code through browsing and sign-in to
− checkout, where it takes priority over PERPS or an older referral cookie.
This selection works even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Before
sign-in, checkout shows the selected code, and when your link set the
referral cookie it also previews the discounted price. The code's
eligibility and final price are still validated at payment. Buyers can
also enter your code manually. Replacing it with another code or removing
it earns you no commission. When the buyer came through your link and
checked out without any affiliate code, the purchase still appears in your
history as Did Not Use Code and counts toward your reward tiers. A
purchase that uses another affiliate's code belongs to that affiliate.
- First-purchase discount: a buyer's first purchase with your code gets
the larger of your standard customer discount and the platform's
first-purchase discount: the larger of the one PERPS gives and the one on
After
limit option) earns 15%. Other later purchases keep your normal rate. A first
purchase of Elite earns 25%; the rates do not stack. First purchase here
means the buyer's first paid purchase with any code, affiliate, or plan, so
a returning customer never qualifies for 25% by switching to your code. If
your normal rate for a purchase is higher, you keep it. The rate is fixed
when the buyer pays, and ending a promotion does not change commission you
already earned. While a promotion runs, a Boosted Commission banner at
the top of the Affiliates page shows both promotion rates; the banner
disappears when the promotion ends.
- Checkout credit: your affiliate code must be applied to the completed
purchase for a sale to count toward affiliate commission. Opening your
@CODE link carries the selected code through browsing and sign-in to
+ checkout, where it is applied automatically ahead of an older referral cookie.
This selection works even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Before
sign-in, checkout shows the selected code, and when your link set the
referral cookie it also previews the discounted price. The code's
eligibility and final price are still validated at payment. Buyers can
also enter your code manually. Replacing it with another code or removing
it earns you no commission. When the buyer came through your link and
checked out without any affiliate code, the purchase still appears in your
history as Did Not Use Code and counts toward your reward tiers. A
purchase that uses another affiliate's code belongs to that affiliate.
- First-purchase discount: a buyer's first purchase with your code gets
the larger of your standard customer discount and the platform's
first-purchase discount: the larger of the one PERPS gives and the one on
limit option) earns 15%. Other later purchases keep your normal rate. A first
purchase of Elite earns 25%; the rates do not stack. First purchase here
means the buyer's first paid purchase with any code, affiliate, or plan, so
a returning customer never qualifies for 25% by switching to your code. If
your normal rate for a purchase is higher, you keep it. The rate is fixed
when the buyer pays, and ending a promotion does not change commission you
already earned. While a promotion runs, a Boosted Commission banner at
the top of the Affiliates page shows both promotion rates; the banner
disappears when the promotion ends.
- Checkout credit: your affiliate code must be applied to the completed
purchase for a sale to count toward affiliate commission. Opening your
@CODE link carries the selected code through browsing and sign-in to
− checkout, where it takes priority over PERPS or an older referral cookie.
+ checkout, where it is applied automatically ahead of an older referral cookie.
This selection works even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Before
sign-in, checkout shows the selected code, and when your link set the
referral cookie it also previews the discounted price. The code's
eligibility and final price are still validated at payment. Buyers can
also enter your code manually. Replacing it with another code or removing
it earns you no commission. When the buyer came through your link and
checked out without any affiliate code, the purchase still appears in your
history as Did Not Use Code and counts toward your reward tiers. A
purchase that uses another affiliate's code belongs to that affiliate.
- First-purchase discount: a buyer's first purchase with your code gets
the larger of your standard customer discount and the platform's
first-purchase discount: the larger of the one PERPS gives and the one on
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading with the APIFX markets moved from hyperliquid to veranta; previous hyperliquid markets now accept only closing orders.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
| market | expected_price | slippage_tolerance_bps, attached TP/SL |
|---|
The server resolves provider, symbol, and venue coin from market_id. Do not
send those fields. expected_price records what your client observed, but it
never controls the execution price, margin calculation, or slippage reference.
− FX markets are EUR/USD and USD/JPY, both on hyperliquid. Use their current
− market_id values from GET /v1/markets. The historical fpx and lighter
− providers are retired and have no markets available for new trades.
Before placing a market order, request
GET /v1/markets/{market_id}/quote?side=buy&size=... to estimate the fill. A
size-aware quote returns the projected fill price (top-of-book bounded by the
mark-based slippage cap), the maximum adverse slippage tier in basis points
(slippage_bps), notional,
fee, and whether the requested size is valid at the market's precision. The
eventual order still executes against newer authoritative market data, so
treat the quote as an estimate rather than a reserved price. The fee rate follows the market's asset category, regardless of its
source venue or venue ticker format. The quote is not tied to an account, so
its fee uses the standard rate; an
Elite account is charged its reduced rate when
the order fills. The fee and slippage schedules are published in the
After
| market | expected_price | slippage_tolerance_bps, attached TP/SL |
|---|
The server resolves provider, symbol, and venue coin from market_id. Do not
send those fields. expected_price records what your client observed, but it
never controls the execution price, margin calculation, or slippage reference.
+ FX markets trade on veranta. Use their current market_id values from
+ GET /v1/markets. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets are
+ retiring: they accept only orders that reduce or close existing positions
+ there. The historical fpx and lighter providers are retired and have no
+ markets available for new trades.
Before placing a market order, request
GET /v1/markets/{market_id}/quote?side=buy&size=... to estimate the fill. A
size-aware quote returns the projected fill price (top-of-book bounded by the
mark-based slippage cap), the maximum adverse slippage tier in basis points
(slippage_bps), notional,
fee, and whether the requested size is valid at the market's precision. The
eventual order still executes against newer authoritative market data, so
treat the quote as an estimate rather than a reserved price. The fee rate follows the market's asset category, regardless of its
source venue or venue ticker format. The quote is not tied to an account, so
its fee uses the standard rate; an
Elite account is charged its reduced rate when
the order fills. The fee and slippage schedules are published in the
| market | expected_price | slippage_tolerance_bps, attached TP/SL |
|---|
The server resolves provider, symbol, and venue coin from market_id. Do not
send those fields. expected_price records what your client observed, but it
never controls the execution price, margin calculation, or slippage reference.
− FX markets are EUR/USD and USD/JPY, both on hyperliquid. Use their current
− market_id values from GET /v1/markets. The historical fpx and lighter
− providers are retired and have no markets available for new trades.
+ FX markets trade on veranta. Use their current market_id values from
+ GET /v1/markets. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets are
+ retiring: they accept only orders that reduce or close existing positions
+ there. The historical fpx and lighter providers are retired and have no
+ markets available for new trades.
Before placing a market order, request
GET /v1/markets/{market_id}/quote?side=buy&size=... to estimate the fill. A
size-aware quote returns the projected fill price (top-of-book bounded by the
mark-based slippage cap), the maximum adverse slippage tier in basis points
(slippage_bps), notional,
fee, and whether the requested size is valid at the market's precision. The
eventual order still executes against newer authoritative market data, so
treat the quote as an estimate rather than a reserved price. The fee rate follows the market's asset category, regardless of its
source venue or venue ticker format. The quote is not tied to an account, so
its fee uses the standard rate; an
Elite account is charged its reduced rate when
the order fills. The fee and slippage schedules are published in the
PremierMyFundedPerps · Account trading policyEUR/USD and USD/JPY markets moved to Veranta with retire process matching GOLD's previous transition.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
An Elite account trades NAS100 and SP500 at up to 40x, US30 at up to 25x, gold
at up to 20x, and oil at up to 10x, and caps each group's combined open
notional at that multiple of its starting balance. Market listings still report each market's standard
maxLeverage. API and website orders above an Elite limit are rejected with
invalid_leverage or max_total_notional; see
Elite Accounts.
Gold trades on XAU, which counts as gold for these Elite limits. The previous
GOLD market is retiring: it is reduce-only, so its market reports
trading_enabled: false and an order that would open, add to, or flip a
position is rejected with market_unavailable. Reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing GOLD positions keep working;
see Retiring markets.
Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
reopening price. See
Trading hours.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
After
An Elite account trades NAS100 and SP500 at up to 40x, US30 at up to 25x, gold
at up to 20x, and oil at up to 10x, and caps each group's combined open
notional at that multiple of its starting balance. Market listings still report each market's standard
maxLeverage. API and website orders above an Elite limit are rejected with
invalid_leverage or max_total_notional; see
Elite Accounts.
Gold trades on XAU, which counts as gold for these Elite limits. The previous
GOLD market is retiring: it is reduce-only, so its market reports
trading_enabled: false and an order that would open, add to, or flip a
position is rejected with market_unavailable. Reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing GOLD positions keep working;
see Retiring markets.
+ EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Veranta. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and
+ USD/JPY markets are retiring the same way: they report
+ trading_enabled: false, an order that would open, add to, or flip a position
+ there is rejected with market_unavailable, and reduce-only orders, closes,
+ and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing positions keep working.
Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
reopening price. See
Trading hours.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
An Elite account trades NAS100 and SP500 at up to 40x, US30 at up to 25x, gold
at up to 20x, and oil at up to 10x, and caps each group's combined open
notional at that multiple of its starting balance. Market listings still report each market's standard
maxLeverage. API and website orders above an Elite limit are rejected with
invalid_leverage or max_total_notional; see
Elite Accounts.
Gold trades on XAU, which counts as gold for these Elite limits. The previous
GOLD market is retiring: it is reduce-only, so its market reports
trading_enabled: false and an order that would open, add to, or flip a
position is rejected with market_unavailable. Reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing GOLD positions keep working;
see Retiring markets.
+ EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Veranta. The previous hyperliquid EUR/USD and
+ USD/JPY markets are retiring the same way: they report
+ trading_enabled: false, an order that would open, add to, or flip a position
+ there is rejected with market_unavailable, and reduce-only orders, closes,
+ and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing positions keep working.
Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
reopening price. See
Trading hours.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading SettingsLoss Limit Line calculation method explained and Confirm Reverse Position feature added with default-on setting.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
it still exists and still executes, liquidates, or enforces your account rules
as normal. Hidden lines cannot be dragged, so manage those orders from the
Positions and Open Orders tabs instead. Hiding Position Line or **TP/SL
Lines** also removes the chart handles that add a new Take Profit or Stop Loss
from the position line. Hiding Order Previews or TP/SL Lines removes
the same handles from a draft limit order's line.
Loss Limit Line and Profit Target Line appear only while you hold a
position in the market you are viewing. Each assumes your other open positions
stay at their current prices, so the level moves as those prices change. The
profit target line shows only on evaluation accounts that have a profit target.
Reaching it does not pass the account on its own: every other challenge rule
still applies.
Trade Arrows is off by default. Turn it on to change how Trade Markers
look: each fill becomes a small arrow on the candle it filled in, pointing up
from under the candle for a buy and down from over the candle for a sell,
instead of a lettered badge. Several fills on one side of a candle stack
outward. Liquidations and account close-outs use an amber arrow. A dashed line
joins each entry's arrow to the arrow of the exit that closed it, green when
the price moved in the trade's favor and red when it moved against it. Entries
of a position that is still open have no line until they close. Hover an arrow
to see the fill's side, size, and price; its trade stays highlighted while the
other trades dim. Arrows and lines cover your most recent 100 orders and appear
once the chart has loaded the candles they belong to. Turning off **Trade
Markers** hides them too.
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
and the Confirm New Orders review. If a current price is not available at
that moment, the close dialog opens instead so nothing is sent without a price.
The close button in the Positions tab still opens the close dialog.
Show Reverse Position controls whether the
Reverse Position button appears. It
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
After
it still exists and still executes, liquidates, or enforces your account rules
as normal. Hidden lines cannot be dragged, so manage those orders from the
Positions and Open Orders tabs instead. Hiding Position Line or **TP/SL
Lines** also removes the chart handles that add a new Take Profit or Stop Loss
from the position line. Hiding Order Previews or TP/SL Lines removes
the same handles from a draft limit order's line.
Loss Limit Line and Profit Target Line appear only while you hold a
position in the market you are viewing. Each assumes your other open positions
stay at their current prices, so the level moves as those prices change. The
profit target line shows only on evaluation accounts that have a profit target.
Reaching it does not pass the account on its own: every other challenge rule
still applies.
+ The Loss Limit Line also sets aside the estimated closing fee and the
+ maximum slippage for closing your position, so it sits slightly closer to the
+ current price than the point where your open profit or loss alone would reach
+ the limit. A Stop Loss placed at or before the line stays within your loss
+ limit after those costs. A fast move that jumps past your Stop Loss before it
+ fills can still close it beyond the line.
Trade Arrows is off by default. Turn it on to change how Trade Markers
look: each fill becomes a small arrow on the candle it filled in, pointing up
from under the candle for a buy and down from over the candle for a sell,
instead of a lettered badge. Several fills on one side of a candle stack
outward. Liquidations and account close-outs use an amber arrow. A dashed line
joins each entry's arrow to the arrow of the exit that closed it, green when
the price moved in the trade's favor and red when it moved against it. Entries
of a position that is still open have no line until they close. Hover an arrow
to see the fill's side, size, and price; its trade stays highlighted while the
other trades dim. Arrows and lines cover your most recent 100 orders and appear
once the chart has loaded the candles they belong to. Turning off **Trade
Markers** hides them too.
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
and the Confirm New Orders review. If a current price is not available at
that moment, the close dialog opens instead so nothing is sent without a price.
The close button in the Positions tab still opens the close dialog.
Show Reverse Position controls whether the
Reverse Position button appears. It
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
+ Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
+ by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
+ position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
+ price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
+ follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
+ off.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
it still exists and still executes, liquidates, or enforces your account rules
as normal. Hidden lines cannot be dragged, so manage those orders from the
Positions and Open Orders tabs instead. Hiding Position Line or **TP/SL
Lines** also removes the chart handles that add a new Take Profit or Stop Loss
from the position line. Hiding Order Previews or TP/SL Lines removes
the same handles from a draft limit order's line.
Loss Limit Line and Profit Target Line appear only while you hold a
position in the market you are viewing. Each assumes your other open positions
stay at their current prices, so the level moves as those prices change. The
profit target line shows only on evaluation accounts that have a profit target.
Reaching it does not pass the account on its own: every other challenge rule
still applies.
+ The Loss Limit Line also sets aside the estimated closing fee and the
+ maximum slippage for closing your position, so it sits slightly closer to the
+ current price than the point where your open profit or loss alone would reach
+ the limit. A Stop Loss placed at or before the line stays within your loss
+ limit after those costs. A fast move that jumps past your Stop Loss before it
+ fills can still close it beyond the line.
Trade Arrows is off by default. Turn it on to change how Trade Markers
look: each fill becomes a small arrow on the candle it filled in, pointing up
from under the candle for a buy and down from over the candle for a sell,
instead of a lettered badge. Several fills on one side of a candle stack
outward. Liquidations and account close-outs use an amber arrow. A dashed line
joins each entry's arrow to the arrow of the exit that closed it, green when
the price moved in the trade's favor and red when it moved against it. Entries
of a position that is still open have no line until they close. Hover an arrow
to see the fill's side, size, and price; its trade stays highlighted while the
other trades dim. Arrows and lines cover your most recent 100 orders and appear
once the chart has loaded the candles they belong to. Turning off **Trade
Markers** hides them too.
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
and the Confirm New Orders review. If a current price is not available at
that moment, the close dialog opens instead so nothing is sent without a price.
The close button in the Positions tab still opens the close dialog.
Show Reverse Position controls whether the
Reverse Position button appears. It
is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
+ Confirm Reverse Position opens a review before a reversal is sent. It is on
+ by default, separate from Confirm New Orders. Turn it off to reverse a
+ position as soon as you click Reverse. The review still opens if a current
+ price is not available, or if you lead a copy trading group so you can see each
+ follower's result. This option is unavailable while Show Reverse Position is
+ off.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
PremierMyFundedPerps · Streamer Mode SettingsAdded source documentation URL and removed note about Mintlify platform.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Streamer Mode Settings
Blur your personal details and one-time secrets while you stream, record, or share your screen.
Open Streamer Mode settings
Streamer Mode
Streamer Mode keeps personal details off screen while you stream, record a
video, or share your screen. It is off by default. When it is on, these details
are blurred everywhere in the app:
| Where | What is blurred |
|---|
Checkout | Your email, billing name and address, address suggestions, and card details
| Onboarding | Your legal name and address as you enter them |
|---|
codes and new API keys have no peek button and stay blurred.
The change applies immediately, and the signed-in account preference carries
to your other devices. The current browser also remembers it, so pages are
blurred from the moment they load.
Streamer Mode only changes what is shown in MyFundedPerps. It does not hide
details in other tabs, browser autofill suggestions, password managers, or
emails. Check what else is visible before you go live.
Hide Email in Account Menu
Hide Email in Account Menu blurs only the email address in the account menu.
You can also turn it on or off by selecting your email in the account menu.
While Streamer Mode is on, the account menu email is always blurred and this
setting cannot be turned off.
− This documentation is built and hosted on Mintlify, a developer documentation platform.
After
Streamer Mode Settings
+ Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/streamer-mode
Blur your personal details and one-time secrets while you stream, record, or share your screen.
Open Streamer Mode settings
Streamer Mode
Streamer Mode keeps personal details off screen while you stream, record a
video, or share your screen. It is off by default. When it is on, these details
are blurred everywhere in the app:
| Where | What is blurred |
|---|
Checkout | Your email, billing name and address, address suggestions, and card details
| Onboarding | Your legal name and address as you enter them |
|---|
codes and new API keys have no peek button and stay blurred.
The change applies immediately, and the signed-in account preference carries
to your other devices. The current browser also remembers it, so pages are
blurred from the moment they load.
Streamer Mode only changes what is shown in MyFundedPerps. It does not hide
details in other tabs, browser autofill suggestions, password managers, or
emails. Check what else is visible before you go live.
Hide Email in Account Menu
Hide Email in Account Menu blurs only the email address in the account menu.
You can also turn it on or off by selecting your email in the account menu.
While Streamer Mode is on, the account menu email is always blurred and this
setting cannot be turned off.
Streamer Mode Settings
+ Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/streamer-mode
Blur your personal details and one-time secrets while you stream, record, or share your screen.
Open Streamer Mode settings
Streamer Mode
Streamer Mode keeps personal details off screen while you stream, record a
video, or share your screen. It is off by default. When it is on, these details
are blurred everywhere in the app:
| Where | What is blurred |
|---|
Checkout | Your email, billing name and address, address suggestions, and card details
| Onboarding | Your legal name and address as you enter them |
|---|
codes and new API keys have no peek button and stay blurred.
The change applies immediately, and the signed-in account preference carries
to your other devices. The current browser also remembers it, so pages are
blurred from the moment they load.
Streamer Mode only changes what is shown in MyFundedPerps. It does not hide
details in other tabs, browser autofill suggestions, password managers, or
emails. Check what else is visible before you go live.
Hide Email in Account Menu
Hide Email in Account Menu blurs only the email address in the account menu.
You can also turn it on or off by selecting your email in the account menu.
While Streamer Mode is on, the account menu email is always blurred and this
setting cannot be turned off.
− This documentation is built and hosted on Mintlify, a developer documentation platform.
PremierMyFundedPerps · SettingsStreamer Mode feature added; lifetime payout certificates now listed separately from other certificate types.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/index
− Configure your account, security, public profile, language, appearance, trading defaults, copy trading, API keys, and notifications, and find your certificates and purchase history.
Open Settings while signed in. Most
changes save to your MyFundedPerps account and follow you across devices;
device-specific controls say so in their description.
On desktop, use Search above Profile to find pages and individual
settings, such as "App Installation", "Background Effects", or "Max Market
Slippage". Results are grouped into Pages and Settings, with the parent
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
Control background effects and install the web app.
Trading
Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
− Find and share your pass, funded, payout, and leaderboard certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
matching settings tab.
After
Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/index
+ Configure your account, security, public profile, language, appearance, Streamer Mode, trading defaults, copy trading, API keys, and notifications, and find your certificates and purchase history.
Open Settings while signed in. Most
changes save to your MyFundedPerps account and follow you across devices;
device-specific controls say so in their description.
On desktop, use Search above Profile to find pages and individual
settings, such as "App Installation", "Background Effects", or "Max Market
Slippage". Results are grouped into Pages and Settings, with the parent
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
Control background effects and install the web app.
+ Blur personal details and secrets while you share your screen.
Trading
Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
+ Find and share your pass, funded, payout, lifetime payout, and leaderboard
+ certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
matching settings tab.
Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/index
− Configure your account, security, public profile, language, appearance, trading defaults, copy trading, API keys, and notifications, and find your certificates and purchase history.
+ Configure your account, security, public profile, language, appearance, Streamer Mode, trading defaults, copy trading, API keys, and notifications, and find your certificates and purchase history.
Open Settings while signed in. Most
changes save to your MyFundedPerps account and follow you across devices;
device-specific controls say so in their description.
On desktop, use Search above Profile to find pages and individual
settings, such as "App Installation", "Background Effects", or "Max Market
Slippage". Results are grouped into Pages and Settings, with the parent
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
Control background effects and install the web app.
+ Blur personal details and secrets while you share your screen.
Trading
Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
− Find and share your pass, funded, payout, and leaderboard certificates.
+ Find and share your pass, funded, payout, lifetime payout, and leaderboard
+ certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
matching settings tab.
PremierMyFundedPerps · CertificatesArticle adds lifetime payout certificate type, name customization option for certificates, and QR codes to pass/funded/payout certificates.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Certificates
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/certificates
− Find every pass, funded, payout, and leaderboard certificate you have earned, and download or share any of them from one place.
Open Certificates
Certificates collects every shareable card you have earned, so you do not need
to go back to the dashboard, Payout History, or the competition page to find
one. Each group appears once you have at least one certificate of that kind.
| Group | What it lists |
|---|
Leaderboard | Your Launch Competition leaderboard card, while you have a competition account.
Payouts | One certificate for each paid payout, showing the amount, account number, and paid date.
Funded Accounts | One certificate for each funded account issued to you after an evaluation.
Evaluation Passes | One certificate for each evaluation you passed, showing the account name, number, and pass date.
Payout, funded, and pass certificates are listed newest first.
Share a certificate
1. Select Share on the certificate's row.
2. Review the preview. It shows exactly what anyone with the link sees.
3. Choose Download Image, Copy Image, Copy Link, or **Share
Certificate** to use your device's share sheet when it has one.
Pass, funded, and payout certificates keep the same details after they are
issued, so a link you shared earlier keeps showing the same card. The one
− exception is your username: if you change it in
− Settings, your certificates show the
− new one. Links you shared before may take a short while to show the change.
The leaderboard card is different: it is generated when you select **Share
Leaderboard Card**, using your current rank, equity at capture, total traded
volume, and win rate. It is an image to download, not a link. See
Launch Competition
for what the card contains.
Missing a certificate
Only real challenge accounts earn certificates. A certificate does not appear
for:
- An evaluation that has not passed yet.
- A funding step that has not issued your funded account yet.
- A payout that has not been paid.
If you hold a very large number of certificates, the list shows the most recent
After
Certificates
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/certificates
+ Find every pass, funded, payout, lifetime payout, and leaderboard certificate you have earned, and download or share any of them from one place.
Open Certificates
Certificates collects every shareable card you have earned, so you do not need
to go back to the dashboard, Payout History, or the competition page to find
one. Each group appears once you have at least one certificate of that kind.
| Group | What it lists |
|---|
Leaderboard | Your Launch Competition leaderboard card, while you have a competition account.
+ Lifetime Payouts | One certificate showing the total of every payout you have been paid.
Payouts | One certificate for each paid payout, showing the amount, account number, and paid date.
Funded Accounts | One certificate for each funded account issued to you after an evaluation.
Evaluation Passes | One certificate for each evaluation you passed, showing the account name, number, and pass date.
Payout, funded, and pass certificates are listed newest first.
+ Choose the name on your certificates
+ Use Name on Certificates at the top of Certificates to choose what your
+ pass, funded, payout, and lifetime payout certificates show:
+ - Username: your username. This is the default.
+ - Legal Name: the legal name on your profile.
+ The change applies to every certificate, including links you shared before.
+ Legal Name can only be chosen when your legal name is on file. Anyone with
+ a certificate link can see the name it shows, so choose Username if you do
+ not want your legal name on shared certificates.
Share a certificate
1. Select Share on the certificate's row.
2. Review the preview. It shows exactly what anyone with the link sees.
3. Choose Download Image, Copy Image, Copy Link, or **Share
Certificate** to use your device's share sheet when it has one.
+ Pass, funded, and payout certificates include a QR code in the top right that
+ opens the certificate's page, so anyone looking at the image can check it.
Pass, funded, and payout certificates keep the same details after they are
issued, so a link you shared earlier keeps showing the same card. The one
+ exception is your name: if you change your username in
+ Settings or switch **Name on
+ Certificates**, your certificates show the new name. Links you shared before
+ may take a short while to show the change.
+ Lifetime payout certificate
+ The Lifetime Payout Certificate adds up every payout you have been paid. It
+ shows the total, the name you chose for your certificates, the date of your latest payout, and how many
+ payouts you have received. It appears after your first payout is paid and
+ updates as new payouts are paid.
+ Select Share on its row to preview it, then choose Download Image or
+ Copy Image. It is an image, not a link, so nobody else sees it unless you
+ share the image yourself.
The leaderboard card is different: it is generated when you select **Share
Leaderboard Card**, using your current rank, equity at capture, total traded
volume, and win rate. It is an image to download, not a link. See
Launch Competition
for what the card contains.
Missing a certificate
Only real challenge accounts earn certificates. A certificate does not appear
for:
- An evaluation that has not passed yet.
- A funding step that has not issued your funded account yet.
- A payout that has not been paid.
If you hold a very large number of certificates, the list shows the most recent
Certificates
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/certificates
− Find every pass, funded, payout, and leaderboard certificate you have earned, and download or share any of them from one place.
+ Find every pass, funded, payout, lifetime payout, and leaderboard certificate you have earned, and download or share any of them from one place.
Open Certificates
Certificates collects every shareable card you have earned, so you do not need
to go back to the dashboard, Payout History, or the competition page to find
one. Each group appears once you have at least one certificate of that kind.
| Group | What it lists |
|---|
Leaderboard | Your Launch Competition leaderboard card, while you have a competition account.
+ Lifetime Payouts | One certificate showing the total of every payout you have been paid.
Payouts | One certificate for each paid payout, showing the amount, account number, and paid date.
Funded Accounts | One certificate for each funded account issued to you after an evaluation.
Evaluation Passes | One certificate for each evaluation you passed, showing the account name, number, and pass date.
Payout, funded, and pass certificates are listed newest first.
+ Choose the name on your certificates
+ Use Name on Certificates at the top of Certificates to choose what your
+ pass, funded, payout, and lifetime payout certificates show:
+ - Username: your username. This is the default.
+ - Legal Name: the legal name on your profile.
+ The change applies to every certificate, including links you shared before.
+ Legal Name can only be chosen when your legal name is on file. Anyone with
+ a certificate link can see the name it shows, so choose Username if you do
+ not want your legal name on shared certificates.
Share a certificate
1. Select Share on the certificate's row.
2. Review the preview. It shows exactly what anyone with the link sees.
3. Choose Download Image, Copy Image, Copy Link, or **Share
Certificate** to use your device's share sheet when it has one.
+ Pass, funded, and payout certificates include a QR code in the top right that
+ opens the certificate's page, so anyone looking at the image can check it.
Pass, funded, and payout certificates keep the same details after they are
issued, so a link you shared earlier keeps showing the same card. The one
− exception is your username: if you change it in
− Settings, your certificates show the
− new one. Links you shared before may take a short while to show the change.
+ exception is your name: if you change your username in
+ Settings or switch **Name on
+ Certificates**, your certificates show the new name. Links you shared before
+ may take a short while to show the change.
+ Lifetime payout certificate
+ The Lifetime Payout Certificate adds up every payout you have been paid. It
+ shows the total, the name you chose for your certificates, the date of your latest payout, and how many
+ payouts you have received. It appears after your first payout is paid and
+ updates as new payouts are paid.
+ Select Share on its row to preview it, then choose Download Image or
+ Copy Image. It is an image, not a link, so nobody else sees it unless you
+ share the image yourself.
The leaderboard card is different: it is generated when you select **Share
Leaderboard Card**, using your current rank, equity at capture, total traded
volume, and win rate. It is an image to download, not a link. See
Launch Competition
for what the card contains.
Missing a certificate
Only real challenge accounts earn certificates. A certificate does not appear
for:
- An evaluation that has not passed yet.
- A funding step that has not issued your funded account yet.
- A payout that has not been paid.
If you hold a very large number of certificates, the list shows the most recent
PremierMyFundedPerps · API Key SettingsAdded note that API Key remains blurred in Streamer Mode even after clicking Show, though Copy still functions.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
and responsibility statements. Select Back to change the access.
3. Select Continue to send a six-digit verification code to your account
email, then enter that code. The code expires after 10 minutes.
Verification-code requests share the email limit used for sign-in: up to
five codes per rolling minute and ten per rolling hour. If you reach either
limit, the request control remains unavailable while an inline message
counts down until you can request another code.
4. Select Create API Key.
The credential appears in a dialog after creation and is hidden by default.
Use Show API Key to reveal it or Copy API Key to copy it without
revealing it. MyFundedPerps stores only its cryptographic hash, so the
full key cannot be recovered or shown again after you close the dialog.
Choose Read And Trade only when the integration must create, modify, or
cancel orders. Account access can cover all accounts or one selected account.
The account picker shows any name you gave an account on the dashboard,
followed by its account number. API responses keep reporting the account's
original name and number.
You can hold up to five active keys per environment. Use separate names for
separate trading clients so you can revoke one integration without
interrupting another.
The Environment choice determines what the key can reach. Live keys
(fp_live_) serve requests on developers.myfundedperpetuals.com and reach
your challenge accounts. Test (Sandbox) keys (fp_test_) serve requests
on sandbox.myfundedperpetuals.com and reach only your sandbox accounts, free
After
and responsibility statements. Select Back to change the access.
3. Select Continue to send a six-digit verification code to your account
email, then enter that code. The code expires after 10 minutes.
Verification-code requests share the email limit used for sign-in: up to
five codes per rolling minute and ten per rolling hour. If you reach either
limit, the request control remains unavailable while an inline message
counts down until you can request another code.
4. Select Create API Key.
The credential appears in a dialog after creation and is hidden by default.
Use Show API Key to reveal it or Copy API Key to copy it without
revealing it. MyFundedPerps stores only its cryptographic hash, so the
full key cannot be recovered or shown again after you close the dialog.
+ While Streamer Mode is on, the credential stays
+ blurred even after Show API Key, and Copy API Key still works.
Choose Read And Trade only when the integration must create, modify, or
cancel orders. Account access can cover all accounts or one selected account.
The account picker shows any name you gave an account on the dashboard,
followed by its account number. API responses keep reporting the account's
original name and number.
You can hold up to five active keys per environment. Use separate names for
separate trading clients so you can revoke one integration without
interrupting another.
The Environment choice determines what the key can reach. Live keys
(fp_live_) serve requests on developers.myfundedperpetuals.com and reach
your challenge accounts. Test (Sandbox) keys (fp_test_) serve requests
on sandbox.myfundedperpetuals.com and reach only your sandbox accounts, free
and responsibility statements. Select Back to change the access.
3. Select Continue to send a six-digit verification code to your account
email, then enter that code. The code expires after 10 minutes.
Verification-code requests share the email limit used for sign-in: up to
five codes per rolling minute and ten per rolling hour. If you reach either
limit, the request control remains unavailable while an inline message
counts down until you can request another code.
4. Select Create API Key.
The credential appears in a dialog after creation and is hidden by default.
Use Show API Key to reveal it or Copy API Key to copy it without
revealing it. MyFundedPerps stores only its cryptographic hash, so the
full key cannot be recovered or shown again after you close the dialog.
+ While Streamer Mode is on, the credential stays
+ blurred even after Show API Key, and Copy API Key still works.
Choose Read And Trade only when the integration must create, modify, or
cancel orders. Account access can cover all accounts or one selected account.
The account picker shows any name you gave an account on the dashboard,
followed by its account number. API responses keep reporting the account's
original name and number.
You can hold up to five active keys per environment. Use separate names for
separate trading clients so you can revoke one integration without
interrupting another.
The Environment choice determines what the key can reach. Live keys
(fp_live_) serve requests on developers.myfundedperpetuals.com and reach
your challenge accounts. Test (Sandbox) keys (fp_test_) serve requests
on sandbox.myfundedperpetuals.com and reach only your sandbox accounts, free
PremierMyFundedPerps · Market data streamingProvider list expanded to include veranta and ostium; FX market data source changed from hyperliquid to veranta with updated symbol format.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
close_handle(); PHP accepts an Amp\Cancellation.
Receive buffering is bounded. Pull transports apply backpressure; TypeScript
and Java fail with slow_consumer if more than 16 complete messages await the
reader. Messages over 1 MiB fail the session. No client silently truncates a
batch or rounds a decimal price. Other market channels remain available
through the wire protocol below; the SDK wrapper currently covers price ticks.
Market identity and filters
Use the exact coin and provider returned for your selected market by
GET /v1/markets or GET /v1/markets/{market_id} in the REST API.
Pass coin in the subscription's symbols array. REST's symbol is a display
label: for Binance BTC, symbol is BTC and coin is BTCUSDT, so subscribe
to symbols: ["BTCUSDT"] with providers: ["binance"]. Provider values
− are hyperliquid, binance, bybit, lighter, fpx, and synthetic.
− FX uses hyperliquid for both EUR/USD and USD/JPY (xyz:EUR and
− xyz:JPY). The historical fpx and lighter identities are retired and no
− longer publish market data.
Every market subscription requires symbols with 1 to 32 exact symbols.
providers is optional, but specify it to avoid mixing venue prices.
Omitting it uses the compatibility provider set, so explicitly name new
providers. status accepts only providers and needs no symbols.
| Channel | Payload fields | Event type |
|---|
For candles, request explicit intervals such as intervals: ["1m"].
After
close_handle(); PHP accepts an Amp\Cancellation.
Receive buffering is bounded. Pull transports apply backpressure; TypeScript
and Java fail with slow_consumer if more than 16 complete messages await the
reader. Messages over 1 MiB fail the session. No client silently truncates a
batch or rounds a decimal price. Other market channels remain available
through the wire protocol below; the SDK wrapper currently covers price ticks.
Market identity and filters
Use the exact coin and provider returned for your selected market by
GET /v1/markets or GET /v1/markets/{market_id} in the REST API.
Pass coin in the subscription's symbols array. REST's symbol is a display
label: for Binance BTC, symbol is BTC and coin is BTCUSDT, so subscribe
to symbols: ["BTCUSDT"] with providers: ["binance"]. Provider values
+ are hyperliquid, binance, bybit, veranta, ostium, lighter, fpx,
+ and synthetic. FX uses veranta (for example EURUSD and USDJPY). The
+ retiring Hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets (xyz:EUR and xyz:JPY)
+ keep publishing while positions remain on them. The historical fpx and
+ lighter identities are retired and no longer publish market data.
Every market subscription requires symbols with 1 to 32 exact symbols.
providers is optional, but specify it to avoid mixing venue prices.
Omitting it uses the compatibility provider set, so explicitly name new
providers. status accepts only providers and needs no symbols.
| Channel | Payload fields | Event type |
|---|
For candles, request explicit intervals such as intervals: ["1m"].
close_handle(); PHP accepts an Amp\Cancellation.
Receive buffering is bounded. Pull transports apply backpressure; TypeScript
and Java fail with slow_consumer if more than 16 complete messages await the
reader. Messages over 1 MiB fail the session. No client silently truncates a
batch or rounds a decimal price. Other market channels remain available
through the wire protocol below; the SDK wrapper currently covers price ticks.
Market identity and filters
Use the exact coin and provider returned for your selected market by
GET /v1/markets or GET /v1/markets/{market_id} in the REST API.
Pass coin in the subscription's symbols array. REST's symbol is a display
label: for Binance BTC, symbol is BTC and coin is BTCUSDT, so subscribe
to symbols: ["BTCUSDT"] with providers: ["binance"]. Provider values
− are hyperliquid, binance, bybit, lighter, fpx, and synthetic.
− FX uses hyperliquid for both EUR/USD and USD/JPY (xyz:EUR and
− xyz:JPY). The historical fpx and lighter identities are retired and no
− longer publish market data.
+ are hyperliquid, binance, bybit, veranta, ostium, lighter, fpx,
+ and synthetic. FX uses veranta (for example EURUSD and USDJPY). The
+ retiring Hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets (xyz:EUR and xyz:JPY)
+ keep publishing while positions remain on them. The historical fpx and
+ lighter identities are retired and no longer publish market data.
Every market subscription requires symbols with 1 to 32 exact symbols.
providers is optional, but specify it to avoid mixing venue prices.
Omitting it uses the compatibility provider set, so explicitly name new
providers. status accepts only providers and needs no symbols.
| Channel | Payload fields | Event type |
|---|
For candles, request explicit intervals such as intervals: ["1m"].
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideEUR/USD and USD/JPY moved from Hyperliquid to Veranta venue; multiple sections added describing trading hours options and reversal behavior changes.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
Forex and index markets
− EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Hyperliquid, gold (XAU) on Binance, and the
− S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100) on Hyperliquid, around the clock. The
− following markets price from oracle venues that quote a bid and an ask, so
− their order book shows a single level on each side:
−
| Markets | Venue |
|---|---|
| GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta |
| Dow Jones 30 (US30) | Ostium |
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
Trading hours
These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
the clock. Times are New York time:
−
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|---|---|
| GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, USD/CHF | Sunday 17:00 to Friday 17:00 | None |
| US30 | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday |
Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
While a market is closed
- Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
- Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
- You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
- Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote. If your
account is liquidated or closed out while a market is closed, those
positions close at that last quote.
Prices can open far from the last quote after a weekend or holiday. A Stop
Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
which can be worse than its trigger price.
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
Retiring markets
A market that is being retired is reduce-only. It no longer appears in search
or on the Markets page, and you cannot open a new position or add to an
existing one. Positions you already hold stay open: open them from the
Positions tab or the Dashboard to reduce, close, or set Take Profit and Stop
Loss orders, which keep working until you close the position. The market's
trade page shows a notice with a link to its replacement.
Gold now trades on XAU.
The previous GOLD market is retiring, so open new gold trades on XAU.
Save markets to your watchlist
Star a market on Markets or in the Trade symbol picker to add it to your
watchlist. Both views and the bottom-bar Watchlist use the same saved list,
with a shared limit of 25 markets. Removing a star in either view frees a
slot everywhere. Crypto and traditional instruments that share a ticker are
separate markets.
Open Configure Watchlist from the bottom-bar Watchlist to remove markets or
drag them into your preferred order. Your watchlist is saved to your profile
and follows you across trading accounts.
On the trading terminal, use the source menu on the scrolling market ticker to
show Trending markets, the standard Tickers list, Top Volume, or your Watchlist.
Watchlist markets appear in your saved order, including markets from different
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
− Venue picker at the top switches between them. Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
- Tap Focus Chart (the full-screen icon in the header) to give the chart
the whole screen. The header and bottom tabs hide, leaving one bar under the
chart with your open position for the market, Buy / Long, **Sell /
Short, and Exit Focus**, which restores the full layout. Focus applies
only to the price chart and is remembered on that device.
Net PnL percentage
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
Reverse a position
Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
− side. Holding a 1 BTC long and reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short. On the
chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
it is the Reverse button in each row, and on a phone it is the **Reverse
Position** button on each position card.
− A reversal is one market order for twice your position size, so both sides
− happen in a single fill:
- All or nothing. If the new position would break a challenge rule, exceed
− your margin or exposure limits, or exceed your
− Max Market Slippage, the
− order is rejected and your original position stays open unchanged. You are
− never left flat by a reversal that only half worked.
- Same settings. The new position uses the leverage and margin mode of the
position you reversed.
- Fees and slippage. The trading fee applies to the full reversed size,
the same as closing and then opening separately. Market slippage is
estimated for the full order size.
- Exits. The position's Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled, as
with any flip. Set new exits for the reversed position if you want them.
- Current position only. If the position changes before the order fills
(for example, a Take Profit partly closes it, you add to it, or you change
its leverage), the reversal is rejected instead of reversing something other
than what you saw. Try again with the updated position.
- Copy trading followers. Reversing a lead account reverses its followers.
If a follower's position changes before filling, its copy is resized to reach
the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
Copy Trading.
− If Confirm New Orders reviews market orders, Reverse Position opens a short
− review first. Otherwise it is sent as soon as you click it.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
Choose an order type
| Order | What it does | Main tradeoff |
|---|
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
After
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
Forex and index markets
+ Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
+ on Hyperliquid, around the clock. The following markets price from oracle
+ venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
+ each side:
+
| Markets | Venue |
|---|---|
| EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta |
| Dow Jones 30 (US30) | Ostium |
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
Trading hours
These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
the clock. Times are New York time:
+
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|---|---|
| EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, USD/CHF | Sunday 17:00 to Friday 17:00 | None |
| US30 | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday |
Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
+ A badge beside the market name marks these markets in the trade page header,
+ the market picker, search, and the Markets page, so you can tell they do not
+ trade around the clock before you open one. FX pairs show 24/5, since they
+ trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
+ such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
+ without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
+ name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
+ Markets with two trading-hour options
+ Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
+ and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
+ in the market bar (or at the top of Market Details on a phone) switches
+ between them. Hover the info icon beside each option, or read the line under
+ it on a phone, for what that option means.
+ - Standard Market Hours follows the sessions in the table above. While the
+ market is closed, prices freeze and new positions wait until it reopens.
+ - 24/7 trades around the clock, including nights, weekends, and holidays.
+ Outside regular market hours, its price can move away from the underlying
+ market.
+ The trade page opens on Standard Market Hours unless you hold an open
+ position in that market, in which case it opens on the option your position
+ uses. You can hold a market on only one option at a time; close the position
+ before trading the other.
While a market is closed
- Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
- Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
- You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
- Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote. If your
account is liquidated or closed out while a market is closed, those
positions close at that last quote.
Prices can open far from the last quote after a weekend or holiday. A Stop
Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
which can be worse than its trigger price.
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
Retiring markets
A market that is being retired is reduce-only. It no longer appears in search
or on the Markets page, and you cannot open a new position or add to an
existing one. Positions you already hold stay open: open them from the
Positions tab or the Dashboard to reduce, close, or set Take Profit and Stop
Loss orders, which keep working until you close the position. The market's
trade page shows a notice with a link to its replacement.
Gold now trades on XAU.
The previous GOLD market is retiring, so open new gold trades on XAU.
+ EUR/USD and
+ USD/JPY now trade on
+ Veranta, which follows the trading hours above. The previous
+ Hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets are retiring. Positions you hold there
+ stay on Hyperliquid: open one from the Positions tab to see its Hyperliquid
+ chart, where you can reduce, close, or protect it. The EUR/USD and USD/JPY
+ pages show Veranta prices, so a new order there opens a separate Veranta
+ position instead of reducing your Hyperliquid one. If you still hold a
+ Hyperliquid position, those pages show a notice that links to its chart.
Save markets to your watchlist
Star a market on Markets or in the Trade symbol picker to add it to your
watchlist. Both views and the bottom-bar Watchlist use the same saved list,
with a shared limit of 25 markets. Removing a star in either view frees a
slot everywhere. Crypto and traditional instruments that share a ticker are
separate markets.
Open Configure Watchlist from the bottom-bar Watchlist to remove markets or
drag them into your preferred order. Your watchlist is saved to your profile
and follows you across trading accounts.
On the trading terminal, use the source menu on the scrolling market ticker to
show Trending markets, the standard Tickers list, Top Volume, or your Watchlist.
Watchlist markets appear in your saved order, including markets from different
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
+ Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
+ Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
- Tap Focus Chart (the full-screen icon in the header) to give the chart
the whole screen. The header and bottom tabs hide, leaving one bar under the
chart with your open position for the market, Buy / Long, **Sell /
Short, and Exit Focus**, which restores the full layout. Focus applies
only to the price chart and is remembered on that device.
Net PnL percentage
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
Reverse a position
Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
+ side, or the largest size your margin allows. Holding a 1 BTC long and
+ reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short when your margin covers it. On the
chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
it is the Reverse button in each row, and on a phone it is the **Reverse
Position** button on each position card.
+ A reversal is one market order that closes your whole position and opens the
+ new side, so both sides happen in a single fill:
+ - Smaller size when margin is short. Closing a position in a loss lowers
+ your balance, so a position using most of your margin may not be able to
+ reopen at the same size. The new position then opens at the largest size your
+ remaining margin covers, after the realized loss, the trading fee, and your
+ Max Market Slippage. For
+ example, a 1 BTC long might reverse into a 0.8 BTC short. The review shows
+ the estimated size; the final size is set when the order fills. If not even
+ the smallest size fits, the reversal is rejected.
- All or nothing. If the new position would break a challenge rule, exceed
+ your exposure limits, or exceed your Max Market Slippage, the order is
+ rejected and your original position stays open unchanged. You are never left
+ flat by a reversal that only half worked.
- Same settings. The new position uses the leverage and margin mode of the
position you reversed.
- Fees and slippage. The trading fee applies to the full reversed size,
the same as closing and then opening separately. Market slippage is
estimated for the full order size.
- Exits. The position's Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled, as
with any flip. Set new exits for the reversed position if you want them.
- Current position only. If the position changes before the order fills
(for example, a Take Profit partly closes it, you add to it, or you change
its leverage), the reversal is rejected instead of reversing something other
than what you saw. Try again with the updated position.
- Copy trading followers. Reversing a lead account reverses its followers.
If a follower's position changes before filling, its copy is resized to reach
the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
Copy Trading.
+ Reverse Position opens a short review first, so you can check the market, the
+ new side, and the estimated price before anything is sent. To reverse as soon
+ as you click, turn off
+ Confirm Reverse Position in Trading
+ settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
+ follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
Choose an order type
| Order | What it does | Main tradeoff |
|---|
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
Forex and index markets
− EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Hyperliquid, gold (XAU) on Binance, and the
− S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100) on Hyperliquid, around the clock. The
− following markets price from oracle venues that quote a bid and an ask, so
− their order book shows a single level on each side:
+ Gold (XAU) trades on Binance, and the S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100)
+ on Hyperliquid, around the clock. The following markets price from oracle
+ venues that quote a bid and an ask, so their order book shows a single level on
+ each side:
−
| Markets | Venue |
|---|---|
| GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta |
+
| Markets | Venue |
|---|---|
| EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF | Veranta |
| Dow Jones 30 (US30) | Ostium |
US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
Trading hours
These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
the clock. Times are New York time:
−
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|---|---|
| GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, USD/CHF | Sunday 17:00 to Friday 17:00 | None |
+
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|---|---|
| EUR/USD, USD/JPY, GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, USD/CHF | Sunday 17:00 to Friday 17:00 | None |
| US30 | Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 | 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday |
Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
+ A badge beside the market name marks these markets in the trade page header,
+ the market picker, search, and the Markets page, so you can tell they do not
+ trade around the clock before you open one. FX pairs show 24/5, since they
+ trade without a daily break from Sunday to Friday. Markets with a daily break,
+ such as US30, show 23/5. On the trade page, markets
+ without a Trading Hours picker show a Venue field next to the market
+ name with the venue that supplies the market's prices.
+ Markets with two trading-hour options
+ Some markets trade on two venues: one that keeps Standard Market Hours
+ and one that trades 24/7. On these markets, the Trading Hours picker
+ in the market bar (or at the top of Market Details on a phone) switches
+ between them. Hover the info icon beside each option, or read the line under
+ it on a phone, for what that option means.
+ - Standard Market Hours follows the sessions in the table above. While the
+ market is closed, prices freeze and new positions wait until it reopens.
+ - 24/7 trades around the clock, including nights, weekends, and holidays.
+ Outside regular market hours, its price can move away from the underlying
+ market.
+ The trade page opens on Standard Market Hours unless you hold an open
+ position in that market, in which case it opens on the option your position
+ uses. You can hold a market on only one option at a time; close the position
+ before trading the other.
While a market is closed
- Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
- Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
- You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
- Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote. If your
account is liquidated or closed out while a market is closed, those
positions close at that last quote.
Prices can open far from the last quote after a weekend or holiday. A Stop
Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
which can be worse than its trigger price.
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
Retiring markets
A market that is being retired is reduce-only. It no longer appears in search
or on the Markets page, and you cannot open a new position or add to an
existing one. Positions you already hold stay open: open them from the
Positions tab or the Dashboard to reduce, close, or set Take Profit and Stop
Loss orders, which keep working until you close the position. The market's
trade page shows a notice with a link to its replacement.
Gold now trades on XAU.
The previous GOLD market is retiring, so open new gold trades on XAU.
+ EUR/USD and
+ USD/JPY now trade on
+ Veranta, which follows the trading hours above. The previous
+ Hyperliquid EUR/USD and USD/JPY markets are retiring. Positions you hold there
+ stay on Hyperliquid: open one from the Positions tab to see its Hyperliquid
+ chart, where you can reduce, close, or protect it. The EUR/USD and USD/JPY
+ pages show Veranta prices, so a new order there opens a separate Veranta
+ position instead of reducing your Hyperliquid one. If you still hold a
+ Hyperliquid position, those pages show a notice that links to its chart.
Save markets to your watchlist
Star a market on Markets or in the Trade symbol picker to add it to your
watchlist. Both views and the bottom-bar Watchlist use the same saved list,
with a shared limit of 25 markets. Removing a star in either view frees a
slot everywhere. Crypto and traditional instruments that share a ticker are
separate markets.
Open Configure Watchlist from the bottom-bar Watchlist to remove markets or
drag them into your preferred order. Your watchlist is saved to your profile
and follows you across trading accounts.
On the trading terminal, use the source menu on the scrolling market ticker to
show Trending markets, the standard Tickers list, Top Volume, or your Watchlist.
Watchlist markets appear in your saved order, including markets from different
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
- Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
− Venue picker at the top switches between them. Below it are mark price,
+ Venue picker at the top switches between them (shown as **Trading
+ Hours** when the choice is between standard market hours and 24/7). Below it are mark price,
24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
- Tap Focus Chart (the full-screen icon in the header) to give the chart
the whole screen. The header and bottom tabs hide, leaving one bar under the
chart with your open position for the market, Buy / Long, **Sell /
Short, and Exit Focus**, which restores the full layout. Focus applies
only to the price chart and is remembered on that device.
Net PnL percentage
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
Reverse a position
Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
− side. Holding a 1 BTC long and reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short. On the
+ side, or the largest size your margin allows. Holding a 1 BTC long and
+ reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short when your margin covers it. On the
chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
it is the Reverse button in each row, and on a phone it is the **Reverse
Position** button on each position card.
− A reversal is one market order for twice your position size, so both sides
− happen in a single fill:
+ A reversal is one market order that closes your whole position and opens the
+ new side, so both sides happen in a single fill:
+ - Smaller size when margin is short. Closing a position in a loss lowers
+ your balance, so a position using most of your margin may not be able to
+ reopen at the same size. The new position then opens at the largest size your
+ remaining margin covers, after the realized loss, the trading fee, and your
+ Max Market Slippage. For
+ example, a 1 BTC long might reverse into a 0.8 BTC short. The review shows
+ the estimated size; the final size is set when the order fills. If not even
+ the smallest size fits, the reversal is rejected.
- All or nothing. If the new position would break a challenge rule, exceed
− your margin or exposure limits, or exceed your
− Max Market Slippage, the
− order is rejected and your original position stays open unchanged. You are
− never left flat by a reversal that only half worked.
+ your exposure limits, or exceed your Max Market Slippage, the order is
+ rejected and your original position stays open unchanged. You are never left
+ flat by a reversal that only half worked.
- Same settings. The new position uses the leverage and margin mode of the
position you reversed.
- Fees and slippage. The trading fee applies to the full reversed size,
the same as closing and then opening separately. Market slippage is
estimated for the full order size.
- Exits. The position's Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled, as
with any flip. Set new exits for the reversed position if you want them.
- Current position only. If the position changes before the order fills
(for example, a Take Profit partly closes it, you add to it, or you change
its leverage), the reversal is rejected instead of reversing something other
than what you saw. Try again with the updated position.
- Copy trading followers. Reversing a lead account reverses its followers.
If a follower's position changes before filling, its copy is resized to reach
the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
Copy Trading.
− If Confirm New Orders reviews market orders, Reverse Position opens a short
− review first. Otherwise it is sent as soon as you click it.
+ Reverse Position opens a short review first, so you can check the market, the
+ new side, and the estimated price before anything is sent. To reverse as soon
+ as you click, turn off
+ Confirm Reverse Position in Trading
+ settings. Copy trading leads always see the review so they can follow each
+ follower's result.
To remove the button everywhere, turn off
Show Reverse Position in Trading
settings.
Choose an order type
| Order | What it does | Main tradeoff |
|---|
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsMinimum payout request for $1K Elite account changed from $250 to $30, with split details added.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
- The day boundary matches the other plans; see
Challenges and Rules.
- The rule applies in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages, together with
the static maximum loss limit.
The option is part of the account you buy. You cannot add or remove the daily
loss limit after purchase.
Elite prize accounts
Elite accounts can also be won in giveaways. A won Elite account follows the
same Elite rules as a bought No DLL account of its size, with no daily loss
limit. Giveaways can also award a
\$1K Elite account, which cannot be bought. On a \$1K Elite account the profit
target is \$100, the maximum loss limit is \$50, and the minimum payout
− request is \$250 before the split.
Evaluation rules
| Rule | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
|---|
| Profit target (10%) | \$500 | \$1,000 | \$2,500 | \$5,000 |
The profit target and the maximum loss limit (MLL) use account equity,
including open-position profit or loss. There is no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit.
After
- The day boundary matches the other plans; see
Challenges and Rules.
- The rule applies in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages, together with
the static maximum loss limit.
The option is part of the account you buy. You cannot add or remove the daily
loss limit after purchase.
Elite prize accounts
Elite accounts can also be won in giveaways. A won Elite account follows the
same Elite rules as a bought No DLL account of its size, with no daily loss
limit. Giveaways can also award a
\$1K Elite account, which cannot be bought. On a \$1K Elite account the profit
target is \$100, the maximum loss limit is \$50, and the minimum payout
+ request is \$30 before the split (\$24 to you on 80/20).
Evaluation rules
| Rule | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
|---|
| Profit target (10%) | \$500 | \$1,000 | \$2,500 | \$5,000 |
The profit target and the maximum loss limit (MLL) use account equity,
including open-position profit or loss. There is no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit.
- The day boundary matches the other plans; see
Challenges and Rules.
- The rule applies in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages, together with
the static maximum loss limit.
The option is part of the account you buy. You cannot add or remove the daily
loss limit after purchase.
Elite prize accounts
Elite accounts can also be won in giveaways. A won Elite account follows the
same Elite rules as a bought No DLL account of its size, with no daily loss
limit. Giveaways can also award a
\$1K Elite account, which cannot be bought. On a \$1K Elite account the profit
target is \$100, the maximum loss limit is \$50, and the minimum payout
− request is \$250 before the split.
+ request is \$30 before the split (\$24 to you on 80/20).
Evaluation rules
| Rule | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
|---|
| Profit target (10%) | \$500 | \$1,000 | \$2,500 | \$5,000 |
The profit target and the maximum loss limit (MLL) use account equity,
including open-position profit or loss. There is no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Challenges and RulesAdded $30 minimum profit split threshold for a $1K Elite prize account option.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review.
See Becoming Funded.
Funded accounts and payouts
The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.
A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, \$250, and \$500 before the split
− on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes; see Elite Accounts.
A rejected request restores the allowance, and submitted requests
cannot be cancelled. Each account has its own allowance, even when one trader holds
several accounts.
Each user can receive at most \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts, combined
across all accounts and model types and counted after the profit split. New
purchases and resets do not reset this cap. Read
Lifetime Payout Cap.
Payout requests require a flat account and temporarily lock trading while the
request is pending. Read Payouts for the
window, gross deduction, and the permanent MLL lock on Select, Prime, and
Signature.
Read the Challenge Lifecycle for the steps from
After
completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review.
See Becoming Funded.
Funded accounts and payouts
The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.
A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, \$250, and \$500 before the split
+ on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes, and \$30 on a \$1K Elite prize
+ account; see Elite Accounts.
A rejected request restores the allowance, and submitted requests
cannot be cancelled. Each account has its own allowance, even when one trader holds
several accounts.
Each user can receive at most \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts, combined
across all accounts and model types and counted after the profit split. New
purchases and resets do not reset this cap. Read
Lifetime Payout Cap.
Payout requests require a flat account and temporarily lock trading while the
request is pending. Read Payouts for the
window, gross deduction, and the permanent MLL lock on Select, Prime, and
Signature.
Read the Challenge Lifecycle for the steps from
completion instead of receiving automatic funding.
For example, \$100K in Prime, \$100K in Select, and \$100K in Signature totals \$300K.
Another \$100K Prime account requires Funding Review.
See Becoming Funded.
Funded accounts and payouts
The dashboard's Constraints panel shows Payout Rules only for funded accounts.
Evaluation and other non-funded accounts show their applicable trading rules
without the Payout Rules section.
A funded account can submit one payout request per Eastern calendar day, except
on Elite, which has no daily limit. The
minimum is \$100 before the profit split (\$80 to the trader on 80/20, or \$90
on 90/10). Elite minimums are \$50, \$100, \$250, and \$500 before the split
− on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes; see Elite Accounts.
+ on its \$5K, \$10K, \$25K, and \$50K sizes, and \$30 on a \$1K Elite prize
+ account; see Elite Accounts.
A rejected request restores the allowance, and submitted requests
cannot be cancelled. Each account has its own allowance, even when one trader holds
several accounts.
Each user can receive at most \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts, combined
across all accounts and model types and counted after the profit split. New
purchases and resets do not reset this cap. Read
Lifetime Payout Cap.
Payout requests require a flat account and temporarily lock trading while the
request is pending. Read Payouts for the
window, gross deduction, and the permanent MLL lock on Select, Prime, and
Signature.
Read the Challenge Lifecycle for the steps from
PremierMyFundedPerps · PayoutsPayout request process description simplified; minimum payout amount added for Elite prize accounts; clarification added about Streamer Mode email display.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Payouts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
− Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts.
− Requests can be paused. The panel checks availability when you open it, return
− to the tab, and reconnect, and every submission checks availability again.
− When requests are paused or availability cannot be verified, the request
− action is disabled. All normal payout requirements still apply.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
eligibility gates are clear. Review and delivery can take longer than the
request window.
Minimum and profit split
On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.
\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of \$30 on \$1K or \$50 on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.
Elite accounts use an 80/20 split, or 90/10 with the upgrade, and a minimum of
1% of the account size before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K,
\$250 on \$25K, and \$500 on \$50K (\$40, \$80, \$200, and \$400 to you
− on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). See
Elite Accounts.
Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite have no minimum trading-day or
qualifying-day requirement, consistency gate, or payout count cap per account.
The lifetime payout cap below still applies.
Lifetime payout cap
Each user can receive at most \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts across
all MyFundedPerps accounts. The cap is per user, combined across every
account and model type (Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite), not per account.
The cap counts the payout amount you actually receive after the profit split,
not the gross amount deducted from the account. Purchasing new accounts or
resetting existing accounts does not reset it.
The lifetime cap is separate from the per-request rules on this page. The
for an example and its limits.
Complete Rise onboarding
Only payouts with a cash portion need Rise. If you choose 100% store credit,
you can submit without a Rise account or invitation. Store-credit-only accounts
skip Rise setup entirely.
For cash delivery, enter the email you want paid to, send the
invitation, then accept it and create the Rise account. The invitation email
comes from Rise after you select Send Invitation. Check your inbox and
spam folder, then follow the invitation to complete setup. The panel shows
when setup is accepted or needs attention. If the invitation could not be
completed, contact support from the panel.
Check the email carefully. Approved payouts are delivered to the connected
− Rise account.
Clear the payout gates
The request form explains the first condition that is not yet satisfied.
Before requesting:
- keep the funded account active;
- wait for any pending request to finish and, except on Elite, for the next
daily window;
- close every open position;
- cancel resting orders and wait for working orders to settle;
- have at least the plan's minimum in available gross profit in the current
cycle (\$100 on Select, Prime, and Signature).
Payouts use realized balance. Close positions and settle orders before relying
on the displayed request amount.
After
Payouts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
+ Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts. Every request
+ must meet the normal payout requirements below.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
eligibility gates are clear. Review and delivery can take longer than the
request window.
Minimum and profit split
On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.
\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of \$30 on \$1K or \$50 on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.
Elite accounts use an 80/20 split, or 90/10 with the upgrade, and a minimum of
1% of the account size before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K,
\$250 on \$25K, and \$500 on \$50K (\$40, \$80, \$200, and \$400 to you
+ on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). A \$1K Elite prize
+ account has a \$30 minimum before the split (\$24 to you). See
Elite Accounts.
Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite have no minimum trading-day or
qualifying-day requirement, consistency gate, or payout count cap per account.
The lifetime payout cap below still applies.
Lifetime payout cap
Each user can receive at most \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts across
all MyFundedPerps accounts. The cap is per user, combined across every
account and model type (Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite), not per account.
The cap counts the payout amount you actually receive after the profit split,
not the gross amount deducted from the account. Purchasing new accounts or
resetting existing accounts does not reset it.
The lifetime cap is separate from the per-request rules on this page. The
for an example and its limits.
Complete Rise onboarding
Only payouts with a cash portion need Rise. If you choose 100% store credit,
you can submit without a Rise account or invitation. Store-credit-only accounts
skip Rise setup entirely.
For cash delivery, enter the email you want paid to, send the
invitation, then accept it and create the Rise account. The invitation email
comes from Rise after you select Send Invitation. Check your inbox and
spam folder, then follow the invitation to complete setup. The panel shows
when setup is accepted or needs attention. If the invitation could not be
completed, contact support from the panel.
Check the email carefully. Approved payouts are delivered to the connected
+ Rise account. While Streamer Mode is on, the Rise
+ email is blurred on screen.
Clear the payout gates
The request form explains the first condition that is not yet satisfied.
Before requesting:
- keep the funded account active;
- wait for any pending request to finish and, except on Elite, for the next
daily window;
- close every open position;
- cancel resting orders and wait for working orders to settle;
- have at least the plan's minimum in available gross profit in the current
cycle (\$100 on Select, Prime, and Signature).
Payouts use realized balance. Close positions and settle orders before relying
on the displayed request amount.
Payouts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
− Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts.
− Requests can be paused. The panel checks availability when you open it, return
− to the tab, and reconnect, and every submission checks availability again.
− When requests are paused or availability cannot be verified, the request
− action is disabled. All normal payout requirements still apply.
+ Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts. Every request
+ must meet the normal payout requirements below.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
eligibility gates are clear. Review and delivery can take longer than the
request window.
Minimum and profit split
On Select, Prime, and Signature, the minimum is **\$100 of gross profit before
the split**. This pays \$80 with an 80/20 split or \$90 with a 90/10 split. The request form accepts your net share
and shows the gross account deduction before you confirm.
\$1K and \$2.5K Select prize accounts use their own terms: a 90/10 profit split
and a minimum request of \$30 on \$1K or \$50 on \$2.5K. Payout Terms on
the account shows the split and minimum that apply.
Elite accounts use an 80/20 split, or 90/10 with the upgrade, and a minimum of
1% of the account size before the split: \$50 on \$5K, \$100 on \$10K,
\$250 on \$25K, and \$500 on \$50K (\$40, \$80, \$200, and \$400 to you
− on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). See
+ on 80/20, or \$45, \$90, \$225, and \$450 on 90/10). A \$1K Elite prize
+ account has a \$30 minimum before the split (\$24 to you). See
Elite Accounts.
Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite have no minimum trading-day or
qualifying-day requirement, consistency gate, or payout count cap per account.
The lifetime payout cap below still applies.
Lifetime payout cap
Each user can receive at most \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts across
all MyFundedPerps accounts. The cap is per user, combined across every
account and model type (Select, Prime, Signature, and Elite), not per account.
The cap counts the payout amount you actually receive after the profit split,
not the gross amount deducted from the account. Purchasing new accounts or
resetting existing accounts does not reset it.
The lifetime cap is separate from the per-request rules on this page. The
for an example and its limits.
Complete Rise onboarding
Only payouts with a cash portion need Rise. If you choose 100% store credit,
you can submit without a Rise account or invitation. Store-credit-only accounts
skip Rise setup entirely.
For cash delivery, enter the email you want paid to, send the
invitation, then accept it and create the Rise account. The invitation email
comes from Rise after you select Send Invitation. Check your inbox and
spam folder, then follow the invitation to complete setup. The panel shows
when setup is accepted or needs attention. If the invitation could not be
completed, contact support from the panel.
Check the email carefully. Approved payouts are delivered to the connected
− Rise account.
+ Rise account. While Streamer Mode is on, the Rise
+ email is blurred on screen.
Clear the payout gates
The request form explains the first condition that is not yet satisfied.
Before requesting:
- keep the funded account active;
- wait for any pending request to finish and, except on Elite, for the next
daily window;
- close every open position;
- cancel resting orders and wait for working orders to settle;
- have at least the plan's minimum in available gross profit in the current
cycle (\$100 on Select, Prime, and Signature).
Payouts use realized balance. Close positions and settle orders before relying
on the displayed request amount.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Buying a ChallengeAdded guidance to enable Streamer Mode during checkout to blur sensitive information while maintaining form functionality.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
2. Complete checkout
Checkout pre-fills your name, billing address, and country from the details
you entered at signup. You can edit these billing fields for the current order.
As you type a street address, checkout suggests matching addresses. Choosing
one fills in the city, state or province, postal code, and country, which you
can still edit. You can also ignore the suggestions and type the full address.
Each order keeps its submitted billing address; changing it does not change
your saved residential address or legal name. If your residence
country is Afghanistan, India, Indonesia, or Myanmar, the last name is
optional. Complete any additional fields
required by the selected payment method. Card and crypto
options are available according to your billing country and provider availability.
If card payments are unavailable for your selected billing country, checkout
automatically selects Crypto, disables Card, and explains the restriction.
Continue with crypto to pay from your wallet. When enabled for your account, store credit automatically reduces the
amount due; when credit covers the entire order, select Complete Purchase
without a card or crypto payment. Billing details and legal acceptance are
still required.
For new crypto checkouts, MyFundedPerps can absorb a small settlement shortfall
of up to 0.5% of the amount due to the provider after discounts and store
credit, capped at \$1 USD. The payment
provider must still confirm that the payment succeeded before your challenge
is issued. Pay the amount shown at checkout; this allowance covers small
settlement differences and does not change the order price.
After
2. Complete checkout
Checkout pre-fills your name, billing address, and country from the details
you entered at signup. You can edit these billing fields for the current order.
As you type a street address, checkout suggests matching addresses. Choosing
one fills in the city, state or province, postal code, and country, which you
can still edit. You can also ignore the suggestions and type the full address.
Each order keeps its submitted billing address; changing it does not change
your saved residential address or legal name. If your residence
country is Afghanistan, India, Indonesia, or Myanmar, the last name is
optional. Complete any additional fields
required by the selected payment method. Card and crypto
options are available according to your billing country and provider availability.
+ If you stream or record checkout, turn on
+ Streamer Mode first to blur your email, billing
+ details, and card fields while keeping the form usable.
If card payments are unavailable for your selected billing country, checkout
automatically selects Crypto, disables Card, and explains the restriction.
Continue with crypto to pay from your wallet. When enabled for your account, store credit automatically reduces the
amount due; when credit covers the entire order, select Complete Purchase
without a card or crypto payment. Billing details and legal acceptance are
still required.
For new crypto checkouts, MyFundedPerps can absorb a small settlement shortfall
of up to 0.5% of the amount due to the provider after discounts and store
credit, capped at \$1 USD. The payment
provider must still confirm that the payment succeeded before your challenge
is issued. Pay the amount shown at checkout; this allowance covers small
settlement differences and does not change the order price.
2. Complete checkout
Checkout pre-fills your name, billing address, and country from the details
you entered at signup. You can edit these billing fields for the current order.
As you type a street address, checkout suggests matching addresses. Choosing
one fills in the city, state or province, postal code, and country, which you
can still edit. You can also ignore the suggestions and type the full address.
Each order keeps its submitted billing address; changing it does not change
your saved residential address or legal name. If your residence
country is Afghanistan, India, Indonesia, or Myanmar, the last name is
optional. Complete any additional fields
required by the selected payment method. Card and crypto
options are available according to your billing country and provider availability.
+ If you stream or record checkout, turn on
+ Streamer Mode first to blur your email, billing
+ details, and card fields while keeping the form usable.
If card payments are unavailable for your selected billing country, checkout
automatically selects Crypto, disables Card, and explains the restriction.
Continue with crypto to pay from your wallet. When enabled for your account, store credit automatically reduces the
amount due; when credit covers the entire order, select Complete Purchase
without a card or crypto payment. Billing details and legal acceptance are
still required.
For new crypto checkouts, MyFundedPerps can absorb a small settlement shortfall
of up to 0.5% of the amount due to the provider after discounts and store
credit, capped at \$1 USD. The payment
provider must still confirm that the payment succeeded before your challenge
is issued. Pay the amount shown at checkout; this allowance covers small
settlement differences and does not change the order price.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Billing and RewardsShipping details are blurred when Streamer Mode is enabled; note about shipping regions clarified.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
An Elite Case is a black edition of its tier's case. It contains the same
prizes at the same drop rates as the standard case of that
tier, opens the same way, and appears in pull history under its Elite name.
Elite Cases cannot be bought with FP Points.
Merch Cases
A Merch Case cannot be bought with FP Points. Every Merch Case pays one piece of
MyFundedPerps merch: a T-Shirt, Pillow, Long Sleeve Tee, Polo, Baseball Cap, or
Full-Zip Hoodie.
Merch you win appears in the Merch section of My Rewards. For each item,
choose one of these:
- Keep and Ship: enter your shipping details. Clothing sizes are US men's
sizes. Merch ships to the US, Canada, Mexico, and Europe. It can take up to
− 2-3 weeks to receive your tracking code.
- Take \$25 Credit: exchange the item for \$25 in store credit instead.
This is also the option for addresses outside the shipping regions.
You do not have to decide right away. The item waits in Rewards until you
choose.
Discount code prizes
Bronze, Silver, Gold, and Diamond cases can pay a 35% or 40% discount code. The code is created for you when you open the
case and is saved under Discount Codes on the Rewards page, with Copy
and Use Code buttons. Use Code opens checkout with the code applied.
Each discount code:
- Works only on your account. Anyone else who enters it sees it as an invalid
code.
- Can be used once. One use covers a whole checkout, including an order for
After
An Elite Case is a black edition of its tier's case. It contains the same
prizes at the same drop rates as the standard case of that
tier, opens the same way, and appears in pull history under its Elite name.
Elite Cases cannot be bought with FP Points.
Merch Cases
A Merch Case cannot be bought with FP Points. Every Merch Case pays one piece of
MyFundedPerps merch: a T-Shirt, Pillow, Long Sleeve Tee, Polo, Baseball Cap, or
Full-Zip Hoodie.
Merch you win appears in the Merch section of My Rewards. For each item,
choose one of these:
- Keep and Ship: enter your shipping details. Clothing sizes are US men's
sizes. Merch ships to the US, Canada, Mexico, and Europe. It can take up to
+ 2-3 weeks to receive your tracking code. While
+ Streamer Mode is on, the shipping fields are
+ blurred on screen.
- Take \$25 Credit: exchange the item for \$25 in store credit instead.
This is also the option for addresses outside the shipping regions.
You do not have to decide right away. The item waits in Rewards until you
choose.
Discount code prizes
Bronze, Silver, Gold, and Diamond cases can pay a 35% or 40% discount code. The code is created for you when you open the
case and is saved under Discount Codes on the Rewards page, with Copy
and Use Code buttons. Use Code opens checkout with the code applied.
Each discount code:
- Works only on your account. Anyone else who enters it sees it as an invalid
code.
- Can be used once. One use covers a whole checkout, including an order for
An Elite Case is a black edition of its tier's case. It contains the same
prizes at the same drop rates as the standard case of that
tier, opens the same way, and appears in pull history under its Elite name.
Elite Cases cannot be bought with FP Points.
Merch Cases
A Merch Case cannot be bought with FP Points. Every Merch Case pays one piece of
MyFundedPerps merch: a T-Shirt, Pillow, Long Sleeve Tee, Polo, Baseball Cap, or
Full-Zip Hoodie.
Merch you win appears in the Merch section of My Rewards. For each item,
choose one of these:
- Keep and Ship: enter your shipping details. Clothing sizes are US men's
sizes. Merch ships to the US, Canada, Mexico, and Europe. It can take up to
− 2-3 weeks to receive your tracking code.
+ 2-3 weeks to receive your tracking code. While
+ Streamer Mode is on, the shipping fields are
+ blurred on screen.
- Take \$25 Credit: exchange the item for \$25 in store credit instead.
This is also the option for addresses outside the shipping regions.
You do not have to decide right away. The item waits in Rewards until you
choose.
Discount code prizes
Bronze, Silver, Gold, and Diamond cases can pay a 35% or 40% discount code. The code is created for you when you open the
case and is saved under Discount Codes on the Rewards page, with Copy
and Use Code buttons. Use Code opens checkout with the code applied.
Each discount code:
- Works only on your account. Anyone else who enters it sees it as an invalid
code.
- Can be used once. One use covers a whole checkout, including an order for
PremierMyFundedPerps · Becoming FundedPass certificate now shows evaluation name instead of challenge details.Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Becoming Funded
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/becoming-funded
Complete identity verification, sign the customer agreement, follow funding review, and open the issued funded account.
The evaluation pass starts a four-part funding path:
1. Challenge Passed
2. Identity Verification
3. Customer Agreement
4. Funded Account
The passed account's dashboard shows which step is complete, current, upcoming,
or blocked. When the evaluation passes, you also receive a congratulations
email with the account ID and a link back to the dashboard. If identity
verification is your next step, a separate email invites you to complete it.
− Your evaluation certificate celebrates Evaluation Passed and includes your
− name, challenge details, and pass date. Follow the passed-account dashboard
for your next funding step.
API sandbox accounts are for integration testing only. Passing a
sandbox account ends it as passed and does not start the funding path.
1. Verify your identity
Choose Verify Identity or Continue Verification from the passed-account
dashboard. The secure identity check is provided by Sumsub. Identity documents
are sent directly to Sumsub and are not stored by MyFundedPerps.
A current Sumsub approval is reused across your accounts, including a check
completed for affiliate payouts. You do not need to repeat an approved check
unless the team requires a new verification.
Use your complete legal identity and follow the provider prompts. Most checks
finish within minutes, but some take up to 12 hours.
After
Becoming Funded
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/becoming-funded
Complete identity verification, sign the customer agreement, follow funding review, and open the issued funded account.
The evaluation pass starts a four-part funding path:
1. Challenge Passed
2. Identity Verification
3. Customer Agreement
4. Funded Account
The passed account's dashboard shows which step is complete, current, upcoming,
or blocked. When the evaluation passes, you also receive a congratulations
email with the account ID and a link back to the dashboard. If identity
verification is your next step, a separate email invites you to complete it.
+ Your pass certificate celebrates Passed and includes your name, the
+ evaluation you passed, and the pass date. Follow the passed-account dashboard
for your next funding step.
API sandbox accounts are for integration testing only. Passing a
sandbox account ends it as passed and does not start the funding path.
1. Verify your identity
Choose Verify Identity or Continue Verification from the passed-account
dashboard. The secure identity check is provided by Sumsub. Identity documents
are sent directly to Sumsub and are not stored by MyFundedPerps.
A current Sumsub approval is reused across your accounts, including a check
completed for affiliate payouts. You do not need to repeat an approved check
unless the team requires a new verification.
Use your complete legal identity and follow the provider prompts. Most checks
finish within minutes, but some take up to 12 hours.
Becoming Funded
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/becoming-funded
Complete identity verification, sign the customer agreement, follow funding review, and open the issued funded account.
The evaluation pass starts a four-part funding path:
1. Challenge Passed
2. Identity Verification
3. Customer Agreement
4. Funded Account
The passed account's dashboard shows which step is complete, current, upcoming,
or blocked. When the evaluation passes, you also receive a congratulations
email with the account ID and a link back to the dashboard. If identity
verification is your next step, a separate email invites you to complete it.
− Your evaluation certificate celebrates Evaluation Passed and includes your
− name, challenge details, and pass date. Follow the passed-account dashboard
+ Your pass certificate celebrates Passed and includes your name, the
+ evaluation you passed, and the pass date. Follow the passed-account dashboard
for your next funding step.
API sandbox accounts are for integration testing only. Passing a
sandbox account ends it as passed and does not start the funding path.
1. Verify your identity
Choose Verify Identity or Continue Verification from the passed-account
dashboard. The secure identity check is provided by Sumsub. Identity documents
are sent directly to Sumsub and are not stored by MyFundedPerps.
A current Sumsub approval is reused across your accounts, including a check
completed for affiliate payouts. You do not need to repeat an approved check
unless the team requires a new verification.
Use your complete legal identity and follow the provider prompts. Most checks
finish within minutes, but some take up to 12 hours.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramOne-time tier rewards changed from sealed reward cases and Prime evaluation accounts to gift codes redeemable on the Affiliates page, with specific case and account rewards replaced by new code types; Statistics tab renamed to Analytics with expanded reporting including date r...Oct 14
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
Reward tiers
Tiers are based on gross lifetime completed sales. A sale counts toward your
tier once its refund hold ends: 48 hours after payment, or as soon as the
purchased account executes its first trade, whichever comes first. A paid sale
can count toward tier rewards while its commission is still awaiting eligibility
review; that commission remains unavailable for payout until review clears.
Purchases made through your link without your code (Did Not Use Code)
earn no commission but count toward your tier once their refund hold ends, on
the same 48-hour or first-trade schedule.
Unpaid orders, ineligible self-referrals, and orders refunded before the hold
ends do not add tier progress. Refunds and chargebacks after a sale has counted never reduce the
total, so a tier you reach is permanent. Tiers do not change the commission
− rate; each tier above Bronze issues a one-time reward automatically as a sealed
− reward case, plus a free Prime evaluation account where listed, the moment your
− completed sales cross the threshold. Both appear under
− Rewards and your dashboard.
−
| Tier | Gross lifetime sales | One-time reward |
|---|
| Bronze | Starting tier | None |
−
Gold \$1,000 Diamond Case + 10K Prime account Diamond \$2,500 Obsidian Case + 25K Prime account Obsidian \$5,000 Obsidian Case + 50K Prime account Goat \$10,000 Obsidian Case + 100K Prime account
| Tier | Gross lifetime sales | One-time reward codes |
|---|---|---|
| Silver | \$250 | Gold Case |
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
- Fixed 30% offer. Every graphic prints a fixed offer of 30% off with
your code as part of its artwork. It does not update with your code's
current discount, which Your Code's Discount shows. Share the graphics
only while your code gives buyers 30% off.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
− The team may issue you giveaway codes to share with your audience. A
− Giveaways tab appears on the Affiliates page once your first code is
− issued. Affiliates without giveaway codes do not see this tab.
- Each code shows the reward it grants: a free evaluation account with the
listed size and profit split, or a sealed reward case. A code limited to
first-time code redeemers, or to users with or without an account, says so
under the reward.
− - Each code can be redeemed once, by anyone except you. Redeeming one of your
− own giveaway codes on your account is refused.
- Codes are hidden until you select the show button beside them, so the tab is
safe to keep on screen while streaming. The copy button copies a code without
revealing it.
- Codes that have not been redeemed show Available. A redeemed code shows
Redeemed, the date and time, and a partially hidden email of the person
who redeemed it, such as fo•••@g•••.com: only the first one or two
characters of the address, the first character of the domain, and its
ending (such as .com) are visible.
- Newest codes appear first. Use Next and Previous to browse older
codes.
Recipients redeem codes on
Redeem Code.
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
- Payout requests are approved on the last Friday of each month and paid
− through Riseworks to the email you enter.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
Clearing cookies or switching browsers loses that attribution. If you have not
allowed attribution cookies where consent is required, the visit is not tracked;
you can allow them in Cookie Preferences and reopen the link.
A purchase started during that window is credited to the partner automatically,
even with no checkout code or with a different affiliate or discount code.
Partner tracking does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. Refunded purchases remain identifiable separately.
− Statistics
− Open the Statistics tab on the Affiliates page to see how your link and
− code perform:
−
| Figure | What it counts |
|---|
− Link Clicks | Visits to your referral link, for the life of your affiliate account. Known bots are not counted.
−
| Referred Traders | Traders attributed to you by a purchase made with your code. |
|---|
− Confirmed Orders | Purchases made with your code whose commission has passed the refund hold, minus refunds.
−
| Confirmed Sales | The amount paid on those confirmed orders. |
|---|
− Weekly Activity charts clicks, new referred traders, confirmed orders, or
− confirmed sales for each of the last 12 weeks. Orders and sales are placed in
− the week of purchase once they are confirmed, so the latest week can grow after
− the refund hold ends. Weeks start on Monday (UTC). Weekly click history begins
− in October 2026; earlier clicks count only toward the Link Clicks total.
− Orders still in the refund hold, and purchases through your link without your
− code, are not included here. They appear in your commission history as
− Pending and Did Not Use Code.
− Statistics load when you open the tab and show the time they were updated.
Select Refresh for the latest figures.
Commission history
The Affiliates page shows Commission History with your total commission
earned and the number of paid orders from your code or link. Each row shows
the purchased account type and size, its commission, and the date and time
the order was placed in your local time zone. Newest orders appear first;
use Next and Previous to browse older orders.
Orders placed through your link without your code show Did Not Use Code
instead of a commission. The Did Not Use Code box in the earnings summary
at the top of the page totals these paid purchases and how many there are.
They never add to your commission or payout balance.
Orders within the refund hold or awaiting a commission decision show
Pending alongside their calculated commission. Pending commission is
After
Reward tiers
Tiers are based on gross lifetime completed sales. A sale counts toward your
tier once its refund hold ends: 48 hours after payment, or as soon as the
purchased account executes its first trade, whichever comes first. A paid sale
can count toward tier rewards while its commission is still awaiting eligibility
review; that commission remains unavailable for payout until review clears.
Purchases made through your link without your code (Did Not Use Code)
earn no commission but count toward your tier once their refund hold ends, on
the same 48-hour or first-trade schedule.
Unpaid orders, ineligible self-referrals, and orders refunded before the hold
ends do not add tier progress. Refunds and chargebacks after a sale has counted never reduce the
total, so a tier you reach is permanent. Tiers do not change the commission
+ rate. Each tier above Bronze issues a one-time reward as gift codes, added to
+ the Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page the moment your completed sales
+ cross the threshold. Each code can be redeemed once. Redeem the codes on your
+ own account, or give them away to your audience: they make great giveaways for
+ your followers. See Giveaway codes.
+
| Tier | Gross lifetime sales | One-time reward codes |
|---|
| Bronze | Starting tier | None |
+
Gold \$1,000 Obsidian Case Diamond \$2,500 Eclipse Case Obsidian \$5,000 Eclipse Case + 10K Elite No DLL account Goat \$10,000 Matt's Golden Ticket
| Tier | Gross lifetime sales | One-time reward codes |
|---|---|---|
| Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case |
+ The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
+ so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
+ rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
- Fixed 30% offer. Every graphic prints a fixed offer of 30% off with
your code as part of its artwork. It does not update with your code's
current discount, which Your Code's Discount shows. Share the graphics
only while your code gives buyers 30% off.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
+ The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
+ audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
+ team issues you. The tab appears once your first code is issued. Affiliates
+ without codes do not see this tab.
- Each code shows the reward it grants: a free evaluation account with the
listed size and profit split, or a sealed reward case. A code limited to
first-time code redeemers, or to users with or without an account, says so
under the reward.
+ - Each code can be redeemed once. Tier reward codes are labeled with the tier
+ that earned them, such as Silver tier reward, and you can redeem them on
+ your own account or give them away. Codes from the team can be redeemed by
+ anyone except you; redeeming one on your account is refused.
- Codes are hidden until you select the show button beside them, so the tab is
safe to keep on screen while streaming. The copy button copies a code without
revealing it.
- Codes that have not been redeemed show Available. A redeemed code shows
Redeemed, the date and time, and a partially hidden email of the person
who redeemed it, such as fo•••@g•••.com: only the first one or two
characters of the address, the first character of the domain, and its
ending (such as .com) are visible.
- Newest codes appear first. Use Next and Previous to browse older
codes.
Recipients redeem codes on
Redeem Code.
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
- Payout requests are approved on the last Friday of each month and paid
+ through Riseworks to the email you enter. While
+ Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
+ Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
Clearing cookies or switching browsers loses that attribution. If you have not
allowed attribution cookies where consent is required, the visit is not tracked;
you can allow them in Cookie Preferences and reopen the link.
A purchase started during that window is credited to the partner automatically,
even with no checkout code or with a different affiliate or discount code.
Partner tracking does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. Refunded purchases remain identifiable separately.
+ Analytics
+ Open the Analytics tab on the Affiliates page to see how your link, code,
+ and campaigns perform. Every figure is reported by purchase date in UTC.
+ Date range and grouping
+ Choose a Date Range: Today, Yesterday, Last 7 Days, **Last 30
+ Days (the default), Last 90 Days, This Month, Last Month, All
+ Time, or a Custom Range of UTC days. Group By** sets the charts and the
+ breakdown table to Daily, Weekly, or Monthly buckets. Ranges longer
+ than 400 days are always grouped by month.
+ Compare to Previous Period is on by default. Each summary figure then shows
+ its change against the period of the same length just before your range, or
+ No prior data when there is nothing to compare.
+ The report loads when you open the tab and shows the time it was updated.
Select Refresh for the latest figures.
+ Summary figures
+
| Figure | What it counts |
|---|
+ Link Clicks | Visits through your referral and campaign links. Refreshes of the same link and known bots are not counted.
+ Unique Visitors | Browsers that reached your link for the first time in this period. Each visitor counts once, on the day of their first visit.
+ Signups | New accounts created after visiting your link, within your attribution window.
+ Customers | Distinct buyers in this period, split into new customers (first purchase through you) and returning customers.
+ Purchases | Completed purchases credited to you by code or link, including purchases refunded later.
+ Sales Revenue | The amount paid after discounts. Refunded amounts are shown separately and are not subtracted.
+ Commission Earned | Commission on this period's purchases, pending plus approved, after reversals.
+ Link Conversion | Unique visitors from this period who went on to purchase, divided by unique visitors. Code-only purchases are excluded.
+
| Average Order Value | Sales revenue divided by purchases. |
|---|
+ Earnings per Click | Commission from purchases that followed a link visit, divided by unique visitors.
+ Select the info icon beside any figure for its definition.
+ Charts and funnel
+ - Sales charts purchases and revenue over time.
+ - Traffic and Customers charts clicks, signups, and customers.
+ - Commission by Purchase Date charts pending, approved, and reversed
+ commission.
+ - Referral Funnel follows the unique visitors first seen in your range
+ through Signed Up and First Purchase, with the share of the previous
+ step that reached each stage.
+ Click, visitor, and signup tracking has a start date. A notice shows when it
+ began, and traffic before that date is unavailable rather than zero. Sales are
+ shown in full.
+ Campaigns
+ Create a tracking link for each place you share, such as your X bio, a YouTube
+ review, or a Discord announcement. Select New Tracking Link, give it a
+ name and a link ID (lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens; the ID cannot be
+ changed later), and optionally add UTM tags for your own analytics tools. You
+ can have up to 50 tracking links. Archive a link you no longer use and restore
+ it later.
+ The Campaigns table reports clicks, visitors, signups, customers,
+ purchases, revenue, conversion, and commission for each tracking
+ link. Plain Link covers your link without a campaign, and Code Only
+ covers purchases made with your code and no tracked visit.
+ Link sales without your code
+ Link Sales Without Your Code lists the orders and revenue from buyers who
+ arrived through your link but checked out without your code. These purchases
+ count toward your reward tiers but do not earn commission.
+ Details and export
+ The Details section has three tables, each with Export CSV:
+ - Breakdown: clicks, signups, buyers, purchases, revenue, refunds,
+ commission, and conversion for each day, week, or month in your range.
+ - Products: purchases, revenue, refunds, and commission for each product.
+ - Transactions: each order with its purchase date, product, amount, code,
+ method (Code, Link and Code, or Link Only), commission, and
+ status. Filter by product, campaign, or status, or use Search Orders.
+ Buyers are never identified: each order shows a short reference only. When a
+ range has more than 5,000 purchases, choose a shorter range to see sales
+ details.
+ How attribution works
+ - Last click wins. Your link saves a cookie for your attribution window, and a
+ later click on another affiliate's link replaces it.
+ - Commission goes to the affiliate code applied at checkout. A buyer who
+ arrives through your link but uses another affiliate's code belongs to that
+ affiliate.
+ - Commission is approved after the refund hold and paid out later, so approval
+ and payout dates can fall in a different period than the purchase.
+ - Refunded and charged-back purchases stay in the purchase count. Their amounts
+ appear under refunds, and any commission they remove appears as
+ Reversed.
Commission history
The Affiliates page shows Commission History with your total commission
earned and the number of paid orders from your code or link. Each row shows
the purchased account type and size, its commission, and the date and time
the order was placed in your local time zone. Newest orders appear first;
use Next and Previous to browse older orders.
Orders placed through your link without your code show Did Not Use Code
instead of a commission. The Did Not Use Code box in the earnings summary
at the top of the page totals these paid purchases and how many there are.
They never add to your commission or payout balance.
Orders within the refund hold or awaiting a commission decision show
Pending alongside their calculated commission. Pending commission is
Reward tiers
Tiers are based on gross lifetime completed sales. A sale counts toward your
tier once its refund hold ends: 48 hours after payment, or as soon as the
purchased account executes its first trade, whichever comes first. A paid sale
can count toward tier rewards while its commission is still awaiting eligibility
review; that commission remains unavailable for payout until review clears.
Purchases made through your link without your code (Did Not Use Code)
earn no commission but count toward your tier once their refund hold ends, on
the same 48-hour or first-trade schedule.
Unpaid orders, ineligible self-referrals, and orders refunded before the hold
ends do not add tier progress. Refunds and chargebacks after a sale has counted never reduce the
total, so a tier you reach is permanent. Tiers do not change the commission
− rate; each tier above Bronze issues a one-time reward automatically as a sealed
− reward case, plus a free Prime evaluation account where listed, the moment your
− completed sales cross the threshold. Both appear under
− Rewards and your dashboard.
−
| Tier | Gross lifetime sales | One-time reward |
|---|
+ rate. Each tier above Bronze issues a one-time reward as gift codes, added to
+ the Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page the moment your completed sales
+ cross the threshold. Each code can be redeemed once. Redeem the codes on your
+ own account, or give them away to your audience: they make great giveaways for
+ your followers. See Giveaway codes.
+
| Tier | Gross lifetime sales | One-time reward codes |
|---|
| Bronze | Starting tier | None |
−
Gold \$1,000 Diamond Case + 10K Prime account Diamond \$2,500 Obsidian Case + 25K Prime account Obsidian \$5,000 Obsidian Case + 50K Prime account Goat \$10,000 Obsidian Case + 100K Prime account
| Tier | Gross lifetime sales | One-time reward codes |
|---|---|---|
| Silver | \$250 | Gold Case |
+
Gold \$1,000 Obsidian Case Diamond \$2,500 Eclipse Case Obsidian \$5,000 Eclipse Case + 10K Elite No DLL account Goat \$10,000 Matt's Golden Ticket
| Tier | Gross lifetime sales | One-time reward codes |
|---|---|---|
| Silver | \$250 | Diamond Case |
+ The Obsidian reward is two codes, one for the case and one for the account,
+ so you can keep one and give the other away. If you reached a tier before
+ rewards became codes, you also receive that tier's codes.
Promo graphics
Open the Graphics tab on the Affiliates page to download ready-made
promo graphics. Each one is filled in with your affiliate code, your display
name, and your profile picture.
- Fixed 30% offer. Every graphic prints a fixed offer of 30% off with
your code as part of its artwork. It does not update with your code's
current discount, which Your Code's Discount shows. Share the graphics
only while your code gives buyers 30% off.
- Elite details. The MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
Meet Elite, and How Much Can You Open graphics show account prices,
rules, and leverage figures as designed. These do not update automatically.
- Name and picture. Edit the name, upload a different picture, and zoom or
Asset, The Market Never Closes, MyFundedPerps Elite, Start Your Evaluation,
and a 30% Off Banner. Story holds vertical 1080 × 1920 versions of
Partnership Announcement, Trade Everything, The Market Never Closes, and
Start Your Evaluation, plus Meet Elite and How Much Can You Open.
- Downloads. Download each graphic as a PNG.
The Your Code's Discount card shows the discount your code gives buyers
right now and, when the discount has a limited number of uses, how many are
left. If a graphic is temporarily turned off, it stays listed with the
reason and cannot be downloaded until it is available again.
Graphics you already received from the team stay available to download in
the same tab.
Giveaway codes
− The team may issue you giveaway codes to share with your audience. A
− Giveaways tab appears on the Affiliates page once your first code is
− issued. Affiliates without giveaway codes do not see this tab.
+ The Giveaways tab on the Affiliates page holds codes to share with your
+ audience: your reward tier codes and any giveaway codes the
+ team issues you. The tab appears once your first code is issued. Affiliates
+ without codes do not see this tab.
- Each code shows the reward it grants: a free evaluation account with the
listed size and profit split, or a sealed reward case. A code limited to
first-time code redeemers, or to users with or without an account, says so
under the reward.
− - Each code can be redeemed once, by anyone except you. Redeeming one of your
− own giveaway codes on your account is refused.
+ - Each code can be redeemed once. Tier reward codes are labeled with the tier
+ that earned them, such as Silver tier reward, and you can redeem them on
+ your own account or give them away. Codes from the team can be redeemed by
+ anyone except you; redeeming one on your account is refused.
- Codes are hidden until you select the show button beside them, so the tab is
safe to keep on screen while streaming. The copy button copies a code without
revealing it.
- Codes that have not been redeemed show Available. A redeemed code shows
Redeemed, the date and time, and a partially hidden email of the person
who redeemed it, such as fo•••@g•••.com: only the first one or two
characters of the address, the first character of the domain, and its
ending (such as .com) are visible.
- Newest codes appear first. Use Next and Previous to browse older
codes.
Recipients redeem codes on
Redeem Code.
A pending, unsuccessful, or invalidated check does not unlock payout requests.
If Sumsub asks you to resubmit, try again with your full legal name and clear
photos of a valid ID. Sumsub sometimes approves a check after additional
screening, so contact support only if your check is still not approved 12 hours
after your last submission, or if the page asks you to contact support.
Once approved, return to Payouts and select Request Payout. Rise onboarding
is a separate payment step and does not replace Sumsub identity verification.
- Request a payout from the Payouts tab once your unclaimed commission reaches
the \$100 minimum. Only commission that has cleared the refund hold counts
toward your available payout. If a higher minimum applies, the Payouts tab
shows it; the minimum cannot be set below \$100.
- Payout requests are approved on the last Friday of each month and paid
− through Riseworks to the email you enter.
+ through Riseworks to the email you enter. While
+ Streamer Mode is on, that email is blurred in the
+ Payouts tab.
- You are responsible for your own taxes.
Affiliate payouts are separate from funded trader payouts. See
Payouts for funded account payouts.
Partner links
Partner tracking is a separate program managed by the team. A partner does not
need an affiliate account. The team creates a link such as
https://myfundedperpetuals.com/?partner=MFFU.
When attribution cookies are permitted, opening a valid partner link starts a
7-day attribution window in that browser. The most recent valid partner link
replaces the previous partner. Opening the same link again refreshes the window.
Clearing cookies or switching browsers loses that attribution. If you have not
allowed attribution cookies where consent is required, the visit is not tracked;
you can allow them in Cookie Preferences and reopen the link.
A purchase started during that window is credited to the partner automatically,
even with no checkout code or with a different affiliate or discount code.
Partner tracking does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. Refunded purchases remain identifiable separately.
− Statistics
− Open the Statistics tab on the Affiliates page to see how your link and
− code perform:
−
| Figure | What it counts |
|---|
− Link Clicks | Visits to your referral link, for the life of your affiliate account. Known bots are not counted.
−
| Referred Traders | Traders attributed to you by a purchase made with your code. |
|---|
− Confirmed Orders | Purchases made with your code whose commission has passed the refund hold, minus refunds.
−
| Confirmed Sales | The amount paid on those confirmed orders. |
|---|
− Weekly Activity charts clicks, new referred traders, confirmed orders, or
− confirmed sales for each of the last 12 weeks. Orders and sales are placed in
− the week of purchase once they are confirmed, so the latest week can grow after
− the refund hold ends. Weeks start on Monday (UTC). Weekly click history begins
− in October 2026; earlier clicks count only toward the Link Clicks total.
− Orders still in the refund hold, and purchases through your link without your
− code, are not included here. They appear in your commission history as
− Pending and Did Not Use Code.
− Statistics load when you open the tab and show the time they were updated.
+ Analytics
+ Open the Analytics tab on the Affiliates page to see how your link, code,
+ and campaigns perform. Every figure is reported by purchase date in UTC.
+ Date range and grouping
+ Choose a Date Range: Today, Yesterday, Last 7 Days, **Last 30
+ Days (the default), Last 90 Days, This Month, Last Month, All
+ Time, or a Custom Range of UTC days. Group By** sets the charts and the
+ breakdown table to Daily, Weekly, or Monthly buckets. Ranges longer
+ than 400 days are always grouped by month.
+ Compare to Previous Period is on by default. Each summary figure then shows
+ its change against the period of the same length just before your range, or
+ No prior data when there is nothing to compare.
+ The report loads when you open the tab and shows the time it was updated.
Select Refresh for the latest figures.
+ Summary figures
+
| Figure | What it counts |
|---|
+ Link Clicks | Visits through your referral and campaign links. Refreshes of the same link and known bots are not counted.
+ Unique Visitors | Browsers that reached your link for the first time in this period. Each visitor counts once, on the day of their first visit.
+ Signups | New accounts created after visiting your link, within your attribution window.
+ Customers | Distinct buyers in this period, split into new customers (first purchase through you) and returning customers.
+ Purchases | Completed purchases credited to you by code or link, including purchases refunded later.
+ Sales Revenue | The amount paid after discounts. Refunded amounts are shown separately and are not subtracted.
+ Commission Earned | Commission on this period's purchases, pending plus approved, after reversals.
+ Link Conversion | Unique visitors from this period who went on to purchase, divided by unique visitors. Code-only purchases are excluded.
+
| Average Order Value | Sales revenue divided by purchases. |
|---|
+ Earnings per Click | Commission from purchases that followed a link visit, divided by unique visitors.
+ Select the info icon beside any figure for its definition.
+ Charts and funnel
+ - Sales charts purchases and revenue over time.
+ - Traffic and Customers charts clicks, signups, and customers.
+ - Commission by Purchase Date charts pending, approved, and reversed
+ commission.
+ - Referral Funnel follows the unique visitors first seen in your range
+ through Signed Up and First Purchase, with the share of the previous
+ step that reached each stage.
+ Click, visitor, and signup tracking has a start date. A notice shows when it
+ began, and traffic before that date is unavailable rather than zero. Sales are
+ shown in full.
+ Campaigns
+ Create a tracking link for each place you share, such as your X bio, a YouTube
+ review, or a Discord announcement. Select New Tracking Link, give it a
+ name and a link ID (lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens; the ID cannot be
+ changed later), and optionally add UTM tags for your own analytics tools. You
+ can have up to 50 tracking links. Archive a link you no longer use and restore
+ it later.
+ The Campaigns table reports clicks, visitors, signups, customers,
+ purchases, revenue, conversion, and commission for each tracking
+ link. Plain Link covers your link without a campaign, and Code Only
+ covers purchases made with your code and no tracked visit.
+ Link sales without your code
+ Link Sales Without Your Code lists the orders and revenue from buyers who
+ arrived through your link but checked out without your code. These purchases
+ count toward your reward tiers but do not earn commission.
+ Details and export
+ The Details section has three tables, each with Export CSV:
+ - Breakdown: clicks, signups, buyers, purchases, revenue, refunds,
+ commission, and conversion for each day, week, or month in your range.
+ - Products: purchases, revenue, refunds, and commission for each product.
+ - Transactions: each order with its purchase date, product, amount, code,
+ method (Code, Link and Code, or Link Only), commission, and
+ status. Filter by product, campaign, or status, or use Search Orders.
+ Buyers are never identified: each order shows a short reference only. When a
+ range has more than 5,000 purchases, choose a shorter range to see sales
+ details.
+ How attribution works
+ - Last click wins. Your link saves a cookie for your attribution window, and a
+ later click on another affiliate's link replaces it.
+ - Commission goes to the affiliate code applied at checkout. A buyer who
+ arrives through your link but uses another affiliate's code belongs to that
+ affiliate.
+ - Commission is approved after the refund hold and paid out later, so approval
+ and payout dates can fall in a different period than the purchase.
+ - Refunded and charged-back purchases stay in the purchase count. Their amounts
+ appear under refunds, and any commission they remove appears as
+ Reversed.
Commission history
The Affiliates page shows Commission History with your total commission
earned and the number of paid orders from your code or link. Each row shows
the purchased account type and size, its commission, and the date and time
the order was placed in your local time zone. Newest orders appear first;
use Next and Previous to browse older orders.
Orders placed through your link without your code show Did Not Use Code
instead of a commission. The Did Not Use Code box in the earnings summary
at the top of the page totals these paid purchases and how many there are.
They never add to your commission or payout balance.
Orders within the refund hold or awaiting a commission decision show
Pending alongside their calculated commission. Pending commission is
PremierMyFundedPerps · Streamer Mode SettingsNew page published.Oct 14
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading with the APIElite accounts now have separate market exposure caps; copy trading behavior, evaluation tracking, and account streaming capabilities were added or clarified.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api
Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.
The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an Idempotency-Key header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned client_order_id for durable reconciliation.
Exposure caps
API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
− for each market; other users have separate allowances. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.
| type | Required price fields | Important options |
|---|
of pending and resting orders. This view is safer for reconciliation than
searching recent history.
At an hourly swap boundary, ready charges are applied before order settlement
and its balance and margin checks, without waiting for the scheduled hourly
processing window. Incomplete charge data can keep the order pending while it
is recovered. This also applies to reduce-only closes: closing after a boundary
does not remove the charge for exposure held at that boundary. See
Commissions and Fees.
For an enabled copy group, copied market orders stay pending until the lead
market order fills. If the lead rejects or expires without filling, its pending
market copies are canceled without opening follower positions or charging
trading fees. Resting limit and trigger copies, including attached TP/SL,
− execute independently on each account. See
Copy Trading.
Use GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server id is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.
If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns 503 with Retry-After instead of returning truncated data.
- PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id} changes price and optionally size.
- PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits sets or removes TP/SL attached to
a resting limit entry. Send null to remove a leg.
- DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id} cancels a working order or queues cancellation
when execution already owns the row.
fill and trading rules.
GET /v1/scaled-orders/{id} returns every rung's price, size, child order ID,
and placement rejection when applicable. DELETE fences unplaced rungs and
cancels every working child.
Reconcile fills and closed positions
GET /v1/fills?account_id=... returns filled orders in settlement order with
fees, realized P\&L, notional, liquidity role, and partial-fill lineage. Use
GET /v1/positions?account_id=...&status=closed for cursor-paginated closed
position records.
Treat all cursors as opaque. Order and strategy state can continue changing
after a response, so reconcile by resource ID until it reaches a terminal
status.
Copy groups and scheduled execution
Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See Authentication.
Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that reject_reason. Previously
parent_order_id.
A canceled order carries cancel_reason:
| cancel_reason | Meaning |
|---|
user | You canceled it, including a cancel requested while it was executing.
| oco | Its paired TP or SL filled and retired the remaining size. |
|---|
reduce_only | The position it protected closed, reversed, or became too small for it.
| replaced | A new attached TP or SL took over the size it covered. |
|---|
trading_restricted | A trading restriction on your profile canceled opening orders.
| venue_policy | The market stopped accepting new positions on this venue. |
|---|
− copy | A copy-trading lead order changed or ended, or the copy stopped applying.
Treat unknown values as a generic cancellation: new reasons may be added.
Orders canceled before this field existed omit it. A closed position carries
close_reason: user, take_profit, stop_loss, liquidation, reversal,
or system.
Every fill also records position_side_after (long, short, or flat) and
position_size_after, the account's position in that market immediately
after the fill. Fills from before these fields existed omit them.
GET /v1/twap-orders?account_id=... continues to return active TWAP and VWAP
parents. To discover terminal parents without retaining their IDs, request
status=completed or status=canceled. History is ordered by creation time,
newest first, within the selected status, and accepts limit (1 to 100,
default 50) and cursor. Follow next_cursor while has_more is true, keeping
account_id and status unchanged. Query both terminal statuses for a complete
history. The strategy field distinguishes TWAP from VWAP; completion_reason
explains why a completed schedule stopped. Pagination is not accepted for the
active listing.
Live market data
Use market data streaming for live prices, books, trades,
− and candles. It is public and uses a dedicated WebSocket endpoint. Continue
− using REST for account balances, positions, order state, and fills; private
− account streaming is not available.
After
Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api
Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.
The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an Idempotency-Key header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned client_order_id for durable reconciliation.
Exposure caps
API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
+ for each market; other users have separate allowances. Elite accounts are the
+ exception: each Elite account has its own cap for each market, counting only
+ that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.
| type | Required price fields | Important options |
|---|
of pending and resting orders. This view is safer for reconciliation than
searching recent history.
At an hourly swap boundary, ready charges are applied before order settlement
and its balance and margin checks, without waiting for the scheduled hourly
processing window. Incomplete charge data can keep the order pending while it
is recovered. This also applies to reduce-only closes: closing after a boundary
does not remove the charge for exposure held at that boundary. See
Commissions and Fees.
For an enabled copy group, copied market orders stay pending until the lead
market order fills. If the lead rejects or expires without filling, its pending
market copies are canceled without opening follower positions or charging
trading fees. Resting limit and trigger copies, including attached TP/SL,
+ execute independently on each account. Copies open on the same venue as the
+ lead order, including an alternate venue you chose for the market, and a
+ trading halt blocks new follower exposure even while a copy is in flight. A
+ copy uses the leverage you send, lowered to the follower's own maximum for
+ that market when needed, and keeps the margin mode of any position the
+ follower already holds in that market. See
Copy Trading.
Use GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server id is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.
If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns 503 with Retry-After instead of returning truncated data.
- PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id} changes price and optionally size.
- PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits sets or removes TP/SL attached to
a resting limit entry. Send null to remove a leg.
- DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id} cancels a working order or queues cancellation
when execution already owns the row.
fill and trading rules.
GET /v1/scaled-orders/{id} returns every rung's price, size, child order ID,
and placement rejection when applicable. DELETE fences unplaced rungs and
cancels every working child.
Reconcile fills and closed positions
GET /v1/fills?account_id=... returns filled orders in settlement order with
fees, realized P\&L, notional, liquidity role, and partial-fill lineage. Use
GET /v1/positions?account_id=...&status=closed for cursor-paginated closed
position records.
Treat all cursors as opaque. Order and strategy state can continue changing
after a response, so reconcile by resource ID until it reaches a terminal
status.
+ Track evaluation progress
+ GET /v1/accounts/{account_id} returns a risk snapshot with equity, loss-limit room,
+ and the profit still needed to pass. An evaluation passes when equity,
+ including unrealized P\&L, reaches the profit target, so track
+ risk.remaining_profit_equity. When it reaches zero, the evaluation passes and
+ open positions are closed. risk.remaining_profit counts realized profit only
+ and can stay above zero while open profit already covers the target. Both are
+ null when the account has no profit target, and remaining_profit_equity is
+ also null when marks are incomplete.
Copy groups and scheduled execution
Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See Authentication.
Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that reject_reason. Previously
parent_order_id.
A canceled order carries cancel_reason:
| cancel_reason | Meaning |
|---|
user | You canceled it, including a cancel requested while it was executing.
| oco | Its paired TP or SL filled and retired the remaining size. |
|---|
reduce_only | The position it protected closed, reversed, or became too small for it.
| replaced | A new attached TP or SL took over the size it covered. |
|---|
trading_restricted | A trading restriction on your profile canceled opening orders.
| venue_policy | The market stopped accepting new positions on this venue. |
|---|
+ copy | A copy-trading lead order changed or ended, the copy stopped applying, or the account started following a lead.
Treat unknown values as a generic cancellation: new reasons may be added.
Orders canceled before this field existed omit it. A closed position carries
close_reason: user, take_profit, stop_loss, liquidation, reversal,
or system.
+ A copied follower order that was still executing when its group stopped
+ because the lead account passed, failed, or closed is rejected with
+ reject_reason copy_lead_stopped; the follower's positions are then closed
+ by the copy-trading stop.
Every fill also records position_side_after (long, short, or flat) and
position_size_after, the account's position in that market immediately
after the fill. Fills from before these fields existed omit them.
GET /v1/twap-orders?account_id=... continues to return active TWAP and VWAP
parents. To discover terminal parents without retaining their IDs, request
status=completed or status=canceled. History is ordered by creation time,
newest first, within the selected status, and accepts limit (1 to 100,
default 50) and cursor. Follow next_cursor while has_more is true, keeping
account_id and status unchanged. Query both terminal statuses for a complete
history. The strategy field distinguishes TWAP from VWAP; completion_reason
explains why a completed schedule stopped. Pagination is not accepted for the
active listing.
Live market data
Use market data streaming for live prices, books, trades,
+ and candles. It is public and uses a dedicated WebSocket endpoint. For order,
+ fill, position, and balance changes on your own accounts, use
+ account streaming, an authenticated WebSocket that pushes
+ each change as it happens. REST remains available for snapshots and lookups.
Trading with the API
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/trading-with-api
Place and manage every order type available in the trading terminal.
The REST API uses the same order books, trading rules, fees, margin checks, and
paper execution engine as the trading terminal. Every create request requires
an Idempotency-Key header. Standard orders and position closes may also carry
a caller-assigned client_order_id for durable reconciliation.
Exposure caps
API orders share the same per-user market exposure allowance as orders placed
in the terminal. Your own accounts of the same product and size share one cap
− for each market; other users have separate allowances. Long and short notional
+ for each market; other users have separate allowances. Elite accounts are the
+ exception: each Elite account has its own cap for each market, counting only
+ that account's position. Long and short notional
add together. An opening fill that would exceed the cap is rejected with
exposure_cap, without resizing. Reductions and closes remain allowed, and
freed capacity becomes available at the next refresh, approximately 10 seconds
later. See Asset Exposure Limits.
Standard and advanced orders
Send orders to POST /v1/orders. If type is omitted, the request is treated
as a market order for compatibility with existing clients.
| type | Required price fields | Important options |
|---|
of pending and resting orders. This view is safer for reconciliation than
searching recent history.
At an hourly swap boundary, ready charges are applied before order settlement
and its balance and margin checks, without waiting for the scheduled hourly
processing window. Incomplete charge data can keep the order pending while it
is recovered. This also applies to reduce-only closes: closing after a boundary
does not remove the charge for exposure held at that boundary. See
Commissions and Fees.
For an enabled copy group, copied market orders stay pending until the lead
market order fills. If the lead rejects or expires without filling, its pending
market copies are canceled without opening follower positions or charging
trading fees. Resting limit and trigger copies, including attached TP/SL,
− execute independently on each account. See
+ execute independently on each account. Copies open on the same venue as the
+ lead order, including an alternate venue you chose for the market, and a
+ trading halt blocks new follower exposure even while a copy is in flight. A
+ copy uses the leverage you send, lowered to the follower's own maximum for
+ that market when needed, and keeps the margin mode of any position the
+ follower already holds in that market. See
Copy Trading.
Use GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=... to resolve your caller-assigned order
identity when the placement response or server id is unavailable. This lookup
survives API key rotation and returns the normal order-page shape with zero or
one result.
If the server cannot prove the snapshot is complete inside the active-order
bound, it returns 503 with Retry-After instead of returning truncated data.
- PATCH /v1/orders/{order_id} changes price and optionally size.
- PUT /v1/orders/{order_id}/attached-exits sets or removes TP/SL attached to
a resting limit entry. Send null to remove a leg.
- DELETE /v1/orders/{order_id} cancels a working order or queues cancellation
when execution already owns the row.
fill and trading rules.
GET /v1/scaled-orders/{id} returns every rung's price, size, child order ID,
and placement rejection when applicable. DELETE fences unplaced rungs and
cancels every working child.
Reconcile fills and closed positions
GET /v1/fills?account_id=... returns filled orders in settlement order with
fees, realized P\&L, notional, liquidity role, and partial-fill lineage. Use
GET /v1/positions?account_id=...&status=closed for cursor-paginated closed
position records.
Treat all cursors as opaque. Order and strategy state can continue changing
after a response, so reconcile by resource ID until it reaches a terminal
status.
+ Track evaluation progress
+ GET /v1/accounts/{account_id} returns a risk snapshot with equity, loss-limit room,
+ and the profit still needed to pass. An evaluation passes when equity,
+ including unrealized P\&L, reaches the profit target, so track
+ risk.remaining_profit_equity. When it reaches zero, the evaluation passes and
+ open positions are closed. risk.remaining_profit counts realized profit only
+ and can stay above zero while open profit already covers the target. Both are
+ null when the account has no profit target, and remaining_profit_equity is
+ also null when marks are incomplete.
Copy groups and scheduled execution
Before submitting a lead order through the API, ensure the credential covers
the lead and every follower. The same boundary applies to modifications,
cancellations, and protective exits. A scope failure rejects the complete
native order operation, preserving the copy group's behavior rather than
silently dropping a follower. See Authentication.
Accepted TWAP/VWAP and scaled orders retain the environment and account scope
that authorized them. Revoking the key blocks new requests but does not revoke
that accepted schedule. Each later slice or rung checks the current copy group
against its retained scope. If the group now includes an inaccessible account,
TWAP/VWAP stops with completion_reason: "api_account_scope_changed"; scaled
orders reject the remaining unplaced rungs with that reject_reason. Previously
parent_order_id.
A canceled order carries cancel_reason:
| cancel_reason | Meaning |
|---|
user | You canceled it, including a cancel requested while it was executing.
| oco | Its paired TP or SL filled and retired the remaining size. |
|---|
reduce_only | The position it protected closed, reversed, or became too small for it.
| replaced | A new attached TP or SL took over the size it covered. |
|---|
trading_restricted | A trading restriction on your profile canceled opening orders.
| venue_policy | The market stopped accepting new positions on this venue. |
|---|
− copy | A copy-trading lead order changed or ended, or the copy stopped applying.
+ copy | A copy-trading lead order changed or ended, the copy stopped applying, or the account started following a lead.
Treat unknown values as a generic cancellation: new reasons may be added.
Orders canceled before this field existed omit it. A closed position carries
close_reason: user, take_profit, stop_loss, liquidation, reversal,
or system.
+ A copied follower order that was still executing when its group stopped
+ because the lead account passed, failed, or closed is rejected with
+ reject_reason copy_lead_stopped; the follower's positions are then closed
+ by the copy-trading stop.
Every fill also records position_side_after (long, short, or flat) and
position_size_after, the account's position in that market immediately
after the fill. Fills from before these fields existed omit them.
GET /v1/twap-orders?account_id=... continues to return active TWAP and VWAP
parents. To discover terminal parents without retaining their IDs, request
status=completed or status=canceled. History is ordered by creation time,
newest first, within the selected status, and accepts limit (1 to 100,
default 50) and cursor. Follow next_cursor while has_more is true, keeping
account_id and status unchanged. Query both terminal statuses for a complete
history. The strategy field distinguishes TWAP from VWAP; completion_reason
explains why a completed schedule stopped. Pagination is not accepted for the
active listing.
Live market data
Use market data streaming for live prices, books, trades,
− and candles. It is public and uses a dedicated WebSocket endpoint. Continue
− using REST for account balances, positions, order state, and fills; private
− account streaming is not available.
+ and candles. It is public and uses a dedicated WebSocket endpoint. For order,
+ fill, position, and balance changes on your own accounts, use
+ account streaming, an authenticated WebSocket that pushes
+ each change as it happens. REST remains available for snapshots and lookups.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Account trading policyElite account leverage changed for indices: NAS100 and SP500 now up to 40x, US30 up to 25x; added trading hours policy for Forex and index markets; 2 other changes.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
products and cannot be changed by plan or account.
Market exposure caps
Competition accounts use a separate per-user allowance from other accounts.
Matching competition accounts share their own cap for each market, product,
and size. Both allowances use the configured cap independently, and competition
orders remain subject to exposure rejection. This applies equally to API and
website orders.
An October Competition account on the Blitz or Whale path has its market leverage
ceilings and exposure caps scaled by 4x or 0.5x. Scaled leverage rounds down
and never drops below 1x. Orders above the scaled limits are rejected the same
way as orders above the standard limits; see
October competition.
− An Elite account trades indices at up to 40x, gold at up to 20x, and oil at up
− to 10x, and caps each group's combined open notional at that multiple of its
− starting balance. Market listings still report each market's standard
maxLeverage. API and website orders above an Elite limit are rejected with
invalid_leverage or max_total_notional; see
Elite Accounts.
Gold trades on XAU, which counts as gold for these Elite limits. The previous
GOLD market is retiring: it is reduce-only, so its market reports
trading_enabled: false and an order that would open, add to, or flip a
position is rejected with market_unavailable. Reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing GOLD positions keep working;
see Retiring markets.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see Asset Exposure Limits.
Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the current market caps
− for the applicable limits.
Treat preflight as advisory
Fetch policy when selecting an account and refresh after a relevant rejection or
configuration change. Do not poll this endpoint once per second: it consumes the
shared REST read budget.
A true copy_scope_blocked means the credential cannot cover the configured
copy group as a whole. Use a credential authorized for every member in the same
environment, or change the group through the website. A false value does not
cover stale working copied orders left by earlier configurations: modification
and cancellation check those affected accounts again at execution.
The snapshot does not reserve margin, position slots, order slots, trade-window
allowances, or market liquidity. It does not evaluate a proposed order or fetch
fresh prices. Check market metadata and an appropriate quote for market-specific
After
products and cannot be changed by plan or account.
Market exposure caps
Competition accounts use a separate per-user allowance from other accounts.
Matching competition accounts share their own cap for each market, product,
and size. Both allowances use the configured cap independently, and competition
orders remain subject to exposure rejection. This applies equally to API and
website orders.
An October Competition account on the Blitz or Whale path has its market leverage
ceilings and exposure caps scaled by 4x or 0.5x. Scaled leverage rounds down
and never drops below 1x. Orders above the scaled limits are rejected the same
way as orders above the standard limits; see
October competition.
+ An Elite account trades NAS100 and SP500 at up to 40x, US30 at up to 25x, gold
+ at up to 20x, and oil at up to 10x, and caps each group's combined open
+ notional at that multiple of its starting balance. Market listings still report each market's standard
maxLeverage. API and website orders above an Elite limit are rejected with
invalid_leverage or max_total_notional; see
Elite Accounts.
Gold trades on XAU, which counts as gold for these Elite limits. The previous
GOLD market is retiring: it is reduce-only, so its market reports
trading_enabled: false and an order that would open, add to, or flip a
position is rejected with market_unavailable. Reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing GOLD positions keep working;
see Retiring markets.
+ Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
+ trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
+ is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
+ still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
+ reopening price. See
+ Trading hours.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see Asset Exposure Limits.
Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the current market caps
+ for the applicable limits, and choose your product and account size there to
+ see the exact cap and maximum leverage that apply to your account.
Treat preflight as advisory
Fetch policy when selecting an account and refresh after a relevant rejection or
configuration change. Do not poll this endpoint once per second: it consumes the
shared REST read budget.
A true copy_scope_blocked means the credential cannot cover the configured
copy group as a whole. Use a credential authorized for every member in the same
environment, or change the group through the website. A false value does not
cover stale working copied orders left by earlier configurations: modification
and cancellation check those affected accounts again at execution.
The snapshot does not reserve margin, position slots, order slots, trade-window
allowances, or market liquidity. It does not evaluate a proposed order or fetch
fresh prices. Check market metadata and an appropriate quote for market-specific
products and cannot be changed by plan or account.
Market exposure caps
Competition accounts use a separate per-user allowance from other accounts.
Matching competition accounts share their own cap for each market, product,
and size. Both allowances use the configured cap independently, and competition
orders remain subject to exposure rejection. This applies equally to API and
website orders.
An October Competition account on the Blitz or Whale path has its market leverage
ceilings and exposure caps scaled by 4x or 0.5x. Scaled leverage rounds down
and never drops below 1x. Orders above the scaled limits are rejected the same
way as orders above the standard limits; see
October competition.
− An Elite account trades indices at up to 40x, gold at up to 20x, and oil at up
− to 10x, and caps each group's combined open notional at that multiple of its
− starting balance. Market listings still report each market's standard
+ An Elite account trades NAS100 and SP500 at up to 40x, US30 at up to 25x, gold
+ at up to 20x, and oil at up to 10x, and caps each group's combined open
+ notional at that multiple of its starting balance. Market listings still report each market's standard
maxLeverage. API and website orders above an Elite limit are rejected with
invalid_leverage or max_total_notional; see
Elite Accounts.
Gold trades on XAU, which counts as gold for these Elite limits. The previous
GOLD market is retiring: it is reduce-only, so its market reports
trading_enabled: false and an order that would open, add to, or flip a
position is rejected with market_unavailable. Reduce-only orders, closes,
and Take Profit and Stop Loss exits on existing GOLD positions keep working;
see Retiring markets.
+ Forex and index markets on the Veranta and Ostium venues follow their venue's
+ trading sessions. While a market is closed, a market order or close
+ is rejected with market_closed. Limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss orders can
+ still be placed, edited, and canceled; they stay open and can fill at the
+ reopening price. See
+ Trading hours.
A market's exposure cap limits combined open notional (long plus short) across
accounts of the same challenge model and account size. Each Elite account
instead has its own cap for each market, counting only that account's
position. The server includes existing exposure and rejects a fill that would
exceed the configured cap. Closing or reducing positions remains allowed.
An existing position keeps its enrolled exposure group through additions,
reductions, and reversals, even if challenge offerings change. A new position
after fully closing uses the current product grouping. This applies equally to
API and website orders; see Asset Exposure Limits.
Exposure-cap enforcement defaults to enabled for newly added markets. A
numerical cap must still be configured; enabling the switch alone does not set
a dollar limit. Check the current market caps
− for the applicable limits.
+ for the applicable limits, and choose your product and account size there to
+ see the exact cap and maximum leverage that apply to your account.
Treat preflight as advisory
Fetch policy when selecting an account and refresh after a relevant rejection or
configuration change. Do not poll this endpoint once per second: it consumes the
shared REST read budget.
A true copy_scope_blocked means the credential cannot cover the configured
copy group as a whole. Use a credential authorized for every member in the same
environment, or change the group through the website. A false value does not
cover stale working copied orders left by earlier configurations: modification
and cancellation check those affected accounts again at execution.
The snapshot does not reserve margin, position slots, order slots, trade-window
allowances, or market liquidity. It does not evaluate a proposed order or fetch
fresh prices. Check market metadata and an appropriate quote for market-specific
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading SettingsAdded Profit Target Line definition, expanded Loss Limit and Profit Target Line behavior details, and added Reverse Position settings controls.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.
Chart Lines
Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except Trade Arrows and Bid/Ask Lines is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.
| Setting | What it shows |
|---|
| Liquidation Lines | The estimated liquidation price of your position. |
Loss Limit Line | The price where your position would bring the account to its loss limit.
| Trade Markers | Buy and sell markers where your orders filled. |
|---|
Trade Arrows | Arrow markers under buys and over sells, joined entry to exit.
| Bid/Ask Lines | The current best bid and ask prices. |
|---|
Hiding a line changes the chart only. The order, position, or risk level behind
it still exists and still executes, liquidates, or enforces your account rules
as normal. Hidden lines cannot be dragged, so manage those orders from the
Positions and Open Orders tabs instead. Hiding Position Line or **TP/SL
Lines** also removes the chart handles that add a new Take Profit or Stop Loss
− from the position line.
Trade Arrows is off by default. Turn it on to change how Trade Markers
look: each fill becomes a small arrow on the candle it filled in, pointing up
from under the candle for a buy and down from over the candle for a sell,
instead of a lettered badge. Several fills on one side of a candle stack
outward. Liquidations and account close-outs use an amber arrow. A dashed line
joins each entry's arrow to the arrow of the exit that closed it, green when
the price moved in the trade's favor and red when it moved against it. Entries
of a position that is still open have no line until they close. Hover an arrow
to see the fill's side, size, and price; its trade stays highlighted while the
other trades dim. Arrows and lines cover your most recent 100 orders and appear
once the chart has loaded the candles they belong to. Turning off **Trade
Markers** hides them too.
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.
If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.
Trade Confirmations
Confirm New Orders has three options:
| Option | Behavior |
|---|
Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders.
| All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand. |
|---|
Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
submitted. This update resets previous confirmation choices to off for everyone.
You can turn confirmation back on, and that new choice is saved.
When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.
One-Click Chart Close changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
and the Confirm New Orders review. If a current price is not available at
that moment, the close dialog opens instead so nothing is sent without a price.
The close button in the Positions tab still opens the close dialog.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
After
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.
Chart Lines
Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except Trade Arrows and Bid/Ask Lines is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.
| Setting | What it shows |
|---|
| Liquidation Lines | The estimated liquidation price of your position. |
Loss Limit Line | The price where your position would bring the account to its loss limit.
+ Profit Target Line | The price where your position would bring an evaluation account to its profit target.
| Trade Markers | Buy and sell markers where your orders filled. |
|---|
Trade Arrows | Arrow markers under buys and over sells, joined entry to exit.
| Bid/Ask Lines | The current best bid and ask prices. |
|---|
Hiding a line changes the chart only. The order, position, or risk level behind
it still exists and still executes, liquidates, or enforces your account rules
as normal. Hidden lines cannot be dragged, so manage those orders from the
Positions and Open Orders tabs instead. Hiding Position Line or **TP/SL
Lines** also removes the chart handles that add a new Take Profit or Stop Loss
+ from the position line. Hiding Order Previews or TP/SL Lines removes
+ the same handles from a draft limit order's line.
+ Loss Limit Line and Profit Target Line appear only while you hold a
+ position in the market you are viewing. Each assumes your other open positions
+ stay at their current prices, so the level moves as those prices change. The
+ profit target line shows only on evaluation accounts that have a profit target.
+ Reaching it does not pass the account on its own: every other challenge rule
+ still applies.
Trade Arrows is off by default. Turn it on to change how Trade Markers
look: each fill becomes a small arrow on the candle it filled in, pointing up
from under the candle for a buy and down from over the candle for a sell,
instead of a lettered badge. Several fills on one side of a candle stack
outward. Liquidations and account close-outs use an amber arrow. A dashed line
joins each entry's arrow to the arrow of the exit that closed it, green when
the price moved in the trade's favor and red when it moved against it. Entries
of a position that is still open have no line until they close. Hover an arrow
to see the fill's side, size, and price; its trade stays highlighted while the
other trades dim. Arrows and lines cover your most recent 100 orders and appear
once the chart has loaded the candles they belong to. Turning off **Trade
Markers** hides them too.
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.
If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.
Trade Confirmations
Confirm New Orders has three options:
| Option | Behavior |
|---|
Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders.
| All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand. |
|---|
+ The same choice applies to
+ Reverse Position: with Never,
+ clicking it reverses the position right away; with Market Orders or **All
+ Orders**, it opens a short review first.
Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
submitted. This update resets previous confirmation choices to off for everyone.
You can turn confirmation back on, and that new choice is saved.
When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.
One-Click Chart Close changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
and the Confirm New Orders review. If a current price is not available at
that moment, the close dialog opens instead so nothing is sent without a price.
The close button in the Positions tab still opens the close dialog.
+ Show Reverse Position controls whether the
+ Reverse Position button appears. It
+ is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
+ line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
+ reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
+ you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
challenge rules, close-order previews, and closed trade history are unchanged.
Chart Lines
Choose which trading lines and markers appear on the trade chart. Every group
except Trade Arrows and Bid/Ask Lines is shown by default. Turn a
switch off to hide that group; your choice is saved to your user settings and
synced across devices when signed in.
| Setting | What it shows |
|---|
| Liquidation Lines | The estimated liquidation price of your position. |
Loss Limit Line | The price where your position would bring the account to its loss limit.
+ Profit Target Line | The price where your position would bring an evaluation account to its profit target.
| Trade Markers | Buy and sell markers where your orders filled. |
|---|
Trade Arrows | Arrow markers under buys and over sells, joined entry to exit.
| Bid/Ask Lines | The current best bid and ask prices. |
|---|
Hiding a line changes the chart only. The order, position, or risk level behind
it still exists and still executes, liquidates, or enforces your account rules
as normal. Hidden lines cannot be dragged, so manage those orders from the
Positions and Open Orders tabs instead. Hiding Position Line or **TP/SL
Lines** also removes the chart handles that add a new Take Profit or Stop Loss
− from the position line.
+ from the position line. Hiding Order Previews or TP/SL Lines removes
+ the same handles from a draft limit order's line.
+ Loss Limit Line and Profit Target Line appear only while you hold a
+ position in the market you are viewing. Each assumes your other open positions
+ stay at their current prices, so the level moves as those prices change. The
+ profit target line shows only on evaluation accounts that have a profit target.
+ Reaching it does not pass the account on its own: every other challenge rule
+ still applies.
Trade Arrows is off by default. Turn it on to change how Trade Markers
look: each fill becomes a small arrow on the candle it filled in, pointing up
from under the candle for a buy and down from over the candle for a sell,
instead of a lettered badge. Several fills on one side of a candle stack
outward. Liquidations and account close-outs use an amber arrow. A dashed line
joins each entry's arrow to the arrow of the exit that closed it, green when
the price moved in the trade's favor and red when it moved against it. Entries
of a position that is still open have no line until they close. Hover an arrow
to see the fill's side, size, and price; its trade stays highlighted while the
other trades dim. Arrows and lines cover your most recent 100 orders and appear
once the chart has loaded the candles they belong to. Turning off **Trade
Markers** hides them too.
after you add 0.5 BTC. Sizes round down to the market's size step, so the exits
never cover more than you hold.
If the order that adds to the position carries its own Take Profit or Stop
Loss, that exit already covers the full result, so your existing exits of that
kind are not resized. An exit that is executing at that moment is not resized.
Turn this off to keep existing TP/SL sizes unchanged when you add to a position.
Trade Confirmations
Confirm New Orders has three options:
| Option | Behavior |
|---|
Market Orders | Review orders that execute at market before submitting, including immediate market, scheduled, stop/take-market, and conditional orders.
| All Orders | Review every supported new order beforehand. |
|---|
+ The same choice applies to
+ Reverse Position: with Never,
+ clicking it reverses the position right away; with Market Orders or **All
+ Orders**, it opens a short review first.
Confirm TP/SL Chart Drags asks before a chart drag places or moves a Take
Profit or Stop Loss order. It is off by default, so releasing a drag applies the
change immediately. Turn it on if you want to review each change before it is
submitted. This update resets previous confirmation choices to off for everyone.
You can turn confirmation back on, and that new choice is saved.
When you release a chart drag, the order line stays at the new price. A small
loading icon shows while the update is being confirmed. If chart confirmations
are enabled, the icon appears after you confirm. It disappears when the update
is applied; queued moves keep it until processing finishes. If the update fails,
the chart restores the confirmed price or removes an unsuccessful new TP/SL.
This confirms the order update, not a trade fill. Fills appear separately on the
chart when the order executes.
One-Click Chart Close changes the X next to the PnL on the chart's position
line. It is off by default, so clicking the X opens the close dialog where you
choose the size and order type. Turn it on to close the whole position with a
market order as soon as you click the X. The close uses your saved
Max Market Slippage and skips the close dialog
and the Confirm New Orders review. If a current price is not available at
that moment, the close dialog opens instead so nothing is sent without a price.
The close button in the Positions tab still opens the close dialog.
+ Show Reverse Position controls whether the
+ Reverse Position button appears. It
+ is on by default. Turn it off to remove the button from the chart's position
+ line, the Positions tab, and the position cards on a phone, so you cannot
+ reverse a position by mistake. Your positions and orders are not affected, and
+ you can still flip a position with an opposite order larger than it.
Trade Notifications
Choose whether the app shows notifications for market-order fills, resting
limit/stop fills, Take Profit fills, Stop Loss fills, order changes, and TP/SL
changes. These are visual notifications. Configure audio separately under
Notifications settings.
Fills that settle while your notification preferences are still loading are
announced as soon as loading finishes, even when newer fills have arrived in
the meantime. Notifications are a convenience, not an execution record: confirm
fill history on the trade page when precision matters.
For workflow examples, read the Trading Guide.
Trader Lockout
Use Trader Lockout in Trading settings to take a voluntary break. Choose
PremierMyFundedPerps · Notification SettingsAdded affiliate purchase email notification settings and controls for affiliate users.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Notification Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/notifications
− Choose sounds for trading events, control volume and event toggles, and upload, preview, rename, or delete custom audio.
Open Notification settings
− The Notifications tab controls trading audio. Visual fill and order-change
− notifications are configured under Trading settings.
Trade Sounds
For each supported event, choose a built-in or custom sound and turn that event
on or off. Use the preview control to hear the current selection before relying
on it during trading.
The master Trade Sound Volume applies across enabled event sounds. Browser tab
audio permissions and device volume still affect what you hear.
Sound is a convenience, not an execution guarantee. Confirm fills, rejected
orders, and position state in the trading interface even when no sound plays.
Sound Library
Upload an accepted audio file to add a custom sound. Give it a recognizable
name, then select it for any event under Trade Sounds.
The library lets you:
After
Notification Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/notifications
+ Choose affiliate purchase emails and sounds for trading events, control volume and event toggles, and upload, preview, rename, or delete custom audio.
Open Notification settings
+ The Notifications tab controls trading audio and, for affiliates, purchase
+ emails. Visual fill and order-change notifications are configured under
+ Trading settings.
+ Affiliate Emails
+ This card appears only when you are an affiliate. **Affiliate Purchase Email
+ Notifications** is on by default: each time a purchase made with one of your
+ codes is credited to you, you receive an email with the commission amount.
+ Turn it off to stop these emails, and turn it back on to receive them for
+ later purchases. Emails are not sent for purchases credited while the setting
+ is off. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their commission
+ is corrected or approved. The Manage notification settings link in each email opens this
+ card. See Affiliate Program for when commission
+ is credited.
Trade Sounds
For each supported event, choose a built-in or custom sound and turn that event
on or off. Use the preview control to hear the current selection before relying
on it during trading.
The master Trade Sound Volume applies across enabled event sounds. Browser tab
audio permissions and device volume still affect what you hear.
Sound is a convenience, not an execution guarantee. Confirm fills, rejected
orders, and position state in the trading interface even when no sound plays.
Sound Library
Upload an accepted audio file to add a custom sound. Give it a recognizable
name, then select it for any event under Trade Sounds.
The library lets you:
Notification Settings
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/settings/notifications
− Choose sounds for trading events, control volume and event toggles, and upload, preview, rename, or delete custom audio.
+ Choose affiliate purchase emails and sounds for trading events, control volume and event toggles, and upload, preview, rename, or delete custom audio.
Open Notification settings
− The Notifications tab controls trading audio. Visual fill and order-change
− notifications are configured under Trading settings.
+ The Notifications tab controls trading audio and, for affiliates, purchase
+ emails. Visual fill and order-change notifications are configured under
+ Trading settings.
+ Affiliate Emails
+ This card appears only when you are an affiliate. **Affiliate Purchase Email
+ Notifications** is on by default: each time a purchase made with one of your
+ codes is credited to you, you receive an email with the commission amount.
+ Turn it off to stop these emails, and turn it back on to receive them for
+ later purchases. Emails are not sent for purchases credited while the setting
+ is off. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their commission
+ is corrected or approved. The Manage notification settings link in each email opens this
+ card. See Affiliate Program for when commission
+ is credited.
Trade Sounds
For each supported event, choose a built-in or custom sound and turn that event
on or off. Use the preview control to hear the current selection before relying
on it during trading.
The master Trade Sound Volume applies across enabled event sounds. Browser tab
audio permissions and device volume still affect what you hear.
Sound is a convenience, not an execution guarantee. Confirm fills, rejected
orders, and position state in the trading interface even when no sound plays.
Sound Library
Upload an accepted audio file to add a custom sound. Give it a recognizable
name, then select it for any event under Trade Sounds.
The library lets you:
PremierMyFundedPerps · SettingsPasskey management description expanded to include authenticator app option for two-factor authentication.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
device-specific controls say so in their description.
On desktop, use Search above Profile to find pages and individual
settings, such as "App Installation", "Background Effects", or "Max Market
Slippage". Results are grouped into Pages and Settings, with the parent
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
− Add and remove passkeys used for two-factor authentication.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
Control background effects and install the web app.
Trading
Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
Find and share your pass, funded, payout, and leaderboard certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
After
device-specific controls say so in their description.
On desktop, use Search above Profile to find pages and individual
settings, such as "App Installation", "Background Effects", or "Max Market
Slippage". Results are grouped into Pages and Settings, with the parent
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
+ Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
+ app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
Control background effects and install the web app.
Trading
Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
Find and share your pass, funded, payout, and leaderboard certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
device-specific controls say so in their description.
On desktop, use Search above Profile to find pages and individual
settings, such as "App Installation", "Background Effects", or "Max Market
Slippage". Results are grouped into Pages and Settings, with the parent
page shown above each nested result. Matching words are highlighted. Search
ignores capitalization, accents, and punctuation, and accepts words in any order.
Select a setting to open its page and focus the matching card or control.
If nothing matches, the message shows your search text. Clear the search or
press Escape to show all sections again.
Account
Manage your photo, username, connected accounts, and legal identity, or
delete your account.
− Add and remove passkeys used for two-factor authentication.
+ Manage sign-in passkeys and two-factor authentication with an authenticator
+ app.
Choose what other people and search engines can see.
Change the language used throughout the app.
Control background effects and install the web app.
Trading
Set order defaults, execution safeguards, confirmations, and alerts.
Configure lead and follower challenge accounts.
Choose trade sounds, volume, and custom audio.
Create and revoke credentials for programmatic trading.
Achievements and billing
Find and share your pass, funded, payout, and leaderboard certificates.
Search challenge orders, review totals and statuses, and open invoices.
Use the app links at the top of each reference page to jump directly to the
PremierMyFundedPerps · Copy Trading SettingsMultiple clarifications added about order handling during group saves, trading halts, and group stops, plus venue and position protection details.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:
- below 1× uses less relative size;
- 1× uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
- above 1× uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
API credentials must cover the lead and every follower in the same live or
sandbox environment. If a group includes an account outside that boundary,
the API rejects the native lead operation before copying any orders. Use a
credential covering the complete group or manage the instruction on the
website. See Authentication for copied-order changes and
scheduled execution boundaries.
Disable and remove
Disable the group before removing it or selecting another lead. During stop
cleanup, follower orders are canceled and positions are closed. The affected
followers remain locked against manual trading until cleanup finishes.
If the lead passes, fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically. The
− stopped record identifies why and can be removed after cleanup completes.
Read the Copy Trading Guide for sizing examples,
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.
Manage copy groups through the API
API keys with read scope can inspect GET /v1/copy-trading. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.
Keys with trade scope can use these operations:
| Operation | Endpoint |
|---|
Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | POST /v1/copy-trading
Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
After
Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:
- below 1× uses less relative size;
- 1× uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
- above 1× uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
+ Copies use the lead's chosen venue. A trading halt prevents new follower
+ exposure, including an order placed before the halt that is still executing.
+ When you save a group, every account that starts following has its open orders
+ canceled, including stop loss and take profit orders, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. A follower trades only
+ through its lead, so a manual order left on it could not execute. Positions
+ stay open, and the save confirmation reports how many orders were canceled.
+ Protect follower positions from the lead account.
API credentials must cover the lead and every follower in the same live or
sandbox environment. If a group includes an account outside that boundary,
the API rejects the native lead operation before copying any orders. Use a
credential covering the complete group or manage the instruction on the
website. See Authentication for copied-order changes and
scheduled execution boundaries.
Disable and remove
Disable the group before removing it or selecting another lead. During stop
cleanup, follower orders are canceled and positions are closed. The affected
followers remain locked against manual trading until cleanup finishes.
If the lead passes, fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically. The
+ stopped record identifies why and can be removed after cleanup completes. A
+ copied order that was still executing when the group stopped is not filled, and
+ its rejection says the lead account ended.
Read the Copy Trading Guide for sizing examples,
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.
Manage copy groups through the API
API keys with read scope can inspect GET /v1/copy-trading. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.
Keys with trade scope can use these operations:
| Operation | Endpoint |
|---|
Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | POST /v1/copy-trading
Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
Add active accounts you own. A funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
The multiplier adjusts the follower's balance-normalized opening quantity:
- below 1× uses less relative size;
- 1× uses the same relative size after starting-balance normalization;
- above 1× uses more relative size, subject to the follower's own limits.
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Every follower keeps independent collateral, challenge-rule, position, and
market checks. One follower can reject an instruction without blocking the lead.
+ Copies use the lead's chosen venue. A trading halt prevents new follower
+ exposure, including an order placed before the halt that is still executing.
+ When you save a group, every account that starts following has its open orders
+ canceled, including stop loss and take profit orders, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. A follower trades only
+ through its lead, so a manual order left on it could not execute. Positions
+ stay open, and the save confirmation reports how many orders were canceled.
+ Protect follower positions from the lead account.
API credentials must cover the lead and every follower in the same live or
sandbox environment. If a group includes an account outside that boundary,
the API rejects the native lead operation before copying any orders. Use a
credential covering the complete group or manage the instruction on the
website. See Authentication for copied-order changes and
scheduled execution boundaries.
Disable and remove
Disable the group before removing it or selecting another lead. During stop
cleanup, follower orders are canceled and positions are closed. The affected
followers remain locked against manual trading until cleanup finishes.
If the lead passes, fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically. The
− stopped record identifies why and can be removed after cleanup completes.
+ stopped record identifies why and can be removed after cleanup completes. A
+ copied order that was still executing when the group stopped is not filled, and
+ its rejection says the lead account ended.
Read the Copy Trading Guide for sizing examples,
stage compatibility, and the full lifecycle.
Manage copy groups through the API
API keys with read scope can inspect GET /v1/copy-trading. A group is
returned only when the credential can access its lead and every follower in
the same live or sandbox environment. A restricted key can therefore see
fewer groups than the website. Accessible groups with archived members remain
listed so they can be disabled or deleted.
Keys with trade scope can use these operations:
| Operation | Endpoint |
|---|
Create or update groups and explicitly delete disabled groups | POST /v1/copy-trading
Disable copying, including a group with inactive or archived accounts | POST /v1/copy-trading/{config_id}/disable
PremierMyFundedPerps · QuickstartAccount updates moved from REST-only to account streaming with REST available for snapshots and lookups.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
"margin_mode": "cross"
}'
An accepted order begins as pending. Read the order endpoint until it becomes
filled or rejected; use a sensible backoff and observe the documented rate
limits. If the placement response is lost, use
GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=quickstart-entry-1 to recover the server order.
5. Place advanced orders
The same /v1/orders endpoint also accepts limit, chase, stop, take, and
external conditional orders. TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders use their own
parent resources. Continue with Trading with the API for
request shapes and lifecycle operations.
For continuous market updates, connect to market data streaming
− instead of polling prices. Account and order updates remain available through REST.
After
"margin_mode": "cross"
}'
An accepted order begins as pending. Read the order endpoint until it becomes
filled or rejected; use a sensible backoff and observe the documented rate
limits. If the placement response is lost, use
GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=quickstart-entry-1 to recover the server order.
5. Place advanced orders
The same /v1/orders endpoint also accepts limit, chase, stop, take, and
external conditional orders. TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders use their own
parent resources. Continue with Trading with the API for
request shapes and lifecycle operations.
For continuous market updates, connect to market data streaming
+ instead of polling prices. For order, fill, position, and balance changes on
+ your accounts, connect to account streaming; REST
+ remains available for snapshots and lookups.
"margin_mode": "cross"
}'
An accepted order begins as pending. Read the order endpoint until it becomes
filled or rejected; use a sensible backoff and observe the documented rate
limits. If the placement response is lost, use
GET /v1/orders?client_order_id=quickstart-entry-1 to recover the server order.
5. Place advanced orders
The same /v1/orders endpoint also accepts limit, chase, stop, take, and
external conditional orders. TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders use their own
parent resources. Continue with Trading with the API for
request shapes and lifecycle operations.
For continuous market updates, connect to market data streaming
− instead of polling prices. Account and order updates remain available through REST.
+ instead of polling prices. For order, fill, position, and balance changes on
+ your accounts, connect to account streaming; REST
+ remains available for snapshots and lookups.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Troubleshooting and FAQFP Points expiration time changed from midnight Eastern to 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, and purchase limit policy was substantially revised.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
Split Cash and Store Credit.
Does store credit expire?
Yes. Store credit expires 45 days after it is issued, and credit issued before
September 11, 2026 expires at midnight Eastern time on October 26, 2026. Checkout uses the credit that
expires soonest first. Select Expiry Schedule under your balance on
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
Store Credit Expiry.
Do FP Points expire?
Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
− September 11, 2026 expire at midnight Eastern time on December 10, 2026. Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select Expiry Schedule on the FP Points tab of
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
FP Points Expiry.
A tool or footer is unavailable
If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
Refresh beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.
After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
manual options remain available when storage is blocked. This message is
separate from a permissions rejection.
Sounds or notifications are missing
Check both the event toggle and the selected sound under
Notifications settings. Confirm the master volume,
browser tab audio permission, and device volume. Custom uploads must be audio
files within the size accepted by the uploader.
App installation is unavailable
Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.
Checkout says I reached a purchase limit
− Purchases are limited to 30 in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in any rolling 7 days,
− and 200 in any rolling 30 days across all plans and payment methods. The notice
− on the checkout page names the window you reached and the time you can
− purchase again; no payment was taken. Wait until that time, then try again.
− Read Buying a Challenge for
− how the rolling windows work.
A purchase or invoice is missing
Open Purchase History,
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.
Still need help?
Open Support. Before You Contact Us
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
FAQ.
If you still need help, use Message Support below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select View Conversations to return to your Intercom conversations.
After
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
Split Cash and Store Credit.
Does store credit expire?
Yes. Store credit expires 45 days after it is issued, and credit issued before
September 11, 2026 expires at midnight Eastern time on October 26, 2026. Checkout uses the credit that
expires soonest first. Select Expiry Schedule under your balance on
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
Store Credit Expiry.
Do FP Points expire?
Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
+ September 11, 2026 expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026 (04:00 UTC on
+ December 10). Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select Expiry Schedule on the FP Points tab of
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
FP Points Expiry.
A tool or footer is unavailable
If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
Refresh beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.
After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
manual options remain available when storage is blocked. This message is
separate from a permissions rejection.
Sounds or notifications are missing
Check both the event toggle and the selected sound under
Notifications settings. Confirm the master volume,
browser tab audio permission, and device volume. Custom uploads must be audio
files within the size accepted by the uploader.
App installation is unavailable
Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.
Checkout says I reached a purchase limit
+ Challenge purchases have no general limit. This notice appears only when an
+ individual purchase limit applies to your account. It names the limit and, when
+ waiting helps, the time you can purchase again; no payment was taken. Contact
+ support if you have questions about the limit on your account. Read
+ Purchase limits
+ for details.
A purchase or invoice is missing
Open Purchase History,
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.
Still need help?
Open Support. Before You Contact Us
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
FAQ.
If you still need help, use Message Support below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select View Conversations to return to your Intercom conversations.
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
Split Cash and Store Credit.
Does store credit expire?
Yes. Store credit expires 45 days after it is issued, and credit issued before
September 11, 2026 expires at midnight Eastern time on October 26, 2026. Checkout uses the credit that
expires soonest first. Select Expiry Schedule under your balance on
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
Store Credit Expiry.
Do FP Points expire?
Yes. FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned, and points earned before
− September 11, 2026 expire at midnight Eastern time on December 10, 2026. Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
+ September 11, 2026 expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026 (04:00 UTC on
+ December 10). Opening a case spends the points that expire soonest first.
Select Expiry Schedule on the FP Points tab of
Rewards to see each expiry
date. Read
FP Points Expiry.
A tool or footer is unavailable
If the market picker, calculator, chart panel, layout switcher, footer, or
bottom toolbar cannot load, the rest of the page stays available. Select
Refresh beside the unavailable item to reload the page and try again.
You can also close a failed market picker to continue viewing the current
market. The footer's legal, support, and cookie-preference links remain
available in its fallback view.
After an app update, the next page you open loads the new version. A page you
manual options remain available when storage is blocked. This message is
separate from a permissions rejection.
Sounds or notifications are missing
Check both the event toggle and the selected sound under
Notifications settings. Confirm the master volume,
browser tab audio permission, and device volume. Custom uploads must be audio
files within the size accepted by the uploader.
App installation is unavailable
Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.
Checkout says I reached a purchase limit
− Purchases are limited to 30 in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in any rolling 7 days,
− and 200 in any rolling 30 days across all plans and payment methods. The notice
− on the checkout page names the window you reached and the time you can
− purchase again; no payment was taken. Wait until that time, then try again.
− Read Buying a Challenge for
− how the rolling windows work.
+ Challenge purchases have no general limit. This notice appears only when an
+ individual purchase limit applies to your account. It names the limit and, when
+ waiting helps, the time you can purchase again; no payment was taken. Contact
+ support if you have questions about the limit on your account. Read
+ Purchase limits
+ for details.
A purchase or invoice is missing
Open Purchase History,
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.
Still need help?
Open Support. Before You Contact Us
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
FAQ.
If you still need help, use Message Support below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select View Conversations to return to your Intercom conversations.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading JournalSession tag field removed from trading journal; automatic session categorization by UTC windows no longer available.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Trading Journal
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-journal
− Review auto-logged closed trades, R multiples, session and hold-time tags, and add notes, setups, tags, mistakes, and ratings.
Open the journal
The journal lives on the dashboard at
myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard/journal.
Every trade you close on the selected challenge account appears there
automatically: entry and exit prices, size, leverage, fees, funding, and close
reason all come from your trading history. There is no manual trade entry and
nothing to sync.
What is logged for each trade
A journal trade is one complete position lifecycle (open to fully closed).
Each row shows:
- Close time, market, side, and leverage.
- Entry size and lifecycle entry/exit prices (volume-weighted when the
position filled in parts).
- Hold time, with an automatic bucket: Scalp (under 15 minutes), Intraday
(under 24 hours), or Swing (24 hours or longer).
− - A session tag derived from the entry time using fixed UTC windows: London
− 07:00 to 13:00, New York 13:00 to 21:00, and Asia otherwise.
- Net P\&L (realized P\&L minus fees, plus funding).
- R multiple, when the trade has one (see below).
R multiple
The R multiple expresses net P\&L as a multiple of the risk you defined at
entry: the distance from your entry price to the stop loss attached when the
order was placed, times the entry size.
A trade only has an R multiple when a stop loss was attached to the entry
order. Trades without an attached stop, and trades opened before this feature
shipped, show no value instead of an estimated one. Moving the stop after
entry does not change the recorded initial risk.
Reviewing a trade
Select any row to open its dedicated trade review page. The page opens with a
time to revoke access immediately. A trade is private by default, and clearing
its journal review does not change the visibility choice.
Working through the queue
The review page includes Previous and Next controls that step through your
recent trades in close order, and Save & Review Next stores the current entry
and jumps straight to the next trade without a journal entry. Each trade in the
table shows Not Journaled until you save an entry for it, then
Journaled. These labels track your own notes only; they are not a review by
MyFundedPerps and do not affect your account. The journal table shows how many
trades are not journaled yet, and the Journal filter narrows the table to just
those.
Filters and history depth
− Filter the table by session or journal status, or search it. The table loads
your most recent trades first and pages backward on demand, up to the most
recent 200 trades. The performance tiles and P\&L calendar above the table use
the same analytics ranges as the
Performance page.
The P\&L calendar places each trade on the New York trading day it closed in,
the same day your daily loss limit uses. That day starts at midnight New York
time, so a trade closed in the evening in the Americas counts toward that same
date.
Select Download CSV to export the account's complete journal history. The
file includes every closed trade, not only the rows currently loaded in the
table, together with trade facts, calculated results, journal status, setup,
tags, mistakes, execution rating, and notes.
After
Trading Journal
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-journal
+ Review auto-logged closed trades, R multiples, hold-time tags, and add notes, setups, tags, mistakes, and ratings.
Open the journal
The journal lives on the dashboard at
myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard/journal.
Every trade you close on the selected challenge account appears there
automatically: entry and exit prices, size, leverage, fees, funding, and close
reason all come from your trading history. There is no manual trade entry and
nothing to sync.
What is logged for each trade
A journal trade is one complete position lifecycle (open to fully closed).
Each row shows:
- Close time, market, side, and leverage.
- Entry size and lifecycle entry/exit prices (volume-weighted when the
position filled in parts).
- Hold time, with an automatic bucket: Scalp (under 15 minutes), Intraday
(under 24 hours), or Swing (24 hours or longer).
- Net P\&L (realized P\&L minus fees, plus funding).
- R multiple, when the trade has one (see below).
R multiple
The R multiple expresses net P\&L as a multiple of the risk you defined at
entry: the distance from your entry price to the stop loss attached when the
order was placed, times the entry size.
A trade only has an R multiple when a stop loss was attached to the entry
order. Trades without an attached stop, and trades opened before this feature
shipped, show no value instead of an estimated one. Moving the stop after
entry does not change the recorded initial risk.
Reviewing a trade
Select any row to open its dedicated trade review page. The page opens with a
time to revoke access immediately. A trade is private by default, and clearing
its journal review does not change the visibility choice.
Working through the queue
The review page includes Previous and Next controls that step through your
recent trades in close order, and Save & Review Next stores the current entry
and jumps straight to the next trade without a journal entry. Each trade in the
table shows Not Journaled until you save an entry for it, then
Journaled. These labels track your own notes only; they are not a review by
MyFundedPerps and do not affect your account. The journal table shows how many
trades are not journaled yet, and the Journal filter narrows the table to just
those.
Filters and history depth
+ Filter the table by journal status, or search it. The table loads
your most recent trades first and pages backward on demand, up to the most
recent 200 trades. The performance tiles and P\&L calendar above the table use
the same analytics ranges as the
Performance page.
The P\&L calendar places each trade on the New York trading day it closed in,
the same day your daily loss limit uses. That day starts at midnight New York
time, so a trade closed in the evening in the Americas counts toward that same
date.
Select Download CSV to export the account's complete journal history. The
file includes every closed trade, not only the rows currently loaded in the
table, together with trade facts, calculated results, journal status, setup,
tags, mistakes, execution rating, and notes.
Trading Journal
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-journal
− Review auto-logged closed trades, R multiples, session and hold-time tags, and add notes, setups, tags, mistakes, and ratings.
+ Review auto-logged closed trades, R multiples, hold-time tags, and add notes, setups, tags, mistakes, and ratings.
Open the journal
The journal lives on the dashboard at
myfundedperpetuals.com/dashboard/journal.
Every trade you close on the selected challenge account appears there
automatically: entry and exit prices, size, leverage, fees, funding, and close
reason all come from your trading history. There is no manual trade entry and
nothing to sync.
What is logged for each trade
A journal trade is one complete position lifecycle (open to fully closed).
Each row shows:
- Close time, market, side, and leverage.
- Entry size and lifecycle entry/exit prices (volume-weighted when the
position filled in parts).
- Hold time, with an automatic bucket: Scalp (under 15 minutes), Intraday
(under 24 hours), or Swing (24 hours or longer).
− - A session tag derived from the entry time using fixed UTC windows: London
− 07:00 to 13:00, New York 13:00 to 21:00, and Asia otherwise.
- Net P\&L (realized P\&L minus fees, plus funding).
- R multiple, when the trade has one (see below).
R multiple
The R multiple expresses net P\&L as a multiple of the risk you defined at
entry: the distance from your entry price to the stop loss attached when the
order was placed, times the entry size.
A trade only has an R multiple when a stop loss was attached to the entry
order. Trades without an attached stop, and trades opened before this feature
shipped, show no value instead of an estimated one. Moving the stop after
entry does not change the recorded initial risk.
Reviewing a trade
Select any row to open its dedicated trade review page. The page opens with a
time to revoke access immediately. A trade is private by default, and clearing
its journal review does not change the visibility choice.
Working through the queue
The review page includes Previous and Next controls that step through your
recent trades in close order, and Save & Review Next stores the current entry
and jumps straight to the next trade without a journal entry. Each trade in the
table shows Not Journaled until you save an entry for it, then
Journaled. These labels track your own notes only; they are not a review by
MyFundedPerps and do not affect your account. The journal table shows how many
trades are not journaled yet, and the Journal filter narrows the table to just
those.
Filters and history depth
− Filter the table by session or journal status, or search it. The table loads
+ Filter the table by journal status, or search it. The table loads
your most recent trades first and pages backward on demand, up to the most
recent 200 trades. The performance tiles and P\&L calendar above the table use
the same analytics ranges as the
Performance page.
The P\&L calendar places each trade on the New York trading day it closed in,
the same day your daily loss limit uses. That day starts at midnight New York
time, so a trade closed in the evening in the Americas counts toward that same
date.
Select Download CSV to export the account's complete journal history. The
file includes every closed trade, not only the rows currently loaded in the
table, together with trade facts, calculated results, journal status, setup,
tags, mistakes, execution rating, and notes.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading GuideArticle expanded to cover forex and index markets on multiple venues with trading hours restrictions, added Reverse Position feature, and added chart-based limit order placement.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
− Forex markets
− The forex markets are EUR/USD and USD/JPY, both on Hyperliquid. Both use
− the venue's perpetual order book and price history, with trading
− available around the clock subject to venue availability and fresh market data.
− There is no weekend price substitute or switch to another venue outside
− traditional forex hours. Check the order ticket for each market's current
− leverage and size requirements.
− Forex previously traded on Lighter. Open forex positions were carried over to
− the Hyperliquid markets with their entry price, size, leverage, and history
− unchanged, and they now follow the Hyperliquid market's prices and rules.
Browse markets
The Markets page shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices refresh
every 30 seconds while the tab is visible; polling pauses in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.
Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
− - Tap the mark price to open Market Details. It shows mark price, 24h
− change, open interest, and 24h volume, and opens Trading Data,
− Market Info, and Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the
− tabs above it take you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
- Tap Focus Chart (the full-screen icon in the header) to give the chart
the whole screen. The header and bottom tabs hide, leaving one bar under the
chart with your open position for the market, Buy / Long, **Sell /
Short, and Exit Focus**, which restores the full layout. Focus applies
only to the price chart and is remembered on that device.
Net PnL percentage
Position Net PnL % on the trading terminal, dashboard, and position PnL cards
is calculated as Net PnL ÷ position margin × 100 for every market,
including forex. For example, a \$25 net profit on \$250 of margin is a 10%
return.
For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
Choose an order type
| Order | What it does | Main tradeoff |
|---|
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.
wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
Where faster confirmation is enabled, a fresh book showing the market
strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
it does not fill using an old touch alone.
- A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.
How market orders fill
Market orders, including triggered stop and take-profit market exits, fill
their whole size at the best ask for buys or the best bid for sells, with
maximum adverse slippage capped against the current mark reference. Each
published tier is a worst-case bound, not a fixed fill offset. If the book
offers a price inside the cap, your order receives that price. A fill is never
better than the mark itself: buys fill at or above the mark and sells at or
below it, even when the book momentarily sits through the mark.
For buys, the fill is the lower of the best ask and mark × (1 + tier / 10,000),
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
at the trigger price: market movement and the spread can change the final loss.
Take Profit and Stop Loss instructions help define exits before an order is
submitted. You can show their estimated gain or loss in percent or USD, and
save a TP/SL preset that fills the same gain and loss on every market (see
Trading settings). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.
For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
− Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger price. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.
New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:
| Venue | Trigger source |
|---|
For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
including a small trade. The platform does not wait for the candle to close
or for the mark price to reach the same level. Liquidation and account loss
monitoring use their separate price references.
Protective market Stop Loss and Take Profit orders can execute using the
first recorded best bid or ask at or after the touch when eligible quote evidence
is available and the order and position have not changed. That price stays fixed
- Reset to Default: restore the platform default arrangement and panel
sizes in one click.
Choose Edit Current Layout to enter edit mode. The edit toolbar takes the
place of the market stats bar while you edit, so the terminal stays where it
is. In edit mode, drag any panel by its handle onto a highlighted zone: an
existing column, or a strip at the edge where a new column will appear.
Hovering a zone outlines where the panel will land and names the zone. You
can also use the panel's Move To menu. Each panel header also has a hide
button. Panels glide into their new places, and rearranging never reloads the
main chart. The edit toolbar keeps the arrangement with Done, restores
the layout you selected before editing with Reset, or names the
arrangement with Save as Layout.
Widgets
The Widgets row in the edit toolbar lists every panel that is not on
screen; scroll it sideways when it holds more widgets than fit. Drag a widget
chip onto a highlighted zone, or open its Place in menu and pick a zone,
and it joins the terminal there. Hiding a placed widget returns it to the
row. Widgets you can place:
- Market Chart: a compact chart with its own market picker and timeframe
chips, so you can watch one market while trading another. While it is
placed, the bottom-bar Chart button shows "Docked in the terminal"
instead of opening a floating window; the widget and the floating window
share the same market and timeframe. Click the docked chart to trade its
market: the order ticket and order book switch to it, both show a
Hiding the order ticket removes the order entry form until you show it again
from customize mode or apply another arrangement.
Automatic closure after an evaluation pass
When the server confirms that your evaluation equity reaches its profit
target and the other pass requirements are clear, the account automatically
passes and closes its open positions. Open profit and loss count toward
equity, so you do not need to close trades yourself to realize the target.
Closing fees or slippage can leave the final balance slightly below target
without changing the passed result. See
Evaluation Progress.
Understand rejections
An order can be rejected when it would violate account rules, collateral or
− position limits, current market availability, execution protection, a pending
− payout lock, or copy-follower restrictions. Read the message attached to the
rejected order, confirm the active account, then change only the condition that
caused the rejection.
Do not repeatedly resubmit an unchanged order. If the reason remains unclear,
use Troubleshooting and FAQ.
Today's fill statistics
The dashboard counts fills on the day they settle, even if you placed the order
on an earlier day. Today's fees, realized PnL, traded volume, and fill win rate
use the same fills. The day runs from midnight to midnight in America/New_York,
including daylight saving changes. Unfilled orders and historical fills with no
recorded settlement time are excluded from these daily statistics.
Today's P\&L
Today's P\&L measures the change in equity since midnight in America/New_York.
It includes changes in unrealized profit or loss, trading fees, and swap fees,
− so it can differ from the profit on trades closed today.
If you closed all positions before today's reset and have had no activity
since, today's P\&L is \$0.00. Yesterday's gain or loss is already included in
your balance. A page left open checks the current day once per minute without
requiring a refresh. If you have open positions and today's starting equity
is not yet available, the daily P\&L value and its share action remain
unavailable until that value arrives.
After
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
+ Forex and index markets
+ EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Hyperliquid, gold (XAU) on Binance, and the
+ S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100) on Hyperliquid, around the clock. The
+ following markets price from oracle venues that quote a bid and an ask, so
+ their order book shows a single level on each side:
+
GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF Veranta Dow Jones 30 (US30) Ostium
| Markets | Venue |
|---|
+ US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
+ point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
+ and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
+ the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
+ Trading hours
+ These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
+ the clock. Times are New York time:
+
GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, USD/CHF Sunday 17:00 to Friday 17:00 None US30 Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|
+ Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
+ shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
+ While a market is closed
+ - Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
+ - Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
+ message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
+ - You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
+ orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
+ - Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote. If your
+ account is liquidated or closed out while a market is closed, those
+ positions close at that last quote.
+ Prices can open far from the last quote after a weekend or holiday. A Stop
+ Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
+ which can be worse than its trigger price.
Browse markets
The Markets page shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices refresh
every 30 seconds while the tab is visible; polling pauses in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.
Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
+ - Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
+ Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
+ Venue picker at the top switches between them. Below it are mark price,
+ 24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
+ as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
+ Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
+ you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
- Tap Focus Chart (the full-screen icon in the header) to give the chart
the whole screen. The header and bottom tabs hide, leaving one bar under the
chart with your open position for the market, Buy / Long, **Sell /
Short, and Exit Focus**, which restores the full layout. Focus applies
only to the price chart and is remembered on that device.
Net PnL percentage
Position Net PnL % on the trading terminal, dashboard, and position PnL cards
is calculated as Net PnL ÷ position margin × 100 for every market,
including forex. For example, a \$25 net profit on \$250 of margin is a 10%
return.
For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
+ Reverse a position
+ Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
+ side. Holding a 1 BTC long and reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short. On the
+ chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
+ it is the Reverse button in each row, and on a phone it is the **Reverse
+ Position** button on each position card.
+ A reversal is one market order for twice your position size, so both sides
+ happen in a single fill:
+ - All or nothing. If the new position would break a challenge rule, exceed
+ your margin or exposure limits, or exceed your
+ Max Market Slippage, the
+ order is rejected and your original position stays open unchanged. You are
+ never left flat by a reversal that only half worked.
+ - Same settings. The new position uses the leverage and margin mode of the
+ position you reversed.
+ - Fees and slippage. The trading fee applies to the full reversed size,
+ the same as closing and then opening separately. Market slippage is
+ estimated for the full order size.
+ - Exits. The position's Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled, as
+ with any flip. Set new exits for the reversed position if you want them.
+ - Current position only. If the position changes before the order fills
+ (for example, a Take Profit partly closes it, you add to it, or you change
+ its leverage), the reversal is rejected instead of reversing something other
+ than what you saw. Try again with the updated position.
+ - Copy trading followers. Reversing a lead account reverses its followers.
+ If a follower's position changes before filling, its copy is resized to reach
+ the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
+ available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
+ Copy Trading.
+ If Confirm New Orders reviews market orders, Reverse Position opens a short
+ review first. Otherwise it is sent as soon as you click it.
+ To remove the button everywhere, turn off
+ Show Reverse Position in Trading
+ settings.
Choose an order type
| Order | What it does | Main tradeoff |
|---|
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.
wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
Where faster confirmation is enabled, a fresh book showing the market
strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
it does not fill using an old touch alone.
- A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.
+ Start a limit order from the chart
+ Hover the chart and a + button appears beside the price label on the price
+ scale. Click it to start a limit order at that price. A level above the current
+ price starts a sell limit and a level at or below it starts a buy limit. You
+ can switch the side in the order ticket.
+ The order ticket switches to Limit with the price filled in, and the chart
+ draws a dashed draft line at that level. The draft is not placed yet: drag the
+ line to adjust the price, set the size in the order ticket, then submit the
+ order there.
+ You can also right-click the chart and choose Buy Limit at or **Sell Limit
+ at** the price under the pointer.
How market orders fill
Market orders, including triggered stop and take-profit market exits, fill
their whole size at the best ask for buys or the best bid for sells, with
maximum adverse slippage capped against the current mark reference. Each
published tier is a worst-case bound, not a fixed fill offset. If the book
offers a price inside the cap, your order receives that price. A fill is never
better than the mark itself: buys fill at or above the mark and sells at or
below it, even when the book momentarily sits through the mark.
For buys, the fill is the lower of the best ask and mark × (1 + tier / 10,000),
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
at the trigger price: market movement and the spread can change the final loss.
Take Profit and Stop Loss instructions help define exits before an order is
submitted. You can show their estimated gain or loss in percent or USD, and
save a TP/SL preset that fills the same gain and loss on every market (see
Trading settings). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.
For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
+ If you switch between Long and Short, a fixed Take Profit or Stop Loss price
+ moves to the other side of the entry price at the same distance, so it still
+ protects the new direction. Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger
+ price.
+ While you draft a limit order, the draft limit line on the chart shows TP
+ and SL handles. Drag a handle up or down to set that Take Profit or Stop
+ Loss price. The ticket turns on TP/SL and fills in the price, and the draft
+ line stays in sync with the ticket as you edit either one. Nothing is placed
+ until you submit the order. A handle is hidden once its level is set, and the
+ SL handle is hidden while a trailing stop is selected. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.
New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:
| Venue | Trigger source |
|---|
For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
including a small trade. The platform does not wait for the candle to close
or for the mark price to reach the same level. Liquidation and account loss
monitoring use their separate price references.
Protective market Stop Loss and Take Profit orders can execute using the
first recorded best bid or ask at or after the touch when eligible quote evidence
is available and the order and position have not changed. That price stays fixed
- Reset to Default: restore the platform default arrangement and panel
sizes in one click.
Choose Edit Current Layout to enter edit mode. The edit toolbar takes the
place of the market stats bar while you edit, so the terminal stays where it
is. In edit mode, drag any panel by its handle onto a highlighted zone: an
existing column, or a strip at the edge where a new column will appear.
Hovering a zone outlines where the panel will land and names the zone. You
can also use the panel's Move To menu. Each panel header also has a hide
button. Panels glide into their new places, and rearranging never reloads the
main chart. The edit toolbar keeps the arrangement with Done, restores
the layout you selected before editing with Reset, or names the
arrangement with Save as Layout.
+ Multiple charts
+ On a desktop-width window, the chart layout buttons beside Terminal Layout
+ in the market stats bar, or the Chart Layout section of the **Terminal
+ Layout menu, split the chart area into One Chart, Two Charts** side by
+ side, or Four Charts in a grid. Every chart is a full
+ chart with your indicators, drawing tools, saved chart layouts, and position
+ and order lines for the market it shows.
+ - The first chart always shows the market in the address bar. Picking a
+ different market in its header opens that market's trade page.
+ - Each other chart has its own market picker in its header and keeps its own
+ timeframe, so you can watch different markets, or the same market on
+ different timeframes. Changing its market or timeframe does not retarget the
+ other charts. A chart the layout shows for the first time starts on the market in the address
+ bar, on the 1h, 4h, or daily timeframe.
+ - Saved chart customizations are shared across charts. Charts showing the same
+ market also share saved drawings. If you edit drawings in both, the latest
+ save is kept.
+ - Click a chart to trade its market. The active chart gets a highlighted
+ border, and the order ticket and order book switch to its market. When that
+ market differs from the address bar, both show a "Following chart" strip
+ with the market name, and the buy and sell buttons name the market, so you
+ can confirm it before you submit. Click the first chart, or open a different
+ market, to return the ticket to the market in the address bar.
+ - Starting a limit order from the chart's context menu works in the first
+ chart only.
+ Choose One Chart at any time to return to the single chart. The layout and
+ each chart's market and timeframe are remembered per browser. Charts you are
+ not showing are closed and do not load market data. Phone and narrow-window
+ layouts always show one chart.
Widgets
The Widgets row in the edit toolbar lists every panel that is not on
screen; scroll it sideways when it holds more widgets than fit. Drag a widget
chip onto a highlighted zone, or open its Place in menu and pick a zone,
and it joins the terminal there. Hiding a placed widget returns it to the
row. Widgets you can place:
- Market Chart: a compact chart with its own market picker and timeframe
chips, so you can watch one market while trading another. While it is
placed, the bottom-bar Chart button shows "Docked in the terminal"
instead of opening a floating window; the widget and the floating window
share the same market and timeframe. Click the docked chart to trade its
market: the order ticket and order book switch to it, both show a
Hiding the order ticket removes the order entry form until you show it again
from customize mode or apply another arrangement.
Automatic closure after an evaluation pass
When the server confirms that your evaluation equity reaches its profit
target and the other pass requirements are clear, the account automatically
passes and closes its open positions. Open profit and loss count toward
equity, so you do not need to close trades yourself to realize the target.
Closing fees or slippage can leave the final balance slightly below target
without changing the passed result. See
Evaluation Progress.
Understand rejections
An order can be rejected when it would violate account rules, collateral or
+ position limits, current market availability or
+ trading hours, execution protection, a pending payout lock,
+ or copy-follower restrictions. Read the message attached to the
rejected order, confirm the active account, then change only the condition that
caused the rejection.
Do not repeatedly resubmit an unchanged order. If the reason remains unclear,
use Troubleshooting and FAQ.
Today's fill statistics
The dashboard counts fills on the day they settle, even if you placed the order
on an earlier day. Today's fees, realized PnL, traded volume, and fill win rate
use the same fills. The day runs from midnight to midnight in America/New_York,
including daylight saving changes. Unfilled orders and historical fills with no
recorded settlement time are excluded from these daily statistics.
Today's P\&L
Today's P\&L measures the change in equity since midnight in America/New_York.
It includes changes in unrealized profit or loss, trading fees, and swap fees,
+ so it can differ from the profit on trades closed today. The swap fee charged
+ at midnight belongs to the day that just ended, so it is not part of today's
+ P\&L.
If you closed all positions before today's reset and have had no activity
since, today's P\&L is \$0.00. Yesterday's gain or loss is already included in
your balance. A page left open checks the current day once per minute without
requiring a refresh. If you have open positions and today's starting equity
is not yet available, the daily P\&L value and its share action remain
unavailable until that value arrives.
Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/trading-guide
Understand simulated order execution, sizing, margin, leverage, Take Profit and Stop Loss, and the safeguards around each trade.
MyFundedPerps uses real market data and venue order books to simulate
orders and fills. The server validates account rules, available collateral,
market constraints, and execution protection before applying a fill to your
simulated account.
− Forex markets
− The forex markets are EUR/USD and USD/JPY, both on Hyperliquid. Both use
− the venue's perpetual order book and price history, with trading
− available around the clock subject to venue availability and fresh market data.
− There is no weekend price substitute or switch to another venue outside
− traditional forex hours. Check the order ticket for each market's current
− leverage and size requirements.
− Forex previously traded on Lighter. Open forex positions were carried over to
− the Hyperliquid markets with their entry price, size, leverage, and history
− unchanged, and they now follow the Hyperliquid market's prices and rules.
+ Forex and index markets
+ EUR/USD and USD/JPY trade on Hyperliquid, gold (XAU) on Binance, and the
+ S\&P 500 (SP500) and Nasdaq-100 (NAS100) on Hyperliquid, around the clock. The
+ following markets price from oracle venues that quote a bid and an ask, so
+ their order book shows a single level on each side:
+
GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, and USD/CHF Veranta Dow Jones 30 (US30) Ostium
| Markets | Venue |
|---|
+ US30 prices are index points. One unit of size is worth \$1 per
+ point, the same as every other market on the platform. Take Profit, Stop Loss,
+ and other price triggers on these markets follow the venue's mid price. Check
+ the order ticket for each market's current leverage and size requirements.
+ Trading hours
+ These markets follow their venue's trading sessions instead of trading around
+ the clock. Times are New York time:
+
GBP/USD, AUD/USD, USD/CAD, USD/CHF Sunday 17:00 to Friday 17:00 None US30 Sunday 18:00 to Friday 17:00 17:00 to 18:00, Monday to Thursday
| Markets | Weekly session | Daily break |
|---|
+ Venues also close early or for the full day on some holidays. The trade page
+ shows a Market Closed notice whenever a market is outside its session.
+ While a market is closed
+ - Prices, the chart, and the order book show the last quote before the close.
+ - Market orders and position closes are rejected with a market closed
+ message. Nothing on the market can fill until it reopens.
+ - You can still place, edit, and cancel limit, Take Profit, and Stop Loss
+ orders. They stay open and can trigger or fill at the reopening price.
+ - Open positions keep counting toward your account at the last quote. If your
+ account is liquidated or closed out while a market is closed, those
+ positions close at that last quote.
+ Prices can open far from the last quote after a weekend or holiday. A Stop
+ Loss that the reopening price crosses fills at the first available price,
+ which can be worse than its trigger price.
Browse markets
The Markets page shows cached prices
and statistics so browsing does not wait for every data source. Prices refresh
every 30 seconds while the tab is visible; polling pauses in hidden tabs.
A recent listing and its other statistics are reused for ten minutes; an older
cached listing can appear while a replacement loads. Overview cards and
historical charts load independently from the market list.
Open Filters to narrow the list by asset class (Stocks, Crypto, Indices,
Commodities, FX) and other criteria. Selected filters stay in the page URL so
a refined view can be shared or refreshed.
Open a market to see current trading data. Orders use current execution checks,
not the cached prices on the Markets page.
changes at the same time, the app rejects the older change to protect the
newer saved version.
To change a drawing's settings, such as the levels, colors, and labels of a
Fibonacci retracement, right-click the drawing and choose Settings… at the
top of the menu, or double-click one of its lines. When the chart is tall
enough, the toolbar that appears after you select a drawing also shows a
settings icon.
Trade on a phone
On a phone, the trade page uses a single header row: the menu, the market
picker, the current mark price with its 24h change, and your notifications.
The page fills the screen, including the space Safari frees when you hide its
toolbar.
− - Tap the mark price to open Market Details. It shows mark price, 24h
− change, open interest, and 24h volume, and opens Trading Data,
− Market Info, and Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the
− tabs above it take you back to Chart.
+ - Tap the mark price, or the info icon beside the market name, to open
+ Market Details. When the market trades on more than one venue, the
+ Venue picker at the top switches between them. Below it are mark price,
+ 24h change, open interest, 24h volume, and any notes about the market, such
+ as its trading hours. It also opens Trading Data, Market Info, and
+ Market Depth. While one of those views is open, the tabs above it take
+ you back to Chart.
- The chart's drawing tools start collapsed. Tap the arrow at the chart's left
edge to show them.
- Tap Focus Chart (the full-screen icon in the header) to give the chart
the whole screen. The header and bottom tabs hide, leaving one bar under the
chart with your open position for the market, Buy / Long, **Sell /
Short, and Exit Focus**, which restores the full layout. Focus applies
only to the price chart and is remembered on that device.
Net PnL percentage
Position Net PnL % on the trading terminal, dashboard, and position PnL cards
is calculated as Net PnL ÷ position margin × 100 for every market,
including forex. For example, a \$25 net profit on \$250 of margin is a 10%
return.
For example, selling 0.5 BTC while you hold a 0.5 BTC long closes the long:
it does not leave you holding a 0.5 BTC long and a 0.5 BTC short. Selling
0.8 BTC instead closes the long and opens a 0.3 BTC short.
Hedge mode is not supported. You cannot hold a long and a short on the same
market in the same account at the same time.
When a position closes or flips, its Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are
canceled automatically, because the position they protected no longer
exists. Set new exits for a flipped position if you want them. When a
position is only reduced, any exit larger than the remaining size is reduced
to fit it.
Use Reduce Only (described below) when an order should only shrink or
close your position and never flip it.
+ Reverse a position
+ Reverse Position closes your position and opens the same size on the other
+ side. Holding a 1 BTC long and reversing leaves you with a 1 BTC short. On the
+ chart it is the up and down arrow on the position's line. In the Positions tab
+ it is the Reverse button in each row, and on a phone it is the **Reverse
+ Position** button on each position card.
+ A reversal is one market order for twice your position size, so both sides
+ happen in a single fill:
+ - All or nothing. If the new position would break a challenge rule, exceed
+ your margin or exposure limits, or exceed your
+ Max Market Slippage, the
+ order is rejected and your original position stays open unchanged. You are
+ never left flat by a reversal that only half worked.
+ - Same settings. The new position uses the leverage and margin mode of the
+ position you reversed.
+ - Fees and slippage. The trading fee applies to the full reversed size,
+ the same as closing and then opening separately. Market slippage is
+ estimated for the full order size.
+ - Exits. The position's Take Profit and Stop Loss orders are canceled, as
+ with any flip. Set new exits for the reversed position if you want them.
+ - Current position only. If the position changes before the order fills
+ (for example, a Take Profit partly closes it, you add to it, or you change
+ its leverage), the reversal is rejected instead of reversing something other
+ than what you saw. Try again with the updated position.
+ - Copy trading followers. Reversing a lead account reverses its followers.
+ If a follower's position changes before filling, its copy is resized to reach
+ the intended position on the new side. The follower still needs enough
+ available collateral and must pass its own trading checks. See
+ Copy Trading.
+ If Confirm New Orders reviews market orders, Reverse Position opens a short
+ review first. Otherwise it is sent as soon as you click it.
+ To remove the button everywhere, turn off
+ Show Reverse Position in Trading
+ settings.
Choose an order type
| Order | What it does | Main tradeoff |
|---|
Market | Fills the full size using the execution model described below. | Adverse slippage is capped by the market's published tier.
Limit | Rests at your price and fills in full there once the market reaches it. A limit placed through the market fills right away as a market order. | Controls price but may remain unfilled if the market never reaches the limit.
Stop / Take Profit | Watches a trigger and submits the configured exit behavior when reached. | A trigger is not a guaranteed fill price; execution still uses current market conditions.
Scheduled or advanced order | Breaks or manages an instruction using the controls shown in the order ticket. | Each generated order still passes the ordinary account and execution checks.
Check the order ticket for the order types available on the selected market.
Select Reduce Only to cap an order at closing or shrinking an existing
position in the opposite direction. It is offered on every order type except
Take Market: a reduce-only take exit belongs on the position's Take Profit
instead. When an account restriction requires it, the option is locked on and
oversized requests are capped at the open position size.
wait longer between attempts. A brief touch still does not guarantee a fill.
Where faster confirmation is enabled, a fresh book showing the market
strictly beyond your resting limit can fill it immediately at the limit
price. If that book is too old, the order uses the usual confirmation checks.
Exact touches can start confirmation immediately after the order is
triggered, but still need a newer book that reaches the limit. If an
execution attempt is interrupted, the order can return to waiting and retry;
it does not fill using an old touch alone.
- A Limit take profit or stop loss follows the same rule after it triggers: it
rests at its price and fills in full at that price once the market reaches
it, so it can remain unfilled. If the market has already passed the limit
when it triggers, it fills right away as a market order instead.
+ Start a limit order from the chart
+ Hover the chart and a + button appears beside the price label on the price
+ scale. Click it to start a limit order at that price. A level above the current
+ price starts a sell limit and a level at or below it starts a buy limit. You
+ can switch the side in the order ticket.
+ The order ticket switches to Limit with the price filled in, and the chart
+ draws a dashed draft line at that level. The draft is not placed yet: drag the
+ line to adjust the price, set the size in the order ticket, then submit the
+ order there.
+ You can also right-click the chart and choose Buy Limit at or **Sell Limit
+ at** the price under the pointer.
How market orders fill
Market orders, including triggered stop and take-profit market exits, fill
their whole size at the best ask for buys or the best bid for sells, with
maximum adverse slippage capped against the current mark reference. Each
published tier is a worst-case bound, not a fixed fill offset. If the book
offers a price inside the cap, your order receives that price. A fill is never
better than the mark itself: buys fill at or above the mark and sells at or
below it, even when the book momentarily sits through the mark.
For buys, the fill is the lower of the best ask and mark × (1 + tier / 10,000),
and at least the mark. For sells, it is the higher of the best bid and
mark × (1 - tier / 10,000), and at most the mark. For example, with a mark of
\$100 and a 1 bps cap, a best ask of \$100.005 fills at \$100.005; a best ask of
at the trigger price: market movement and the spread can change the final loss.
Take Profit and Stop Loss instructions help define exits before an order is
submitted. You can show their estimated gain or loss in percent or USD, and
save a TP/SL preset that fills the same gain and loss on every market (see
Trading settings). Review
the trigger, direction, quantity, and whether the exit uses market or limit
behavior where the ticket offers that choice.
For a new order, you can enter either a trigger price or an estimated gain or
loss. The last field you edit controls the target. If you enter a USD amount or
percentage, the draft trigger price updates with the estimated entry price,
size, leverage, and fees until you submit. If you enter or drag the trigger
price, that price stays fixed and the gain or loss estimate updates instead.
− Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger price. The selected amount is
+ If you switch between Long and Short, a fixed Take Profit or Stop Loss price
+ moves to the other side of the entry price at the same distance, so it still
+ protects the new direction. Once submitted, the order uses its saved trigger
+ price.
+ While you draft a limit order, the draft limit line on the chart shows TP
+ and SL handles. Drag a handle up or down to set that Take Profit or Stop
+ Loss price. The ticket turns on TP/SL and fills in the price, and the draft
+ line stays in sync with the ticket as you edit either one. Nothing is placed
+ until you submit the order. A handle is hidden once its level is set, and the
+ SL handle is hidden while a trailing stop is selected. The selected amount is
an estimate, not a guaranteed final profit or loss.
New Take Profit, Stop Loss, and other conditional orders use the market's
standard chart source:
| Venue | Trigger source |
|---|
For Last Price triggers, one actual trade touching your level is enough,
including a small trade. The platform does not wait for the candle to close
or for the mark price to reach the same level. Liquidation and account loss
monitoring use their separate price references.
Protective market Stop Loss and Take Profit orders can execute using the
first recorded best bid or ask at or after the touch when eligible quote evidence
is available and the order and position have not changed. That price stays fixed
- Reset to Default: restore the platform default arrangement and panel
sizes in one click.
Choose Edit Current Layout to enter edit mode. The edit toolbar takes the
place of the market stats bar while you edit, so the terminal stays where it
is. In edit mode, drag any panel by its handle onto a highlighted zone: an
existing column, or a strip at the edge where a new column will appear.
Hovering a zone outlines where the panel will land and names the zone. You
can also use the panel's Move To menu. Each panel header also has a hide
button. Panels glide into their new places, and rearranging never reloads the
main chart. The edit toolbar keeps the arrangement with Done, restores
the layout you selected before editing with Reset, or names the
arrangement with Save as Layout.
+ Multiple charts
+ On a desktop-width window, the chart layout buttons beside Terminal Layout
+ in the market stats bar, or the Chart Layout section of the **Terminal
+ Layout menu, split the chart area into One Chart, Two Charts** side by
+ side, or Four Charts in a grid. Every chart is a full
+ chart with your indicators, drawing tools, saved chart layouts, and position
+ and order lines for the market it shows.
+ - The first chart always shows the market in the address bar. Picking a
+ different market in its header opens that market's trade page.
+ - Each other chart has its own market picker in its header and keeps its own
+ timeframe, so you can watch different markets, or the same market on
+ different timeframes. Changing its market or timeframe does not retarget the
+ other charts. A chart the layout shows for the first time starts on the market in the address
+ bar, on the 1h, 4h, or daily timeframe.
+ - Saved chart customizations are shared across charts. Charts showing the same
+ market also share saved drawings. If you edit drawings in both, the latest
+ save is kept.
+ - Click a chart to trade its market. The active chart gets a highlighted
+ border, and the order ticket and order book switch to its market. When that
+ market differs from the address bar, both show a "Following chart" strip
+ with the market name, and the buy and sell buttons name the market, so you
+ can confirm it before you submit. Click the first chart, or open a different
+ market, to return the ticket to the market in the address bar.
+ - Starting a limit order from the chart's context menu works in the first
+ chart only.
+ Choose One Chart at any time to return to the single chart. The layout and
+ each chart's market and timeframe are remembered per browser. Charts you are
+ not showing are closed and do not load market data. Phone and narrow-window
+ layouts always show one chart.
Widgets
The Widgets row in the edit toolbar lists every panel that is not on
screen; scroll it sideways when it holds more widgets than fit. Drag a widget
chip onto a highlighted zone, or open its Place in menu and pick a zone,
and it joins the terminal there. Hiding a placed widget returns it to the
row. Widgets you can place:
- Market Chart: a compact chart with its own market picker and timeframe
chips, so you can watch one market while trading another. While it is
placed, the bottom-bar Chart button shows "Docked in the terminal"
instead of opening a floating window; the widget and the floating window
share the same market and timeframe. Click the docked chart to trade its
market: the order ticket and order book switch to it, both show a
Hiding the order ticket removes the order entry form until you show it again
from customize mode or apply another arrangement.
Automatic closure after an evaluation pass
When the server confirms that your evaluation equity reaches its profit
target and the other pass requirements are clear, the account automatically
passes and closes its open positions. Open profit and loss count toward
equity, so you do not need to close trades yourself to realize the target.
Closing fees or slippage can leave the final balance slightly below target
without changing the passed result. See
Evaluation Progress.
Understand rejections
An order can be rejected when it would violate account rules, collateral or
− position limits, current market availability, execution protection, a pending
− payout lock, or copy-follower restrictions. Read the message attached to the
+ position limits, current market availability or
+ trading hours, execution protection, a pending payout lock,
+ or copy-follower restrictions. Read the message attached to the
rejected order, confirm the active account, then change only the condition that
caused the rejection.
Do not repeatedly resubmit an unchanged order. If the reason remains unclear,
use Troubleshooting and FAQ.
Today's fill statistics
The dashboard counts fills on the day they settle, even if you placed the order
on an earlier day. Today's fees, realized PnL, traded volume, and fill win rate
use the same fills. The day runs from midnight to midnight in America/New_York,
including daylight saving changes. Unfilled orders and historical fills with no
recorded settlement time are excluded from these daily statistics.
Today's P\&L
Today's P\&L measures the change in equity since midnight in America/New_York.
It includes changes in unrealized profit or loss, trading fees, and swap fees,
− so it can differ from the profit on trades closed today.
+ so it can differ from the profit on trades closed today. The swap fee charged
+ at midnight belongs to the day that just ended, so it is not part of today's
+ P\&L.
If you closed all positions before today's reset and have had no activity
since, today's P\&L is \$0.00. Yesterday's gain or loss is already included in
your balance. A page left open checks the current day once per minute without
requiring a refresh. If you have open positions and today's starting equity
is not yet available, the daily P\&L value and its share action remain
unavailable until that value arrives.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Tradable AssetsAdded source documentation link; removed Mintlify platform attribution statement.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Tradable Assets
Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.
This page lists all 134 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
List last changed: 2026-10-12.
This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
current availability. Markets that follow [trading
hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.
Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on Market Exposure Caps. See Asset Exposure Limits for how those caps apply to your accounts.
Crypto
68 markets.
| Market | Symbol |
|---|
| BRENTOIL-USD | BRENTOIL |
|---|
| XPD-USD | XPD |
− This documentation is built and hosted on Mintlify, a developer documentation platform.
After
Tradable Assets
+ Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/tradable-assets
Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.
This page lists all 134 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
List last changed: 2026-10-12.
This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
current availability. Markets that follow [trading
hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.
Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on Market Exposure Caps. See Asset Exposure Limits for how those caps apply to your accounts.
Crypto
68 markets.
| Market | Symbol |
|---|
| BRENTOIL-USD | BRENTOIL |
|---|
| XPD-USD | XPD |
Tradable Assets
+ Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/tradable-assets
Every market you can currently open positions on, grouped by asset class, with the names and symbols shown on the trade page.
This page lists all 134 markets currently enabled for trading on MyFundedPerps. The Market column matches the market name on the trade page, and Symbol is the ticker you can search for.
List last changed: 2026-10-12.
This list is updated from the platform's market configuration after markets
are added or removed, so it can briefly trail the app. The [Markets
page](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/markets) and the trade page always show
current availability. Markets that follow [trading
hours](/guides/trading-guide#trading-hours) stay listed while they are closed.
Maximum leverage and exposure caps for each market are listed on Market Exposure Caps. See Asset Exposure Limits for how those caps apply to your accounts.
Crypto
68 markets.
| Market | Symbol |
|---|
| BRENTOIL-USD | BRENTOIL |
|---|
| XPD-USD | XPD |
− This documentation is built and hosted on Mintlify, a developer documentation platform.
PremierMyFundedPerps · October competitionBonus reset eligibility changed from active to expired; task reset is now the only free reset available.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.
Trading and ranking
There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.
The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.
Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the Terms of Use. For what disqualification does to your competition account, see Disqualification.
Free reset
You get one free reset. It unlocks after you complete three tasks on the competition page:
1. Post about the competition on X using the prepared post.
2. Follow MyFundedPerps on YouTube and Instagram. Open each profile, follow it, then choose Confirm Follows. Confirmation becomes available 15 seconds after you start the task.
3. Repost the competition post on X.
To reset, close every open position and cancel working orders first. A reset returns your account to \$100,000 on the Classic path, and you can choose a path again before your next trade. Resets are available only while the competition is live, and the reset cannot be undone.
Bonus reset
− Until October 6, 2026 at 06:00 UTC, every entrant gets one extra free reset with no tasks required. It is used before your task reset, so you can still unlock and use the task reset afterward, starting 24 hours after your bonus reset. The bonus reset is available even if you reset recently, and it still requires closed positions and canceled orders.
After
You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.
Trading and ranking
There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.
The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.
Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the Terms of Use. For what disqualification does to your competition account, see Disqualification.
Free reset
You get one free reset. It unlocks after you complete three tasks on the competition page:
1. Post about the competition on X using the prepared post.
2. Follow MyFundedPerps on YouTube and Instagram. Open each profile, follow it, then choose Confirm Follows. Confirmation becomes available 15 seconds after you start the task.
3. Repost the competition post on X.
To reset, close every open position and cancel working orders first. A reset returns your account to \$100,000 on the Classic path, and you can choose a path again before your next trade. Resets are available only while the competition is live, and the reset cannot be undone.
Bonus reset
+ Until October 6, 2026 at 06:00 UTC, every entrant could take one extra free reset with no tasks required. That window has closed, so the task reset is now the only free reset. If you used the bonus reset, you can still unlock and use the task reset, starting 24 hours after your bonus reset.
You choose a path once. Your account starts with the Classic balance and caps, and trading before you choose keeps those terms and closes the choice. Close positions and cancel working orders before choosing. After the free reset, you can choose a path again.
Trading and ranking
There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, and your path's leverage and exposure caps apply.
The highest account equity wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. The return shown beside each trader is measured against their own path's starting balance, so a Whale account at \$151,500 shows +1%. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades. You appear on the leaderboard after your first fill.
Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the Terms of Use. For what disqualification does to your competition account, see Disqualification.
Free reset
You get one free reset. It unlocks after you complete three tasks on the competition page:
1. Post about the competition on X using the prepared post.
2. Follow MyFundedPerps on YouTube and Instagram. Open each profile, follow it, then choose Confirm Follows. Confirmation becomes available 15 seconds after you start the task.
3. Repost the competition post on X.
To reset, close every open position and cancel working orders first. A reset returns your account to \$100,000 on the Classic path, and you can choose a path again before your next trade. Resets are available only while the competition is live, and the reset cannot be undone.
Bonus reset
− Until October 6, 2026 at 06:00 UTC, every entrant gets one extra free reset with no tasks required. It is used before your task reset, so you can still unlock and use the task reset afterward, starting 24 hours after your bonus reset. The bonus reset is available even if you reset recently, and it still requires closed positions and canceled orders.
+ Until October 6, 2026 at 06:00 UTC, every entrant could take one extra free reset with no tasks required. That window has closed, so the task reset is now the only free reset. If you used the bonus reset, you can still unlock and use the task reset, starting 24 hours after your bonus reset.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Launch competitionLaunch competition ended; description changed to past tense and competition moved to finished section with prize redemption details added.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Launch competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/launch-competition
Entry, trading rules, prizes, daily case drops, resets, and leaderboard sharing for the MyFundedPerps Launch Competition.
Schedule and entry
− The MyFundedPerps Launch Competition runs from September 15, 2026 at 10:00 AM to September 28, 2026 at 12:00 PM, New York time (EDT, UTC−4).
− Competitions shows the launch competition at the top while it runs, with the countdown, the top of the leaderboard, and the next daily case draw. Once you have joined, it also shows your rank and equity, and Trade Now opens your competition account. Select the competition's name or View Leaderboard to open its full page; Competitions at the top of that page returns you to the list.
− Every platform user who registered before the start is automatically entered, regardless of account status. A dismissible notice appears when your competition account is ready. Users who register after the start can join manually from the competition's page before it closes.
− On the competition's page, choose Trade Competition above the countdown to open your competition account. Your Competition Account brings together your standings and reset availability. The leaderboard follows your account panel, with Share Leaderboard Card in its header. On mobile, each trader's row includes their equity, profit and loss, balance, and prize. Prize Structure below the leaderboard shows the full prize breakdown by default; select its heading to collapse or expand it. Trading rules, fair-play standards, and daily case rewards appear in Competition Details.
Trading and ranking
Each participant receives a separate \$100,000 competition account. There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, leverage caps, and exposure caps still apply.
The highest account equity at close wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. If both are equal, a stable participant identifier determines the order. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades; an account without closed trades has a zero win rate.
Leaderboard positions refresh approximately every 15 minutes, and every three minutes during the final hour of the competition. Final results use closing equity, so prizes become available after closing scores have finished settling.
Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the Terms of Use. For what disqualification does to your competition account, see Disqualification.
Account resets
You can reset your competition account three times in total, with at least 24 hours between resets. Close every open position and cancel working orders and TWAPs before resetting.
A reset restores equity to \$100,000. Trade statistics, leaderboard history, and case-drop eligibility and history are preserved. Resets are available only while the competition is live.
Top 100 prizes
After results are finalized, launch competition trading accounts are archived and removed from your dashboard. Any remaining positions are closed and pending orders are canceled. Final standings, prize redemption codes, and reward cases remain available. Accounts received as prizes are separate from competition trading accounts and remain available.
Each winning rank receives both prizes below. All MyFundedFutures accounts are Rapid accounts.
| Rank | MyFundedPerps | MyFundedFutures Rapid | Combined account size |
|---|
After
Launch competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/launch-competition
Entry, trading rules, prizes, daily case drops, resets, and leaderboard sharing for the MyFundedPerps Launch Competition.
Schedule and entry
+ The launch competition has ended. This page describes how it ran, for
+ reference.
+ The MyFundedPerps Launch Competition ran from September 15, 2026 at 10:00 AM to September 28, 2026 at 12:00 PM, New York time (EDT, UTC−4).
+ Every platform user who registered before the start was automatically entered, regardless of account status. Users who registered after the start could join manually from the competition's page before it closed.
+ The competition now appears with finished competitions on Competitions. Its full page keeps the final standings, and winners find their prize redemption codes there (see Top 100 prizes).
Trading and ranking
Each participant receives a separate \$100,000 competition account. There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, leverage caps, and exposure caps still apply.
The highest account equity at close wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. If both are equal, a stable participant identifier determines the order. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades; an account without closed trades has a zero win rate.
Leaderboard positions refresh approximately every 15 minutes, and every three minutes during the final hour of the competition. Final results use closing equity, so prizes become available after closing scores have finished settling.
Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the Terms of Use. For what disqualification does to your competition account, see Disqualification.
Account resets
You can reset your competition account three times in total, with at least 24 hours between resets. Close every open position and cancel working orders and TWAPs before resetting.
A reset restores equity to \$100,000. Trade statistics, leaderboard history, and case-drop eligibility and history are preserved. Resets are available only while the competition is live.
Top 100 prizes
After results are finalized, launch competition trading accounts are archived and removed from your dashboard. Any remaining positions are closed and pending orders are canceled. Final standings, prize redemption codes, and reward cases remain available. Accounts received as prizes are separate from competition trading accounts and remain available.
Each winning rank receives both prizes below. All MyFundedFutures accounts are Rapid accounts.
| Rank | MyFundedPerps | MyFundedFutures Rapid | Combined account size |
|---|
Launch competition
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/launch-competition
Entry, trading rules, prizes, daily case drops, resets, and leaderboard sharing for the MyFundedPerps Launch Competition.
Schedule and entry
− The MyFundedPerps Launch Competition runs from September 15, 2026 at 10:00 AM to September 28, 2026 at 12:00 PM, New York time (EDT, UTC−4).
− Competitions shows the launch competition at the top while it runs, with the countdown, the top of the leaderboard, and the next daily case draw. Once you have joined, it also shows your rank and equity, and Trade Now opens your competition account. Select the competition's name or View Leaderboard to open its full page; Competitions at the top of that page returns you to the list.
− Every platform user who registered before the start is automatically entered, regardless of account status. A dismissible notice appears when your competition account is ready. Users who register after the start can join manually from the competition's page before it closes.
− On the competition's page, choose Trade Competition above the countdown to open your competition account. Your Competition Account brings together your standings and reset availability. The leaderboard follows your account panel, with Share Leaderboard Card in its header. On mobile, each trader's row includes their equity, profit and loss, balance, and prize. Prize Structure below the leaderboard shows the full prize breakdown by default; select its heading to collapse or expand it. Trading rules, fair-play standards, and daily case rewards appear in Competition Details.
+ The launch competition has ended. This page describes how it ran, for
+ reference.
+ The MyFundedPerps Launch Competition ran from September 15, 2026 at 10:00 AM to September 28, 2026 at 12:00 PM, New York time (EDT, UTC−4).
+ Every platform user who registered before the start was automatically entered, regardless of account status. Users who registered after the start could join manually from the competition's page before it closed.
+ The competition now appears with finished competitions on Competitions. Its full page keeps the final standings, and winners find their prize redemption codes there (see Top 100 prizes).
Trading and ranking
Each participant receives a separate \$100,000 competition account. There is no profit target, drawdown limit, or daily loss limit that can end your run. Standard trading fees, swap fees, slippage, margin liquidation, leverage caps, and exposure caps still apply.
The highest account equity at close wins. Equity includes unrealized profit and loss. Equal equity is ranked by win rate; a higher win rate wins the tie. If both are equal, a stable participant identifier determines the order. Win rate is winning closed trades divided by all closed trades; an account without closed trades has a zero win rate.
Leaderboard positions refresh approximately every 15 minutes, and every three minutes during the final hour of the competition. Final results use closing equity, so prizes become available after closing scores have finished settling.
Standings count genuine, independent trading only. Operating more than one account, copying or coordinating trades across accounts, or exploiting stale prices and platform errors leads to disqualification and can end platform access. The full prohibited-conduct list is in the Terms of Use. For what disqualification does to your competition account, see Disqualification.
Account resets
You can reset your competition account three times in total, with at least 24 hours between resets. Close every open position and cancel working orders and TWAPs before resetting.
A reset restores equity to \$100,000. Trade statistics, leaderboard history, and case-drop eligibility and history are preserved. Resets are available only while the competition is live.
Top 100 prizes
After results are finalized, launch competition trading accounts are archived and removed from your dashboard. Any remaining positions are closed and pending orders are canceled. Final standings, prize redemption codes, and reward cases remain available. Accounts received as prizes are separate from competition trading accounts and remain available.
Each winning rank receives both prizes below. All MyFundedFutures accounts are Rapid accounts.
| Rank | MyFundedPerps | MyFundedFutures Rapid | Combined account size |
|---|
PremierMyFundedPerps · Getting StartedSign In and Sign Up locations changed from phone menu to always-visible header across all screen sizes.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
The platform is operated by Funding Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., d/b/a
MyFundedPerpetuals.
1. Open MyFundedPerps
Open MyFundedPerps. You can choose a challenge
before signing in. Your profile, challenge accounts, settings, purchase history,
and trading activity belong to the account you verify at checkout.
If the launch page appears, the countdown shows the time remaining until
opening. Keep the page open to enter automatically when launch begins. If launch is
paused or delayed, this page receives the updated schedule and access stays
closed. A countdown reaching zero does not override a launch pause. If you have
an early-access password, select Enter Password. To receive launch updates,
enter your email address and select Notify Me.
− After entering the site, select Open Menu on a phone to find Sign In.
− Sign Up and the language picker remain in the header.
2. Choose a challenge
Open the challenge selector and compare
the available formats. Before checkout, review:
- account size and starting balance;
- evaluation step count and profit target for each step;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
- drawdown type, such as static or trailing end-of-day;
- consistency, qualifying-day, and payout requirements;
- purchased profit split, price, discount, and total.
These values can differ by plan. The terms shown for the selected challenge are
the authoritative terms for that purchase.
Select Start Challenge to open checkout with your selected plan. If you are
After
The platform is operated by Funding Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., d/b/a
MyFundedPerpetuals.
1. Open MyFundedPerps
Open MyFundedPerps. You can choose a challenge
before signing in. Your profile, challenge accounts, settings, purchase history,
and trading activity belong to the account you verify at checkout.
If the launch page appears, the countdown shows the time remaining until
opening. Keep the page open to enter automatically when launch begins. If launch is
paused or delayed, this page receives the updated schedule and access stays
closed. A countdown reaching zero does not override a launch pause. If you have
an early-access password, select Enter Password. To receive launch updates,
enter your email address and select Notify Me.
+ After entering the site, Sign In, Sign Up, and the language picker are
+ in the header on every screen size, including phones.
2. Choose a challenge
Open the challenge selector and compare
the available formats. Before checkout, review:
- account size and starting balance;
- evaluation step count and profit target for each step;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
- drawdown type, such as static or trailing end-of-day;
- consistency, qualifying-day, and payout requirements;
- purchased profit split, price, discount, and total.
These values can differ by plan. The terms shown for the selected challenge are
the authoritative terms for that purchase.
Select Start Challenge to open checkout with your selected plan. If you are
The platform is operated by Funding Perpetuals Holdings, Inc., d/b/a
MyFundedPerpetuals.
1. Open MyFundedPerps
Open MyFundedPerps. You can choose a challenge
before signing in. Your profile, challenge accounts, settings, purchase history,
and trading activity belong to the account you verify at checkout.
If the launch page appears, the countdown shows the time remaining until
opening. Keep the page open to enter automatically when launch begins. If launch is
paused or delayed, this page receives the updated schedule and access stays
closed. A countdown reaching zero does not override a launch pause. If you have
an early-access password, select Enter Password. To receive launch updates,
enter your email address and select Notify Me.
− After entering the site, select Open Menu on a phone to find Sign In.
− Sign Up and the language picker remain in the header.
+ After entering the site, Sign In, Sign Up, and the language picker are
+ in the header on every screen size, including phones.
2. Choose a challenge
Open the challenge selector and compare
the available formats. Before checkout, review:
- account size and starting balance;
- evaluation step count and profit target for each step;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
- drawdown type, such as static or trailing end-of-day;
- consistency, qualifying-day, and payout requirements;
- purchased profit split, price, discount, and total.
These values can differ by plan. The terms shown for the selected challenge are
the authoritative terms for that purchase.
Select Start Challenge to open checkout with your selected plan. If you are
PremierMyFundedPerps · Elite AccountsUS30 added to Elite plan's boosted leverage markets; tab naming and purchase limit rules changed; exposure cap table and notes updated.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
− rule, and boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
− Elite Perps tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
| Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
|---|
| Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000 |
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
− number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the per-order and rolling
− purchase limits
− that apply to every plan. Only funded Elite accounts are capped; see
Funded allocation.
DLL options
Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:
| Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else |
|---|
3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
| No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page |
|---|
A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
- The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
allowance is \$1,500.
- Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
− Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. Each cap is a
− multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
| Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure |
|---|
| Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000 |
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
− short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, and CL and BRENTOIL share the
− oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD market count toward the
− gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
starting balance.
- Every other market keeps its normal maximum leverage, shown on the
Market Exposure Caps page.
- Market exposure caps still apply on top of
the Elite caps. Each Elite account has its own market exposure cap: your
other Elite accounts of the same size do not share or use up its capacity.
The order ticket shows the limit for the selected market as **Account
Exposure Cap**, and the leverage selector goes up to the Elite maximum for that
market. An order that would exceed the leverage or an exposure cap is
rejected. Reducing or closing a position is always allowed.
Fees
Elite accounts pay reduced fees on four markets, in both the evaluation and
Sim Funded stages:
| Markets | Elite commission per fill | Elite daily swap rate | Standard commission | Standard daily swap rate |
|---|
- On a \$10,000 fill in NAS100, SP500, Gold, or WTI Oil, the Elite commission
is \$0.10 instead of \$0.50.
- A NAS100 or SP500 position worth \$10,000 pays \$1.00 in swap fees over 24
hourly charges, instead of \$1.50.
- Every other market, including other indices, other commodities such as
silver and Brent, crypto, forex, and stocks, uses the standard rates.
Read Commissions and Fees for how commissions
and hourly swap fees are calculated.
Accounts per order
One order can include up to 10 accounts at \$5K or \$10K, up to 4 at \$25K, or
− up to 2 at \$50K, all of the same size and option. The general
− purchase limits
− also apply.
Sim Funded
Passing the evaluation leads to a Sim Funded Elite account. It keeps the same
rules as the evaluation, without the profit target:
- the same starting balance;
- the same 5% static MLL and loss threshold, which does not move after a
withdrawal;
- the same leverage and exposure caps;
- the same daily loss limit option: a 3% daily loss limit on a 3% DLL
account, or none on a No DLL account;
- no consistency rule.
Sim Funded accounts use simulated capital and simulated execution, like every
funded account.
After
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
+ rule, and boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
+ Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
| Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
|---|
| Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000 |
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
+ number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the
+ per-order account limits. Only funded Elite accounts are
+ capped; see
Funded allocation.
DLL options
Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:
| Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else |
|---|
3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
| No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page |
|---|
A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
- The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
allowance is \$1,500.
- Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
+ Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
+ is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
| Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure |
|---|
+
| US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000 |
|---|
| Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000 |
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
+ short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
+ and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
+ market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
starting balance.
- Every other market keeps its normal maximum leverage, shown on the
Market Exposure Caps page.
+ Choose Elite and your account size there to see the current group caps,
+ account exposure limit, and market caps for that size.
- Market exposure caps still apply on top of
the Elite caps. Each Elite account has its own market exposure cap: your
other Elite accounts of the same size do not share or use up its capacity.
The order ticket shows the limit for the selected market as **Account
Exposure Cap**, and the leverage selector goes up to the Elite maximum for that
market. An order that would exceed the leverage or an exposure cap is
rejected. Reducing or closing a position is always allowed.
Fees
Elite accounts pay reduced fees on four markets, in both the evaluation and
Sim Funded stages:
| Markets | Elite commission per fill | Elite daily swap rate | Standard commission | Standard daily swap rate |
|---|
- On a \$10,000 fill in NAS100, SP500, Gold, or WTI Oil, the Elite commission
is \$0.10 instead of \$0.50.
- A NAS100 or SP500 position worth \$10,000 pays \$1.00 in swap fees over 24
hourly charges, instead of \$1.50.
- Every other market, including other indices, other commodities such as
silver and Brent, crypto, forex, and stocks, uses the standard rates.
Read Commissions and Fees for how commissions
and hourly swap fees are calculated.
Accounts per order
One order can include up to 10 accounts at \$5K or \$10K, up to 4 at \$25K, or
+ up to 2 at \$50K, all of the same size and option. You can place as many
+ orders as you like.
Sim Funded
Passing the evaluation leads to a Sim Funded Elite account. It keeps the same
rules as the evaluation, without the profit target:
- the same starting balance;
- the same 5% static MLL and loss threshold, which does not move after a
withdrawal;
- the same leverage and exposure caps;
- the same daily loss limit option: a 3% daily loss limit on a 3% DLL
account, or none on a No DLL account;
- no consistency rule.
Sim Funded accounts use simulated capital and simulated execution, like every
funded account.
Elite Accounts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/elite-accounts
Elite plan sizes, prices, and daily loss limit options, evaluation and Sim Funded rules, leverage and exposure caps, reduced fees, funded allocation limits, and payouts.
Elite is a 1-Step evaluation with a static maximum loss limit, no consistency
− rule, and boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
+ rule, and boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. It comes in \$5K, \$10K,
\$25K, and \$50K account sizes, and every size has two options: 3% DLL,
which adds a 3% daily loss limit at a lower price, or No DLL, which has no
daily loss limit. Passing leads to a Sim Funded Elite account with the same
rules. Open the
challenge selector and choose the
− Elite Perps tab to buy.
+ Elite tab to buy.
Sizes and prices
| Detail | Elite \$5K | Elite \$10K | Elite \$25K | Elite \$50K |
|---|
| Starting balance | \$5,000 | \$10,000 | \$25,000 | \$50,000 |
These are list prices. Checkout shows the current price and any discount before
you pay. The 90/10 upgrade is optional and chosen at checkout; its rows show the
total price with the upgrade. The funded count row assumes every account is the
same size; see Funded allocation for mixed sizes.
There is no limit on the total Elite account size you can buy. You can buy any
− number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the per-order and rolling
− purchase limits
− that apply to every plan. Only funded Elite accounts are capped; see
+ number and mix of Elite sizes and options, within the
+ per-order account limits. Only funded Elite accounts are
+ capped; see
Funded allocation.
DLL options
Choose the option on the Elite pricing card or at checkout. The two options
are identical except for the daily loss limit:
| Option | Daily loss limit | Everything else |
|---|
3% DLL | 3% of starting balance, measured from the day's starting equity | Same Elite rules on this page
| No DLL | None | Same Elite rules on this page |
|---|
A 3% DLL account follows the same 3% rule as Select, Prime, and Signature:
- The floor is the day's starting equity, including open-position profit or
loss, minus 3% of the starting balance. On an Elite \$50K account the
allowance is \$1,500.
- Equity that reaches the floor breaches the account, fails it, and closes its
The plan adds no evaluation rules beyond this table. Platform-wide rules still
apply, including the trading policy, prohibited trading
activity, account inactivity, market exposure caps, and the platform terms.
How static drawdown works
The loss threshold is the starting balance minus the MLL, and it is fixed for
the life of the account. It does not trail profits, intraday highs, or
end-of-day highs.
For example, an Elite \$25K account has a \$1,250 MLL, so its loss threshold is
\$23,750. If equity grows to \$27,000, the threshold stays at \$23,750, leaving
\$3,250 of room. Equity that reaches \$23,750 breaches the account, fails it,
and closes its positions.
Leverage and exposure
− Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, gold, and oil. Each cap is a
− multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
+ Elite accounts use boosted leverage on indices, US30, gold, and oil. Each cap
+ is a multiple of the account's starting balance and applies to each account
separately, in both the evaluation and Sim Funded stages:
| Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure |
|---|
+
| Markets | Maximum leverage | Elite \$5K exposure | Elite \$10K exposure | Elite \$25K exposure | Elite \$50K exposure |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| US30 | 25x | \$125,000 | \$250,000 | \$625,000 | \$1,250,000 |
| Gold (XAU) | 20x | \$100,000 | \$200,000 | \$500,000 | \$1,000,000 |
- Exposure is the full value of your open positions in that group, long plus
− short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, and CL and BRENTOIL share the
− oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD market count toward the
− gold cap together with XAU.
+ short. NAS100 and SP500 share the indices cap, US30 has its own cap, and CL
+ and BRENTOIL share the oil cap. Positions still open on the retiring GOLD
+ market count toward the gold cap together with XAU.
- The account's total exposure across every market is capped at 40x its
starting balance.
- Every other market keeps its normal maximum leverage, shown on the
Market Exposure Caps page.
+ Choose Elite and your account size there to see the current group caps,
+ account exposure limit, and market caps for that size.
- Market exposure caps still apply on top of
the Elite caps. Each Elite account has its own market exposure cap: your
other Elite accounts of the same size do not share or use up its capacity.
The order ticket shows the limit for the selected market as **Account
Exposure Cap**, and the leverage selector goes up to the Elite maximum for that
market. An order that would exceed the leverage or an exposure cap is
rejected. Reducing or closing a position is always allowed.
Fees
Elite accounts pay reduced fees on four markets, in both the evaluation and
Sim Funded stages:
| Markets | Elite commission per fill | Elite daily swap rate | Standard commission | Standard daily swap rate |
|---|
- On a \$10,000 fill in NAS100, SP500, Gold, or WTI Oil, the Elite commission
is \$0.10 instead of \$0.50.
- A NAS100 or SP500 position worth \$10,000 pays \$1.00 in swap fees over 24
hourly charges, instead of \$1.50.
- Every other market, including other indices, other commodities such as
silver and Brent, crypto, forex, and stocks, uses the standard rates.
Read Commissions and Fees for how commissions
and hourly swap fees are calculated.
Accounts per order
One order can include up to 10 accounts at \$5K or \$10K, up to 4 at \$25K, or
− up to 2 at \$50K, all of the same size and option. The general
− purchase limits
− also apply.
+ up to 2 at \$50K, all of the same size and option. You can place as many
+ orders as you like.
Sim Funded
Passing the evaluation leads to a Sim Funded Elite account. It keeps the same
rules as the evaluation, without the profit target:
- the same starting balance;
- the same 5% static MLL and loss threshold, which does not move after a
withdrawal;
- the same leverage and exposure caps;
- the same daily loss limit option: a 3% daily loss limit on a 3% DLL
account, or none on a No DLL account;
- no consistency rule.
Sim Funded accounts use simulated capital and simulated execution, like every
funded account.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Copy Trading GuideArticle adds detailed rules for how copied orders execute, including leverage application, position reversals, margin adjustments, resizing logic, and cancellation scenarios.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide
Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.
Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.
Before you start
Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account or disable the group and
− let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually.
Create a group
Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).
Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.
Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.
Choose how much of the lead's balance-adjusted quantity each follower should
use.
Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.
How follower size is calculated
Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. 1× follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is 0.1× through 2×.
Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.
Trigger policy across updates
A copied order keeps the originating order's trigger policy, including when a
copy or an attached TP/SL is created after a platform update. Existing orders
keep their policy when you edit their price or size. A canceled order's new
replacement uses the current policy. See
Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Market order execution
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Independent follower checks
Every follower order is validated against that follower's own:
- available collateral and current positions;
- challenge and funded-account rules;
- market and position limits;
- allowed stage pairing and current account status.
A follower can reject or reduce a copied instruction without blocking the lead
or other followers. Follower accounts can end with different fills, positions,
and performance from the lead.
− After you submit an opening order or close a position from the lead account,
the Copy Results panel briefly reports whether each follower copied the
instruction. A follower result does not change whether the lead instruction
succeeds.
Stop or change a group
Disable a group before changing its lead or deleting it. When a lead passes,
fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically: resting follower orders are
canceled, follower positions are closed under the platform's terminal-close
− policy, and manual trading unlocks only after cleanup completes.
Stopped history remains visible until you remove it. See the
Copy Trading settings reference for control-by-control
details.
Inspect follower access through the API
API integrations can call GET /v1/accounts/{account_id}/trading-policy with a
read or trade credential to inspect copy_follower_locked before sending a
manual instruction. A locked follower rejects manual entries, reductions,
closes, and protective-order changes.
− Follower orders that copy trading canceled (because the lead order changed or
− ended, the group was disabled or changed, or the copy could no longer be
− applied) report cancel_reason copy in API order responses. Orders the
follower canceled themselves report user.
The account's copy_stop record exposes stopped_at, completed_at,
acknowledged_at, and reason. It remains available after its group is deleted,
so a reconnecting client can still explain why copying stopped. Unset timestamps
are null; the record itself is null when the account has no stop notice. The API
does not expose a lead account ID outside the credential's account access.
The policy also reports copy_scope_blocked when an enabled group led by the
selected account contains a member the credential cannot access. Group coverage
requires the same live or sandbox environment and access to every configured
− member. Member IDs outside the credential boundary are not returned. Stale
working copies from older configurations are checked separately for each
modification or cancellation.
This is an advisory snapshot. The trading engine checks the current lock again
when an instruction is placed or settled. See Account trading policy
for the other restrictions and refresh guidance.
After
Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide
Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.
Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.
Before you start
Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account or disable the group and
+ let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually. When an account starts
+ following, its open orders, including stop loss and take profit orders, are
+ canceled, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. Its positions stay open.
Create a group
Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).
Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.
Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.
Choose how much of the lead's balance-adjusted quantity each follower should
use.
Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.
How follower size is calculated
Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. 1× follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is 0.1× through 2×.
Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.
+ A copied order uses the lead's leverage unless it is above the follower's own
+ maximum for that market. In that case, the copy uses the follower's maximum
+ instead. If the follower already holds the market, the copy keeps that
+ position's margin mode (cross or isolated).
+ Reversing a lead position reverses each follower too. The follower's whole
+ position on that side closes, and a new position opens on the other side at
+ the follower's normal copy size.
+ If the follower's position changes before its copy fills, for example because
+ one of its take profit orders filled first, the copy is resized so the follower
+ still ends on the new side at that same size. This also applies if the follower
+ was flat or already held the new side when the lead reversed. An existing
+ position on the new side keeps its size plus the copied opening size.
+ Isolated margin
+ When you add or remove margin on an isolated lead position, each follower's
+ isolated position in the same market and direction is adjusted too. The
+ amount is scaled to the follower's position size, so every account carries
+ the same margin per unit and the liquidation prices stay in line. A follower
+ adds only what its free balance allows and removes only what it can release
+ safely. Follower accounts cannot adjust margin on their own while they follow
+ a lead.
Trigger policy across updates
A copied order keeps the originating order's trigger policy, including when a
copy or an attached TP/SL is created after a platform update. Existing orders
keep their policy when you edit their price or size. A canceled order's new
replacement uses the current policy. See
Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Market order execution
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Independent follower checks
+ If a copied reversal is resized because the follower's position changed,
+ its collateral requirement is checked again before execution. It can be
+ rejected if the follower can no longer afford the intended position. A copy
+ can be resized up to three times. If the position changes again before filling,
+ the copy is rejected instead of continuing to retry.
Every follower order is validated against that follower's own:
- available collateral and current positions;
- challenge and funded-account rules;
- market and position limits;
- allowed stage pairing and current account status.
A follower can reject or reduce a copied instruction without blocking the lead
or other followers. Follower accounts can end with different fills, positions,
and performance from the lead.
+ After you submit an opening order, close, or reverse a position from the lead account,
the Copy Results panel briefly reports whether each follower copied the
instruction. A follower result does not change whether the lead instruction
succeeds.
Stop or change a group
Disable a group before changing its lead or deleting it. When a lead passes,
fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically: resting follower orders are
canceled, follower positions are closed under the platform's terminal-close
+ policy, and manual trading unlocks only after cleanup completes. A copied order
+ still executing when the group stops is rejected with reason
+ copy_lead_stopped.
Stopped history remains visible until you remove it. See the
Copy Trading settings reference for control-by-control
details.
Inspect follower access through the API
API integrations can call GET /v1/accounts/{account_id}/trading-policy with a
read or trade credential to inspect copy_follower_locked before sending a
manual instruction. A locked follower rejects manual entries, reductions,
closes, and protective-order changes.
+ Follower orders that copy trading canceled (because the account started
+ following a lead, the lead order changed or ended, the group was disabled or
+ changed, or the copy could no longer be applied) report cancel_reason copy
+ in API order responses. Orders the
follower canceled themselves report user.
The account's copy_stop record exposes stopped_at, completed_at,
acknowledged_at, and reason. It remains available after its group is deleted,
so a reconnecting client can still explain why copying stopped. Unset timestamps
are null; the record itself is null when the account has no stop notice. The API
does not expose a lead account ID outside the credential's account access.
The policy also reports copy_scope_blocked when an enabled group led by the
selected account contains a member the credential cannot access. Group coverage
requires the same live or sandbox environment and access to every configured
+ member. This coverage also applies when setting isolated margin on a lead
+ position, because that adjustment reaches its followers. Member IDs outside
+ the credential boundary are not returned. Stale
working copies from older configurations are checked separately for each
modification or cancellation.
This is an advisory snapshot. The trading engine checks the current lock again
when an instruction is placed or settled. See Account trading policy
for the other restrictions and refresh guidance.
Copy Trading Guide
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/copy-trading-guide
Create a same-owner copy-trading group, choose a lead and followers, set risk multipliers, and understand independent follower checks.
Native copy trading coordinates orders across active challenge accounts owned
by the same MyFundedPerps user. Each group has one lead account and one or
more followers.
Before you start
Every account in the group must be active, unarchived, and yours. An account can
belong to only one enabled group. Evaluation accounts can follow either stage,
but a funded account cannot follow an evaluation lead.
Follower accounts are locked against manual trading while their group is
enabled. Manage the strategy from the lead account or disable the group and
− let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually.
+ let cleanup finish before trading a follower manually. When an account starts
+ following, its open orders, including stop loss and take profit orders, are
+ canceled, and its TWAP/VWAP schedules stop. Its positions stay open.
Create a group
Go to [Settings → Copy
Trading](https://myfundedperpetuals.com/settings?section=copy-trading).
Select the account whose eligible orders should be copied.
Choose active accounts that are not already part of another enabled group.
Choose how much of the lead's balance-adjusted quantity each follower should
use.
Confirm the group composition and save it before placing lead orders.
How follower size is calculated
Opening and increasing quantities are normalized by the lead and follower
starting balances, then adjusted by the follower multiplier. 1× follows the
lead's relative size; lower values reduce it and higher values increase it. The
available range is 0.1× through 2×.
Reductions preserve the fraction of the lead position being reduced. The
platform rounds copied quantity down to the market's size step rather than
rounding a follower into more risk.
+ A copied order uses the lead's leverage unless it is above the follower's own
+ maximum for that market. In that case, the copy uses the follower's maximum
+ instead. If the follower already holds the market, the copy keeps that
+ position's margin mode (cross or isolated).
+ Reversing a lead position reverses each follower too. The follower's whole
+ position on that side closes, and a new position opens on the other side at
+ the follower's normal copy size.
+ If the follower's position changes before its copy fills, for example because
+ one of its take profit orders filled first, the copy is resized so the follower
+ still ends on the new side at that same size. This also applies if the follower
+ was flat or already held the new side when the lead reversed. An existing
+ position on the new side keeps its size plus the copied opening size.
+ Isolated margin
+ When you add or remove margin on an isolated lead position, each follower's
+ isolated position in the same market and direction is adjusted too. The
+ amount is scaled to the follower's position size, so every account carries
+ the same margin per unit and the liquidation prices stay in line. A follower
+ adds only what its free balance allows and removes only what it can release
+ safely. Follower accounts cannot adjust margin on their own while they follow
+ a lead.
Trigger policy across updates
A copied order keeps the originating order's trigger policy, including when a
copy or an attached TP/SL is created after a platform update. Existing orders
keep their policy when you edit their price or size. A canceled order's new
replacement uses the current policy. See
Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Market order execution
Copied market orders wait for the lead market order to fill. If the lead
rejects or expires without filling, its pending market copies are canceled
without opening follower positions or charging trading fees.
Resting limit and trigger orders, including TP/SL exits, continue to execute
independently on each account. Their fills can occur in a different order.
Independent follower checks
+ If a copied reversal is resized because the follower's position changed,
+ its collateral requirement is checked again before execution. It can be
+ rejected if the follower can no longer afford the intended position. A copy
+ can be resized up to three times. If the position changes again before filling,
+ the copy is rejected instead of continuing to retry.
Every follower order is validated against that follower's own:
- available collateral and current positions;
- challenge and funded-account rules;
- market and position limits;
- allowed stage pairing and current account status.
A follower can reject or reduce a copied instruction without blocking the lead
or other followers. Follower accounts can end with different fills, positions,
and performance from the lead.
− After you submit an opening order or close a position from the lead account,
+ After you submit an opening order, close, or reverse a position from the lead account,
the Copy Results panel briefly reports whether each follower copied the
instruction. A follower result does not change whether the lead instruction
succeeds.
Stop or change a group
Disable a group before changing its lead or deleting it. When a lead passes,
fails, or is closed, the group stops automatically: resting follower orders are
canceled, follower positions are closed under the platform's terminal-close
− policy, and manual trading unlocks only after cleanup completes.
+ policy, and manual trading unlocks only after cleanup completes. A copied order
+ still executing when the group stops is rejected with reason
+ copy_lead_stopped.
Stopped history remains visible until you remove it. See the
Copy Trading settings reference for control-by-control
details.
Inspect follower access through the API
API integrations can call GET /v1/accounts/{account_id}/trading-policy with a
read or trade credential to inspect copy_follower_locked before sending a
manual instruction. A locked follower rejects manual entries, reductions,
closes, and protective-order changes.
− Follower orders that copy trading canceled (because the lead order changed or
− ended, the group was disabled or changed, or the copy could no longer be
− applied) report cancel_reason copy in API order responses. Orders the
+ Follower orders that copy trading canceled (because the account started
+ following a lead, the lead order changed or ended, the group was disabled or
+ changed, or the copy could no longer be applied) report cancel_reason copy
+ in API order responses. Orders the
follower canceled themselves report user.
The account's copy_stop record exposes stopped_at, completed_at,
acknowledged_at, and reason. It remains available after its group is deleted,
so a reconnecting client can still explain why copying stopped. Unset timestamps
are null; the record itself is null when the account has no stop notice. The API
does not expose a lead account ID outside the credential's account access.
The policy also reports copy_scope_blocked when an enabled group led by the
selected account contains a member the credential cannot access. Group coverage
requires the same live or sandbox environment and access to every configured
− member. Member IDs outside the credential boundary are not returned. Stale
+ member. This coverage also applies when setting isolated margin on a lead
+ position, because that adjustment reaches its followers. Member IDs outside
+ the credential boundary are not returned. Stale
working copies from older configurations are checked separately for each
modification or cancellation.
This is an advisory snapshot. The trading engine checks the current lock again
when an instruction is placed or settled. See Account trading policy
for the other restrictions and refresh guidance.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Challenges and RulesArticle adds information about market exposure caps, hourly swap fee timing, and stop loss order behavior for additional venues.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Challenges and Rules
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenges-and-rules
Understand evaluation stages, profit targets, loss and drawdown rules, account states, funded progression, and payout-specific requirements.
Every sold challenge is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature use
one profit target, a 3% daily loss limit, and static maximum drawdown. Elite
uses one profit target and static maximum drawdown, with a choice of a 3% daily
loss limit (3% DLL) or no daily loss limit (No DLL) when you buy, and has its
own leverage, exposure, allocation, and payout terms; see
− Elite Accounts. There is no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit. All percentages use starting balance, never current
equity.
Evaluation rules
| Plan | Profit target | Daily loss limit | Static maximum drawdown |
|---|
The profit target and loss rules use account equity, including
open-position profit or loss. On plans with a daily loss limit, daily loss is
measured from start-of-day equity at midnight America/New_York, including
entirely as store credit. See
Payouts for
their minimum request.
Daily loss reset time
On Select, Prime, Signature, and 3% DLL Elite accounts, the daily loss limit resets at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time
(America/New_York) every day. This is **04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight
Time (EDT) and 05:00 UTC during Eastern Standard Time (EST)**. The reset
follows New York's daylight saving changes, so it is not a fixed UTC time.
The new trading day's equity, including open-position profit or loss, becomes
the daily-loss reference. The dollar loss allowance remains a percentage of
starting balance. A daily reset does not reopen a failed account or reset the
maximum loss limit.
Static drawdown and the withdrawal lock
The initial MLL floor is starting balance minus the static drawdown allowance.
It does not follow intraday or end-of-day highs. On the first withdrawal from
a Select, Prime, or Signature funded account, the floor locks permanently to
starting balance. It never moves again, including after later withdrawals.
Before this lock, reaching a loss floor breaches the account. After the lock,
equity exactly at the MLL floor is allowed; falling below it breaches. The
daily-loss floor remains inclusive. The dashboard shows both loss floors.
A withdrawal never restores the original buffer.
Elite has no withdrawal lock. An Elite account's MLL floor stays at starting
balance minus 5% for the life of the account, including after withdrawals, and
reaching it breaches the account. See
Elite Accounts.
Loss-limit monitoring continues while the account is active, including after
trades settle or hourly swap fees are charged. A confirmed loss-limit breach
changes the account to Failed and stops further trading.
Through the API, a position closed by liquidation reports close_reason
liquidation, and a position closed because the account reached a final state
reports system. Resting exits canceled by a liquidation report
cancel_reason liquidation.
New Stop Loss orders follow the market's chart source: Last Price for Binance,
− Bybit and Hyperliquid. This does not change the price references used for
loss-limit or liquidation checks. Existing orders
keep their original trigger policy until canceled and replaced.
A detected Stop Loss crossing remains valid if the price moves back before
execution. The exit still needs a fresh execution price, so placing a stop does
not guarantee a fill before a loss-limit breach. See
Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Account states
Competition trading uses a separate market exposure allowance from your
purchased challenges. Matching competition accounts share a capped allowance
for each market, product, and size. Competition positions do not consume your
purchased-account allowance. See Asset Exposure Limits
for the calculation and rejection behavior.
After
Challenges and Rules
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenges-and-rules
Understand evaluation stages, profit targets, loss and drawdown rules, account states, funded progression, and payout-specific requirements.
Every sold challenge is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature use
one profit target, a 3% daily loss limit, and static maximum drawdown. Elite
uses one profit target and static maximum drawdown, with a choice of a 3% daily
loss limit (3% DLL) or no daily loss limit (No DLL) when you buy, and has its
own leverage, exposure, allocation, and payout terms; see
+ Elite Accounts. To see the market exposure caps and
+ maximum leverage for a specific product and account size, choose them on
+ Market Exposure Caps. There is
+ no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit. All percentages use starting balance, never current
equity.
Evaluation rules
| Plan | Profit target | Daily loss limit | Static maximum drawdown |
|---|
The profit target and loss rules use account equity, including
open-position profit or loss. On plans with a daily loss limit, daily loss is
measured from start-of-day equity at midnight America/New_York, including
entirely as store credit. See
Payouts for
their minimum request.
Daily loss reset time
On Select, Prime, Signature, and 3% DLL Elite accounts, the daily loss limit resets at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time
(America/New_York) every day. This is **04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight
Time (EDT) and 05:00 UTC during Eastern Standard Time (EST)**. The reset
follows New York's daylight saving changes, so it is not a fixed UTC time.
The new trading day's equity, including open-position profit or loss, becomes
the daily-loss reference. The dollar loss allowance remains a percentage of
starting balance. A daily reset does not reopen a failed account or reset the
maximum loss limit.
+ The hourly swap fee charged at midnight covers the hour before the reset, so it
+ counts toward the trading day that just ended. The new day's reference equity
+ is taken after that fee is charged.
Static drawdown and the withdrawal lock
The initial MLL floor is starting balance minus the static drawdown allowance.
It does not follow intraday or end-of-day highs. On the first withdrawal from
a Select, Prime, or Signature funded account, the floor locks permanently to
starting balance. It never moves again, including after later withdrawals.
Before this lock, reaching a loss floor breaches the account. After the lock,
equity exactly at the MLL floor is allowed; falling below it breaches. The
daily-loss floor remains inclusive. The dashboard shows both loss floors.
A withdrawal never restores the original buffer.
Elite has no withdrawal lock. An Elite account's MLL floor stays at starting
balance minus 5% for the life of the account, including after withdrawals, and
reaching it breaches the account. See
Elite Accounts.
Loss-limit monitoring continues while the account is active, including after
trades settle or hourly swap fees are charged. A confirmed loss-limit breach
changes the account to Failed and stops further trading.
Through the API, a position closed by liquidation reports close_reason
liquidation, and a position closed because the account reached a final state
reports system. Resting exits canceled by a liquidation report
cancel_reason liquidation.
New Stop Loss orders follow the market's chart source: Last Price for Binance,
+ Bybit and Hyperliquid, and the venue's mid price for Veranta and Ostium, which
+ publish no trades. This does not change the price references used for
loss-limit or liquidation checks. Existing orders
keep their original trigger policy until canceled and replaced.
A detected Stop Loss crossing remains valid if the price moves back before
execution. The exit still needs a fresh execution price, so placing a stop does
not guarantee a fill before a loss-limit breach. See
Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Account states
Competition trading uses a separate market exposure allowance from your
purchased challenges. Matching competition accounts share a capped allowance
for each market, product, and size. Competition positions do not consume your
purchased-account allowance. See Asset Exposure Limits
for the calculation and rejection behavior.
Challenges and Rules
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenges-and-rules
Understand evaluation stages, profit targets, loss and drawdown rules, account states, funded progression, and payout-specific requirements.
Every sold challenge is a 1-Step evaluation. Select, Prime, and Signature use
one profit target, a 3% daily loss limit, and static maximum drawdown. Elite
uses one profit target and static maximum drawdown, with a choice of a 3% daily
loss limit (3% DLL) or no daily loss limit (No DLL) when you buy, and has its
own leverage, exposure, allocation, and payout terms; see
− Elite Accounts. There is no minimum trading-day count
+ Elite Accounts. To see the market exposure caps and
+ maximum leverage for a specific product and account size, choose them on
+ Market Exposure Caps. There is
+ no minimum trading-day count
or evaluation time limit. All percentages use starting balance, never current
equity.
Evaluation rules
| Plan | Profit target | Daily loss limit | Static maximum drawdown |
|---|
The profit target and loss rules use account equity, including
open-position profit or loss. On plans with a daily loss limit, daily loss is
measured from start-of-day equity at midnight America/New_York, including
entirely as store credit. See
Payouts for
their minimum request.
Daily loss reset time
On Select, Prime, Signature, and 3% DLL Elite accounts, the daily loss limit resets at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time
(America/New_York) every day. This is **04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight
Time (EDT) and 05:00 UTC during Eastern Standard Time (EST)**. The reset
follows New York's daylight saving changes, so it is not a fixed UTC time.
The new trading day's equity, including open-position profit or loss, becomes
the daily-loss reference. The dollar loss allowance remains a percentage of
starting balance. A daily reset does not reopen a failed account or reset the
maximum loss limit.
+ The hourly swap fee charged at midnight covers the hour before the reset, so it
+ counts toward the trading day that just ended. The new day's reference equity
+ is taken after that fee is charged.
Static drawdown and the withdrawal lock
The initial MLL floor is starting balance minus the static drawdown allowance.
It does not follow intraday or end-of-day highs. On the first withdrawal from
a Select, Prime, or Signature funded account, the floor locks permanently to
starting balance. It never moves again, including after later withdrawals.
Before this lock, reaching a loss floor breaches the account. After the lock,
equity exactly at the MLL floor is allowed; falling below it breaches. The
daily-loss floor remains inclusive. The dashboard shows both loss floors.
A withdrawal never restores the original buffer.
Elite has no withdrawal lock. An Elite account's MLL floor stays at starting
balance minus 5% for the life of the account, including after withdrawals, and
reaching it breaches the account. See
Elite Accounts.
Loss-limit monitoring continues while the account is active, including after
trades settle or hourly swap fees are charged. A confirmed loss-limit breach
changes the account to Failed and stops further trading.
Through the API, a position closed by liquidation reports close_reason
liquidation, and a position closed because the account reached a final state
reports system. Resting exits canceled by a liquidation report
cancel_reason liquidation.
New Stop Loss orders follow the market's chart source: Last Price for Binance,
− Bybit and Hyperliquid. This does not change the price references used for
+ Bybit and Hyperliquid, and the venue's mid price for Veranta and Ostium, which
+ publish no trades. This does not change the price references used for
loss-limit or liquidation checks. Existing orders
keep their original trigger policy until canceled and replaced.
A detected Stop Loss crossing remains valid if the price moves back before
execution. The exit still needs a fresh execution price, so placing a stop does
not guarantee a fill before a loss-limit breach. See
Take Profit and Stop Loss orders.
Account states
Competition trading uses a separate market exposure allowance from your
purchased challenges. Matching competition accounts share a capped allowance
for each market, product, and size. Competition positions do not consume your
purchased-account allowance. See Asset Exposure Limits
for the calculation and rejection behavior.
PremierMyFundedPerps · PayoutsPayout requests opening date changed from future (September 11, 2026) to past tense, with removed details about cutoff application and disabled state handling.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Payouts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
− Payout requests open on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
− Time (04:00 UTC)**. This cutoff applies to all existing and newly funded
− accounts, including the first payout. Passing an evaluation before the cutoff
− does not allow an immediate withdrawal.
− Until then, the request action is disabled and the panel shows the opening
− time. The opening can be rescheduled, or requests can be paused. The panel
− checks availability when you open it, return to the tab, reconnect, and reach
− the displayed opening time. Every submission checks availability again.
− When requests are paused or availability cannot be verified, the form stays
− disabled. All normal payout requirements and the daily request allowance
− continue to apply after opening.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
After
Payouts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
+ Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
+ Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts.
+ Requests can be paused. The panel checks availability when you open it, return
+ to the tab, and reconnect, and every submission checks availability again.
+ When requests are paused or availability cannot be verified, the request
+ action is disabled. All normal payout requirements still apply.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
Payouts
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/challenge-lifecycle/payouts
Read funded payout terms, complete Rise onboarding, clear eligibility gates, submit a request, and understand its effect on the account.
Payouts are available from the
Payouts panel for an active
funded account. Select the intended account before reviewing or submitting a
request.
Payout request availability
− Payout requests open on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
− Time (04:00 UTC)**. This cutoff applies to all existing and newly funded
− accounts, including the first payout. Passing an evaluation before the cutoff
− does not allow an immediate withdrawal.
− Until then, the request action is disabled and the panel shows the opening
− time. The opening can be rescheduled, or requests can be paused. The panel
− checks availability when you open it, return to the tab, reconnect, and reach
− the displayed opening time. Every submission checks availability again.
− When requests are paused or availability cannot be verified, the form stays
− disabled. All normal payout requirements and the daily request allowance
− continue to apply after opening.
+ Payout requests opened on **September 11, 2026 at 12:00 a.m. Eastern Daylight
+ Time (04:00 UTC)** for all existing and newly funded accounts.
+ Requests can be paused. The panel checks availability when you open it, return
+ to the tab, and reconnect, and every submission checks availability again.
+ When requests are paused or availability cannot be verified, the request
+ action is disabled. All normal payout requirements still apply.
Daily payout window
Each funded account can submit one payout request per day. Elite accounts are
the exception: they have no daily limit, so you can request again as soon as
your previous request finishes. See Elite Accounts.
On every other plan, the allowance resets
at 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time (America/New_York), the same time
as the daily loss reset.
This is 04:00 UTC during Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) and **05:00 UTC during
Eastern Standard Time (EST)**.
The allowance follows calendar days, rather than a rolling 24-hour wait from
your previous request. The payout panel shows the next window in your local
time and in Eastern time. Two funded accounts held by the same trader each
PremierMyFundedPerps · Buying a ChallengePurchase limits changed from rolling 24/75/200-hour limits to no limits; added individual limit notice feature and renamed checkout result from "Payment Approved" to "Your Challenge Is Ready" with updated description.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
PERPS can give a larger discount on your first purchase. The homepage cards
and banner show that first-purchase discount until you have bought an account,
then the standard PERPS discount. A refunded purchase still uses up the first-purchase
discount. Affiliate codes share the same first-purchase discount: on your first
purchase, an affiliate code gives you whichever is larger, the first-purchase
discount or the affiliate's standard discount. A promotion that applies to the
− affiliate code uses its own discount instead.
Some other codes also give a larger discount on your first purchase and a
standard discount on every purchase after it. These codes count every purchase
− you have made, whichever code you used. Checkout shows the discount that applies
− to you before you pay. A failed or abandoned checkout does not use up the
first-purchase discount, but a completed purchase does, even if it is later
refunded. While one checkout with the first-purchase discount is still open,
other checkouts get the standard discount for up to 30 minutes.
Before email verification and profile setup, an affiliate-link visit shows the
selected code and the price before discounts. The code stays selected through
sign-in, and checkout validates its discount and eligibility afterward. Other
visits preview the current standing-code discount, including any selected
profit-split upgrade. The collapsed summary shows the same price as the expanded
summary. Use Back at the left of the checkout header, beside the logo,
to return to the challenge selector. This is a public price preview; enter the
code at payment and review the confirmed total.
Checkout shows the chosen plan and account size as the item in your order,
with its collector card, fee, and rules, beside the billing and payment form.
Use the Account Size control to move between the sizes the plan sells,
and the Challenge Type control to switch plans, without leaving checkout.
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked Coming Soon
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
− and total update with every change. On a phone the order folds into a bar at
− the top of the page; tap it to open or close the order details.
Pay particular attention to:
- the single evaluation profit target;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
- the daily payout window and gross minimum;
- funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
- challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.
Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.
Buy more than one account
When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.
3. Apply a checkout code
Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of PERPS and
any older referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in
even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code
before applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active
referral cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it.
Otherwise, checkout applies PERPS when that offer is enabled.
− You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Checkout Code.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see PERPS; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.
Use Add Code to replace the automatically applied discount with another
discount or affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.
When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
− under Checkout Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid.
Some promotions also apply automatically when you enter an eligible affiliate
code. Checkout then shows that promotion's discount, and any reward case it
includes, in place of the standard affiliate discount. The affiliate is still
credited for the purchase. Promotion limits still apply. Some promotions give a
larger discount on your first use and a smaller one on later uses; these stay
available on later purchases at the later-use discount, with any reward case,
as long as that discount is at least the standard affiliate discount. Once you
reach a promotion's limit otherwise, it is no longer offered and the standard
affiliate discount applies. When more than one
promotion matches, choose the one you want from the Choose your promotion
takes the place of any other discount or affiliate code on that order.
Partner links
Partner links use separate attribution. If you opened a valid partner link and
attribution cookies are permitted, purchases started within its seven-day window
are credited to that partner automatically. The most recent valid partner link
wins. This works with no checkout code or with a different affiliate or discount
code, and does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. See Partner Links
for consent, browser, and cookie-window details.
Review the final total after every code, add-on, or payment-method change.
Purchase limits
− Every customer can complete up to 30 challenge accounts in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in
− any rolling 7 days, and 200 in any rolling 30 days. Each individual challenge account counts, including every account in a multi-account checkout. The limits count every
− challenge plan, account size, and payment method together, and a purchase is
− accepted only if it stays within all three. Each window rolls from the time of
− a completed purchase rather than resetting at midnight, so you can buy again as
− earlier purchases age out. Failed or abandoned payments do not count.
− If you reach a limit, checkout shows a Purchase Limit Reached notice that
− shows your selected quantity, the quantity available now, and exactly how many accounts to remove. No payment is taken. If waiting can make the full quantity fit, the notice also shows when.
− Accounts under a stricter, individually applied purchase limit see that limit
− on the checkout page as well. The notice clears when the displayed wait ends;
− checkout checks your current limits again when you submit.
− An unfinished payment temporarily reserves a slot for each account in the order. You can resume a
− crypto checkout that already has a payment session, even if that reservation
− uses your last available slot. If a checkout expires before its payment session
− opens, start a new checkout.
4. Read the payment result
Checkout opens a fresh confirmation page after you submit payment. If your
session has ended, sign in again to return to the same order's payment status.
You do not need to submit another payment to view the result.
| Result | What to do |
|---|
− Payment Approved | The evaluation account, or every account in a multi-account order, has been added to the dashboard. Select it in the account switcher.
Payment Submitted | The payment is still processing. Keep the order number and wait for settlement. Do not start another payment for that order.
Payment Status Unavailable | Check the dashboard and Purchase History before attempting another payment. This prevents an unnecessary duplicate attempt when the result is uncertain.
The order also appears in
Purchase History
with its current paid, pending, failed, or refunded status.
5. Confirm the new account
Open the dashboard and choose the
new evaluation account in the account switcher. Confirm its plan, starting
balance, status, and rule card before trading.
Continue with Evaluation Progress.
After
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
+ If you enter a free account or case gift code at checkout and select
+ Add Code, checkout opens Redeem Code on the Rewards page and redeems it
+ for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout. Redeem older codes
+ without a prefix directly on Rewards. Gift codes do not discount an order.
PERPS can give a larger discount on your first purchase. The homepage cards
and banner show that first-purchase discount until you have bought an account,
then the standard PERPS discount. A refunded purchase still uses up the first-purchase
discount. Affiliate codes share the same first-purchase discount: on your first
purchase, an affiliate code gives you whichever is larger, the first-purchase
discount or the affiliate's standard discount. A promotion that applies to the
+ affiliate code uses its own discount instead, unless the first-purchase
+ discount is larger on your first purchase.
Some other codes also give a larger discount on your first purchase and a
standard discount on every purchase after it. These codes count every purchase
+ you have made, whichever code you used. When the homepage advertises one of
+ these codes, affiliate codes also match its first-purchase discount: your first
+ purchase with an affiliate code gets the largest of that discount, the PERPS
+ first-purchase discount, and the affiliate's standard discount. Checkout shows
+ the discount that applies to you before you pay. A failed or abandoned checkout does not use up the
first-purchase discount, but a completed purchase does, even if it is later
refunded. While one checkout with the first-purchase discount is still open,
other checkouts get the standard discount for up to 30 minutes.
Before email verification and profile setup, an affiliate-link visit shows the
selected code and the price before discounts. The code stays selected through
sign-in, and checkout validates its discount and eligibility afterward. Other
visits preview the current standing-code discount, including any selected
profit-split upgrade. The collapsed summary shows the same price as the expanded
summary. Use Back at the left of the checkout header, beside the logo,
to return to the challenge selector. This is a public price preview; enter the
code at payment and review the confirmed total.
Checkout shows the chosen plan and account size as the item in your order,
with its collector card, fee, and rules, beside the billing and payment form.
Use the Account Size control to move between the sizes the plan sells,
and the Challenge Type control to switch plans, without leaving checkout.
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked Coming Soon
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
+ and total update with every change. On a phone the whole order stays open above
+ the payment form: choose a plan from Choose a Challenge, pick an account
+ size, and open Trading Rules or Payouts and Perks to see the full rules.
+ Review Your Order shows the fee, the Discount or Affiliate Code field,
+ and the total.
Pay particular attention to:
- the single evaluation profit target;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
- the daily payout window and gross minimum;
- funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
- challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.
Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.
Buy more than one account
When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.
3. Apply a checkout code
Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of PERPS and
any older referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in
even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code
before applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active
referral cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it.
Otherwise, checkout applies PERPS when that offer is enabled.
+ You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Discount or Affiliate Code.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see PERPS; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.
Use Add Code to replace the automatically applied discount with another
discount or affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.
When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
+ under Discount or Affiliate Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid.
Some promotions also apply automatically when you enter an eligible affiliate
code. Checkout then shows that promotion's discount, and any reward case it
includes, in place of the standard affiliate discount. The affiliate is still
credited for the purchase. Promotion limits still apply. Some promotions give a
larger discount on your first use and a smaller one on later uses; these stay
available on later purchases at the later-use discount, with any reward case,
as long as that discount is at least the standard affiliate discount. Once you
reach a promotion's limit otherwise, it is no longer offered and the standard
affiliate discount applies. When more than one
promotion matches, choose the one you want from the Choose your promotion
takes the place of any other discount or affiliate code on that order.
Partner links
Partner links use separate attribution. If you opened a valid partner link and
attribution cookies are permitted, purchases started within its seven-day window
are credited to that partner automatically. The most recent valid partner link
wins. This works with no checkout code or with a different affiliate or discount
code, and does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. See Partner Links
for consent, browser, and cookie-window details.
Review the final total after every code, add-on, or payment-method change.
Purchase limits
+ There is no limit on how many challenge accounts you can buy. You can place as
+ many orders as you like across every plan, account size, and payment method.
+ Only the number of accounts in a single order is limited; see
+ Buy more than one account.
+ If an individual purchase limit applies to your account, checkout shows a
+ Purchase Limit Reached notice when an order would exceed it. The notice
+ shows your selected quantity, the quantity available now, and how many accounts
+ to remove. No payment is taken. If waiting can make the full quantity fit, the
+ notice also shows when, and checkout checks the limit again when you submit.
4. Read the payment result
Checkout opens a fresh confirmation page after you submit payment. If your
session has ended, sign in again to return to the same order's payment status.
You do not need to submit another payment to view the result.
| Result | What to do |
|---|
+ Your Challenge Is Ready | The evaluation account, or every account in a multi-account order, has been added to the dashboard. The page shows the account card and its rules. Select Start Trading to open the new account, or Go to Dashboard.
Payment Submitted | The payment is still processing. Keep the order number and wait for settlement. Do not start another payment for that order.
Payment Status Unavailable | Check the dashboard and Purchase History before attempting another payment. This prevents an unnecessary duplicate attempt when the result is uncertain.
The order also appears in
Purchase History
with its current paid, pending, failed, or refunded status.
5. Confirm the new account
Open the dashboard and choose the
new evaluation account in the account switcher. Confirm its plan, starting
balance, status, and rule card before trading.
Continue with Evaluation Progress.
The homepage shows whole-dollar prices. When PERPS is available, the cards
show the list price crossed out above the price with that code. A code selected through an affiliate @CODE link takes priority at checkout, followed by an active referral cookie when attribution consent permits it. Without either, checkout may automatically apply PERPS when the offer is enabled for you. Otherwise, enter a code and select Add Code. A valid code
discounts the list price once, including the 90/10 upgrade. There is no additional catalog discount. A percentage discount on a
whole-dollar total rounds down to the nearest whole dollar, so the discounted
price on a homepage card is the amount you pay and you never get less than
the stated percentage off.
The percentage comes from the current PERPS offer and can change with public
promotions. A different discount or affiliate code replaces PERPS; percentage discounts do
not stack. Available store credit is applied automatically after the discount.
A custom price that includes cents, or a discounted total under \$1, keeps
its exact cents, which checkout shows in full. The final order total is the
amount you will pay.
+ If you enter a free account or case gift code at checkout and select
+ Add Code, checkout opens Redeem Code on the Rewards page and redeems it
+ for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout. Redeem older codes
+ without a prefix directly on Rewards. Gift codes do not discount an order.
PERPS can give a larger discount on your first purchase. The homepage cards
and banner show that first-purchase discount until you have bought an account,
then the standard PERPS discount. A refunded purchase still uses up the first-purchase
discount. Affiliate codes share the same first-purchase discount: on your first
purchase, an affiliate code gives you whichever is larger, the first-purchase
discount or the affiliate's standard discount. A promotion that applies to the
− affiliate code uses its own discount instead.
+ affiliate code uses its own discount instead, unless the first-purchase
+ discount is larger on your first purchase.
Some other codes also give a larger discount on your first purchase and a
standard discount on every purchase after it. These codes count every purchase
− you have made, whichever code you used. Checkout shows the discount that applies
− to you before you pay. A failed or abandoned checkout does not use up the
+ you have made, whichever code you used. When the homepage advertises one of
+ these codes, affiliate codes also match its first-purchase discount: your first
+ purchase with an affiliate code gets the largest of that discount, the PERPS
+ first-purchase discount, and the affiliate's standard discount. Checkout shows
+ the discount that applies to you before you pay. A failed or abandoned checkout does not use up the
first-purchase discount, but a completed purchase does, even if it is later
refunded. While one checkout with the first-purchase discount is still open,
other checkouts get the standard discount for up to 30 minutes.
Before email verification and profile setup, an affiliate-link visit shows the
selected code and the price before discounts. The code stays selected through
sign-in, and checkout validates its discount and eligibility afterward. Other
visits preview the current standing-code discount, including any selected
profit-split upgrade. The collapsed summary shows the same price as the expanded
summary. Use Back at the left of the checkout header, beside the logo,
to return to the challenge selector. This is a public price preview; enter the
code at payment and review the confirmed total.
Checkout shows the chosen plan and account size as the item in your order,
with its collector card, fee, and rules, beside the billing and payment form.
Use the Account Size control to move between the sizes the plan sells,
and the Challenge Type control to switch plans, without leaving checkout.
Each size shows its fee before you select it. A cell marked Coming Soon
is an unavailable placeholder with no announced account size or price and
cannot be selected. Switching plans keeps your account size when the new plan
sells it and otherwise moves to that plan's recommended size. The fee, rules,
− and total update with every change. On a phone the order folds into a bar at
− the top of the page; tap it to open or close the order details.
+ and total update with every change. On a phone the whole order stays open above
+ the payment form: choose a plan from Choose a Challenge, pick an account
+ size, and open Trading Rules or Payouts and Perks to see the full rules.
+ Review Your Order shows the fee, the Discount or Affiliate Code field,
+ and the total.
Pay particular attention to:
- the single evaluation profit target;
- maximum daily loss and maximum drawdown;
- the daily payout window and gross minimum;
- funded payout terms and purchased profit split;
- challenge fee, discount, optional add-ons, and final total.
Plan values can change. The terms displayed for the selected order are more
reliable than an older screenshot or example. If pricing changes while your
checkout is open, the payment is stopped so you can review the refreshed prices
and confirm the order again.
Buy more than one account
When multi-account checkout is available for your account, a **Number of
the payment provider confirms cancellation or expiry. Once funds are arriving or
processing, cancellation may be unavailable: check the status or contact support
with your order number before sending anything else. Closing the payment window
alone does not cancel the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be paid again; start
a new purchase to use released credit for a different challenge.
3. Apply a checkout code
Opening a valid affiliate @CODE link selects that code ahead of PERPS and
any older referral cookie. The selection follows your navigation and sign-in
even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Checkout validates the code
before applying its discount. Without a code selected in the URL, an active
referral cookie supplies the default when attribution consent permits it.
Otherwise, checkout applies PERPS when that offer is enabled.
− You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Checkout Code.
+ You can replace or remove the applied discount beside Discount or Affiliate Code.
Account-size cards preview the list
price crossed out beside a discounted price and a code badge. Direct visitors
see PERPS; visitors with a valid affiliate-link selection or active referral
cookie see that affiliate's code and customer discount instead. The preview covers the base
account fee. It does not change your order total.
Use Add Code to replace the automatically applied discount with another
discount or affiliate code. Review the confirmed total.
PERPS resolves to the best eligible public promotion or its standing rate.
Only one discount or affiliate code applies. Available store credit is then
applied automatically. Promotion redemption limits still apply. If a code
is rejected, remove or correct it before payment. Removing the discount restores the price before that discount while keeping
automatic store credit; it does not apply PERPS automatically.
When the banner advertises a free case, it applies to qualifying purchases. The
banner drops the free case once that offer ends. Some promotional
codes include a reward case. When the applied code
unlocks one for your selected account size, the order summary shows the case
− under Checkout Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
+ under Discount or Affiliate Code with the tier you will receive, and how many cases
the order earns when it includes more than one account. The sealed cases are
delivered to My Rewards when the order is paid.
Some promotions also apply automatically when you enter an eligible affiliate
code. Checkout then shows that promotion's discount, and any reward case it
includes, in place of the standard affiliate discount. The affiliate is still
credited for the purchase. Promotion limits still apply. Some promotions give a
larger discount on your first use and a smaller one on later uses; these stay
available on later purchases at the later-use discount, with any reward case,
as long as that discount is at least the standard affiliate discount. Once you
reach a promotion's limit otherwise, it is no longer offered and the standard
affiliate discount applies. When more than one
promotion matches, choose the one you want from the Choose your promotion
takes the place of any other discount or affiliate code on that order.
Partner links
Partner links use separate attribution. If you opened a valid partner link and
attribution cookies are permitted, purchases started within its seven-day window
are credited to that partner automatically. The most recent valid partner link
wins. This works with no checkout code or with a different affiliate or discount
code, and does not apply a discount or change affiliate commissions.
Attribution is saved when checkout starts, so a later payment confirmation keeps
it even if the cookie expires. See Partner Links
for consent, browser, and cookie-window details.
Review the final total after every code, add-on, or payment-method change.
Purchase limits
− Every customer can complete up to 30 challenge accounts in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in
− any rolling 7 days, and 200 in any rolling 30 days. Each individual challenge account counts, including every account in a multi-account checkout. The limits count every
− challenge plan, account size, and payment method together, and a purchase is
− accepted only if it stays within all three. Each window rolls from the time of
− a completed purchase rather than resetting at midnight, so you can buy again as
− earlier purchases age out. Failed or abandoned payments do not count.
− If you reach a limit, checkout shows a Purchase Limit Reached notice that
− shows your selected quantity, the quantity available now, and exactly how many accounts to remove. No payment is taken. If waiting can make the full quantity fit, the notice also shows when.
− Accounts under a stricter, individually applied purchase limit see that limit
− on the checkout page as well. The notice clears when the displayed wait ends;
− checkout checks your current limits again when you submit.
− An unfinished payment temporarily reserves a slot for each account in the order. You can resume a
− crypto checkout that already has a payment session, even if that reservation
− uses your last available slot. If a checkout expires before its payment session
− opens, start a new checkout.
+ There is no limit on how many challenge accounts you can buy. You can place as
+ many orders as you like across every plan, account size, and payment method.
+ Only the number of accounts in a single order is limited; see
+ Buy more than one account.
+ If an individual purchase limit applies to your account, checkout shows a
+ Purchase Limit Reached notice when an order would exceed it. The notice
+ shows your selected quantity, the quantity available now, and how many accounts
+ to remove. No payment is taken. If waiting can make the full quantity fit, the
+ notice also shows when, and checkout checks the limit again when you submit.
4. Read the payment result
Checkout opens a fresh confirmation page after you submit payment. If your
session has ended, sign in again to return to the same order's payment status.
You do not need to submit another payment to view the result.
| Result | What to do |
|---|
− Payment Approved | The evaluation account, or every account in a multi-account order, has been added to the dashboard. Select it in the account switcher.
+ Your Challenge Is Ready | The evaluation account, or every account in a multi-account order, has been added to the dashboard. The page shows the account card and its rules. Select Start Trading to open the new account, or Go to Dashboard.
Payment Submitted | The payment is still processing. Keep the order number and wait for settlement. Do not start another payment for that order.
Payment Status Unavailable | Check the dashboard and Purchase History before attempting another payment. This prevents an unnecessary duplicate attempt when the result is uncertain.
The order also appears in
Purchase History
with its current paid, pending, failed, or refunded status.
5. Confirm the new account
Open the dashboard and choose the
new evaluation account in the account switcher. Confirm its plan, starting
balance, status, and rule card before trading.
Continue with Evaluation Progress.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Breaches and Next StepsAdded clarification that positions in markets outside trading hours close at the last quote before market close.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Competition products with no evaluation rules are not subject to the
inactivity rules.
Review the account before acting
1. Select the failed account in the account switcher.
2. Read the Pass Progress summary and final constraint.
3. Review the rule card, equity chart, closed trades, and order history around
the decision.
4. Compare the result with the terms attached to that exact account.
Open positions, marked equity, fills, fees, and funding can affect the account
state. Use the recorded account data rather than reconstructing the outcome
from one order alone.
When an account ends, any remaining open positions are closed automatically.
Closes use top-of-book
bounded between the reference and the maximum slippage cap (see
How market orders fill), and
it appears in the order history as a close-out with the account's taker fee
for that market's asset category, including the reduced
Elite rate on NAS100, SP500, Gold, and WTI Oil. The source
venue and venue ticker format do not change the fee rate.
Written breach explanation
The failure report stays expanded on the dashboard while the failed account
is selected. It cannot be dismissed.
A rule-triggered failure automatically queues a written explanation. When
available, it uses the balances, equity, loss anchors, rule settings, and open
After
Competition products with no evaluation rules are not subject to the
inactivity rules.
Review the account before acting
1. Select the failed account in the account switcher.
2. Read the Pass Progress summary and final constraint.
3. Review the rule card, equity chart, closed trades, and order history around
the decision.
4. Compare the result with the terms attached to that exact account.
Open positions, marked equity, fills, fees, and funding can affect the account
state. Use the recorded account data rather than reconstructing the outcome
from one order alone.
When an account ends, any remaining open positions are closed automatically.
+ A position in a market that is outside its
+ trading hours closes at the last quote
+ before the close.
Closes use top-of-book
bounded between the reference and the maximum slippage cap (see
How market orders fill), and
it appears in the order history as a close-out with the account's taker fee
for that market's asset category, including the reduced
Elite rate on NAS100, SP500, Gold, and WTI Oil. The source
venue and venue ticker format do not change the fee rate.
Written breach explanation
The failure report stays expanded on the dashboard while the failed account
is selected. It cannot be dismissed.
A rule-triggered failure automatically queues a written explanation. When
available, it uses the balances, equity, loss anchors, rule settings, and open
Competition products with no evaluation rules are not subject to the
inactivity rules.
Review the account before acting
1. Select the failed account in the account switcher.
2. Read the Pass Progress summary and final constraint.
3. Review the rule card, equity chart, closed trades, and order history around
the decision.
4. Compare the result with the terms attached to that exact account.
Open positions, marked equity, fills, fees, and funding can affect the account
state. Use the recorded account data rather than reconstructing the outcome
from one order alone.
When an account ends, any remaining open positions are closed automatically.
+ A position in a market that is outside its
+ trading hours closes at the last quote
+ before the close.
Closes use top-of-book
bounded between the reference and the maximum slippage cap (see
How market orders fill), and
it appears in the order history as a close-out with the account's taker fee
for that market's asset category, including the reduced
Elite rate on NAS100, SP500, Gold, and WTI Oil. The source
venue and venue ticker format do not change the fee rate.
Written breach explanation
The failure report stays expanded on the dashboard while the failed account
is selected. It cannot be dismissed.
A rule-triggered failure automatically queues a written explanation. When
available, it uses the balances, equity, loss anchors, rule settings, and open
PremierMyFundedPerps · Billing and RewardsOptional competition entry step added; expiration time for early points changed from midnight ET December 10 to 11:00 PM EST December 9; checkout code redemption process expanded.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
button to open that account on X, then follow it there. Your assigned
account stays the same if you reload the page or reconnect X.
4. Select Post on X to open a prepared post about the free Trade Case,
then publish it on X.
5. Claim Free Trade Case becomes available after both waits finish:
15 seconds after selecting Follow and 10 seconds after selecting
Post on X. Select it to add the Trade Case to My Rewards. If the claim
says to join the Discord server, join it with your connected Discord
account and claim again. If you already joined, or the claim says your
Discord membership could not be checked, wait a minute and claim again.
Reloading the page keeps your completed steps and waiting time. The post and
Discord steps are required for claims that have not yet been completed.
While the October Competition is open for
registration, claiming also enters you into it automatically when you meet its
entry requirements. If you cannot be entered automatically, the confirmation
invites you to join instead.
Each MyFundedPerps account can claim one free Trade Case from this offer, and
each X account can be used for only one claim. The case is in addition to any
other Trade Case you received. Open it from My Rewards; opening it requires
the same completed account details as other cases. The offer ends once all
follow tasks have been handed out. If you already received a follow task by
then, you can still finish it and claim your case.
Claims are checked for fraud. A claim made from a browser or device that cannot
be verified is not accepted; claim again from your usual browser. Accepted
approval. An explicitly declined claim remains unavailable, and its X account
cannot be used for another claim. Contact support if you think a claim was
declined by mistake.
Affiliate milestone rewards
Affiliate sales milestones can grant sealed cases automatically. Each milestone
reward is issued once and remains yours after refunds. Open the granted case
on the Rewards page. Some milestones also issue a separate Prime evaluation
account; that account is independent of the case result. See the
Affiliate Program guide for the milestone rewards.
Redeem a free account or case code
Open Redeem Code, sign in, and complete
onboarding if prompted. Paste the full code and select Redeem Code. You can
− also reach this page from Rewards.
Each code can be used once and does not expire. An account code adds a free
evaluation account with the challenge size and profit split configured when
the code was issued. Normal challenge rules and funding requirements apply.
A case code adds one sealed case to Rewards; redeeming the code does not open
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that was issued to them to share
with their audience.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
are spendable immediately; you do not need to claim them or wait for identity
verification or funding approval. Mock accounts, retired Beta evaluations, and Beta Blitz do not qualify.
Older evaluation passes do not forfeit a first-pass bonus you have never
received. Once credited, later passes do not earn another first-pass bonus. Look for
First Account Pass in Points History.
To open a case with points, move the carousel to that case and select
Open. Opening spends the displayed FP Points cost, records a Case
Redemption entry in Points History, and reveals the reward immediately. When
your balance is below the cost, the control reads how many points you are
missing and cannot be selected.
FP Points expiry
FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned. For purchase points, that is
− 90 days after the purchase. Points earned before launch day (September 11, 2026) expire at midnight Eastern time on December 10, 2026, 90 days after
− launch day. The schedule shows each
expiry in your local time. Each purchase, bonus, grant, or other award is
tracked separately, so different parts of your balance can expire on different
dates. Opening a case always spends the points that expire soonest first.
To see when your points expire, open
Rewards, select
FP Points, then select Expiry Schedule beside Points History. The
schedule lists each expiry date, how many days remain, where the points came
from, and the amount.
Unspent points are removed from your balance shortly after their expiry date,
and the removal appears as Expired Points in Points History. If your balance
is negative after a refund, new points first cover the negative amount, and
only the remainder starts its own 90 days.
After
button to open that account on X, then follow it there. Your assigned
account stays the same if you reload the page or reconnect X.
4. Select Post on X to open a prepared post about the free Trade Case,
then publish it on X.
5. Claim Free Trade Case becomes available after both waits finish:
15 seconds after selecting Follow and 10 seconds after selecting
Post on X. Select it to add the Trade Case to My Rewards. If the claim
says to join the Discord server, join it with your connected Discord
account and claim again. If you already joined, or the claim says your
Discord membership could not be checked, wait a minute and claim again.
Reloading the page keeps your completed steps and waiting time. The post and
Discord steps are required for claims that have not yet been completed.
+ While a competition is open for
+ registration, an optional step before the claim lets you enter it with one
+ click. Select Enter Competition; entering means you agree to the
+ competition's rules and the Terms of Use shown under the button. Once you are
+ in, the step shows You're entered. with a link to the competition page.
+ The step is optional: you can claim your free Trade Case without entering.
While the October Competition is open for
registration, claiming also enters you into it automatically when you meet its
entry requirements. If you cannot be entered automatically, the confirmation
invites you to join instead.
Each MyFundedPerps account can claim one free Trade Case from this offer, and
each X account can be used for only one claim. The case is in addition to any
other Trade Case you received. Open it from My Rewards; opening it requires
the same completed account details as other cases. The offer ends once all
follow tasks have been handed out. If you already received a follow task by
then, you can still finish it and claim your case.
Claims are checked for fraud. A claim made from a browser or device that cannot
be verified is not accepted; claim again from your usual browser. Accepted
approval. An explicitly declined claim remains unavailable, and its X account
cannot be used for another claim. Contact support if you think a claim was
declined by mistake.
Affiliate milestone rewards
Affiliate sales milestones can grant sealed cases automatically. Each milestone
reward is issued once and remains yours after refunds. Open the granted case
on the Rewards page. Some milestones also issue a separate Prime evaluation
account; that account is independent of the case result. See the
Affiliate Program guide for the milestone rewards.
Redeem a free account or case code
Open Redeem Code, sign in, and complete
onboarding if prompted. Paste the full code and select Redeem Code. You can
+ also reach this page from Rewards. If you enter a free account or case code in
+ the checkout code field and select Add Code, checkout takes you to Redeem
+ Code and redeems it for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout.
+ Redeem older codes without a prefix directly on Rewards.
Each code can be used once and does not expire. An account code adds a free
evaluation account with the challenge size and profit split configured when
the code was issued. Normal challenge rules and funding requirements apply.
A case code adds one sealed case to Rewards; redeeming the code does not open
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that was issued to them to share
with their audience.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
are spendable immediately; you do not need to claim them or wait for identity
verification or funding approval. Mock accounts, retired Beta evaluations, and Beta Blitz do not qualify.
Older evaluation passes do not forfeit a first-pass bonus you have never
received. Once credited, later passes do not earn another first-pass bonus. Look for
First Account Pass in Points History.
To open a case with points, move the carousel to that case and select
Open. Opening spends the displayed FP Points cost, records a Case
Redemption entry in Points History, and reveals the reward immediately. When
your balance is below the cost, the control reads how many points you are
missing and cannot be selected.
FP Points expiry
FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned. For purchase points, that is
+ 90 days after the purchase. Points earned before launch day (September 11, 2026) expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026
+ (04:00 UTC on December 10), exactly 90 days after launch day began. The schedule shows each
expiry in your local time. Each purchase, bonus, grant, or other award is
tracked separately, so different parts of your balance can expire on different
dates. Opening a case always spends the points that expire soonest first.
To see when your points expire, open
Rewards, select
FP Points, then select Expiry Schedule beside Points History. The
schedule lists each expiry date, how many days remain, where the points came
from, and the amount.
Unspent points are removed from your balance shortly after their expiry date,
and the removal appears as Expired Points in Points History. If your balance
is negative after a refund, new points first cover the negative amount, and
only the remainder starts its own 90 days.
button to open that account on X, then follow it there. Your assigned
account stays the same if you reload the page or reconnect X.
4. Select Post on X to open a prepared post about the free Trade Case,
then publish it on X.
5. Claim Free Trade Case becomes available after both waits finish:
15 seconds after selecting Follow and 10 seconds after selecting
Post on X. Select it to add the Trade Case to My Rewards. If the claim
says to join the Discord server, join it with your connected Discord
account and claim again. If you already joined, or the claim says your
Discord membership could not be checked, wait a minute and claim again.
Reloading the page keeps your completed steps and waiting time. The post and
Discord steps are required for claims that have not yet been completed.
+ While a competition is open for
+ registration, an optional step before the claim lets you enter it with one
+ click. Select Enter Competition; entering means you agree to the
+ competition's rules and the Terms of Use shown under the button. Once you are
+ in, the step shows You're entered. with a link to the competition page.
+ The step is optional: you can claim your free Trade Case without entering.
While the October Competition is open for
registration, claiming also enters you into it automatically when you meet its
entry requirements. If you cannot be entered automatically, the confirmation
invites you to join instead.
Each MyFundedPerps account can claim one free Trade Case from this offer, and
each X account can be used for only one claim. The case is in addition to any
other Trade Case you received. Open it from My Rewards; opening it requires
the same completed account details as other cases. The offer ends once all
follow tasks have been handed out. If you already received a follow task by
then, you can still finish it and claim your case.
Claims are checked for fraud. A claim made from a browser or device that cannot
be verified is not accepted; claim again from your usual browser. Accepted
approval. An explicitly declined claim remains unavailable, and its X account
cannot be used for another claim. Contact support if you think a claim was
declined by mistake.
Affiliate milestone rewards
Affiliate sales milestones can grant sealed cases automatically. Each milestone
reward is issued once and remains yours after refunds. Open the granted case
on the Rewards page. Some milestones also issue a separate Prime evaluation
account; that account is independent of the case result. See the
Affiliate Program guide for the milestone rewards.
Redeem a free account or case code
Open Redeem Code, sign in, and complete
onboarding if prompted. Paste the full code and select Redeem Code. You can
− also reach this page from Rewards.
+ also reach this page from Rewards. If you enter a free account or case code in
+ the checkout code field and select Add Code, checkout takes you to Redeem
+ Code and redeems it for you. Keep the gift prefix included when using checkout.
+ Redeem older codes without a prefix directly on Rewards.
Each code can be used once and does not expire. An account code adds a free
evaluation account with the challenge size and profit split configured when
the code was issued. Normal challenge rules and funding requirements apply.
A case code adds one sealed case to Rewards; redeeming the code does not open
the case or guarantee an account prize.
A code that is invalid or has reached its maximum uses cannot grant a reward.
An affiliate cannot redeem a giveaway code that was issued to them to share
with their audience.
Free code grants are not paid purchases and do not create an order in
Purchase History.
Password drops
A password drop is a giveaway that opens with a shared password instead of a
are spendable immediately; you do not need to claim them or wait for identity
verification or funding approval. Mock accounts, retired Beta evaluations, and Beta Blitz do not qualify.
Older evaluation passes do not forfeit a first-pass bonus you have never
received. Once credited, later passes do not earn another first-pass bonus. Look for
First Account Pass in Points History.
To open a case with points, move the carousel to that case and select
Open. Opening spends the displayed FP Points cost, records a Case
Redemption entry in Points History, and reveals the reward immediately. When
your balance is below the cost, the control reads how many points you are
missing and cannot be selected.
FP Points expiry
FP Points expire 90 days after they are earned. For purchase points, that is
− 90 days after the purchase. Points earned before launch day (September 11, 2026) expire at midnight Eastern time on December 10, 2026, 90 days after
− launch day. The schedule shows each
+ 90 days after the purchase. Points earned before launch day (September 11, 2026) expire at 11:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time on December 9, 2026
+ (04:00 UTC on December 10), exactly 90 days after launch day began. The schedule shows each
expiry in your local time. Each purchase, bonus, grant, or other award is
tracked separately, so different parts of your balance can expire on different
dates. Opening a case always spends the points that expire soonest first.
To see when your points expire, open
Rewards, select
FP Points, then select Expiry Schedule beside Points History. The
schedule lists each expiry date, how many days remain, where the points came
from, and the amount.
Unspent points are removed from your balance shortly after their expiry date,
and the removal appears as Expired Points in Points History. If your balance
is negative after a refund, new points first cover the negative amount, and
only the remainder starts its own 90 days.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Asset Exposure LimitsAdded explanation of product and account size selection, default view, exposure limits, market group caps, and bookmarking functionality.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Asset Exposure Limits
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/asset-exposure-limits
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand how per-user open notional limits affect your orders.
Find Current Market Limits
Open Market Exposure Caps
for the current list of tradable markets, their categories, maximum leverage,
and exposure caps. Search by market name or symbol to find an asset.
The table uses the platform's market configuration. Check that page for
current values when planning a trade; this guide explains the rules without
copying limits that can change.
How Exposure Is Calculated
A market exposure cap limits the combined open notional across your own
accounts of the same challenge product and account size trading that market.
Your matching accounts share one allowance. Other users have separate
allowances, even when their accounts have the same product and size.
Elite accounts are the exception: each Elite account has its own allowance for
each market, counting only that account's position. Your other Elite accounts
of the same size do not use up its capacity, and a reduction frees capacity
on that account immediately rather than at the next refresh. See
If you type a size larger than that remaining capacity, a note under Size
shows how far over the cap the order is, with Use Max to fill in the largest
size that fits. When no capacity is left, the note says the cap is reached.
Because the remaining capacity is an estimate, you can still submit the order;
the engine rejects it at fill if it would exceed the cap.
A position keeps the same exposure group while it remains open,
including when you add, reduce, or reverse its size. Retiring a challenge
product does not move existing exposure into another group. After you fully
close the position, a new position uses the current product grouping.
Read the Cap Table
- Max Leverage is the market's maximum leverage. Your account's rules can
impose a lower limit. Elite accounts have higher leverage and their own
− exposure caps on indices, gold, and oil; see
Elite Accounts.
- Exposure Cap is the configured per-user notional ceiling, not the
remaining capacity available for your next order.
− - A range with an asterisk means the cap varies by challenge product and
− account size. The range shows the smallest and largest configured caps;
each value applies separately to each user’s matching accounts, or to each
Elite account on its own.
- No Cap means market exposure enforcement is disabled. Available margin,
account rules, and other order checks still apply.
For your account's configured Maximum Position Size, sign in, select an
account, and hover over the market's leverage badge. Read the
Trading Guide for how that ceiling
differs from your remaining buying power.
After
Asset Exposure Limits
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/asset-exposure-limits
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand how per-user open notional limits affect your orders.
Find Current Market Limits
Open Market Exposure Caps
for the current list of tradable markets, their categories, maximum leverage,
and exposure caps. Search by market name or symbol to find an asset.
+ By default the page shows All Products: each market's cap range across
+ every challenge product and account size. Choose a Product and an
+ Account Size to see the exact caps for that account. The page also shows
+ that account's Account Exposure Limit when one applies, and for Elite, its
+ Market Group Caps on indices, US30, gold, and oil. The selection is saved in the
+ page link, so you can bookmark or share the caps for one product and size.
The table uses the platform's market configuration. Check that page for
current values when planning a trade; this guide explains the rules without
copying limits that can change.
How Exposure Is Calculated
A market exposure cap limits the combined open notional across your own
accounts of the same challenge product and account size trading that market.
Your matching accounts share one allowance. Other users have separate
allowances, even when their accounts have the same product and size.
Elite accounts are the exception: each Elite account has its own allowance for
each market, counting only that account's position. Your other Elite accounts
of the same size do not use up its capacity, and a reduction frees capacity
on that account immediately rather than at the next refresh. See
If you type a size larger than that remaining capacity, a note under Size
shows how far over the cap the order is, with Use Max to fill in the largest
size that fits. When no capacity is left, the note says the cap is reached.
Because the remaining capacity is an estimate, you can still submit the order;
the engine rejects it at fill if it would exceed the cap.
A position keeps the same exposure group while it remains open,
including when you add, reduce, or reverse its size. Retiring a challenge
product does not move existing exposure into another group. After you fully
close the position, a new position uses the current product grouping.
Read the Cap Table
- Max Leverage is the market's maximum leverage. Your account's rules can
impose a lower limit. Elite accounts have higher leverage and their own
+ exposure caps on indices, US30, gold, and oil; with Elite selected, the column
+ shows the Elite leverage. See
Elite Accounts.
- Exposure Cap is the configured per-user notional ceiling, not the
remaining capacity available for your next order.
+ - With All Products selected, a range with an asterisk means the cap
+ varies by challenge product and account size. The range shows the smallest and largest configured caps;
each value applies separately to each user’s matching accounts, or to each
Elite account on its own.
- No Cap means market exposure enforcement is disabled. Available margin,
account rules, and other order checks still apply.
For your account's configured Maximum Position Size, sign in, select an
account, and hover over the market's leverage badge. Read the
Trading Guide for how that ceiling
differs from your remaining buying power.
Asset Exposure Limits
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/asset-exposure-limits
Find current market leverage and exposure caps, and understand how per-user open notional limits affect your orders.
Find Current Market Limits
Open Market Exposure Caps
for the current list of tradable markets, their categories, maximum leverage,
and exposure caps. Search by market name or symbol to find an asset.
+ By default the page shows All Products: each market's cap range across
+ every challenge product and account size. Choose a Product and an
+ Account Size to see the exact caps for that account. The page also shows
+ that account's Account Exposure Limit when one applies, and for Elite, its
+ Market Group Caps on indices, US30, gold, and oil. The selection is saved in the
+ page link, so you can bookmark or share the caps for one product and size.
The table uses the platform's market configuration. Check that page for
current values when planning a trade; this guide explains the rules without
copying limits that can change.
How Exposure Is Calculated
A market exposure cap limits the combined open notional across your own
accounts of the same challenge product and account size trading that market.
Your matching accounts share one allowance. Other users have separate
allowances, even when their accounts have the same product and size.
Elite accounts are the exception: each Elite account has its own allowance for
each market, counting only that account's position. Your other Elite accounts
of the same size do not use up its capacity, and a reduction frees capacity
on that account immediately rather than at the next refresh. See
If you type a size larger than that remaining capacity, a note under Size
shows how far over the cap the order is, with Use Max to fill in the largest
size that fits. When no capacity is left, the note says the cap is reached.
Because the remaining capacity is an estimate, you can still submit the order;
the engine rejects it at fill if it would exceed the cap.
A position keeps the same exposure group while it remains open,
including when you add, reduce, or reverse its size. Retiring a challenge
product does not move existing exposure into another group. After you fully
close the position, a new position uses the current product grouping.
Read the Cap Table
- Max Leverage is the market's maximum leverage. Your account's rules can
impose a lower limit. Elite accounts have higher leverage and their own
− exposure caps on indices, gold, and oil; see
+ exposure caps on indices, US30, gold, and oil; with Elite selected, the column
+ shows the Elite leverage. See
Elite Accounts.
- Exposure Cap is the configured per-user notional ceiling, not the
remaining capacity available for your next order.
− - A range with an asterisk means the cap varies by challenge product and
− account size. The range shows the smallest and largest configured caps;
+ - With All Products selected, a range with an asterisk means the cap
+ varies by challenge product and account size. The range shows the smallest and largest configured caps;
each value applies separately to each user’s matching accounts, or to each
Elite account on its own.
- No Cap means market exposure enforcement is disabled. Available margin,
account rules, and other order checks still apply.
For your account's configured Maximum Position Size, sign in, select an
account, and hover over the market's leverage badge. Read the
Trading Guide for how that ceiling
differs from your remaining buying power.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Affiliate ProgramArticle added details about Boosted Commission banners during promotions, clarified first-purchase discount rules, homepage promo bar behavior, and new purchase email notifications.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Refunding the first purchase does not make a later purchase eligible again.
The base rate is the same for every affiliate; the team can assign different
standard and first-order rates to a specific affiliate.
- Commission promotions: the team may run a temporary commission
promotion for every affiliate. While it runs, a buyer's first paid purchase
on the platform earns 25%, and a later Elite purchase (any size or daily loss
limit option) earns 15%. Other later purchases keep your normal rate. A first
purchase of Elite earns 25%; the rates do not stack. First purchase here
means the buyer's first paid purchase with any code, affiliate, or plan, so
a returning customer never qualifies for 25% by switching to your code. If
your normal rate for a purchase is higher, you keep it. The rate is fixed
when the buyer pays, and ending a promotion does not change commission you
− already earned.
- Checkout credit: your affiliate code must be applied to the completed
purchase for a sale to count toward affiliate commission. Opening your
@CODE link carries the selected code through browsing and sign-in to
checkout, where it takes priority over PERPS or an older referral cookie.
This selection works even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Before
sign-in, checkout shows the selected code, and when your link set the
referral cookie it also previews the discounted price. The code's
eligibility and final price are still validated at payment. Buyers can
also enter your code manually. Replacing it with another code or removing
it earns you no commission. When the buyer came through your link and
checked out without any affiliate code, the purchase still appears in your
history as Did Not Use Code and counts toward your reward tiers. A
purchase that uses another affiliate's code belongs to that affiliate.
- First-purchase discount: a buyer's first purchase with your code gets
the larger of your standard customer discount and the platform's
− first-purchase discount, the same one PERPS gives. Later purchases use your
standard customer discount. A promotion on your code uses its own discount
− instead. The sale is credited to you either way.
- Referral link attribution: last click wins. Clicking your link sets a cookie for the
attribution window shown on your Share & Earn tab (30 days unless the
team set a different window for you). If the visitor clicks another
affiliate's link inside that window, the newer click replaces yours. There
is no grace period or lockout. Attribution cookies still require consent
where applicable. When there is no code selected in the URL, an active
referral cookie supplies the checkout default and account-size discount
− preview. A cookie alone does not establish commission eligibility: the code
must be applied to the completed purchase. Your link is saved with the
purchase when checkout starts, so a buyer who removes your code is still
recorded as Did Not Use Code. This also requires attribution cookies
where consent applies.
- Paid orders show their order amount and calculated commission as Pending.
The refund hold ends 48 hours after payment or when the purchased account
executes its first trade, whichever comes first. For an order with several
accounts, the first trade on any of them ends the hold, and commission is
calculated on the whole order total. Unfilled or cancelled orders do not end
the hold. Commission awaiting eligibility review remains pending
until the review is complete.
- Commission History shows a redacted Order ID beneath each product:
an ellipsis followed by the last eight characters. Use this reference to
distinguish purchases when discussing a commission with support. Each
order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
at, including any promotion rate.
- Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
be your own is removed.
- A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
approved commission stays yours.
After
Refunding the first purchase does not make a later purchase eligible again.
The base rate is the same for every affiliate; the team can assign different
standard and first-order rates to a specific affiliate.
- Commission promotions: the team may run a temporary commission
promotion for every affiliate. While it runs, a buyer's first paid purchase
on the platform earns 25%, and a later Elite purchase (any size or daily loss
limit option) earns 15%. Other later purchases keep your normal rate. A first
purchase of Elite earns 25%; the rates do not stack. First purchase here
means the buyer's first paid purchase with any code, affiliate, or plan, so
a returning customer never qualifies for 25% by switching to your code. If
your normal rate for a purchase is higher, you keep it. The rate is fixed
when the buyer pays, and ending a promotion does not change commission you
+ already earned. While a promotion runs, a Boosted Commission banner at
+ the top of the Affiliates page shows both promotion rates; the banner
+ disappears when the promotion ends.
- Checkout credit: your affiliate code must be applied to the completed
purchase for a sale to count toward affiliate commission. Opening your
@CODE link carries the selected code through browsing and sign-in to
checkout, where it takes priority over PERPS or an older referral cookie.
This selection works even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Before
sign-in, checkout shows the selected code, and when your link set the
referral cookie it also previews the discounted price. The code's
eligibility and final price are still validated at payment. Buyers can
also enter your code manually. Replacing it with another code or removing
it earns you no commission. When the buyer came through your link and
checked out without any affiliate code, the purchase still appears in your
history as Did Not Use Code and counts toward your reward tiers. A
purchase that uses another affiliate's code belongs to that affiliate.
- First-purchase discount: a buyer's first purchase with your code gets
the larger of your standard customer discount and the platform's
+ first-purchase discount: the larger of the one PERPS gives and the one on
+ the code the homepage advertises, when it has one. Later purchases use your
standard customer discount. A promotion on your code uses its own discount
+ instead, except that a buyer's first purchase still gets the first-purchase
+ discount when it is larger. The sale is credited to you either way.
- Referral link attribution: last click wins. Clicking your link sets a cookie for the
attribution window shown on your Share & Earn tab (30 days unless the
team set a different window for you). If the visitor clicks another
affiliate's link inside that window, the newer click replaces yours. There
is no grace period or lockout. Attribution cookies still require consent
where applicable. When there is no code selected in the URL, an active
referral cookie supplies the checkout default and account-size discount
+ preview. While your code is selected or your referral cookie is active, the
+ homepage promo bar shows your code instead of the site-wide code. A cookie alone does not establish commission eligibility: the code
must be applied to the completed purchase. Your link is saved with the
purchase when checkout starts, so a buyer who removes your code is still
recorded as Did Not Use Code. This also requires attribution cookies
where consent applies.
- Paid orders show their order amount and calculated commission as Pending.
The refund hold ends 48 hours after payment or when the purchased account
executes its first trade, whichever comes first. For an order with several
accounts, the first trade on any of them ends the hold, and commission is
calculated on the whole order total. Unfilled or cancelled orders do not end
the hold. Commission awaiting eligibility review remains pending
until the review is complete.
+ - Purchase emails: when a purchase made with your code is credited to
+ you, we email the address on your account with the commission amount, the
+ code used, and a partially hidden email of the buyer. Each purchase sends
+ one email while notifications are enabled, including repeat purchases by
+ the same buyer. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their
+ commission is corrected or approved. For new purchases, commission held
+ for eligibility review is emailed once it is approved, and failed or
+ abandoned checkouts send nothing. "Earned" means the commission is recorded
+ on your affiliate balance, not that it has been paid out. Turn these emails
+ off or back on under
+ Notification settings.
- Commission History shows a redacted Order ID beneath each product:
an ellipsis followed by the last eight characters. Use this reference to
distinguish purchases when discussing a commission with support. Each
order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
at, including any promotion rate.
- Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
be your own is removed.
- A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
approved commission stays yours.
Refunding the first purchase does not make a later purchase eligible again.
The base rate is the same for every affiliate; the team can assign different
standard and first-order rates to a specific affiliate.
- Commission promotions: the team may run a temporary commission
promotion for every affiliate. While it runs, a buyer's first paid purchase
on the platform earns 25%, and a later Elite purchase (any size or daily loss
limit option) earns 15%. Other later purchases keep your normal rate. A first
purchase of Elite earns 25%; the rates do not stack. First purchase here
means the buyer's first paid purchase with any code, affiliate, or plan, so
a returning customer never qualifies for 25% by switching to your code. If
your normal rate for a purchase is higher, you keep it. The rate is fixed
when the buyer pays, and ending a promotion does not change commission you
− already earned.
+ already earned. While a promotion runs, a Boosted Commission banner at
+ the top of the Affiliates page shows both promotion rates; the banner
+ disappears when the promotion ends.
- Checkout credit: your affiliate code must be applied to the completed
purchase for a sale to count toward affiliate commission. Opening your
@CODE link carries the selected code through browsing and sign-in to
checkout, where it takes priority over PERPS or an older referral cookie.
This selection works even when attribution cookies are unavailable. Before
sign-in, checkout shows the selected code, and when your link set the
referral cookie it also previews the discounted price. The code's
eligibility and final price are still validated at payment. Buyers can
also enter your code manually. Replacing it with another code or removing
it earns you no commission. When the buyer came through your link and
checked out without any affiliate code, the purchase still appears in your
history as Did Not Use Code and counts toward your reward tiers. A
purchase that uses another affiliate's code belongs to that affiliate.
- First-purchase discount: a buyer's first purchase with your code gets
the larger of your standard customer discount and the platform's
− first-purchase discount, the same one PERPS gives. Later purchases use your
+ first-purchase discount: the larger of the one PERPS gives and the one on
+ the code the homepage advertises, when it has one. Later purchases use your
standard customer discount. A promotion on your code uses its own discount
− instead. The sale is credited to you either way.
+ instead, except that a buyer's first purchase still gets the first-purchase
+ discount when it is larger. The sale is credited to you either way.
- Referral link attribution: last click wins. Clicking your link sets a cookie for the
attribution window shown on your Share & Earn tab (30 days unless the
team set a different window for you). If the visitor clicks another
affiliate's link inside that window, the newer click replaces yours. There
is no grace period or lockout. Attribution cookies still require consent
where applicable. When there is no code selected in the URL, an active
referral cookie supplies the checkout default and account-size discount
− preview. A cookie alone does not establish commission eligibility: the code
+ preview. While your code is selected or your referral cookie is active, the
+ homepage promo bar shows your code instead of the site-wide code. A cookie alone does not establish commission eligibility: the code
must be applied to the completed purchase. Your link is saved with the
purchase when checkout starts, so a buyer who removes your code is still
recorded as Did Not Use Code. This also requires attribution cookies
where consent applies.
- Paid orders show their order amount and calculated commission as Pending.
The refund hold ends 48 hours after payment or when the purchased account
executes its first trade, whichever comes first. For an order with several
accounts, the first trade on any of them ends the hold, and commission is
calculated on the whole order total. Unfilled or cancelled orders do not end
the hold. Commission awaiting eligibility review remains pending
until the review is complete.
+ - Purchase emails: when a purchase made with your code is credited to
+ you, we email the address on your account with the commission amount, the
+ code used, and a partially hidden email of the buyer. Each purchase sends
+ one email while notifications are enabled, including repeat purchases by
+ the same buyer. Historical purchases do not generate emails when their
+ commission is corrected or approved. For new purchases, commission held
+ for eligibility review is emailed once it is approved, and failed or
+ abandoned checkouts send nothing. "Earned" means the commission is recorded
+ on your affiliate balance, not that it has been paid out. Turn these emails
+ off or back on under
+ Notification settings.
- Commission History shows a redacted Order ID beneath each product:
an ellipsis followed by the last eight characters. Use this reference to
distinguish purchases when discussing a commission with support. Each
order with a calculated commission also shows the rate it was calculated
at, including any promotion rate.
- Commission is approved when the refund hold ends, even if you have not
verified your identity yet. When you complete identity verification, earlier
approved commission is checked again, and commission on a purchase found to
be your own is removed.
- A refund or chargeback during the refund hold removes the order's
commission. A refund or chargeback after the hold ends does not: the
approved commission stays yours.
PremierMyFundedPerps · Command-Line InterfaceMyFundedPerps changed CLI authentication from API key creation to browser-based sessions, with manual mode and API key options available.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
| irm https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/install.ps1 | iex |
|---|
The installer places fperp.exe in %LOCALAPPDATA%\Programs\fperp and adds
that directory to your user PATH (new terminals pick it up automatically).
Only x64 Windows builds are published.
Verifying a download
Every release ships a SHA256SUMS file and an Ed25519 signature
(SHA256SUMS.sig) alongside its artifacts at
https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/vX.Y.Z/. The installers verify the
checksum of what they download, and fperp upgrade additionally verifies the
signature against a public key embedded in the binary, so a tampered release
is never installed.
Authenticate
− Create an API key in
− API Key Settings,
− then run:
bash theme={null}
fperp login
− The key is stored in your operating system's credential store (macOS
Keychain, Windows Credential Manager, or the Linux Secret Service). Where no
− credential store is available, it falls back to a 0600 config file; see
fperp login --help for the --store options. FPERP_API_KEY and
− --api-key override the stored key for one-off use.
Stay up to date
bash theme={null}
fperp upgrade
fperp upgrade downloads the latest release, verifies the signed checksums,
and replaces the binary in place. Use fperp upgrade --check to see whether a
newer version exists without installing it, and
fperp upgrade --version vX.Y.Z to install a specific release.
The CLI also checks for new releases in the background at most once per day
and prints a one-line notice on stderr when one exists. It never installs
anything on its own. To disable the check entirely, set
FPERP_NO_UPDATE_CHECK=1; the check is also skipped automatically when the
CI environment variable is set.
Uninstall
− Run fperp logout first so no API key stays behind in your OS credential
store, then remove the binary (which fperp shows where it is) and delete the
~/.config/fperp directory.
After
| irm https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/install.ps1 | iex |
|---|
The installer places fperp.exe in %LOCALAPPDATA%\Programs\fperp and adds
that directory to your user PATH (new terminals pick it up automatically).
Only x64 Windows builds are published.
Verifying a download
Every release ships a SHA256SUMS file and an Ed25519 signature
(SHA256SUMS.sig) alongside its artifacts at
https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/vX.Y.Z/. The installers verify the
checksum of what they download, and fperp upgrade additionally verifies the
signature against a public key embedded in the binary, so a tampered release
is never installed.
Authenticate
bash theme={null}
fperp login
+ fperp login opens your browser to approve a new CLI session. After you
+ approve it, the CLI prints the session's expiry date and stores the
+ credential. The session expires on its own; run fperp login again to renew
+ it. Run fperp login status to see the current session.
+ On a remote or headless machine (for example over SSH), run
+ fperp login --manual. The CLI prints a sign-in link instead of waiting for
+ a browser on the same machine; open it anywhere, approve, and paste the code
+ the approval page shows.
+ To use a long-lived API key instead, create one in
+ API Key Settings
+ and run fperp login --with-api-key, which reads the key from stdin or a
+ prompt that does not echo it. fperp login --api-key also works, but
+ leaves the key in your shell history.
+ Credentials are stored in your operating system's credential store (macOS
Keychain, Windows Credential Manager, or the Linux Secret Service). Where no
+ credential store is available, they fall back to a 0600 config file; see
fperp login --help for the --store options. FPERP_API_KEY and
+ --api-key on any other command override the stored credential for one-off
+ use.
+ fperp logout revokes a browser-approved session and removes the stored
+ credential.
Stay up to date
bash theme={null}
fperp upgrade
fperp upgrade downloads the latest release, verifies the signed checksums,
and replaces the binary in place. Use fperp upgrade --check to see whether a
newer version exists without installing it, and
fperp upgrade --version vX.Y.Z to install a specific release.
The CLI also checks for new releases in the background at most once per day
and prints a one-line notice on stderr when one exists. It never installs
anything on its own. To disable the check entirely, set
FPERP_NO_UPDATE_CHECK=1; the check is also skipped automatically when the
CI environment variable is set.
Uninstall
+ Run fperp logout first so no credential stays behind in your OS credential
store, then remove the binary (which fperp shows where it is) and delete the
~/.config/fperp directory.
| irm https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/install.ps1 | iex |
|---|
The installer places fperp.exe in %LOCALAPPDATA%\Programs\fperp and adds
that directory to your user PATH (new terminals pick it up automatically).
Only x64 Windows builds are published.
Verifying a download
Every release ships a SHA256SUMS file and an Ed25519 signature
(SHA256SUMS.sig) alongside its artifacts at
https://cli.myfundedperpetuals.com/vX.Y.Z/. The installers verify the
checksum of what they download, and fperp upgrade additionally verifies the
signature against a public key embedded in the binary, so a tampered release
is never installed.
Authenticate
− Create an API key in
− API Key Settings,
− then run:
bash theme={null}
fperp login
− The key is stored in your operating system's credential store (macOS
+ fperp login opens your browser to approve a new CLI session. After you
+ approve it, the CLI prints the session's expiry date and stores the
+ credential. The session expires on its own; run fperp login again to renew
+ it. Run fperp login status to see the current session.
+ On a remote or headless machine (for example over SSH), run
+ fperp login --manual. The CLI prints a sign-in link instead of waiting for
+ a browser on the same machine; open it anywhere, approve, and paste the code
+ the approval page shows.
+ To use a long-lived API key instead, create one in
+ API Key Settings
+ and run fperp login --with-api-key, which reads the key from stdin or a
+ prompt that does not echo it. fperp login --api-key also works, but
+ leaves the key in your shell history.
+ Credentials are stored in your operating system's credential store (macOS
Keychain, Windows Credential Manager, or the Linux Secret Service). Where no
− credential store is available, it falls back to a 0600 config file; see
+ credential store is available, they fall back to a 0600 config file; see
fperp login --help for the --store options. FPERP_API_KEY and
− --api-key override the stored key for one-off use.
+ --api-key on any other command override the stored credential for one-off
+ use.
+ fperp logout revokes a browser-approved session and removes the stored
+ credential.
Stay up to date
bash theme={null}
fperp upgrade
fperp upgrade downloads the latest release, verifies the signed checksums,
and replaces the binary in place. Use fperp upgrade --check to see whether a
newer version exists without installing it, and
fperp upgrade --version vX.Y.Z to install a specific release.
The CLI also checks for new releases in the background at most once per day
and prints a one-line notice on stderr when one exists. It never installs
anything on its own. To disable the check entirely, set
FPERP_NO_UPDATE_CHECK=1; the check is also skipped automatically when the
CI environment variable is set.
Uninstall
− Run fperp logout first so no API key stays behind in your OS credential
+ Run fperp logout first so no credential stays behind in your OS credential
store, then remove the binary (which fperp shows where it is) and delete the
~/.config/fperp directory.
PremierMyFundedPerps · AuthenticationRestricted-countries endpoint changed from requiring a key to being public.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
when they attempt a trading request.
Copy trading follows the same account boundary. A lead order requires access to
its lead and every configured follower in the same environment. A key limited
to the lead account cannot place the lead trade while that copy group is
enabled. The request returns 404 with account_not_found before any order is
created; followers are never silently omitted. Use a key covering the complete
group or manage the trade on the website.
Modifications, cancellations, and protective-exit changes also require access
to every copied account they would affect. This includes outstanding copied
orders from a group that has since been disabled. A live key never grants
access to a sandbox follower, even when the website configuration includes it.
Keys created before scoped access was introduced retain read and trading access
− to every owned account until they are revoked. The API information and
− tradable-market catalog endpoints are public; account state, quotes, positions,
− and orders require a key.
Environments
Every key belongs to one environment, named by its prefix and served on its
own hostname:
| Environment | Key prefix | Base URL | Reaches |
|---|
A key presented on the other environment's host returns 401 with a message
naming the correct host. Test keys and sandbox accounts are covered in
Sandbox and test keys.
CLI sessions
The fperp command-line tool can sign in without a manually created API key.
Running fperp login opens your browser to an approval page; approving mints
After
when they attempt a trading request.
Copy trading follows the same account boundary. A lead order requires access to
its lead and every configured follower in the same environment. A key limited
to the lead account cannot place the lead trade while that copy group is
enabled. The request returns 404 with account_not_found before any order is
created; followers are never silently omitted. Use a key covering the complete
group or manage the trade on the website.
Modifications, cancellations, and protective-exit changes also require access
to every copied account they would affect. This includes outstanding copied
orders from a group that has since been disabled. A live key never grants
access to a sandbox follower, even when the website configuration includes it.
Keys created before scoped access was introduced retain read and trading access
+ to every owned account until they are revoked. The API information,
+ tradable-market catalog, and restricted-countries endpoints are public; account
+ state, quotes, positions, and orders require a key.
Environments
Every key belongs to one environment, named by its prefix and served on its
own hostname:
| Environment | Key prefix | Base URL | Reaches |
|---|
A key presented on the other environment's host returns 401 with a message
naming the correct host. Test keys and sandbox accounts are covered in
Sandbox and test keys.
CLI sessions
The fperp command-line tool can sign in without a manually created API key.
Running fperp login opens your browser to an approval page; approving mints
when they attempt a trading request.
Copy trading follows the same account boundary. A lead order requires access to
its lead and every configured follower in the same environment. A key limited
to the lead account cannot place the lead trade while that copy group is
enabled. The request returns 404 with account_not_found before any order is
created; followers are never silently omitted. Use a key covering the complete
group or manage the trade on the website.
Modifications, cancellations, and protective-exit changes also require access
to every copied account they would affect. This includes outstanding copied
orders from a group that has since been disabled. A live key never grants
access to a sandbox follower, even when the website configuration includes it.
Keys created before scoped access was introduced retain read and trading access
− to every owned account until they are revoked. The API information and
− tradable-market catalog endpoints are public; account state, quotes, positions,
− and orders require a key.
+ to every owned account until they are revoked. The API information,
+ tradable-market catalog, and restricted-countries endpoints are public; account
+ state, quotes, positions, and orders require a key.
Environments
Every key belongs to one environment, named by its prefix and served on its
own hostname:
| Environment | Key prefix | Base URL | Reaches |
|---|
A key presented on the other environment's host returns 401 with a message
naming the correct host. Test keys and sandbox accounts are covered in
Sandbox and test keys.
CLI sessions
The fperp command-line tool can sign in without a manually created API key.
Running fperp login opens your browser to an approval page; approving mints
PremierMyFundedPerps · Set the position's extra isolated marginIsolated margin reductions on copy-trading leads now automatically apply scaled changes to each follower's matching position.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Set the position's extra isolated margin
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/positions/set-the-positions-extra-isolated-margin
/openapi.yaml put /v1/positions/{position_id}/isolated-margin
− Sets a desired total rather than applying a delta, making an identical retry safe. Reductions use a fresh authoritative book and reject when the new liquidation risk would be unsafe.
After
Set the position's extra isolated margin
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/positions/set-the-positions-extra-isolated-margin
/openapi.yaml put /v1/positions/{position_id}/isolated-margin
+ Sets a desired total rather than applying a delta, making an identical retry safe. Reductions use a fresh authoritative book and reject when the new liquidation risk would be unsafe. On a copy-trading lead, the change is also applied to each follower's matching isolated position, scaled to its size; follower accounts cannot call this endpoint.
Set the position's extra isolated margin
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/api-reference/positions/set-the-positions-extra-isolated-margin
/openapi.yaml put /v1/positions/{position_id}/isolated-margin
− Sets a desired total rather than applying a delta, making an identical retry safe. Reductions use a fresh authoritative book and reject when the new liquidation risk would be unsafe.
+ Sets a desired total rather than applying a delta, making an identical retry safe. Reductions use a fresh authoritative book and reject when the new liquidation risk would be unsafe. On a copy-trading lead, the change is also applied to each follower's matching isolated position, scaled to its size; follower accounts cannot call this endpoint.
PremierMyFundedPerps · API capabilitiesCopy trading and trading policy permissions added; copy trading configuration inspection moved to API with access filtering clarified.Oct 13
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Account selection | List non-archived accounts accessible to the credential and read an account's risk snapshot.
Market discovery | List execution markets, inspect a market's availability, and request a current quote with an optional size estimate.
Standard orders | Market, limit, chase, stop-market, stop-limit, take-market, take-limit, take-profit, and external conditional orders.
| Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC. |
|---|
Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits.
Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders.
Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits.
Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total.
Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents.
Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation.
Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage.
Account events | A WebSocket stream of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts.
See Trading with the API for behavior and examples and the
REST reference for request and response fields.
Features that require the website
The public REST contract has no endpoints for these website capabilities:
- Signup and onboarding, challenge purchases, identity verification, agreements,
payout requests, and billing or purchase-history management.
- API-key creation and management or sandbox-account creation and reset.
- Saved trading preferences, watchlists, and notifications.
- Journal notes and tags, performance dashboards, and account equity-history charts.
Existing copy-trading configurations still apply when an API request trades a
− lead account. Configure and inspect those groups on the website before running
− an automated strategy. Followers remain subject to the same manual-trading
− restrictions as in the terminal.
Browser-internal connections are not an API-key subscription contract.
REST reads return snapshots; for pushed changes on your accounts, use the
account stream instead of polling. Use bounded
reconciliation and respect the
shared request budgets.
MCP, CLI, and SDK coverage
The REST methods in the MCP server, CLI, and SDKs are
derived from the REST specification. They do not add website capabilities
missing from REST. The SDKs also provide price streaming
through the dedicated public market WebSocket feed.
MCP exposes the REST read and trading operations as tools. The REST
specification also contains two CLI authentication endpoints that MCP does not
After
Account selection | List non-archived accounts accessible to the credential and read an account's risk snapshot.
Market discovery | List execution markets, inspect a market's availability, and request a current quote with an optional size estimate.
Standard orders | Market, limit, chase, stop-market, stop-limit, take-market, take-limit, take-profit, and external conditional orders.
| Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC. |
|---|
Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits.
Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders.
Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits.
Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total.
Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents.
Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation.
Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage.
+ Copy trading | List, save, and disable copy-trading groups whose members the credential can access, and acknowledge a completed copy stop.
+ Trading policy | Read an account's effective rules, trading limits, restrictions, payout and copy locks, and trading halts.
Account events | A WebSocket stream of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts.
See Trading with the API for behavior and examples and the
REST reference for request and response fields.
Features that require the website
The public REST contract has no endpoints for these website capabilities:
- Signup and onboarding, challenge purchases, identity verification, agreements,
payout requests, and billing or purchase-history management.
- API-key creation and management or sandbox-account creation and reset.
- Saved trading preferences, watchlists, and notifications.
- Journal notes and tags, performance dashboards, and account equity-history charts.
Existing copy-trading configurations still apply when an API request trades a
+ lead account. Inspect those groups through the API or on the website before
+ running an automated strategy. The API lists only groups whose lead and every
+ follower your credential can access, and saving never changes groups it does
+ not list. Followers remain subject to the same manual-trading restrictions as
+ in the terminal.
Browser-internal connections are not an API-key subscription contract.
REST reads return snapshots; for pushed changes on your accounts, use the
account stream instead of polling. Use bounded
reconciliation and respect the
shared request budgets.
MCP, CLI, and SDK coverage
The REST methods in the MCP server, CLI, and SDKs are
derived from the REST specification. They do not add website capabilities
missing from REST. The SDKs also provide price streaming
through the dedicated public market WebSocket feed.
MCP exposes the REST read and trading operations as tools. The REST
specification also contains two CLI authentication endpoints that MCP does not
Account selection | List non-archived accounts accessible to the credential and read an account's risk snapshot.
Market discovery | List execution markets, inspect a market's availability, and request a current quote with an optional size estimate.
Standard orders | Market, limit, chase, stop-market, stop-limit, take-market, take-limit, take-profit, and external conditional orders.
| Limit instructions | IOC, FOK, and GTD; omit time in force for GTC. |
|---|
Order lifecycle | Read working orders and paginated history; modify supported working orders, cancel, and update attached exits.
Position lifecycle | Read open and closed positions; close fully or partially using market, limit, or external conditional orders.
Protective exits | Batch TP/SL placement, modification, cancellation, and OCO pairing, including price-capped exits.
Margin | Supply leverage and margin mode when placing orders; add or remove extra isolated margin by setting its target total.
Execution strategies | Create, inspect, and cancel TWAP, VWAP, and scaled ladders. Use the documented status filters when listing strategy parents.
Account-wide actions | Resumable cancel-all ordinary orders and close-all positions. Strategy parents require separate cancellation.
Reconciliation | Order IDs, caller-assigned IDs for ordinary and close orders, paginated fills, and partial-fill lineage.
+ Copy trading | List, save, and disable copy-trading groups whose members the credential can access, and acknowledge a completed copy stop.
+ Trading policy | Read an account's effective rules, trading limits, restrictions, payout and copy locks, and trading halts.
Account events | A WebSocket stream of order, fill, position, and balance changes across the key's accounts.
See Trading with the API for behavior and examples and the
REST reference for request and response fields.
Features that require the website
The public REST contract has no endpoints for these website capabilities:
- Signup and onboarding, challenge purchases, identity verification, agreements,
payout requests, and billing or purchase-history management.
- API-key creation and management or sandbox-account creation and reset.
- Saved trading preferences, watchlists, and notifications.
- Journal notes and tags, performance dashboards, and account equity-history charts.
Existing copy-trading configurations still apply when an API request trades a
− lead account. Configure and inspect those groups on the website before running
− an automated strategy. Followers remain subject to the same manual-trading
− restrictions as in the terminal.
+ lead account. Inspect those groups through the API or on the website before
+ running an automated strategy. The API lists only groups whose lead and every
+ follower your credential can access, and saving never changes groups it does
+ not list. Followers remain subject to the same manual-trading restrictions as
+ in the terminal.
Browser-internal connections are not an API-key subscription contract.
REST reads return snapshots; for pushed changes on your accounts, use the
account stream instead of polling. Use bounded
reconciliation and respect the
shared request budgets.
MCP, CLI, and SDK coverage
The REST methods in the MCP server, CLI, and SDKs are
derived from the REST specification. They do not add website capabilities
missing from REST. The SDKs also provide price streaming
through the dedicated public market WebSocket feed.
MCP exposes the REST read and trading operations as tools. The REST
specification also contains two CLI authentication endpoints that MCP does not
PremierMyFundedPerps · Tradable AssetsNew page published.Oct 13
PremierMyFundedPerps · Trading SettingsRemoved Forex-specific default slider range (up to 1 lot) and Forex Position Sizing setting; updated Order Size Unit description to clarify futures-equivalent markets use separate setting; removed Forex Lot Slider Range setting row.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
The change in place, line by line
Before
chart and make sure Hide marks on bars is unchecked. That chart option does
not affect Trade Arrows.
Bid/Ask Lines is off by default. Turn it on to draw the best bid as a
dashed green line tagged Bid and the best ask as a dashed red line tagged
Ask, each with its price on the price scale. They follow the market's order
book as it updates. On very liquid markets
the spread is often smaller than one pixel at normal zoom, so the two lines can
look like a single line until you zoom in.
Order Defaults
Unless you have saved a different preference, new order tickets start with
Isolated margin, USD sizing for all markets, Percent TP/SL gain and
loss inputs, and Clear Size After Order enabled. The default slider ranges
− are up to 100% for order size, up to 1 lot for Forex, and **up to 10
− contracts** for futures-equivalent sizing. Your saved choices take precedence
− over these defaults.
| Setting | Options | Effect |
|---|
Margin Mode | Isolated or Cross | Sets the starting mode for a newly opened position. Existing positions keep their mode.
−
| Order Size Unit | USD or Asset | Sets the default quantity unit for non-Forex order tickets. |
|---|
− Forex Position Sizing | USD or Lots | Sets how Forex order tickets express size. One standard lot is 100,000 base-currency units.
Futures-Equivalent Position Sizing | USD, Asset, Minis, or Micros | Sets how supported Oil, Gold, Silver, NAS100, and SP500 tickets express size, using CME/COMEX contract multipliers.
Order Size Slider Range | 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, or 100% | Sets the largest account-percentage shortcut shown for opening orders. Reduce-only orders still allow 100%.
− Forex Lot Slider Range | 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 lots | Sets the largest lot shortcut shown for opening Forex orders. You can still type another valid size.
Futures Contract Slider Range | 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 contracts | Sets the largest contract shortcut shown for supported index and commodity orders. Direct entry can exceed the chosen range.
TP/SL Gain and Loss Unit | Percent or USD | Changes how Take Profit and Stop Loss gain/loss inputs are displayed.
TP/SL Preset | Gain, Loss, and Percent or USD | Starts every order ticket with this Take Profit gain and Stop Loss loss. Leave both empty to turn the preset off.
Clear Size After Order | On or off | Clears quantity, including the size saved for that market, after an order is accepted to reduce accidental repeats.
TP/SL Preset
A TP/SL preset saves a gain and a loss, not prices. For example, a preset of
\$150 gain and \$50 loss fills the Gain and Loss fields on every market's
order ticket and turns on Take Profit / Stop Loss. When you enter a size,
the ticket calculates the Take Profit and Stop Loss prices that match those
amounts for that market, side, leverage, and entry price. Changing the size
recalculates them. A USD preset needs a size before it can show prices; a
Percent preset is a return on margin, so it can show prices before you enter a
ticket, labeled Long or Short, and size the order as a USD notional amount. Open
sizes default to values matched to the account's balance tier and remain
editable. Close buttons appear when you hold a position in the selected market
and send a reduce-only order on the opposing side for that share of the
position; the ticket then returns to the side you had selected. If the ticket
cannot place the order as it stands, such as a limit order with no price or one
that needs a review, the button fills the ticket instead so you can finish it
yourself. Select the edit icon beside Quick Size to change the open amounts
and close percentages. To hide Quick Size from the order ticket, turn off
Show Quick Size under Order Defaults. The choice follows your account
across devices.
Open amounts can also be set for one market at a time, in any unit the ticket
− offers for that market: the asset itself (such as 0.05 BTC), lots on Forex, or
− mini and micro contracts on supported index and commodity markets. In the Quick
Size editor, choose the market's Only option, pick a unit, and enter three
amounts. That market then uses those buttons on every venue, while all other
markets keep your USD amounts. Contract amounts are whole numbers. Choosing
All Markets for that market removes its own amounts. You can save amounts
for up to 50 markets. Review, change, or remove them under **Quick Size by
Market in Order Defaults**. These amounts also follow your account across
devices; the USD amounts and close percentages stay on the device where you set
them.
Order presets save a complete recipe: side, order type, size, leverage, margin
mode, attached Take Profit and Stop Loss, slippage, and reduce-only intent. Six
stable slots map to the number keys 1 through 6 on the trade page.
Order presets are in a limited early release and may not be available on your
After
chart and make sure Hide marks on bars is unchecked. That chart option does
not affect Trade Arrows.
Bid/Ask Lines is off by default. Turn it on to draw the best bid as a
dashed green line tagged Bid and the best ask as a dashed red line tagged
Ask, each with its price on the price scale. They follow the market's order
book as it updates. On very liquid markets
the spread is often smaller than one pixel at normal zoom, so the two lines can
look like a single line until you zoom in.
Order Defaults
Unless you have saved a different preference, new order tickets start with
Isolated margin, USD sizing for all markets, Percent TP/SL gain and
loss inputs, and Clear Size After Order enabled. The default slider ranges
+ are up to 100% for order size and up to 10 contracts for
+ futures-equivalent sizing. Your saved choices take precedence over these
+ defaults.
| Setting | Options | Effect |
|---|
Margin Mode | Isolated or Cross | Sets the starting mode for a newly opened position. Existing positions keep their mode.
+ Order Size Unit | USD or Asset | Sets the default quantity unit for order tickets. Futures-equivalent markets use the setting below.
Futures-Equivalent Position Sizing | USD, Asset, Minis, or Micros | Sets how supported Oil, Gold, Silver, NAS100, and SP500 tickets express size, using CME/COMEX contract multipliers.
Order Size Slider Range | 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, or 100% | Sets the largest account-percentage shortcut shown for opening orders. Reduce-only orders still allow 100%.
Futures Contract Slider Range | 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 contracts | Sets the largest contract shortcut shown for supported index and commodity orders. Direct entry can exceed the chosen range.
TP/SL Gain and Loss Unit | Percent or USD | Changes how Take Profit and Stop Loss gain/loss inputs are displayed.
TP/SL Preset | Gain, Loss, and Percent or USD | Starts every order ticket with this Take Profit gain and Stop Loss loss. Leave both empty to turn the preset off.
Clear Size After Order | On or off | Clears quantity, including the size saved for that market, after an order is accepted to reduce accidental repeats.
TP/SL Preset
A TP/SL preset saves a gain and a loss, not prices. For example, a preset of
\$150 gain and \$50 loss fills the Gain and Loss fields on every market's
order ticket and turns on Take Profit / Stop Loss. When you enter a size,
the ticket calculates the Take Profit and Stop Loss prices that match those
amounts for that market, side, leverage, and entry price. Changing the size
recalculates them. A USD preset needs a size before it can show prices; a
Percent preset is a return on margin, so it can show prices before you enter a
ticket, labeled Long or Short, and size the order as a USD notional amount. Open
sizes default to values matched to the account's balance tier and remain
editable. Close buttons appear when you hold a position in the selected market
and send a reduce-only order on the opposing side for that share of the
position; the ticket then returns to the side you had selected. If the ticket
cannot place the order as it stands, such as a limit order with no price or one
that needs a review, the button fills the ticket instead so you can finish it
yourself. Select the edit icon beside Quick Size to change the open amounts
and close percentages. To hide Quick Size from the order ticket, turn off
Show Quick Size under Order Defaults. The choice follows your account
across devices.
Open amounts can also be set for one market at a time, in any unit the ticket
+ offers for that market: the asset itself (such as 0.05 BTC, or 10,000 EUR on
+ EUR/USD) or mini and micro contracts on supported index and commodity markets. In the Quick
Size editor, choose the market's Only option, pick a unit, and enter three
amounts. That market then uses those buttons on every venue, while all other
markets keep your USD amounts. Contract amounts are whole numbers. Choosing
All Markets for that market removes its own amounts. You can save amounts
for up to 50 markets. Review, change, or remove them under **Quick Size by
Market in Order Defaults**. These amounts also follow your account across
devices; the USD amounts and close percentages stay on the device where you set
them.
Order presets save a complete recipe: side, order type, size, leverage, margin
mode, attached Take Profit and Stop Loss, slippage, and reduce-only intent. Six
stable slots map to the number keys 1 through 6 on the trade page.
Order presets are in a limited early release and may not be available on your
chart and make sure Hide marks on bars is unchecked. That chart option does
not affect Trade Arrows.
Bid/Ask Lines is off by default. Turn it on to draw the best bid as a
dashed green line tagged Bid and the best ask as a dashed red line tagged
Ask, each with its price on the price scale. They follow the market's order
book as it updates. On very liquid markets
the spread is often smaller than one pixel at normal zoom, so the two lines can
look like a single line until you zoom in.
Order Defaults
Unless you have saved a different preference, new order tickets start with
Isolated margin, USD sizing for all markets, Percent TP/SL gain and
loss inputs, and Clear Size After Order enabled. The default slider ranges
− are up to 100% for order size, up to 1 lot for Forex, and **up to 10
− contracts** for futures-equivalent sizing. Your saved choices take precedence
− over these defaults.
+ are up to 100% for order size and up to 10 contracts for
+ futures-equivalent sizing. Your saved choices take precedence over these
+ defaults.
| Setting | Options | Effect |
|---|
Margin Mode | Isolated or Cross | Sets the starting mode for a newly opened position. Existing positions keep their mode.
−
| Order Size Unit | USD or Asset | Sets the default quantity unit for non-Forex order tickets. |
|---|
− Forex Position Sizing | USD or Lots | Sets how Forex order tickets express size. One standard lot is 100,000 base-currency units.
+ Order Size Unit | USD or Asset | Sets the default quantity unit for order tickets. Futures-equivalent markets use the setting below.
Futures-Equivalent Position Sizing | USD, Asset, Minis, or Micros | Sets how supported Oil, Gold, Silver, NAS100, and SP500 tickets express size, using CME/COMEX contract multipliers.
Order Size Slider Range | 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, or 100% | Sets the largest account-percentage shortcut shown for opening orders. Reduce-only orders still allow 100%.
− Forex Lot Slider Range | 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 lots | Sets the largest lot shortcut shown for opening Forex orders. You can still type another valid size.
Futures Contract Slider Range | 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100 contracts | Sets the largest contract shortcut shown for supported index and commodity orders. Direct entry can exceed the chosen range.
TP/SL Gain and Loss Unit | Percent or USD | Changes how Take Profit and Stop Loss gain/loss inputs are displayed.
TP/SL Preset | Gain, Loss, and Percent or USD | Starts every order ticket with this Take Profit gain and Stop Loss loss. Leave both empty to turn the preset off.
Clear Size After Order | On or off | Clears quantity, including the size saved for that market, after an order is accepted to reduce accidental repeats.
TP/SL Preset
A TP/SL preset saves a gain and a loss, not prices. For example, a preset of
\$150 gain and \$50 loss fills the Gain and Loss fields on every market's
order ticket and turns on Take Profit / Stop Loss. When you enter a size,
the ticket calculates the Take Profit and Stop Loss prices that match those
amounts for that market, side, leverage, and entry price. Changing the size
recalculates them. A USD preset needs a size before it can show prices; a
Percent preset is a return on margin, so it can show prices before you enter a
ticket, labeled Long or Short, and size the order as a USD notional amount. Open
sizes default to values matched to the account's balance tier and remain
editable. Close buttons appear when you hold a position in the selected market
and send a reduce-only order on the opposing side for that share of the
position; the ticket then returns to the side you had selected. If the ticket
cannot place the order as it stands, such as a limit order with no price or one
that needs a review, the button fills the ticket instead so you can finish it
yourself. Select the edit icon beside Quick Size to change the open amounts
and close percentages. To hide Quick Size from the order ticket, turn off
Show Quick Size under Order Defaults. The choice follows your account
across devices.
Open amounts can also be set for one market at a time, in any unit the ticket
− offers for that market: the asset itself (such as 0.05 BTC), lots on Forex, or
− mini and micro contracts on supported index and commodity markets. In the Quick
+ offers for that market: the asset itself (such as 0.05 BTC, or 10,000 EUR on
+ EUR/USD) or mini and micro contracts on supported index and commodity markets. In the Quick
Size editor, choose the market's Only option, pick a unit, and enter three
amounts. That market then uses those buttons on every venue, while all other
markets keep your USD amounts. Contract amounts are whole numbers. Choosing
All Markets for that market removes its own amounts. You can save amounts
for up to 50 markets. Review, change, or remove them under **Quick Size by
Market in Order Defaults**. These amounts also follow your account across
devices; the USD amounts and close percentages stay on the device where you set
them.
Order presets save a complete recipe: side, order type, size, leverage, margin
mode, attached Take Profit and Stop Loss, slippage, and reduce-only intent. Six
stable slots map to the number keys 1 through 6 on the trade page.
Order presets are in a limited early release and may not be available on your
PremierMyFundedPerps · Troubleshooting and FAQElite 3% DLL accounts now follow daily loss limit reset; added daily loss limit options to Elite account features; removed Elite purchase limit details.Oct 12
▸ View exact changes
What the page said before and after
Before
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/troubleshooting-and-faq
Find commission rates, daily reset times, and payout options, and diagnose common trading, account, and billing problems.
Start with the message shown in the app. MyFundedPerps attaches a specific
reason or support reference when an operation cannot be completed.
What are the trading commissions?
Commissions are execution fees on each fill, including entry and exit. The rate
is 0.03% for crypto, 0.0025% for forex, and 0.005% for stocks, commodities, and
indices. Maker and taker rates are the same. Read
Commissions and Fees for examples and the
separate hourly swap fees.
What time does the daily loss limit reset?
At 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time, with daylight saving time applied.
− Elite has none. Read Daily Loss Reset Time
for UTC equivalents and what the reset changes.
What time do payout requests reset?
Each funded account's daily request allowance resets at **12:00 a.m.
(midnight) New York time**. Elite accounts have no daily limit. A pending
request must finish before another can be submitted. Read Daily Payout Window
for the full rules.
Where are the Elite rules?
− Elite has its own sizes, prices, static loss limit, leverage and exposure caps,
− purchase and funded allocation limits, and payout minimums. Read
Elite Accounts.
Is there a lifetime payout limit?
Yes. Each user may receive a maximum of \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts
across all MyFundedPerps accounts. This limit applies to the actual payout
amount received after the profit split. Purchasing new accounts or resetting
existing accounts does not reset the lifetime cap. Read
Lifetime Payout Cap.
Can I redeem a payout for store credit?
Yes. You can convert all or part of a funded payout to store credit with a
10% boost. Converting \$100 grants \$110 in store credit when the payout is
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
files within the size accepted by the uploader.
App installation is unavailable
Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.
Checkout says I reached a purchase limit
Purchases are limited to 30 in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in any rolling 7 days,
and 200 in any rolling 30 days across all plans and payment methods. The notice
on the checkout page names the window you reached and the time you can
purchase again; no payment was taken. Wait until that time, then try again.
Read Buying a Challenge for
how the rolling windows work.
− Elite orders also count toward the \$200,000 Elite purchase limit. If an Elite
− order would exceed it, the notice shows how much Elite account size remains.
− Read Elite purchase limit.
A purchase or invoice is missing
Open Purchase History,
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.
Still need help?
Open Support. Before You Contact Us
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
FAQ.
If you still need help, use Message Support below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select View Conversations to return to your Intercom conversations.
After
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/troubleshooting-and-faq
Find commission rates, daily reset times, and payout options, and diagnose common trading, account, and billing problems.
Start with the message shown in the app. MyFundedPerps attaches a specific
reason or support reference when an operation cannot be completed.
What are the trading commissions?
Commissions are execution fees on each fill, including entry and exit. The rate
is 0.03% for crypto, 0.0025% for forex, and 0.005% for stocks, commodities, and
indices. Maker and taker rates are the same. Read
Commissions and Fees for examples and the
separate hourly swap fees.
What time does the daily loss limit reset?
At 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time, with daylight saving time applied.
+ Elite 3% DLL accounts follow it; No DLL accounts have none. Read Daily Loss Reset Time
for UTC equivalents and what the reset changes.
What time do payout requests reset?
Each funded account's daily request allowance resets at **12:00 a.m.
(midnight) New York time**. Elite accounts have no daily limit. A pending
request must finish before another can be submitted. Read Daily Payout Window
for the full rules.
Where are the Elite rules?
+ Elite has its own sizes, prices, daily loss limit options, static loss limit,
+ leverage and exposure caps, funded allocation limit, and payout minimums. Read
Elite Accounts.
Is there a lifetime payout limit?
Yes. Each user may receive a maximum of \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts
across all MyFundedPerps accounts. This limit applies to the actual payout
amount received after the profit split. Purchasing new accounts or resetting
existing accounts does not reset the lifetime cap. Read
Lifetime Payout Cap.
Can I redeem a payout for store credit?
Yes. You can convert all or part of a funded payout to store credit with a
10% boost. Converting \$100 grants \$110 in store credit when the payout is
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
files within the size accepted by the uploader.
App installation is unavailable
Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.
Checkout says I reached a purchase limit
Purchases are limited to 30 in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in any rolling 7 days,
and 200 in any rolling 30 days across all plans and payment methods. The notice
on the checkout page names the window you reached and the time you can
purchase again; no payment was taken. Wait until that time, then try again.
Read Buying a Challenge for
how the rolling windows work.
A purchase or invoice is missing
Open Purchase History,
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.
Still need help?
Open Support. Before You Contact Us
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
FAQ.
If you still need help, use Message Support below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select View Conversations to return to your Intercom conversations.
Source: https://docs.myfundedperpetuals.com/guides/troubleshooting-and-faq
Find commission rates, daily reset times, and payout options, and diagnose common trading, account, and billing problems.
Start with the message shown in the app. MyFundedPerps attaches a specific
reason or support reference when an operation cannot be completed.
What are the trading commissions?
Commissions are execution fees on each fill, including entry and exit. The rate
is 0.03% for crypto, 0.0025% for forex, and 0.005% for stocks, commodities, and
indices. Maker and taker rates are the same. Read
Commissions and Fees for examples and the
separate hourly swap fees.
What time does the daily loss limit reset?
At 12:00 a.m. (midnight) New York time, with daylight saving time applied.
− Elite has none. Read Daily Loss Reset Time
+ Elite 3% DLL accounts follow it; No DLL accounts have none. Read Daily Loss Reset Time
for UTC equivalents and what the reset changes.
What time do payout requests reset?
Each funded account's daily request allowance resets at **12:00 a.m.
(midnight) New York time**. Elite accounts have no daily limit. A pending
request must finish before another can be submitted. Read Daily Payout Window
for the full rules.
Where are the Elite rules?
− Elite has its own sizes, prices, static loss limit, leverage and exposure caps,
− purchase and funded allocation limits, and payout minimums. Read
+ Elite has its own sizes, prices, daily loss limit options, static loss limit,
+ leverage and exposure caps, funded allocation limit, and payout minimums. Read
Elite Accounts.
Is there a lifetime payout limit?
Yes. Each user may receive a maximum of \$100,000 in total lifetime payouts
across all MyFundedPerps accounts. This limit applies to the actual payout
amount received after the profit split. Purchasing new accounts or resetting
existing accounts does not reset the lifetime cap. Read
Lifetime Payout Cap.
Can I redeem a payout for store credit?
Yes. You can convert all or part of a funded payout to store credit with a
10% boost. Converting \$100 grants \$110 in store credit when the payout is
paid. That credit cannot be withdrawn as cash and expires 45 days after it is
added. Read
files within the size accepted by the uploader.
App installation is unavailable
Install support depends on the browser and device. On iPhone or iPad, use the
in-app instructions to add MyFundedPerps to the Home Screen. Other browsers
may show a native install prompt or an install action in their own menu.
Checkout says I reached a purchase limit
Purchases are limited to 30 in any rolling 24 hours, 75 in any rolling 7 days,
and 200 in any rolling 30 days across all plans and payment methods. The notice
on the checkout page names the window you reached and the time you can
purchase again; no payment was taken. Wait until that time, then try again.
Read Buying a Challenge for
how the rolling windows work.
− Elite orders also count toward the \$200,000 Elite purchase limit. If an Elite
− order would exceed it, the notice shows how much Elite account size remains.
− Read Elite purchase limit.
A purchase or invoice is missing
Open Purchase History,
clear search and status filters, and load older rows if needed. Invoices appear
only on purchases for which the invoice action is available. Pending, failed,
and refunded orders remain visible with their current status.
Still need help?
Open Support. Before You Contact Us
shows the published FAQ first. Search the questions and answers, filter by topic,
and expand answers in place. You can also browse the full
FAQ.
If you still need help, use Message Support below the FAQ to contact our
team. Select View Conversations to return to your Intercom conversations.